e-DPP UG

e-DPP
(electrical - Data Processing Program)
User Guide
Version 4.0.2
ELTECHS Engineering & Consulting Co., Ltd.

May 2013
Copyright 2001-2013
All Rights Reserved
This manual has copyrights by ELTECHS Engineering & Consulting Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without the written
consent of ELTECHS Engineering & Consulting Co., Ltd. The Licensee may copy portions of this
documentation only for the exclusive use of Licensee. Any reproduction shall include the copyright
notice. This exception does not allow copies to be made for other persons or entities, whether or not
sold. Under this law, copying includes translating into another language.
Certain names and/or logos used in this document may constitute trademarks, service marks or trade
names of ELTECHS Engineering & Consulting Co., Ltd. or other entities.
MS Access, MS Excel, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7 and MS Word are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Spread is a registered trademark of FarPoint Technologies Inc.
ETAP Power Simulator and Real Time are registered trademark of Operation Technology, Inc.
Crystal Reports is a registered trademark of Seagate Software.
Picture images attached in the installation dialog, the opening dialog and e-DPP documents are
licensed by Shutterstock Images LLC.
ELTECHS Engineering & Consulting Co., Ltd. believes that the information contained herein is
accurate as of its publication date, and such information is subject to change without notice. This
information is provided as is without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including
but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or noninfringement. ELTECHS Engineering & Consulting Co., Ltd. assumes no responsibility for errors or
omissions in this publication or any other documents referenced in this publication.

4-5-16 Narashinodai, Funabashi-shi, Chiba
274-0063, JAPAN
User Guide
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Product Description .................................................................... 1-1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Specification ................................................................................................................. 1-2

Capabilities................................................................................................................... 1-4
File Structure ............................................................................................................... 1-6
Libraries ....................................................................................................................... 1-7
Help ............................................................................................................................... 1-8
Chapter 2 Setup ............................................................................................ 2-1

2.1
2.2
System Requirements .................................................................................................. 2-2

Security Key ................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.3
e-DPP Installation (Stand-Alone) ............................................................................... 2-5

2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.4
Stand-Alone License ................................................................................................... 2-3

Network License ......................................................................................................... 2-4
e-DPP Software Installation ........................................................................................ 2-5
License Key Drivers Installation ................................................................................. 2-9
License Configuration ............................................................................................... 2-12
e-DPP Installation (Network) ................................................................................... 2-13

2.4.1
Client Workstation .................................................................................................... 2-13

2.4.1.1
2.4.1.2
2.4.1.3
2.4.2
License Manager Server ............................................................................................ 2-18

2.4.2.1
2.4.2.2
2.4.2.3
2.5
2.6
e-DPP Software Installation .................................................................................. 2-13

Drivers Installation ............................................................................................... 2-13
License Configuration .......................................................................................... 2-16
License Manager Software Installation ................................................................. 2-18
Running License Manager Service ........................................................................ 2-21
Server Monitor Operation ..................................................................................... 2-21
Running e-DPP .......................................................................................................... 2-24

De-Installation............................................................................................................ 2-25
2.6.1
2.6.2
Uninstall e-DPP Software ......................................................................................... 2-25

Uninstall Drivers (Hardware License key) ................................................................ 2-26
Chapter 3 Overview ...................................................................................... 3-1

3.1
3.2
e-DPP Deliverables and Operation Flow ................................................................... 3-2

Database Relation with ETAP Power Simulator ................................................... 3-3
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.3
3.4
General Features ......................................................................................................... 3-3

Table Relation ............................................................................................................. 3-3
Database Structure ...................................................................................................... 3-6

Templates and Documents .......................................................................................... 3-8
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.4.7
3.4.8
3.4.9
3.4.10
DPPProjectRec .......................................................................................................... 3-10

DPPElecLoad ............................................................................................................ 3-11
DPPSwgrMcc............................................................................................................ 3-18
DPPCable .................................................................................................................. 3-23
DPPanel .................................................................................................................... 3-25
DPPBus ..................................................................................................................... 3-29
DPPLump.................................................................................................................. 3-29
DPPLumpMotor ........................................................................................................ 3-30
DPPLCS.................................................................................................................... 3-30
DPPXFMR ................................................................................................................ 3-31
e-DPP 4.0.2
User Guide
Table of Contents
Chapter 4 Ribbon Bar .................................................................................. 4-1

4.1
4.2
4.3
System Button .............................................................................................................. 4-2

Quick Access Toolbar.................................................................................................. 4-4
Ribbon Tabs ................................................................................................................. 4-8
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.3.6
4.3.7
4.3.8
4.3.9
4.3.10
4.4
Optional Commands ................................................................................................. 4-25

4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
Start Tab .................................................................................................................... 4-10

Editor Selection Tab .................................................................................................. 4-12
Edit Tools Tab ........................................................................................................... 4-14
Library Tab................................................................................................................ 4-16
Load Summary Tab ................................................................................................... 4-17
Cable Management Tab ............................................................................................. 4-18
Revision Tab ............................................................................................................. 4-19
Template Tab ............................................................................................................. 4-20
View Tab ................................................................................................................... 4-21
Tools Tab ................................................................................................................... 4-24
Options Menu............................................................................................................ 4-25
HelpButton ................................................................................................................ 4-27
About Button............................................................................................................. 4-28
Defaults Menu .............................................................................................................. 4-8

Data Filling Menu ........................................................................................................ 4-9
Load Summary Menu ............................................................................................... 4-10
Cable Management Menu......................................................................................... 4-11
Revision Menu ........................................................................................................... 4-12
Template Menu .......................................................................................................... 4-13
View Menu ................................................................................................................. 4-14
Tools Menu ................................................................................................................. 4-15
Window Menu............................................................................................................ 4-16
Help Menu .................................................................................................................. 4-17
Chapter 5 File Menu ..................................................................................... 5-1

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
Open Project ................................................................................................................ 5-2

Close Project ................................................................................................................ 5-6
Logout ........................................................................................................................... 5-7
New Project .................................................................................................................. 5-8
Save Project As .......................................................................................................... 5-10
Print ............................................................................................................................ 5-11
User Options............................................................................................................... 5-13
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.7.4
5.7.5
5.7.6
5.7.7
5.7.8
"General" .................................................................................................................. 5-13

"Edit <General>"....................................................................................................... 5-15
"Edit <Elec. Load> (1)" ............................................................................................ 5-17
"Edit <Elec. Load> (2)" ............................................................................................ 5-19
"Cable Sizing" ........................................................................................................... 5-21
"Load Summary (1)" ................................................................................................. 5-22
"Load Summary (2)" ................................................................................................. 5-23
"Others" .................................................................................................................... 5-25
Chapter 6 Data Import ................................................................................. 6-1

6.1
Import MS Access........................................................................................................ 6-2

6.1.1
6.1.2
Settings tab ............................................................................................................... 6-2

Mapping tab .............................................................................................................. 6-7
ii
e-DPP 4.0.2
User Guide
6.1.3
6.2
Table of Contents
Command buttons .................................................................................................. 6-10
Import MS Excel........................................................................................................ 6-11

6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
Rules and Restriction ................................................................................................ 6-11

Importing MS Excel File ........................................................................................... 6-11
Settings tab ............................................................................................................. 6-12
Mapping tab ............................................................................................................ 6-20
Command buttons .................................................................................................. 6-25
Chapter 7 Editor ........................................................................................... 7-1

7.1
Editor Functions .......................................................................................................... 7-2

7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
Opening Template Edit Form ...................................................................................... 7-3

Editing on Edit Forms ................................................................................................. 7-5
Add Command for Specific Templates ..................................................................... 7-17
7.1.3.1
7.1.3.2
7.1.3.3
7.1.3.4
7.1.3.5
7.1.4
Copy Command for Specific Templates ................................................................... 7-22

7.1.4.1
7.1.4.2
7.1.4.3
7.2
Electrical Load ..................................................................................................... 7-17

Cable .................................................................................................................... 7-18
Switchboard ......................................................................................................... 7-19
SwgrMcc (Switchgear/MCC)................................................................................ 7-20
LCS ...................................................................................................................... 7-21
Electrical Load ..................................................................................................... 7-22
Cable .................................................................................................................... 7-23
SwgrMcc (Others) ................................................................................................ 7-24
Template Features ..................................................................................................... 7-25

7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
7.2.5
7.2.6
7.2.7
7.2.8
7.2.9
7.2.10
7.2.11
7.2.12
All Electrical Loads .................................................................................................. 7-25

All Motors ................................................................................................................. 7-31
Induction Motor ........................................................................................................ 7-32
Cable ......................................................................................................................... 7-33
Transformer .............................................................................................................. 7-34
SWGR/MCC Sch ...................................................................................................... 7-36
SWGR/MCC DS ....................................................................................................... 7-37
LCS Data Sheet ......................................................................................................... 7-38
Bus ............................................................................................................................ 7-39
Switchboard .............................................................................................................. 7-40
Lumped Load .......................................................................................................... 7-41
Lumped Motor ........................................................................................................ 7-42
Chapter 8 Project .......................................................................................... 8-1

8.1
8.2
8.3
Information .................................................................................................................. 8-2

Standard ....................................................................................................................... 8-4
Settings.......................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
Loading Categories ..................................................................................................... 8-6

System Configurations ................................................................................................ 8-7
Electrical....................................................................................................................... 8-8
Cable Entry ................................................................................................................ 8-11
Ambient Conditions................................................................................................... 8-12
Excel Report ............................................................................................................... 8-14
Chapter 9 Library......................................................................................... 9-1

9.1
Motor ............................................................................................................................ 9-2

9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.1.4
Motor Library: Entrance Menu ................................................................................... 9-3

Motor Library Editor ................................................................................................... 9-4
Motor Library: Add Menu........................................................................................... 9-6
Motor Library: Copy Menu ......................................................................................... 9-6
iii
e-DPP 4.0.2
User Guide
9.1.5
9.2
HV Circuit Breaker Library: Entrance Menu ............................................................ 9-34

HV Circuit Breaker Library Editor............................................................................ 9-35
HV Circuit Breaker Library: Add Menu ................................................................... 9-37
HV Circuit Breaker Library: Copy Menu.................................................................. 9-38
LV Circuit Breaker ................................................................................................... 9-39

9.8.1
9.8.2
9.8.3
9.8.4
9.9
Motor Sequence Library Editor ................................................................................. 9-28

Motor Sequence Library: Add Menu......................................................................... 9-31
Motor Sequence Library: Copy Menu ....................................................................... 9-32
Motor Sequence Library: Quick Pick ........................................................................ 9-33
HV Circuit Breaker ................................................................................................... 9-34

9.7.1
9.7.2
9.7.3
9.7.4
9.8
LCS Circuit Library Editor ....................................................................................... 9-24

LCS Circuit Library: Add Menu ............................................................................... 9-25
LCS Circuit Library: Copy Menu.............................................................................. 9-26
LCS Circuit Library: Quick Pick............................................................................... 9-27
Motor Sequence ......................................................................................................... 9-28

9.6.1
9.6.2
9.6.3
9.6.4
9.7
Cable Gland Library: Entrance Menu ....................................................................... 9-19

Cable Gland Library Editor ....................................................................................... 9-20
Cable Gland Library: Add Menu............................................................................... 9-21
Cable Gland Library: Copy Menu ............................................................................. 9-22
Cable Gland Library: Quick Pick .............................................................................. 9-22
LCS Circuit ................................................................................................................ 9-24

9.5.1
9.5.2
9.5.3
9.5.4
9.6
Conduit Library: Entrance Menu............................................................................... 9-15

Conduit Library Editor .............................................................................................. 9-16
Conduit Library: Add Menu ...................................................................................... 9-17
Conduit Library: Copy Menu .................................................................................... 9-17
Conduit Library Quick Pick ...................................................................................... 9-18
Cable Gland ............................................................................................................... 9-19

9.4.1
9.4.2
9.4.3
9.4.4
9.4.5
9.5
Cable Library: Entrance Menu .................................................................................... 9-8

Cable Library Editor ................................................................................................... 9-9
Cable Library: Add Menu ......................................................................................... 9-12
Cable Library: Copy Menu ....................................................................................... 9-13
Cable Library: Quick Pick......................................................................................... 9-14
Conduit ....................................................................................................................... 9-15

9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.4
9.3.5
9.4
Motor Library: Quick Pick .......................................................................................... 9-7
Cable ............................................................................................................................. 9-8

9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.2.5
9.3
Table of Contents
LV Circuit Breaker Library: Entrance Menu............................................................. 9-39

LV Circuit Breaker Library Editor ............................................................................ 9-40
LV Circuit Breaker Library: Add Menu .................................................................... 9-42
LV Circuit Breaker Library: Copy Menu .................................................................. 9-42
Fuse ............................................................................................................................. 9-43

9.9.1
9.9.2
9.9.3
9.9.4
Fuse Library: Entrance Menu .................................................................................... 9-43

Fuse Library Editor ................................................................................................... 9-44
Fuse Library: Add Menu ........................................................................................... 9-45
Fuse Library: Copy Menu ......................................................................................... 9-46
9.10 MCCB ......................................................................................................................... 9-47

9.10.1
9.10.2
9.10.3
9.10.4
MCCB Library: Entrance Menu ................................................................................ 9-47

MCCB Library Editor ............................................................................................... 9-48
MCCB Library: Add Menu ....................................................................................... 9-50
MCCB Library: Copy Menu ..................................................................................... 9-50
9.11 Static Load ................................................................................................................. 9-51

9.11.1
9.11.2
9.11.3
9.11.4
Static Load Library: Entrance Menu ......................................................................... 9-51

Static Load Library Editor......................................................................................... 9-52
Static Load Library: Add Menu ................................................................................ 9-53
Static Load Library: Copy Menu............................................................................... 9-53
iv
e-DPP 4.0.2
User Guide
Table of Contents
9.12 Open (Changing Library File) ................................................................................. 9-54

9.13 Save As........................................................................................................................ 9-55
Chapter 10 Defaults .................................................................................... 10-1

10.1 Site Area ..................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.2 Induction Motor......................................................................................................... 10-4
10.2.1 Rating and Specification Page ................................................................................... 10-5
10.2.2 Accessories and Others Page ..................................................................................... 10-9
10.2.3 Cables Page ............................................................................................................. 10-15
10.3 Value List ................................................................................................................. 10-17
Chapter 11 Data Filling .............................................................................. 11-1

11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
Outline ........................................................................................................................ 11-2

Motor (Induction Motors) ........................................................................................ 11-3
Static Load ............................................................................................................... 11-11
Cable ......................................................................................................................... 11-14
Switchgear/MCC ..................................................................................................... 11-20
LCS (Local Control Station)................................................................................... 11-22
Chapter 12 Load Summary ........................................................................ 12-1

12.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................ 12-2
12.1.1 Conventional Load Summary......................................................................................... 2
12.1.2 Lumped Motor ............................................................................................................... 3
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
Bus Loads (Bus Contents) ......................................................................................... 12-4

Switchboard Loads (Switchboard Contents) .......................................................... 12-8
Lumped Loads (Lumped Load Contents) ............................................................. 12-13
Run Load Summary ................................................................................................ 12-17
12.5.1
12.5.2
12.5.3
12.5.4
12.5.5
Entrance Menu ........................................................................................................ 12-17

Results - Digest ....................................................................................................... 12-24
Results - Summary .................................................................................................. 12-26
PF Calculation ......................................................................................................... 12-28
Calculation Formulas .............................................................................................. 12-30
12.5.5.1
12.5.5.2
12.5.5.3
12.5.5.4
Load Efficiency and Power Factor ...................................................................... 12-30

Electrical Consumptions ..................................................................................... 12-31
Summary Calculations ........................................................................................ 12-32
Motor Load Percentage....................................................................................... 12-32
12.6 Lumped Motors ....................................................................................................... 12-34

12.6.1 Method of lumping Motors ..................................................................................... 12-34
12.6.2 Motor Restart Group ............................................................................................... 12-37
12.6.3 Lumped Motor Editor ............................................................................................. 12-39
12.6.3.1
12.6.3.2
12.6.3.3
12.6.3.4
Editing Data ....................................................................................................... 12-40

Setting up Criteria............................................................................................... 12-44
Calculating Lumped Motor ................................................................................. 12-53
Viewing Results of Calculation ........................................................................... 12-54
Chapter 13 Cable Management ................................................................. 13-1

13.1 Power Cable Sizing (Batch) ...................................................................................... 13-2
13.1.1
13.1.2
13.1.3
13.1.4
Cable Sizing Criteria ................................................................................................. 13-3

Command Buttons................................................................................................... 13-12
Results..................................................................................................................... 13-13
13.1.4.1 Cable Ampacities ............................................................................................... 13-19
e-DPP 4.0.2
User Guide
Table of Contents
13.1.4.2 Unit Adjustment for R & X................................................................................. 13-20

13.1.4.3 Voltage Drop at Normal Operation ..................................................................... 13-20
13.1.4.4 Voltage Drop at Motor Start ............................................................................... 13-23
13.2 Power Cable Sizing (Individual Loads) ................................................................. 13-29

13.3 Cable Sizing Chart .................................................................................................. 13-38
13.3.1.
13.3.2.
13.3.3.
13.3.4.
13.3.5.
13.3.6.
13.3.7.
Command Buttons................................................................................................... 13-38

General Page ........................................................................................................... 13-39
Criteria Page ........................................................................................................... 13-41
Load/Motor Page..................................................................................................... 13-43
Cable Page .............................................................................................................. 13-44
Others Page ............................................................................................................. 13-46
13.4 Drum Scheduling ..................................................................................................... 13-50

13.4.1. Statistics .................................................................................................................. 13-51
13.4.2. Drum Scheduling Functionalities ............................................................................ 13-52
13.4.2.1.
13.4.2.2.
13.4.2.3.
13.4.2.4.
13.4.2.5.
13.4.2.6.
Edit Drum Specification ..................................................................................... 13-52

Run Drum Scheduling ........................................................................................ 13-55
Edit Drum List .................................................................................................... 13-62
Edit Drum Schedule............................................................................................ 13-64
Move Drum Cables ............................................................................................. 13-67
Check Cable & Drum Data ................................................................................. 13-69
13.5 Conduit and Gland Sizing ...................................................................................... 13-71

13.5.1. Entrance Menu ........................................................................................................ 13-71
13.5.2. Results..................................................................................................................... 13-72
13.6 Cable Summary ....................................................................................................... 13-73

13.6.1. Cable Summary Criteria .......................................................................................... 13-73
13.6.2. Command Button .................................................................................................... 13-74
13.7 Gland Summary....................................................................................................... 13-76

13.7.1. Gland Summary Criteria ......................................................................................... 13-76
13.7.2. Command Button .................................................................................................... 13-77
13.8 Minimum Cable Size ............................................................................................... 13-79

13.8.1. Entrance Menu ........................................................................................................ 13-79
13.8.2. Editor ...................................................................................................................... 13-82
13.9 Conduit and Gland Size Table ............................................................................... 13-84

13.9.1. Entrance Menu ........................................................................................................ 13-84
13.9.2. Command Buttons................................................................................................... 13-85
13.9.3. Editor ...................................................................................................................... 13-86
Chapter 14 Revision Control ...................................................................... 14-1

14.1 Revision Up ................................................................................................................ 14-2
14.1.1 Template Selection .................................................................................................... 14-2
14.1.2 New Revision Information ........................................................................................ 14-3
14.2 Revision View ............................................................................................................. 14-5

14.3 Revision List ............................................................................................................... 14-7
Chapter 15 Template .................................................................................. 15-1

15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
Template List ............................................................................................................. 15-2

Schedule Sheet ........................................................................................................... 15-3
Data Sheet................................................................................................................... 15-7
Load Summary ........................................................................................................ 15-10
15.4.1 "General & Header Part" Tab .................................................................................. 15-10
15.4.2 "Body Part" Tab ...................................................................................................... 15-13
15.4.3 "Footer Part" Tab .................................................................................................... 15-14
vi
e-DPP 4.0.2
User Guide
Table of Contents
15.5 Cable Sizing Result .................................................................................................. 15-17

15.5.2 "Body Part" Tab ...................................................................................................... 15-20
15.5.3 "Footer Part" Tab .................................................................................................... 15-22
15.6 Cable Sizing Chart .................................................................................................. 15-23

15.6.2 "Body Part" Tab ...................................................................................................... 15-26
15.6.3 "Footer Part" Tab .................................................................................................... 15-27
Chapter 16 Tools Menu .............................................................................. 16-1

16.1 MS Access to ETAP ................................................................................................... 16-2
16.1.1 Type of Equipment.................................................................................................... 16-2
16.1.2 Exporting To ETAP .................................................................................................. 16-3
16.2 MS Excel to ETAP ..................................................................................................... 16-8

16.2.1 Data Mapping............................................................................................................ 16-9
16.2.2 Exporting to Excel Fixed Format ............................................................................ 16-23
16.2.3 Importing to ETAP .................................................................................................. 16-26
16.3 ReporTAP ................................................................................................................ 16-27

16.4 Ground Fault Calculation....................................................................................... 16-28
16.5 SPEL Adaptor .......................................................................................................... 16-29
Chapter 17 View ......................................................................................... 17-1

17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5
Project Editor............................................................................................................. 17-2

Property List .............................................................................................................. 17-5
Status Bar ................................................................................................................... 17-7
Window ....................................................................................................................... 17-8
License Manager........................................................................................................ 17-8
Appendix-I Database Field Descriptions ..................................................... I-1

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Project Record (DPPProjectRec) ............................................................................... I-2

Revision Data (REVData) ......................................................................................... I-10
Electrical Load Schedule (DPPElecLoad) .................................................................. 12
Cable Schedule (DPPCable) ........................................................................................ 25
Switchgear/MCC Schedule (DPPSwgrMcc) .............................................................. 33
Bus List (DPPBus) ........................................................................................................ 49
Switchboard List (DPPPanel)...................................................................................... 53
Local Control Station (DPPLCS) ................................................................................ 65
Lumped Load List (DPPLump) .................................................................................. 69
Lumped Motor (DPPLumpMotor) ............................................................................. 73
Transformer Schedule (DPPXFMR) .......................................................................... 78
vii
e-DPP 4.0.2
Chapter 1
Product Description
e-DPP (Electrical Data Processing Program) is a state of the art engineering software which runs under
Microsoft Windows platform. It handles and processes huge amount of electrical data to generate the
needed schedules and data sheets. It is also equipped with standard form sheets and comprehensive
equipment libraries which facilitate high-performance engineering works. In addition, e-DPP is built
with sophisticated GUI functionalities that allow you to create User-Defined form sheets, execute
engineering calculation, and many more. As a matter of fact, you can carry out top level engineering
activities with basic knowledge of MS Excel only.
ELTECHS Engineering & Consulting Co., Ltd
1-1
e-DPP 4.0.2
Product Description
Specification
1.1 Specification
Key Features
Standardization of Engineering Know-How

Preinstalled e-DPP Standard Form sheets
User Designed Form sheets
Require Basic Knowledge of MS Excel only
Link with User Database
Link with ETAP Power Simulator
Capabilities
Create Database in e-DPP

Functions to customize User Form Sheets
User defined Project Information
User defined Equipment Defaults Data
Preinstalled e-DPP Libraries
Functions to customize User Libraries
Exchange library data with ETAP Power Simulator (Next)
Data export to Lumped Loads in ETAP Power Simulator
Data export to Composite Motors and create One Line Diagrams in ETAP Power Simulator
Flexible Operation
Excel like User interface

Import from Excel and Access user database
Import from ETAP Power Simulator (Next)
Export to Excel Form Sheets
Export to ETAP Power Simulator
Revision Control
Excel like User Interface
Electrical Load
Motor Characteristics
Motor Control and Operation
Electric Cable
Load Summary Result
Power Cable Sizing
Drum Scheduling
Switchgear Schedule & Data Sheets
MCC Schedule & Data Sheets
Local Control Station Schedule & Data Sheets
Equipment Libraries
Revision List
Study Options
Load summary (Electrical demand calculation)
Load summary (for ETAP lumped loads)
Lumped motor (for ETAP dynamic study)
1-2
e-DPP 4.0.2
Product Description
Specification
Ground fault current calculation for non-grounded power system

Power cable sizing
Selection of conduit and cable gland sizes
Libraries
Induction Motor
Cable
Conduit
Cable Gland
Motor Standard Sequence (Schematic Diagram)
Local Control Station
HV Circuit Breaker
LV Circuit Breaker
Power Fuse
MCCB
Static Load
Create Schedule & Data Sheets
Electrical Motor
Electrical Load
HV and MV Switchgears
HV and MV Motor Control Centers
LV Switchgears
LV Motor Control Centers
Local Control Switch
Cable Schedule
Drum Schedule
Transformer
1-3
e-DPP 4.0.2
Product Description
Capabilities
1.2 Capabilities
e-DPP provides the following program capabilities:
Electrical Load Schedule

Number of Electrical Loads
Unlimited
Types of Electrical Loads
Unlimited (16 pre-determined)
(Induction Motor, Synchronous Motor, DC Motor, MOV, Static Load and Power Capacitor,
Lumped Load, UPS, VFD, Battery Charger, Heater, Space Heater, Feeder (Main), Feeder
(Branch), Lighting (Main), Lighting (Branch))
Units of Load Capacities
4 (HP, kW, kVA and kvar)
Cable Schedule
Number of Cables
Unlimited
Types of Cable Use
Unlimited (13 pre-determined)
(Main Power, Control, LCS, CCR, Space Heater, Feeder, Communication, Grounding, LAN,
Bus Duct, Transformer Primary, Transformer Secondary, Transformer Tertiary)
Switchgear/MCC Schedule
Number of units (cells) in Switchgears or MCC
Types of Switchboards
Unlimited
3 (Switchgear, MCC and DP)
LCS Schedule
Number of LCS
Types of LCS
Unlimited
2 (Non-explosion proof and Explosion proof)
Load Summary
Number of Buses
Number of Switchboards
Number of Lumped Loads
Number of Lumped Motors
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Cable Sizing
Number of Installation Raceway Types
Unlimited
5
(U/G Duct, U/G Buried, A/G Trays, A/G Conduit and Free Air)
Drum Scheduling
Number of Cable Drums
9999 per cable specification
Libraries
Headers and Records
Unlimited
Revision Control
Number of Revision Nos.
Number of Revision Documents.
Number of Revision List
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Template Design
Type of Templates
1-4
e-DPP 4.0.2
Product Description
Capabilities
(Schedule Sheet, Data Sheet, Load Summary form, Cable Sizing form,
Cable Sizing Chart form)
Number of User Templates
Unlimited
Number of Fields on a Template
255
Edit Forms (Sheets)

Number of Edit Forms at a time
Network License
Number of Concurrent Users
250 (depending on Contract)
1-5
e-DPP 4.0.2
Product Description
File Structure
1.3 File Structure

Project Database
Each e-DPP project that you create builds a new database, which contains all e-DPP tables.
The e-DPP project can be copied and renamed outside of e-DPP if it does not require a password.
WARNING: If you delete this file after e-DPP has created it, you may not be able to open and retrieve
your project database.
Modifying the e-DPP Database

When viewing the e-DPP database via a DBMS (such as Microsoft Access), it is very important that
certain fields in the database not be changed. General rules for modifying the e-DPP project database
are given below.
You cannot change any database field labeled Final Data, IID, Revision, Issue, ID (Name)
You may change the engineering data and comments of elements in the database. However, many
engineering data fields are related by the engineering logic built into e-DPP editors. For example,
for a motor the fields HP, FLA, PF, EFF, and kVA are related. Changing only one of these fields
may cause problems in e-DPP's editors because it calculates some fields based on values in other
fields.
You cannot add or delete records in any table from MS Access.
There is no guarantee that ELTECHS Engineering & Consulting Co., Ltd. can help you reconstruct
your database if you have modified some of the aforementioned fields.
Inserting Additional Columns in the e-DPP Database

General guidelines for inserting additional columns/fields into the e-DPP project database are given
below.
Construct the database using e-DPP.

Add all system elements using e-DPP's GUI. e-DPP internally allocates the correct database
identifiers (IIDs) for all components. IIDs CANNOT be changed or allocated by the user.
Add any new column you may want to embed in e-DPP's tables. e-DPP will NOT directly
utilize the columns nor assign default values to them. e-DPP will not remove the additional
columns.
Other System Tables

Do not modify the contents of tables whose names are suffixed with "_R".
revision control and, therefore, their contents should not be altered.
1-6
These tables are used for
e-DPP 4.0.2
Product Description
Libraries
1.4 Libraries
e-DPP libraries are constructed with MS-Access database as well as the project database and contains
6 kind of electrical equipment, i.e. motors, cables, conduits, cable glands, LCSs and motor sequence
diagrams.
Refer to the Library Menu chapter for details.
Example of an e-DPP library menu:
<Cable Library>
1-7
e-DPP 4.0.2
Product Description
Help
1.5 Help
The complete contents of this User Guide are included in the online Help file. There are two methods
for displaying Help contents in the e-DPP program.
Help Search
Help for all Editors
Help Search
Click on Help on the e-DPP menu bar to conduct your Help search by using the Index or by doing a
word search. The Help Search Editor contains Contents, Index, and Search pages. The Contents
page allows you to browse the help file Chapter-by-Chapter, just like the e-DPP User Guide.
From the Index page you can view the Help index and display the contents of any item listed. To
facilitate your search, type in the first few letters of the word or subject you are looking for. The index
listing highlights the index item closest to what you have entered.
1-8
e-DPP 4.0.2
Product Description
Help
The Search page enables you to look for words and phrases in Help Topics instead of searching for
information by category. In this page you can type or select the word(s) to define your search.
1-9
e-DPP 4.0.2
Product Description
Help
Help for Editors

Help buttons are provided for all editors. Click on the Help button to display the description for all
pages of the selected editor.
Help on Ribbon Bar

Click on the Help button located on the Ribbon bar to display Help screens. The Help button is
indicated by a question mark. Click once on the Help button.
<End of Chapter 1>
1-10
e-DPP 4.0.2
Chapter 2
Setup
This chapter describes the installation and setup of e-DPP.
2.1
System Requirements
2.2
Security Key
2.3
e-DPP Installation (Stand-Alone)
2.4
e-DPP Installation (Network)
2.5
Running e-DPP
2.6
De-Installation
2-1
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
System Requirements
2.1 System Requirements

To run e-DPP, your computer must meet the following requirements:
Operating Systems
Microsoft Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 2 or higher)
Microsoft Windows Vista Business or Ultimate
Microsoft Windows 7 Professional or Ultimate
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 (Service Pack 1 or higher)
Other Software Requirements
Microsoft Excel 2002 (from Office XP) or 2003 for data import
Microsoft Excel 97-2000, 2002 (from Office XP), 2003, 2007 or 2010 for data export
Minimum PC Requirements
Intel Pentium III
512 MB of RAM
450 MB available hard drive space
1280x768 resolution monitor
USB or Parallel Port
CD ROM Drive
Recommended Operating Systems, Software and PC Configuration
Microsoft Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 2)
Intel Pentium IV or higher
1 GB of RAM
2 GB hard disk space
1280x1024 resolution monitor
USB or Parallel Port
CD ROM Drive
2-2
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
Security Key
2.2 Security Key

e-DPP uses the following two types of security hardware keys to license the use of the software:
Stand-Alone License Hardware Key ( Placed and resides on your computer)

Network License Hardware Key ( Placed and resides on a License Manager Server)
The hardware keys are of two types; the USB and Parallel Port key. The USB key is the one shipped
with the software. The Parallel port key is available on request in lieu of the USB key.
USB Key
Parallel Port Key
2.2.1 Stand-Alone License

The hardware key of a stand-alone system is placed directly on the USB or Parallel port of the
computer that will be running e-DPP.
The hardware key's drivers are necessary and should be installed before running e-DPP.
Security key
Workstation
2-3
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
Security Key
2.2.2 Network License

The Network License (concurrent-user) version of e-DPP has a hardware key plugged to the computer
running the License Manager software. In the e-DPP terminology, this computer is called the
"License Manager Server". The License Manager is a windows program that provides licensing to
simultaneous users in a Local Area Network that communicate through TCP/IP protocol. It allows
users to operate e-DPP software on network workstation running under windows operating systems.
The e-DPP security key hardware is a USB or Parallel port connected device.
Client Workstation 1
Security key
Client Workstation 2
License
Manager
Server
Client Workstation "n"
TCP/IP Based Network
Notes:
1. The License Manager Server is the computer where the License Manager software is
installed. It is also where the security hardware key is plugged. The License Manager
runs on any computer on the network, it is not needed to run it on a dedicated server.
2. The client workstation is the computer where the e-DPP program is installed.
3. e-DPP program may be installed also on the License Manager Server.
2-4
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
2.3 e-DPP Installation (Stand-Alone)

This section describes the installation procedure of e-DPP and its hardware license key
2.3.1 e-DPP Software Installation

Notes: For Windows Vista, you must turn off the "User Account Control" prior to the installation
by doing the following:
i. Select "Start Control Panel" from the windows taskbar.
ii. On the Control Panel applet, click "User Accounts" icon.
iii. On the "Make changes to your user account" view, click "Turn User Account Control on
or off" option.
iv. On the "Turn on User Account Control (UAC) top make your computer more secure" view,
uncheck "Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your computer" option and
click "OK" button.
(1) To install e-DPP, you must have administrative privilege access to your computer.
(2) Close all the applications that are currently running.
(3) Insert the "e-DPP 4.0.2 Installation CD" into the CD Drive of the computer. The installer program
will auto-start.
Note: If the installer program does not auto-start, browse the CD, locate and double click
"eDPPInstaller.exe" (for demo version "eDPPInstallerDemo.exe")
(4) On the "e-DPP Install Menu" main dialog box, click "Install e-DPP 4.0.2" button.
2-5
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
(5) e-DPP 4.0.2 installation will begin with the self-configuration of the Windows Installer as shown
in the following screen.
(6) Click "Next" button on the Welcome screen to continue.
2-6
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
(7) Click "Yes" button to accept the terms and conditions of the preceding License Agreement.
(8) Click "Next" button to installed e-DPP 4.0.2 on the specified destination folder.
2-7
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
(9) The installer displays the Setup Status screen and starts copying files to your installation of e-DPP.
By default, the Setup program will create a program folder named eDPPv402, which can be
renamed by the user.
(10) Click "Finish" button to confirm a successful installation.
2-8
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
2.3.2 License Key Drivers Installation

Note: This is not necessary to the Demo version of e-DPP.
(1) Insert the "e-DPP 4.0.2 Installation CD" into the CD Drive of the computer. The installer program
will auto-start.
Note: If the installer program does not auto-start, browse the CD, locate and double click the
"eDPPInstaller.exe".
(2) On the "e-DPP Install Menu" main dialog box, click "Install License Manager" button.
(3) On "WIBU-KEY Set-up" dialog box, click the "Next" button.

(4) The following dialog box will be displayed.
a. Check additional language as necessary.
b. Click the "Next" button.
2-9
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
(5) Click "Next" button to continue.
(6) Click "Yes" button on the succeeding dialog to confirm creation of the folder.
(7) On the succeeding dialog box, do the following:
a. Uncheck all the options
b. Click "Next" button to continue.
(8) Click "Next" button to install the components.
2-10
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
(9) Click "Next" button to proceed.
(10) Click "Finish" button.

Note: Check "Yes, I want to view the Readme text now" option if you wish to read the "Readme
text".
(11) Click "OK" button to confirm successful installation.
2-11
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
2.3.3 License Configuration

Note: This is not applicable for a Demo version.
(1) Select "Start Control Panel" and double click the "WIBU-KEY" icon.
(2) On WIBU-KEY Control Panel Applet, do the following:

a. Select "Network" tab
b. Select "User Specific" on the
drop down list.
c. On WIBU-KEY Subsystems
frame, uncheck all option except
"Local (Kernel)".
d. Click "Apply" button to save
selected options.
e. Click "OK" button to exit
Control Panel Applet.
a
b
c
e
(3) e-DPP software can now be run.

Note: Plug USB License Key before running e-DPP software. Generally, windows will
automatically locate the USB drivers after plugging the USB License Key.
2-12
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
2.4 e-DPP Installation (Network)

The operation of e-DPP software with network license key requires the installation of the License
Manager. The License Manager issues authorization to the simultaneous e-DPP users in a network
(LAN). If the License Manager does not issue the requested authorization, e-DPP will not run.
The installation process is comprises of two parts; the e-DPP software installation in the client
workstation and the License Manager installation in the computer where the network hardware key
will be plugged. The computer running the License Manager is called "License Manager Server".
Note: This is not applicable to the Demo version of e-DPP
2.4.1 Client Workstation

Client Workstation is the computer where the e-DPP Software will be (is) installed. It is the client of
the License Manager Server.
2.4.1.1 e-DPP Software Installation

Install e-DPP software on a client workstation. Refer to Section 2.3.1 for guidelines.
2.4.1.2 Drivers Installation

After the installation of e-DPP software, the drivers for the network components should be installed as
follows:
(1) Insert the "e-DPP 4.0.2 Installation CD" into the CD Drive of the Client workstation. The installer
program will auto-start.
"eDPPInstaller.exe".
2-13
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
(3) On "WIBU-KEY Set-up" dialog box, click the "Next" button.
(4) The following dialog box will be displayed.

a. Check the additional language as necessary.
b. Click the "Next" button.
(5) Click "Next" button to continue.
2-14
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
(7) On the succeeding dialog box, do the following:

a. Uncheck all the options
b. Click "Next" button to continue.
2-15
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
2.4.1.3 License Configuration

After the License Manager Server has been set running (refer to Section 2.4.2.2), configure the client
workstation as follows:
(1) Select "Start Control Panel" and double click the "WIBU-KEY" icon.
(2) On WIBU-KEY Control Panel Applet, do the following:
2-16
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
a. Select Network tab

b. Select "User Specific" on the
drop-down list.
c. On WIBU-KEY Subsystems
frame, uncheck all option except
"WkLAN" option.
d. Click Apply button to save
selected options.
e. Click Browse button to search
for a server.
a
b
e
c
d
(3) On the "Search for WkLAN server" dialog window, do the following:
a. Select the computer name of the License Manager
server.
b. Click Select button.
a
Note: If the computer name of License Manager

Server does not appear, re-start the License Manager
service on the License Manager Server (refer to
section 2.4.2.2)
(4) The computer name of the License Manager server will be displayed on the control panel applet.
Click "Apply" button again to save modified items and click "OK" button to close control panel
applet.
(5) e-DPP software can now be run provided the License Manager Server is already running.
2-17
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
2.4.2 License Manager Server

License Manager Server is the computer where the License Manager software will be (is) installed
and the network hardware key will be (is) plugged.
The "License Manager Server" is any computer running Windows operating systems (Windows XP,
Vista, 7, Server 2003). It is not necessary to run it on a dedicated server.
2.4.2.1 License Manager Software Installation

(1) Insert the "e-DPP 4.0.2 Installation CD" into the CD Drive of the Server PC. The installer program
will auto-start.
"eDPPInstaller.exe"
(3) On "WIBU-KEY Set-up" dialog box, click "Next" button.
2-18
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
(4) Do the following on the subsequent dialog box:

a. Check additional language as necessary.
b. Click "Next" button.
(5) Click "Next" to continue.
2-19
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
(7) On the succeeding dialog box, do the

following:
a. Check the following options:
32 bit WkNet/WkLAN
Network Server
Install as NT service with
autostart
WkLAN/WkNet Network
Monitor [32 bit]
b. Click "Next" to continue.
2-20
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup

(12) Insert the USB key.
Generally, windows will automatically locate the USB drivers.
2.4.2.2 Running License Manager Service

(1) Select "Start All Programs WIBU-KEY Network Server".
(2) Network Server icon will be displayed on the Taskbar Notification Area.
Right-click on it and
select "Start as Service".
Notes:
i. Each computer running e-DPP requests authorization from the License Manager Server via a
LAN. If the License Manager is not running it will not issue the requested authorization and
e-DPP will not run.
ii. If the USB key is disconnected and re-connected from the License Manager Server, the License
Manager Service should be re-started.
2.4.2.3 Server Monitor Operation

Server Monitor is the main tool to administer USB key network license in a network environment.
From the Server Monitor, the number of users currently accessing a License Manager server, the login
times and access times can be checked. Users can be canceled and network server status information
can be retrieved.
A. To run the Server Monitor Program
a. Select "Start All Programs WIBU-KEY Server Monitor".
2-21
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
B. To View the List of Users

a. On the main menu of the Server Monitor Program (WKSvMon), select "View User
View".
b. On the main menu again, select
"View Browse Network" or
a
b
click the
icon.
Notes:
i. Users may be viewed only
once they are running
e-DPP at the client
workstation.
ii. To automatically browse the
network at startup of the
System Monitor program,
from the main menu select
"OptionsGeneral
Settings" and check
"Browse network at
startup" option.
C. To Cancel a User
c
a. View the list of users (see "B"

above).
b. On the left pane (WIBU-KEY
User List:), select the user's
computer name.
Note: On the right pane
(WIBU-KEY Client Information)
shows
the
relevant
user's
2-22
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup

information.
c. On the main menu select "User Cancel User" or click
icon on the toolbar.
d. Click "Yes" button to confirm cancellation of user.

e. Click "OK" button.
2-23
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
Running e-DPP
2.5 Running e-DPP

When the e-DPP software and relevant drivers installation have been completed, you may run e-DPP.
Plug the USB key or the Parallel Port Key (e-DPP Hardware License Key) to their respective ports.
To run e-DPP, select "Start All Programs e-DPP 4.0.2" or click on the icon "e-DPP 4.0.2"
on the desktop.
Note:
To ensure e-DPP will run, the hardware license key and relevant drivers should be installed and setup
properly. Refer to Section 2.3 and 2.4.
2-24
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
De-Installation
2.6 De-Installation
2.6.1 Uninstall e-DPP Software
(1) Select "Start Control Panel"
(2) Double-click "Add/Remove Programs" icon.
Note: For Windows Vista, double-click "Programs and Features" icon.
(3) Select "e-DPP v.4.0.2 English USB" in the list of the currently installed programs.
Note: For a Demo version, select "e-DPP v.4.0.2 English Demo"
(4) Click "Remove" button.
Setup prepares the e-DPP Setup wizard.
Note: For Windows Vista, click "Uninstall" button.
(5) Select "Remove" option and click the "Next" button.
2-25
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
De-Installation
(6) When asked whether you want to remove the application, select OK.
(7) Click "Finish" button to conclude.
2.6.2 Uninstall Drivers (Hardware License key)

Note: This is not applicable for a Demo version.
(1) Select "Start Control Panel".
(2) Double-click "Add/Remove Programs" icon.
Note: For Windows Vista, double-click "Programs and Features" icon.
(3) Select "WIBU-KEY Setup (WIBU-KEY Remove)" in the list of currently installed programs.
(4) Click the "Change/Remove" button.
Note: For Windows Vista, click "Uninstall" button.
(5) Click "Next" on the WIBU-KEY Setup (Uninstall) dialog to proceed.
2-26
e-DPP 4.0.2
Setup
De-Installation
Note: When a File is locked dialog is encountered, select "Abort Setup" and click
"OK". Then restart the computer before continuing the de-installation. After
restarting, proceed to step 1.
(6) Click on the Finish button to complete de-installation.
<End of Chapter 2>
2-27
e-DPP 4.0.2
Chapter 3
Overview
e-DPP organizes your work on a project basis. Each project provides all the necessary engineering and
design tools and supports for generating a number of project documents. A project consists of an
electrical database that requires a unique set of electrical components within a certain kind of
equipment or material.
3-1
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
e-DPP Deliverables and Operation Flow
3.1 e-DPP Deliverables and Operation Flow

The overall picture of e-DPP deliverables and operation flow are illustrated as below.
e-DPP allows users to import external data files, such as ETAP project database, MS Excel work sheet and MS Access database.
The main data table of e-DPP is "Electrical Load Database (DPPElecLoad)" and a number of child tables are created from or linked to as shown above.
3-2
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
Database Relation with ETAP Power Simulator
3.2 Database Relation with ETAP Power Simulator

e-DPP is also a complementary software of ETAP Power Simulator. Meaning data exchange
between the software is possible. Generally, the structure of the database of e-DPP is designed as
close as possible with the database of ETAP to observe compatibility. Between the databases,
however, still differences exist. Therefore, an intermediate database is introduced to bridge those
differences.
3.2.1 General Features

This chapter describes general features of e-DPP interface with ETAP Power Simulator.
The interface is realized by setting up an intermediate .mdb file between ETAP and e-DPP.
Fig-3.1.1 "e-DPP Interface with ETAP" illustrates the basic relation of those databases. The
intermediate file contains several tables that correspond to those of ETAP.
e-DPP accesses and imports all tables contained in the intermediate file so that e-DPP can make the
best use of ETAP database presenting a number of parameters for electrical equipment. On the other
hand, e-DPP exports its own database to ETAP via the intermediate file so that any changes occurred
in e-DPP environment can be reflected on ETAP database as far as ETAP permits (e.g. System
topology may not be allowed to change).
3.2.2 Table Relation

ETAP project tables that require being accessed by the interface program are for the following
equipment (the names of corresponding ETAP tables are presented in the parentheses);
1) Induction motor
2) Static load
3) MOV
4) Capacitor
5) Cable
6) Lumped load
7) Synchronous motor
8) UPS
9) Charger
10) Battery
11) VFD
12) 2-windings transformer
13) 3-windings transformer
14) Synchronous generator
15) Composite motor
(IndMotor, IndMotorH1)
(StaticLoad, StaticLoadH1)
(MOV, MOVH1)
(CAP, CAPH1)
(Cable, CableH1, CableH2)
(Lump, LumpH1, LumpH2)
(SynMotor, SynMotorH1)
(UPS, UPSH1)
(Charger, ChargerH1)
(Battery, BatteryH1, BatteryH2)
(VFD, VFDH1)
(XFMR2, XFMR2H1, XFMR2H2)
(XFMR3, XFMR3H1, XFMR3H2)
(SynGen, SynGenH1, SynGenH2)
(CompositeMotor)
In addition to the above equipment datatable, the following 2 information tables are also required for
e-DPP and accessed by the interface program;
Load definitions
Project records
(LoadDefs)
(ProjectRec)
3-3
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
3-4
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
Although ETAP users are able to access ETAP project file either by MS-Access directly or through
ODBC driver, the main reason why the intermediate file became necessary is that some of essential
data in e-DPP do not exist in ETAP project .mdb file. The apparent reason is that an entire ETAP
project file is too huge to treat by e-DPP and contains a plenty of tables that are not required by e-DPP.
The intermediate file is created from one or more than one corresponding tables of ETAP depending
on the kind of equipment or e-DPP functions. Records for some components in H1 or H2 table are
sometimes not created by ETAP even if the records for those components exist in a master table. In
that case, the fields in the intermediate tables coming from H1 or H2 will become blank.
Fig-3.1.2 below illustrates the relation of the tables among ETAP, e-DPP and the intermediate files.
3-5
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
Database Structure
3.3 Database Structure

e-DPP database is composed with two MS-Access files (.mdb).
1) <ProjectTitle>.mdb
2) Lib<ProjectTitle>.mdb
(Project File)
(Library File)
Each database contains the following tables:

(Note: The tables used by the system only are not shown here.)
Project File
DPPBus
DPPCable
DPPCGSelect
DPPDrumList
DPPDrumSpec
DPPElecLoad
DPPLump
DPPLumpMotor
DPPLCS
DPPMinCabSize
DPPMotorDefault
DPPPanel
DPPProjectRec
DPPRestartGroup
DPPSiteArea
DPPStaticDefault
DPPSwgrMcc
DPPXFMR
DPPVAL
DPPUserOption
Master
Schedule
REVTemplate
Index of buses
Cable schedule
Conduit and cable gland selection table
Cable drum list
Cable drum specification
Electrical load schedule
Lumped load schedule
Lumped motor schedule
LCS schedule
Minimum cable size table
Motor default parameters
Index of switchboards (switchgear, MCC, distribution panel)
Project information
Motor restart group
Plant site area
Static load default parameters
Load schedule of switchgear and MCC
Power transformer schedule
Value list shown in the pull-down box
Various settings of users preference
Index of templates
Detail field mapping information of templates
Revision information
Library File
LIBMotor
LIBCable
LIBConduit
LIBGland
LIBLCS
LIBSequence
LIBHVCB
LIBLVCB
LIBFuse
LIBMCCB
LIBStatic
Motor library
Cable library
Cable conduit library
Cable gland library
LCS library
Motor sequence library
High voltage circuit breaker
Low voltage circuit breaker
Power fuse
Molded case circuit breaker
Static load (for cable sizing chart)
3-6
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
Database Structure
The fundamental relation and process flow of those tables in e-DPP are illustrated below.
For more information on "Data Filling", see Chapter 11, Data Filling.
In the above figure, the Load Summary and Sizing functions are not shown.
For more information on Load Summary, see Chapter 12, Load Summary.
For more information on Sizing, see Chapter 13, Cable Management.
3-7
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
Templates and Documents
3.4 Templates and Documents

What is "Template"?
"Template" is a format of each document that is produced by e-DPP and consists of two (2) elements,
i.e. MS-Excel sheet and the property table (Master).
e-DPP has built in a number of standard templates that are read-only and not editable. You can export
e-DPP database to MS-Excel via those standard templates in each particular format of document. Also,
you can create or copy them to your own templates with the Template Design function. For more
information on Template Design, see Chapter 15, Template.
Each template belongs to a certain category, and each category belongs to a certain table of e-DPP
project database. The figure below indicates that hierarchy. One template corresponds to one document
format and related to the same name of MS-Excel file (e.g. Template = "DPPElecLoad1", MS-Excel
file = "DPPElecLoad1.xls").
Table
Category
Category
Category
Category
Template
Template
Template
Template
Template Index
The relationship and purposes of use of the individual templates (documents) is tabulated below.
Table Name
Category
Template Name
Document Title
DPPProjectRec
General
DPPProjectInfo
Project Information
DPPElecLoad
All Elec. Loads
DPPElecLoad1
DPPElecLoad2
DPPElecCable1
DPPElecCable2
DPPElecOthers1
DPPElecOthers2
DPPCabSizingData
All Motors
Load Sum Data

Induction Motor
Bus Load
SWBD Load
DPPMotorSch1
DPPMotorSch2
DPPMotorChar
DPPLoadSumData
DPPMotorDataSheet
DPPBusLoad
DPPSwbdLoad
Electrical Load Schedule (Part-1)

Electrical Load Schedule - Cable
(Part-1)
Electrical Load Schedule - Cable
(Part-2)
Electrical Load Schedule - Others
(Part-1)
Electrical Load Schedule - Others
(Part-2)
Input Data for Cable Sizing
Motor Schedule (Part-1)
Motor Schedule (Part-2)
Motor Data (Characteristic)
Input Data for Load Summary
Induction Motor Data Sheet
Schedule of Bus Loads
Schedule of Switchboard Loads
Control Signal
DPPMotorCntrlOp
Motor Data (Control & Operation)
DPPSwgrMcc
3-8
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
Table Name

Category
LCS Schedule
SWGR/MCC
Sch
DPPCable
Cable
DPPPanel
SWGR/MCC
DS
DPPBus
DPPLump
DPPLumpMotor
DPPLCS
DPPXFMR
Switchboard
Bus
Lumped Load
Lumped Motor
LCS Data Sheet
Transformer
Template Name
Document Title
DPPLCSSch
DPPHVSwgrSch
DPPHVSwgrSch-V
DPPLVSwgrSch
DPPLVSwgrSch-V
DPPHVMccSch
DPPHVMccSch-V
DPPLVMccSch
LCS Schedule
HV/MV Switchgear Schedule
(Spread)
HV/MV Switchgear Schedule (Tab)
LV Switchgear Schedule (Spread)
LV Switchgear Schedule (Tab)
HV/MV MCC Schedule (Spread)
HV/MV MCC Schedule (Tab)
LV Motor Control Center Schedule
(Spread)
DPPCable1
Cable Schedule
DPPCable2
Cable Schedule - Others
DPPCableETAP
Cable Schedule for Etap Interface
DPPHVSwgrDS
HV/MV Switchgear Data Sheet
DPPLVSwgrDS
LV Switchgear Data Sheet
DPPHVMccDS
HV/MV MCC Data Sheet
DPPLVMccDS
LV MCC Data Sheet
DPPSwbdComponent Switchboard Components
DPPSwbdList
Switchboard No. List
DPPBusList
Bus No. List
DPPLumpList
Lumped Load List
DPPLumpMotor
Lumped Motor List
DPPLCSDataSheet
LCS Data Sheet
DPPXFMR
Transformer
DPPXfmrETAP
Transformer Schedule for Etap
Interface
In the following pages, all the fields contained in the individual standard templates are listed.
can refer to these pages for information when designing your template.
3-9
You
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
3.4.1 DPPProjectRec
Category
General
Altitude
AverageTemp
CableStandard
CableUnits
CabVoltageHV1
CabVoltageHV2
CabVoltageLV1Ph
CabVoltageLV3Ph1
CabVoltageLV3Ph2
CabVoltageMV1
CabVoltageMV2
Consultant
Contract
Contractor
Contractor
CoolingWaterTemp
CorrosionProtection
Country
Customer
DocumentNo
Frequency
FreqVariationHV1
FreqVariationHV2
FreqVariationLV1Ph
FreqVariationLV3Ph1
FreqVariationLV3Ph2
FreqVariationMV1
FreqVariationMV2
GasGroup
HazardAreaClass
HP_KW
JobNo
LightingPhase
LightingVolt
Location
Template Name
DPPProjectInfo
Field List
MaxDesignTemp
PlantName
MaxHumidity
ProjectCode
MaxStorageTemp
ProjectTitle
MaxTemp
SCCAmpHV1
MaxTransportTemp
SCCAmpHV2
MinDesignTemp
SCCAmpLV1Ph
MinTemp
SCCAmpLV3Ph1
MotorStandard
SCCAmpLV3Ph2
MotVoltageHV1
SCCAmpMV1
MotVoltageHV2
SCCAmpMV2
MotVoltageLV1Ph
SCCkVHV1
MotVoltageLV3Ph1
SCCkVHV2
MotVoltageLV3Ph2
SCCkVLV1Ph
MotVoltageMV1
SCCkVLV3Ph1
MotVoltageMV2
SCCkVLV3Ph2
NGAmpHV1
SCCkVMV1
NGAmpHV2
SeismicFactor
NGAmpLV1Ph
SpaceHeaterPhase
NGAmpLV3Ph1
SpaceHeaterVolt
NGAmpLV3Ph2
Standard
NGAmpMV1
SunlightProtection
NGAmpMV2
SysVoltageHV1
NGSecHV1
SysVoltageHV2
NGSecHV2
SysVoltageLV1Ph
NGSecLV1Ph
SysVoltageLV3Ph1
NGSecLV3Ph1
SysVoltageLV3Ph2
NGSecLV3Ph2
SysVoltageMV1
NGSecMV1
SysVoltageMV2
NGSecMV2
TempClass
NGTypeHV1
TropicalTreatment
NGTypeHV2
NGTypeLV1Ph
NGTypeLV3Ph1
NGTypeLV3Ph2
NGTypeMV1
NGTypeMV2
3-10
Document Title
Project Information
Units
VoltVariationHV1
VoltVariationHV2
VoltVariationLV1Ph
VoltVariationLV3Ph1
VoltVariationLV3Ph2
VoltVariationMV1
VoltVariationMV2
WireSystemHV1
WireSystemHV2
WireSystemLV1Ph
WireSystemLV3Ph1
WireSystemLV3Ph2
WireSystemMV1
WireSystemMV2
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
3.4.2 DPPElecLoad
Category
All Elec. Load
ColdStart
ContQty
Cooling
CurrentRevNo
DegreeProtection
DocumentNo
DutyRating
EnclosureType
EquipName
ExpClass
ExpProtection
ExpTemp
Template Name
DPPElecLoad1
HotStart
HP
HP_KW
ID
InsulationClass
InsulationTemp
InterQty
JobNo
KV
LoadSupplier
Location
Category
All Elec. Load
Document Title
Field List
MFRName
MountBase
MountDirection
MountForm
Noise
PhaseNo
Poles
Rotation
SF
SpareQty
SpeedControl
StartType
SupplierName
TypeMotor
UserText_0
Template Name
DPPElecLoad2
Document Title
Field List
BaseforMotor
BearingInsulation
BearingNoDE
BearingNoNDE
BearingRTDQty
BearingTypeDE
BearingTypeNDE
BTDCableEntrySize
Canopy
ContQty
Corrosion
Coupling
CurrentRevNo
DocumentNo
FrameNo
HP
HP_KW
ID
InterQty
JobNo
KeyforCoupling
KV
Lubricant
NoloadVib
PaintColor
Poles
PowerCableEntrySize
ShaftEnds
SHCableEntrySize
SpaceHeater
SpareQty
TBPosition
Weight
WindingRTDQty
WTDCableEntrySize
3-11
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
Category
All Elec. Load
Template Name
DPPElecCable1
Document Title
Electrical Load Data Cable (Part 1)
Field List
CableODValue
CableTypeText
CableVoltage
CabSize
ContQty
CurrentRevNo
DocumentNo
HP
HP_KW
ID
InterQty
JobNo
KV
LCSCableEntrySize
LCSCableID
LCSCableODValue
LCSCableTypeText
LCSCableVoltage
LCSCabSize
LCSLengthValue
LCSNumberOfWires
LCSUnitsOfWire
LengthValue
Category
All Elec. Load
NumberOfWires
PhaseValue
Poles
PowerCableEntrySize
PowerCableID
SpareQty
UnitsOfWire
Template Name
DPPElecCable2
Document Title
Electrical Load Data Cable (Part 2)
Field List
CCRCableEntrySize
CCRCableID
CCRCableODValue
CCRCableTypeText
CCRCableVoltage
CCRCabSize
CCRLengthValue
CCRNumberOfWires
CCRUnitsOfWire
ContQty
CurrentRevNo
DocumentNo
HP
HP_KW
ID
InterQty
JobNo
KV
Poles
SHCableEntrySize
SHCableID
SHCableODValue
SHCableTypeText
SHCableVoltage
SHCabSize
SHLengthValue
SHNumberOfWires
SHUnitsOfWire
SpareQty
3-12
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
Category
All Elec. Load
Template Name
DPPElecOthers1
Document Title
Electrical Load Data Others (Part-1)
Field List
BearingRTDType
CCRCondODValue
CondODValue
ConductorType
ContQty
CTRatioDiffProt
CTRatioMeterGround
CTRatioMeterPhase
CurrentRevNo
DataType
DiffProtection
DocumentNo
EquipType
HP
HP_KW
ID
InterQty
JobNo
KV
LCSCondODValue
NoOfGrMeteringCT
NoOfPhMeteringCT
Category
All Elec. Load
Poles
Priority
RacewayType
SHCondODValue
SpaceHeater
SpaceHeaterPhase
SpaceHeaterVolt
SpaceHeaterW
SpareQty
SurgeArrestors
SurgeCapacitors
UserNum_0
UserNum_1
WindingRTDType
Template Name
DPPElecOthers2
Document Title
Electrical Load Data Others (Part-2)
Field List
ContQty
CurrentRevNo
DocumentNo
HazardAreaClass
HP
HP_KW
ID
InterQty
JobNo
KV
MotorStructure
NoOfStartsYear
OneLineDWG
Poles
ProcessUnitID
PurchasingDate
ReferenceDWG
RestartReq
SiteArea
SpareQty
Substation
UserText_0
UserText_1
UserText_2
UserText_3
3-13
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
Category
All Elec. Load
Template Name
DPPCabSizingData
Document Title
Input Data For Cable Sizing
Field List
CableAmpDF
CableTypeText
CableVoltage
ConductorType
CurrentRevNo
DataType
EquipName
EquipType
HP
HP_KW
ID
IFL
JobNo
KV
LengthValue
LRC
MFRName
NumberOfWires
PF100
PFlr
PhaseNo
Poles
PowerCableID
RacewayType
SF
UnitsOfWire
Category
All Motors
Template Name
DPPMotorSch1
Document Title
Motor Schedule (Part1)
Field List
ColdStart
ContQty
Cooling
CurrentRevNo
DegreeProtection
DocumentNo
DutyRating
EnclosureType
EquipName
ExpClass
ExpProtection
ExpTemp
HotStart
HP
HP_KW
ID
InsulationClass
InsulationTemp
InterQty
JobNo
KV
LoadSupplier
Location
MFRName
MountBase
MountDirection
MountForm
Noise
PhaseNo
Poles
Rotation
SF
SpareQty
SpeedControl
StartType
SupplierName
TypeMotor
3-14
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
Category
All Motors
Template Name
DPPMotorSch2
Document Title
Motor Schedule (Part2)
Field List
BaseforMotor
BearingInsulation
BearingNoDE
BearingNoNDE
BearingRTDQty
BearingTypeDE
BearingTypeNDE
BTDCableEntrySize
Canopy
ContQty
Corrosion
Coupling
CurrentRevNo
DocumentNo
FrameNo
HP
HP_KW
ID
InterQty
JobNo
KeyforCoupling
KV
Category
All Motors
Lubricant
NoloadVib
PaintColor
Poles
PowerCableEntrySize
ShaftEnds
SHCableEntrySize
SpaceHeater
SpareQty
TBPosition
Weight
WindingRTDQty
WTDCableEntrySize
Template Name
DPPMotorChar
Document Title
Motor Data (Characteristics)
Field List
BHP
ContQty
CurrentRevNo
DocumentNo
EFF100
EFF50
EFF75
HP
HP_KW
ID
IFL
InterQty
JobNo
KV
LoadGD2
LoadTrq0
LoadTrq100
LoadTrq25
LoadTrq50
LoadTrq75
LoadType
LRC
MachineRpm
MotorBreakDownTrq
MotorFullLoadTrq
MotorGD2
MotorLRTrq
MotorPullUpTrq
PercentLoad0
PF100
PF50
PF75
PFlr
Poles
SpareQty
TaCold
TaHot
tE
ThrustContraction
ThrustExpansion
Ts100Un
Ts80Un
3-15
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
Category
Induction Motor
Template Name
DPPMotorDataSheet
Document Title
Induction Motor Datasheet
Field List
ApprovedBy1
ApprovedBy2
ApprovedBy3
ApprovedBy4
BaseforMotor
BearingInsulation
BearingNoDE
BearingNoNDE
BearingRTDQty
BearingRTDType
BearingTypeDE
BearingTypeNDE
BHP
BTDCableEntryType
CableTypeText
CabSize
Canopy
CheckedBy1
CheckedBy2
CheckedBy3
CheckedBy4
ColdStart
ContQty
Cooling
Corrosion
Coupling
CTRatioDiffProt
DegreeProtection
DiffProtection
DocumentNo
DutyRating
EFF100
EFF50
EFF75
EnclosureType
EquipName
ExpClass
ExpProtection
ExpTemp
FrameNo
Frequency
HotStart
HP
HP_KW
ID
IFL
InsulationClass
InsulationTemp
InterQty
JobNo
KeyforCoupling
KV
LoadGD2
LoadTrq0
LoadTrq100
LoadType
Location
LRC
Lubricant
Category
Bus Load
MachineRpm
MadeBy1
MadeBy2
MadeBy3
MadeBy4
MFRName
MotorBreakDownTrq
MotorFullLoadTrq
MotorGD2
MotorLRTrq
MotorPullUpTrq
MotorStandard
MountBase
MountDirection
MountForm
Noise
NoloadVib
PaintColor
PF100
PF50
PF75
PFlr
PhaseNo
PlantName
Poles
PowerCableEntryType
ProjectCode
RevDate1
RevDate2
RevDate3
RevDate4
RevDescription1
RevDescription2
RevDescription3
RevDescription4
RevNo1
RevNo2
RevNo3
RevNo4
Rotation
Template Name
DPPBusLoad
SF
ShaftEnds
SHCableEntryType
SHCableTypeText
SHCabSize
SpaceHeater
SpaceHeaterVolt
SpaceHeaterW
SpareQty
SpeedControl
StartType
SurgeArrestors
SurgeCapacitors
TaCold
TaHot
TBPosition
ThrustContraction
ThrustExpansion
Ts100Un
Ts80Un
TypeMotor
Weight
WindingRTDQty
WindingRTDType
WTDCableEntryType
Document Title
Schedule Of Bus Loads
Field List
Bus
Contractor
EquipName
HP
HP_KW
ID
KV
Poles
3-16
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
Category
SWBD Load
Template Name
DPPSwbdLoad
Document Title
Schedule Of Switchboard Loads
Field List
Contractor
EquipName
HP
HP_KW
ID
KV
Panel
Poles
Category
Load Sum Data
Template Name
DPPLoadSumData
Document Title
Input Data For Load Summary
Field List
BHP
Bus
ContQty
CurrentRevNo
DataType
EFF100
EFF50
EFF75
EquipName
EquipType
HP
HP_KW
ID
InterQty
JobNo
KV
MFRName
Panel
PercentLoad0
PF100
PF50
PF75
PhaseNo
Poles
SpareQty
Substation
3-17
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
3.4.3 DPPSwgrMcc
Category
Control Signal
CCRCurrent
CCRCurrentCom
CCRFault
CCRFaultCom
CCRPermitToStart
CCRPower
CCRRunningStatus
CCRRunningStatusCom
CCRSpeed
CCRSpeedControl
CCRStart
CCRStop
CCRStopInterLock
CCRUserSignal1
CCRUserSignal2
CCRUserSignal3
CurrentRevNo
Template Name
DPPMotorCntrlOp
DocumentNo
HP
HP_KW
ID
JobNo
KV
Category
LCS Schedule
Document Title
Motor Data (Control and Operation)
Field List
LCSAmmeter
LCSAutoManual
LCSAutoManualOff
LCSOffLamp
LCSOnLamp
LCSStart
LCSStartStop
LCSStop
LCSUserSignal1
LPCurrent
LPFault
LPPermitToStart
LPPower
LPRunningStatus
LPSpeed
LPSpeedControl
LPStart
LPStop
LPStopInterLock
LPUserSignal1
LPUserSignal2
Template Name
DPPLCSSch
PanelID
Poles
SequenceName
StarterUnit
Document Title
LCS Schedule
Field List
CurrentRevNo
DocumentNo
EquipName
HP
HP_KW
ID
JobNo
LCSAlarmLamp
LCSAlarmLampColor
LCSAmmeter
LCSAmmeterScale
LCSAutoManual
LCSAutoManualOff
LCSCT
LCSCTRatio
LCSEmergStop
LCSExpProof
LCSOffLamp
LCSOffLampColor
LCSOnLamp
LCSOnLampColor
LCSStart
LCSStartStop
LCSStop
LCSTypeID
StartButtonColor
StopButtonColor
UserText_1
3-18
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
Category
SWGR / MCC Sch
Template Name
DPPHVSwgrSch
Document Title
Field List
CBBreakingKA
CBCycle
CBInterLock
CBInterTrip
CBMakingKA
CBRatedA
CBRatedKV
CBStatus
CBType
ChangeOverSW
CT1RatioA
CT2RatioA
CurrentRevNo
DocumentNo
EarthingSwitch
FaultIndicator
FaultLampColor
FaultStatus
GPTRatioV
ID
JobNo
MeteringDevice
MotorSpaceHeater
PanelID
PressureFlap
ProtectionDevice
Category
SWGR / MCC Sch
RemoteControl
RestartReq
RunningLampColor
SafetyShutter
StarterUnit
StartStopSW
StoppedLampColor
SurgeAbsorber
TestTerminal
Transducer
UnitSortOrder
UnitSpaceHeater
VT1RatioV
ZCTRatioA
Template Name
DPPLVSwgrSch
Document Title
LV Switchgear Schedule
Field List
CBBreakingKA
CBCycle
CBInterLock
CBInterTrip
CBMakingKA
CBRatedA
CBRatedKV
CBStatus
CBType
ChangeOverSW
CT1RatioA
CT2RatioA
CurrentRevNo
DocumentNo
FaultIndicator
FaultLampColor
FaultStatus
GPTRatioV
ID
JobNo
MeteringDevice
MotorSpaceHeater
PanelID
PressureFlap
ProtectionDevice
RemoteControl
RestartReq
RunningLampColor
SafetyShutter
StarterUnit
StartStopSW
StoppedLampColor
TestTerminal
Transducer
UnitSortOrder
UnitSpaceHeater
VT1RatioV
ZCTRatioA
3-19
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
Category
SWGR / MCC Sch
Template Name
DPPHVMccSch
Document Title
HV/MV MCC Schedule
Field List
AmmeterScale
CBInterLock
CBInterTrip
ChangeOverSW
ContactorRatedA
ContactorRatedKV
ContactorStatus
ContactorType
ContInterruptingKA
CT1RatioA
CT2RatioA
CurrentRevNo
DocumentNo
EarthingSwitch
FaultIndicator
FaultLampColor
FaultStatus
FuseInterruptingKA
FuseRatedA
FuseRatedKV
FuseType
GPTRatioV
HP
ID
IFL
JobNo
LRC
Category
SWGR / MCC Sch
MeteringDevice
MotorSpaceHeater
PanelID
Poles
PressureFlap
ProtectionDevice
RemoteControl
RestartReq
RunningLampColor
SafetyShutter
SequenceName
SpeedControl
StarterUnit
StartStopSW
StartType
StoppedLampColor
SurgeAbsorber
Template Name
DPPLVMccSch
TestTerminal
Transducer
UnitSortOrder
UnitSpaceHeater
VT1RatioV
ZCTRatioA
Document Title
LV MCC Schedule
Field List
AmmeterScale
ChangeOverSW
ContactorRatedA
ControlCabSize
CPTRatioV
CT1RatioA
CurrentRevNo
DocumentNo
EarthFaultmA
EquipName
FaultLampColor
FuseRatedA
HP
HP_KW
ID
IFL
JobNo
LRC
MainPowerSize
MCCBTripA
MultiFuncRelay
OLRRangeA
PanelID
ResetButtonColor
RestartReq
RunningLampColor
SequenceName
SpeedControl
StartButtonColor
StarterUnit
StartType
StopButtonColor
StoppedLampColor
UnitSortOrder
UnitType
ZCTRatioA
3-20
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
Category
SWGR / MCC Sch
Template Name
DPPHVSwgrSch-V
Document Title
Field List
AuxPowerCabSize
AuxPowerCabType
CableEntryPoint
CBBreakingKA
CBCycle
CBInterLock
CBInterTrip
CBMakingKA
CBRatedA
CBRatedKV
CBStatus
CBType
ChangeOverSW
ControlCabSize
ControlCabType
CT1Class
CT1RatioA
CT2Class
CT2RatioA
CurrentRevNo
DocumentNo
EarthingSwitch
FaultIndicator
FaultLampColor
FaultStatus
GndWireSize
GndWireType
GPTClass
GPTRatioV
JobNo
LabelDescription
MainPowerSize
MainPowerType
MeteringDevice
MotorSpaceHeater
Category
SWGR / MCC Sch
PanelID
PressureFlap
ProjectCode
ProtectionDevice
RemoteControl
RestartReq
RunningLampColor
SafetyShutter
StarterUnit
StartStopSW
StoppedLampColor
SurgeAbsorber
TestTerminal
Transducer
UnitSortOrder
UnitSpaceHeater
VT1Class
VT1RatioV
ZCTClass
ZCTRatioA
Template Name
DPPLVSwgrSch-V
Document Title
Field List
AuxPowerCabSize
AuxPowerCabType
CableEntryPoint
CBBreakingKA
CBCycle
CBInterLock
CBInterTrip
CBMakingKA
CBRatedA
CBRatedKV
CBStatus
CBType
ChangeOverSW
ControlCabSize
ControlCabType
CT1Class
CT1RatioA
CT2Class
CT2RatioA
CurrentRevNo
DocumentNo
FaultIndicator
FaultLampColor
FaultStatus
GndWireSize
GndWireType
GPTClass
GPTRatioV
JobNo
LabelDescription
MainPowerSize
MainPowerType
MeteringDevice
MotorSpaceHeater
PanelID
PressureFlap
ProjectCode
ProtectionDevice
RemoteControl
RestartReq
RunningLampColor
SafetyShutter
StarterUnit
StartStopSW
StoppedLampColor
TestTerminal
Transducer
UnitSortOrder
UnitSpaceHeater
VT1Class
VT1RatioV
ZCTClass
ZCTRatioA
3-21
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
Category
SWGR / MCC Sch
Template Name
DPPHVMccSch-V
Document Title
HV/MV MCC Schedule
Field List
AmmeterScale
AuxPowerCabSize
AuxPowerCabType
CableEntryPoint
CBInterLock
CBInterTrip
ChangeOverSW
ContactorRatedA
ContactorRatedKV
ContactorStatus
ContactorType
ContInterruptingKA
ControlCabSize
ControlCabType
CT1Class
CT1RatioA
CT2Class
CT2RatioA
CurrentRevNo
DocumentNo
EarthingSwitch
EquipName
FaultIndicator
FaultLampColor
FaultStatus
FuseInterruptingKA
FuseRatedA
FuseRatedKV
FuseType
GndWireSize
GndWireType
GPTClass
GPTRatioV
HP
ID
IFL
JobNo
LabelDescription
LRC
MainPowerSize
MainPowerType
MeteringDevice
MotorSpaceHeater
PanelID
Poles
PressureFlap
ProjectCode
ProtectionDevice
RemoteControl
RestartReq
RunningLampColor
SafetyShutter
SequenceName
SpeedControl
StarterUnit
StartStopSW
StartType
StoppedLampColor
SurgeAbsorber
3-22
TestTerminal
Transducer
UnitSortOrder
UnitSpaceHeater
VT1Class
VT1RatioV
ZCTClass
ZCTRatioA
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
3.4.4 DPPCable
Category
Cable
Template Name
DPPCable1
Document Title
Cable Schedule (Form-1)
Field List
CableFrom
CableTo
CableTypeText
CableVoltage
CabSize
ConduitSize
CurrentRevNo
DocumentNo
DrumNo
EntrySize
EquipmentName
GlandSize
ID
JobNo
LengthValueMeter
NumberOfWires
UnitsOfWire
Category
Cable
Template Name
DPPCable2
Document Title
Field List
CableLibID
CableODValue
CableTypeText
CableUse
CableVoltage
CabSize
CondODValue
ConductorType
ConduitType
CurrentRevNo
DocumentNo
ElecLoadID
EntryType
GlandType
ID
JobNo
LengthValueMeter
MFRName
NumberOfWires
OperationKV
Panel
ProcessUnitID
RacewayType
SiteArea
Substation
TBFrom
TBTo
UnitsOfWire
3-23
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
Category
Cable

Template Name
DPPCableETAP
Document Title
Cable Schedule for ETAP Interface
Field List
CableAcces
CableTypeText
CableVoltage
CabSize
DocumentNo
EquipID
EquipmentCable
FromBus
ID
JobNo
LengthValueMeter
NumberOfWires
ToBus
UnitOfWire
3-24
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
3.4.5 DPPanel
Category
SWGR / MCC DS
ApprovedBy1
ApprovedBy2
ApprovedBy3
ApprovedBy4
ATS
ATSDWG
BIL
BusMaterialGnd
BusMaterialHoriz
BusRatedAHoriz
BusSCPeakKA
BusSCRatedKA
BusSCRatedSec
CableBracket
CableGland
CableGlandPlate
CableTerminal
ChargingHandle
CheckedBy1
CheckedBy2
CheckedBy3
CheckedBy4
ClosingPhase
ClosingVolt
CodeStandard
Customer
DegreeProtection
DocumentNo
DoorLock
DrawoutHandle
Template Name
DPPHVSwgrDS
Document Title
HV/MV Switchgear Data Sheet
Field List
EnclosureType
NoOfEarthingTruck
FixingBolt
NoOfIncomers
FloorFrame
OneLineDWG
Frequency
OutgoingPoint
ID
OutgoingType
IncomingPoint
PaintColor
IncomingType
PanelKV
JobNo
PanelSpaceHeaterPhase
KeyInterlock
PanelSpaceHeaterVolt
LFWithstandKV
PanelType
Lifter
PlantName
LiftingEye
ProjectCode
Location
RatedKV
Location
RelayToolKit
MadeBy1
RevDate1
MadeBy2
RevDate2
MadeBy3
RevDate3
MadeBy4
RevDate4
MFRAssemblyDWG
RevDescription1
MFRDocumentList
RevDescription2
MFRLayoutDWG
RevDescription3
MFRLoadingData
RevDescription4
MFROpManual
RevNo1
MFRRelaySetData
RevNo2
MFRSchematicDWG
RevNo3
MFRSparePartsList
RevNo4
MFRSpecData
RoutineTest
MFRSpecialToolList
MFRTestProcedure
MFRWiringDWG
MountingType
3-25
SchematicDWG
SpecialTest
SpecificationNo
Substation
TestEquipment
TrippingPhase
TrippingVolt
WitnessTest
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
Category
SWGR / MCC DS
Template Name
DPPLVSwgrDS
Document Title
LV Switchgear Data Sheet
Field List
ApprovedBy1
ApprovedBy2
ApprovedBy3
ApprovedBy4
ATS
ATSDWG
BusMaterialGnd
BusMaterialHoriz
BusRatedAHoriz
BusSCPeakKA
BusSCRatedKA
BusSCRatedSec
CableBracket
CableGland
CableGlandPlate
CableTerminal
ChargingHandle
CheckedBy1
CheckedBy2
CheckedBy3
CheckedBy4
ClosingPhase
ClosingVolt
CodeStandard
Customer
DegreeProtection
DocumentNo
DoorLock
DrawoutHandle
EnclosureType
FixingBolt
FloorFrame
Frequency
ID
IncomingPoint
IncomingType
InsulationLevel
JobNo
Lifter
LiftingEye
Location
Location
MadeBy1
MadeBy2
MadeBy3
MadeBy4
MFRAssemblyDWG
MFRDocumentList
MFRLayoutDWG
MFRLoadingData
MFROpManual
MFRRelaySetData
MFRSchematicDWG
MFRSparePartsList
MFRSpecData
MFRSpecialToolList
MFRTestProcedure
MFRWiringDWG
MountingType
NoOfIncomers
OneLineDWG
OutgoingPoint
OutgoingType
PaintColor
PanelKV
PanelType
PlantName
ProjectCode
RatedKV
RelayToolKit
RevDate1
RevDate2
RevDate3
RevDate4
RevDescription1
RevDescription2
RevDescription3
RevDescription4
RevNo1
RevNo2
RevNo3
RevNo4
RoutineTest
3-26
SchematicDWG
SpecialTest
SpecificationNo
Substation
TestEquipment
WitnessTest
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
Category
SWGR / MCC DS
Template Name
DPPHVMccDS
Document Title
HV/MV MCC Data Sheet
Field List
ApprovedBy1
ApprovedBy2
ApprovedBy3
ApprovedBy4
BIL
BusMaterialGnd
BusMaterialHoriz
BusRatedAHoriz
BusSCPeakKA
BusSCRatedKA
BusSCRatedSec
CableBracket
CableGland
CableGlandPlate
CableTerminal
ChargingHandle
CheckedBy1
CheckedBy2
CheckedBy3
CheckedBy4
CodeStandard
ControlPhase
ControlVolt
Customer
DegreeProtection
DocumentNo
DoorLock
DrawoutHandle
EnclosureType
FixingBolt
FloorFrame
Frequency
ID
IncomingPoint
IncomingType
JobNo
LFWithstandKV
Lifter
LiftingEye
Location
Location
MadeBy1
MadeBy2
MadeBy3
MadeBy4
MFRAssemblyDWG
MFRDocumentList
MFRLayoutDWG
MFRLoadingData
MFROpManual
MFRRelaySetData
MFRSchematicDWG
MFRSparePartsList
MFRSpecData
MFRSpecialToolList
MFRTestProcedure
MFRWiringDWG
MountingType
NoOfIncomers
OneLineDWG
OutgoingPoint
OutgoingType
PaintColor
PanelKV
PanelType
PlantName
ProjectCode
3-27
RatedKV
RelayToolKit
RevDate1
RevDate2
RevDate3
RevDate4
RevDescription1
RevDescription2
RevDescription3
RevDescription4
RevNo1
RevNo2
RevNo3
RevNo4
RoutineTest
SchematicDWG
SpecialTest
SpecificationNo
Substation
TestEquipment
WitnessTest
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
Category
SWGR / MCC DS
Template Name
DPPLVMccDS
Document Title
LV MCC Data Sheet
Field List
ApprovedBy1
ApprovedBy2
ApprovedBy3
ApprovedBy4
BackToBack
BusMaterialGnd
BusMaterialHoriz
BusRatedAGnd
BusRatedAHoriz
BusRatedANeut
BusRatedAVert
BusSCPeakKA
BusSCRatedKA
BusSCRatedSec
CableBracket
CableGland
CableGlandPlate
CableTerminal
CheckedBy1
CheckedBy2
CheckedBy3
CheckedBy4
CodeStandard
ControlPhase
ControlVolt
Customer
DegreeProtection
DocumentNo
DoorLock
EnclosureType
FixingBolt
FloorFrame
Frequency
FutureExtension
ID
IncomingPoint
IncomingType
InsulationLevel
InternalWireSize
InternalWireType
JobNo
LiftingEye
Location
Location
Category
SWGR / MCC DS
MadeBy1
MadeBy2
MadeBy3
MadeBy4
MFRAssemblyDWG
MFRDocumentList
MFRLayoutDWG
MFRLoadingData
MFROpManual
MFRRelaySetData
MFRSchematicDWG
MFRSparePartsList
MFRSpecData
MFRSpecialToolList
MFRTestProcedure
MFRWiringDWG
MountingType
NoOfIncomers
OneLineDWG
OutgoingPoint
OutgoingType
PaintColor
PanelKV
PanelType
PlantName
ProjectCode
Template Name
DPPSwbdComponent
RatedKV
RelayToolKit
RevDate1
RevDate2
RevDate3
RevDate4
RevDescription1
RevDescription2
RevDescription3
RevDescription4
RevNo1
RevNo2
RevNo3
RevNo4
RoutineTest
SchematicDWG
SpecialTest
SpecificationNo
Substation
UnitDrawout
WitnessTest
Document Title
Switchboard Components
Field List
AccuracyCT
AccuracyVT
CBRatedKV
CBType
ContactorRatedKV
ContactorType
ControlCabSize
ControlCabType
CPTSecVoltage
CurrentRevNo
DocumentNo
FuseRatedKV
FuseType
ID
IncomingSize
IncomingType
JobNo
OutgoingType
PanelKV
PanelType
SchematicDWG
3-28
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
Category
Switchboard

Template Name
DPPSwbdList
Document Title
Switchboard No. List
Field List
BusID2
BusID3
BusID4
ContCF
Contractor
FromPanelID
ID
InterCF
PanelKV
PanelType
SpareCF
3.4.6 DPPBus
Category
Bus
Template Name
DPPBusList
Document Title
Bus No. List
Field List
BusKV
ContCF
Contractor
FromBusID
ID
InterCF
Phase
SpareCF
3.4.7 DPPLump
Category
Lumped Load
Template Name
DPPLump
Document Title
Lumped Load List
Field List
Bus
ContCF
Contractor
ID
InterCF
KV
PhaseNo
SpareCF
3-29
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
3.4.8 DPPLumpMotor
Category
Lumped Motor
BHP
BHP1
BHP2
Bus
ChildID
ContQty
CouplerInertia
EFF100
EquipName
GroupedInertiaLevel
GroupedLoadType
GroupedPoles
GroupedRestartGroup
Template Name
DPPLumpMotor
ID
InterQty
JobNo
KV
LoadInertia
LoadType
LRC
MachineInertia
MotorBreakDownTrq
MotorInertia
MotorLRTrq
Field List
NoOfMotors
Panel
PercentLoad0
PercentLoad1
PercentLoad2
PF100
PFlr
PhaseNo
Poles
RepKW
RepMVA
Document Title
Lumped Motor List
RestartGroup
RestartReq
Slip
SpareQty
TotalKW
TotalMVA
3.4.9 DPPLCS
Category
LCS Data Sheet
ApprovedBy1
ApprovedBy2
ApprovedBy3
ApprovedBy4
BlindPlug
CableEntry
CableEntrySize
CableGlandQty
CableGlandSize
CableGlandType
CheckedBy1
CheckedBy2
CheckedBy3
CheckedBy4
ControlCableSize
ControlCableType
DegreeProtection
DocumentNo
EnclosureMaterial
ExplosionProtection
GndWireSizeIn
GndWireSizeOut
ID
JobNo
Template Name
DPPLCSDataSheet
Document Title
LCS Data Sheet
Field List
LCSAlarmLamp
OffLockStop
LCSAlarmLampColor
OperationVoltage
LCSAmmeter
ProjectCode
LCSAmmeterRange
Quantity
LCSAutoManual
RatedA
LCSAutoManualOff
RevDate1
LCSCT
RevDate2
LCSCTRatio
RevDate3
LCSEmergStop
RevDate4
LCSOffLamp
RevDescription1
LCSOffLampColor
RevDescription2
LCSOnLamp
RevDescription3
LCSOnLampColor
RevDescription4
LCSStart
RevNo1
LCSStop
RevNo2
LockAutoManual
RevNo3
MadeBy1
RevNo4
MadeBy2
TagPlate
MadeBy3
TerminalBlock
MadeBy4
WarningPlate
Mounting
MountingBolt
3-30
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview
3.4.10 DPPXFMR
Category
Transformer
Template Name
DPPXFMR
Document Title
Transformer Datasheet
Field List
AlteredBy
AlteredTime
AnchorBolt
AuxPowerPhase
AuxPowerVolt
AuxTBDegProtection
AuxTerminalBox
BuchholzRelay
CableGland
CableLugSupplier
CableLugType
ClassName
ClassNeutCT
ClassPrimCT
ClassSecCT
ClassTerCT
CodeStandard
CoolFanCBDegProtection
CoolFanContBox
CoolFanControl
CoolFanPhase
CoolFanQty
CoolFanVolt
CoolFanWatt
CoolingFan
CoreWeight
DateRevs
DimensionText
DocumentNo
DutyRating
EFF050LF080PF
EFF050LF100PF
EFF075LF080PF
EFF075LF100PF
EFF100LF080PF
EFF100LF100PF
EquipmentName
FinalData
FoundationBolt
FromETAP
GroundTerminal
HazardAreaClass
ID (Unique)
ID2
IID
ImpulseTest
InService
Insulation
Issue
LTCControlMethod
LTCRemoteCP
Length
LiftingLug
Location
MFRName
MVAButton
MVAText
ManufacturerName
MaxPercentTap
MinPercentTap
Mounting
Nameplate
NoLoadLoss
Noise
NumberNeutCT
NumberPercentTap
NumberPrimCT
NumberSecCT
NumberTerCT
OilDrainType
OilDrainValve
OilLevelIndDesc
OilLevelIndicator
OilQtyConservator
OilQtyMainTank
OilQtyRadiator
OilQtyTotal
OilTempIndDesc
OilTempIndicator
OilType
OneLineDWG
OverCoverHeight
OverallWeight
PSPosX
PSPosXoverR
PSPosZ
PSPosZBase
PSZeroX
PSZeroXoverR
PSZeroZ
PTPosX
PTPosXoverR
PTPosZ
PTZeroX
PTZeroXoverR
PTZeroZ
PaintColor
PaintMethod
PhaseNo
PressReliefDev
PressVacuumGauge
PrimBIL
PrimCableDuct
PrimConnectCond
PrimConnectSize
PrimConnectType
PrimIsolatingSW
PrimLFWithstandKV
PrimMVA
PrimMVA2
PrimMVA3
PrimNGAmp
PrimNGSec
PrimNGType
PrimNumberConnect
PrimNumberCore
PrimTypeCond
PrimWireSystem
PrimaryBus
PrimkV
PurchaseOrderNo
PurchasingDate
Quantity
RatedFrequency
RatedLoadLoss
RatedVANeutCT
RatedVAPrimCT
RatedVASecCT
RatedVATerCT
RatioNeutCT
RatioPrimCT
RatioSecCT
RatioTerCT
ReferenceDWG
RequisitionNo
Revision
RoutineTest
SCCMVA
SCCSec
SCCkA
SCCkV
STPosX
STPosXoverR
STPosZ
STZeroX
STZeroXoverR
STZeroZ
SecBIL
SecBusductBox
SecCableDuct
SecConnectCond
SecConnectSize
SecConnectType
SecLFWithstandKV
SecMVA
SecNGAmp
SecNGSec
SecNGType
SecNumberCond
SecNumberConnect
SecNumberCore
SecTypeCond
SecWireSystem
SeckV
SecondaryBus
SilicagelBreather
SpaceHeater
SpaceHeaterVolt
SpecialTest
SpecificationNo
StepPercentTap
3-31
SuddenPresRelay
SunShade
SysFreqVariation
SysFrequency
SysNGAmp
SysNGSec
SysNGType
SysSCCAmp
SysSCCkV
SysVoltVariation
SysVoltage
SysWireSystem
TankWeight
TapNeutralTerminal
TappingWinding
TempRise
TemperatureOil
TemperatureWinding
TerBIL
TerBusductBox
TerCableDuct
TerConnectCond
TerConnectSize
TerConnectType
TerLFWithstandKV
TerMVA
TerNGAmp
TerNGSec
TerNGType
TerNumberCond
TerNumberConnect
TerNumberCore
TerTypeCond
TerWireSystem
TerkV
TertiaryBus
Tolerance
TopOilFilter
TotalHeight
TotalLoss
TotalWeight
TypeName
TypeNeutCT
TypePrimCT
TypeSecCT
TypeTapChanger
TypeTerCT
TypeTest
UntankingHeight
VectorGroup
WheelType
Width
WindingInsulation
WindingMaterial
WindingTempIndDesc
WindingTempIndicator
XFMRStandard
e-DPP 4.0.2
Overview

Field List
MagneticSec
MagnetickA
PrimNumberCond
Category
Transformer
SuddenPresRelText
Template Name
DPPXfmrETAP
XFMRSubType
XFMRType
Document Title
Transformer Schedule for ETAP
Interface
Field List
DocumentNo
ID
JobNo
PrimaryBus
PrimkV
PrimMVA
PrimNGType
PSPosXoverR
PSPosZ
PSZeroXoverR
PSZeroZ
PTPosXoverR
PTPosZ
PTZeroXoverR
PTZeroZ
SecondaryBus
SeckV
SecMVA
SecNGType
STPosXoverR
STPosZ
STZeroXoverR
STZeroZ
TertiaryBus
TerkV
TerMVA
TerNGType
Tolerance
VectorGroup
<End of Chapter 3>
3-32
e-DPP 4.0.2
Chapter 4
Ribbon Bar
e-DPP 4.0 introduces the Office 2007 style Ribbon Bar with which most of e-DPP users may be
already familiar using Microsoft business applications.
e-DPP Ribbon Bar

The Ribbon Bar is configured with system button, quick access toolbar, ribbon tabs, ribbon groups and
command bar controls that invoke the individual program functions.
Ribbon Bar Parts
4-1
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
System Button
4.1 System Button

When the system button is clicked, the below file menu is displayed.
Note: When the system button is double clicked, e-DPP application will be closed.
The menu provides with the following commands:
Open Project
Close Project
Logout
New Project
Save Project
Save Project As
Open an existing project file

Close an opened project file
Logout the opened project and logon to the same or other project as a
different user
Create a new project file
Save all changes made to the active project
Save the opened project to a specified project name and continue the
e-DPP operation with the current project
4-2
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
When a cursor is moved on or the right-arrow is clicked, the right pane

changes to Preview and print the document as shown below:
Print
System Button
Print
Print Setup
Print Preview
Recent Projects
User Options
Exit e-DPP
(Not available. For future.)

Open printer setup dialog
Preview an editor spreadsheet (Enabled only when a template
editor is open and active.)
Recently opened projects are listed (max. 12 projects)
If the pin mark for any project is clicked, that project will remain in the
list permanently.
Provide a dialog box to change the various settings for user preferences
Close e-DPP application
For more information, see Chapter 05, File Menu.
4-3
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Quick Access Toolbar
4.2 Quick Access Toolbar

The quick access toolbar enables user to select any fixed or user-defined command with just one click
and also to customize commands and/or appearance of the toolbar.
Save Project and Open Project commands are placed on the toolbar as a default. User may enable
or disable those commands with the pull down list that can be displayed by clicking the down-arrow
beside the toolbar.
More Commands
When this item is selected, Customize dialog is displayed as shown below:
Quick Access tab

User is allowed to add or remove any commands to the quick access toolbar by using this tab.
Note: Some commands are for system use only and not customizable, e.g. File -> Recent File,
MDI Editor -> All Elec. Load Item, etc.
Toolbars tab
User is allowed to add, rename or delete a user-defined toolbar by using this tab. The system
toolbar The Ribbon cannot be deleted.
4-4
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Commands tab
User is allowed to add any commands from the list to the user-defined toolbar by drag & drop
mouse operation by using this tab.
Keyboard tab
User is allowed to assign any shortcut key to invoke a program function by using this tab.
4-5
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Options tab
User is allowed to setup the other useful options by using this tab as shown below:
Show Below the Ribbon / Show Above the Ribbon

The quick access toolbar can be shown in either below or above the Ribbon bar by changing this
menu item.
Minimize the Ribbon

When this item is clicked, the Ribbon bar is shown or hidden. When the Ribbon bar is hidden, only
the Ribbon tabs are displayed as shown below:
4-6
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
4-7
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Ribbon Tabs
4.3 Ribbon Tabs

The Ribbon bar is composed of 10 Ribbon tabs as listed below:
Start
This tab contains the groups and commands to be used to fill out
the minimum and default settings and/or data whenever a new
project is created.
The Ribbon groups contained in this tab are:
Project
Import External Data
Defaults
Data Filling
In normal practice of electrical design & engineering, the data

creation will be carried out in the above order.
Editor Selection
Select a category of spreadsheet type of editors.

When any of them is selected, the next tab Edit Tools will be
automatically opened.
Edit Tools
This tab contains the groups and commands to be used to edit the
spreadsheet type of editor.
The Ribbon groups contained in this tab are:
Clipboard
Find
Edit
Freeze Panes
Calculations
View
File
Editor Help
Library
Library access and management
Load Summary
Load summary calculations for bus loads, switchboard loads and

lumped loads
Lumped motor calculation
Motor restart group
Cable Management
Sizing calculation for power cables, conduits and cable glands

Drum scheduling
Cable sizing chart
Minimum cable sizes
Conduit and gland size selection table
Revision
Revision control for documents
4-8
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Ribbon Tabs
Template
Design user's templates (Spreadsheet editors and MS Excel

document formats)
View
Project Editor
Window management
Network License Manager
Tools
ETAP interface
Ground fault current calculation program
SPEL (SmartPlant Electrical) Adaptor
4-9
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Ribbon Tabs
4.3.1 Start Tab

This tab contains the groups and commands to be used to fill out the project database with the
minimum and default settings and/or external data that are usually required when a new project is
created.
Project group
The options available in Project group are used to set parameters that affect the whole project.
This includes information such as general project information, applicable standard, electrical
voltage data, cable entry types and ambient conditions. It is highly recommended that you review
and modify this information before you start various e-DPP transactions. The Project group provides
with the following commands:
Electrical
Provide a dialog box to enter electrical voltage data
Information
Provide a dialog box to enter general project information
Standard
Provide a dialog box to enter applicable standard
Settings
Provide a dialog box to enter settings
Loading Categories
Provide a dialog box to define 3 loading categories
System
Configurations
Provide a dialog box to define 10 system

configurations
Cable Entry
Provide a dialog box to enter cable entry types
Ambient Conditions
Provide a dialog box to enter ambient conditions
Excel Report
Output the above information to MS Excel
For more information, refer to Chapter 8 Project.
Import External Data group

This group enables users to import an external user data in MS Access database or MS Excel
worksheet format to e-DPP new or existing project database.
Import MS Access
Provide a dialog box to import an external MS Access

database (Note: Compatible version of MS Access file is
up to Office 2003 - .mdb format)
4-10
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Import MS Excel
Ribbon Tabs
Provide a dialog box to import an external MS Excel
worksheet (Note: Compatible version of MS Excel file is
up to Office 2003 - .xls format)
For more information, refer to Chapter 6 Data Import.
Defaults group
The options available in Defaults group are used to set default parameters that affect the whole
project.
This includes information such as equipment defaults, site area and value list. It is highly
recommended that you review and modify this information before you start various e-DPP
transactions. The Defaults group provides the following commands:
Induction Motor
Provide a dialog box to specify the default data for induction

motors
Site Area
Provide a dialog box to specify the site area information
Value List
Provide a dialog box to edit the value list
For more information, refer to Chapter 10, Defaults.
Data Filling group
Induction Motors
Provide a dialog box to perform Data Filling for induction

motors
Static Loads
Provide a dialog box to perform Data Filling for static loads
Cables
Provide a dialog box to specify various conditions for data

transfer from Electrical Load Schedule to Cable Schedule
Switchgear/MCC
Provide a dialog box to transfer data from Electrical Load

Schedule to Switchgear/MCC Schedule
LCS
Provide a dialog box to transfer data from Switchgear/MCC

Schedule to LCS Schedule
For more information, refer to Chapter 11, Data Filling.
4-11
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Ribbon Tabs
4.3.2 Editor Selection Tab

This tab contains the commands to select and open an editor template in a spreadsheet format. The
maximum number of editors that can be opened simultaneously is 8.
Each group contains a split type command buttons.
When a cursor is moved on the command button, a split line is shown between the icon and caption.
Clicking the icon will open the default editor template that was most recently opened one. If it is the
first time to open a template after a new project was created, the top one in the pull down list is opened
and checked as a default. The default template is checked in the list as shown below.
Clicking the caption will show the drop down list containing the titles of all available editor templates.
Loads & Motors group

This group contains 3 commands for editing the data of all types of electrical loads.
All Electrical Loads
Edits database for all electrical loads

MS Excel sheet exported from any template is
in Schedule format.
All Motors
Edits database for all motors

in Schedule format.
4-12
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Induction Motor
Ribbon Tabs
Edits database for induction motor
in Datasheet format.
Branches group
This group contains the commands for cables and transformers.
Cable
Edits database for cables

Usages of cables are Power, Control,
Grounding, Communication, etc.
Transformer
Edits database for transformers with 2 and 3

windings
Switchgear/MCC/LCS group
This group contains the commands for individual modules of switchgears, MCC (motor control
center) and LCS (local control station).
SWGR/MCC SCH
Edits database for individual modules of

switchgear/MCC
in Schedule format.
SWGR/MCC DS
Edits database for individual modules of

switchgear/MCC
in Datasheet format.
LCS Data Sheet
Edits database for selected types of LCS or an

overall list of LCS
in Schedule format or Datasheet format.
Nodes & Lump group

This group contains the commands for buses, switchboards (switchgear & MCC), lumped loads,
lumped motors and their associate loads.
Bus
Edits database for bus or its connected loads
Switchboard
Edits database for switchboard or its connected

loads
Lumped Load
Edits database for lumped loads
Lumped Motor
Edits database for lumped motors
For more information, refer to Chapter 7, Editor.
4-13
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Ribbon Tabs
4.3.3 Edit Tools Tab

This tab contains the commands to be used for the spreadsheet style editors. When any editor is
opened from Editor Selection tab, a focus is moved to this tab.
Clipboard group
Cut
Deletes selected part or group of parts and

attaches to Clipboard
Copy
Copies selected part or group of parts and

attaches to Clipboard
Paste
Pastes selected part or group of parts from

Clipboard
Find group
Find
Opens a dialog to find a user specified data in

Template Editor
Replace
Opens a dialog to replace a user specified data

in Template Editor
Select All
Select all rows shown in Template Editor
Edit group
Add ID
Opens a dialog to add a new ID
Copy ID
Opens a dialog to copy the existing ID to a new

ID
Delete ID
Delete the selected row(s)
Filter
Opens a Filter dialog
Sort
Opens a Sort dialog
Compress
Opens a new Template Editor grouped by the

same ID body (Note: ID = ID body + Suffix)
Library Quick Pick
Opens a Library Quick Pick dialog
Equipment Quick Pick
Opens a Library Equipment Pick dialog
4-14
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Ribbon Tabs
Freeze Panes group
Freeze Panes
Freeze the columns left to and the rows above

the selected cell
Freeze Columns
Freeze the columns left to the selected cell
Freeze Rows
Freeze the rows above the selected cell
Unfreeze Pane
Unfreeze the columns left to and/or the rows

above the selected cell where applicable
Calculations group
One Cable Sizing
Opens a dialog to size power cables for single

load
For more information, refer to Chapter 13,
Cable Management.
View group
Property List
Shows a Property List for the selected item
Refresh
Updates the spreadsheet screen to the latest data
Preview
Opens a Preview screen of the active Template

Editor
File group
Save Active Editor
Saves the changes made in the active Template

Editor
Export to Excel
Opens To Excel dialog
Close Active Editor
Close the active Template Editor
Editor Help group
Show Context Help
Opens HTML style online help and goes to a

topic associated with the active Template Editor
For more information, refer to Chapter 7, Editor.
4-15
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Ribbon Tabs
4.3.4 Library Tab

This tab contains the commands to edit the shipped and user-specified engineering libraries.
Load group
Motor
Opens the Induction Motor Library
Static Load
Opens the Static Load Library
Cable group
Cable
Opens the Cable Library
Conduit
Opens the Cable Conduit Library
Cable Gland
Opens the Cable Gland Library
Control Sequence group
LCS Circuit
Opens the LCS Circuit library
Motor Sequence
Opens the Motor Sequence library
CB & Fuse group
HV Circuit Breaker
Opens the High Voltage Circuit Breaker Library
LV Circuit Breaker
Opens the Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Library
Fuse
Opens the Power Fuse Library
MCCB
Open the MCCB Library
File group
Open
Opens a dialog to select a different library

database
Save As
Save the active library database as a different

library
For more information, refer to Chapter 9, Library.
4-16
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Ribbon Tabs
4.3.5 Load Summary Tab

This tab contains the commands to edit data required for and execute load summary and lumped motor
calculations.
Edit group
Bus Load
Opens a dialog box to assign loads to a bus
Switchboard Load
Opens a dialog box to assign loads to a switchboard
Lumped Load
Opens a dialog box to assign loads to a lumped load
Run group
Run Load Summary
Opens a dialog box to execute load summary calculation
Lumped Motor group
Restart Group
Opens an editor to specify motor restart groups referred by

Lumped Motor calculation
Lumped Motor
Opens a dialog box to specify data required for and

executes the lumped motor calculation
For more information, refer to Chapter 12, Load Summary.
4-17
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Ribbon Tabs
4.3.6 Cable Management Tab

This tab contains the commands to operate various functions for management of cables and cable
related materials.
Sizing group
Power Cable Sizing
Opens a dialog box to execute the power cable sizing

calculation
Conduit & Gland Sizing
Opens a dialog box to execute the conduit and cable gland

sizing
Cable Sizing Chart
Opens a dialog box to create the cable sizing chart and

export to MS Excel
Drum Scheduling
Open a dialog box to execute the cable drum scheduling
Summary group
Cable Summary
Opens a dialog box to execute the cable summary
Gland Summary
Opens a dialog box to execute the cable gland summary
Reference group
Minimum Cable Size
Opens a dialog box to define the minimum power cable size

to be applied to the power cable sizing calculation
Conduit & Gland Size Table
Opens a dialog box to define the conduit and gland size

table
For more information, refer to Chapter 13, Cable Management.
4-18
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Ribbon Tabs
4.3.7 Revision Tab

This tab contains the commands to manage revision numbers, history and contents of e-DPP created
documents.
Revision group
Revision Up
Opens a dialog box to count up the revision number for documents
Revision View
Opens a dialog box to view the revision status for documents
Revision List
Opens a dialog box to view the revision list (contents) for documents
For more information, refer to Chapter 14, Revision Control.
4-19
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Ribbon Tabs
4.3.8 Template Tab

This tab contains the commands to create, edit and view the shipped and user-defined templates used
for the spreadsheet style editors (See sections 4.3.2 and 4.3.3).
List group
Template List
Opens a dialog box to view and specify parameters for the templates
Design group
Schedule Sheet
Opens a dialog box to edit the user designed schedule sheets
Datasheet
Opens a dialog box to edit the user designed datasheets
Applications group
Load Summary
Opens a dialog box to edit the user designed schedule sheet for
load summary
Cable Sizing Result
Opens a dialog box to edit the user designed schedule sheet for cable
sizing results
Cable Sizing Chart
Opens a dialog box to edit the user designed schedule sheet for cable
sizing chart
Cable Schedule
Drum Schedule
(Disabled. For future)

(Disabled. For future)
For more information, refer to Chapter 15, Template.
4-20
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Ribbon Tabs
4.3.9 View Tab

This tab contains the commands to control the appearance of screen & windows and show the license
manager.
Show/Hide group
Project Editor
Shows Project Editor dialog

Note: To close Project Editor, click X button at the upper-right corner of
Project Editor.
Status Bar
Shows and hides the status bar placed at the bottom of e-DPP screen
Status Bar
Status bar is indicated at the bottom of e-DPP screen and consist of 5 panes as shown below:
Indicates a help line message for a

command where the mouse cursor
is currently located.
Default string is e-DPP version
(e.g. e-DPP 4.0.0)
Indicates a currently active project
name and login user name.
Indicates a title of editor template
when a spreadsheet style editor is
opened.
Indicates the status of key locks.
CAP = Caps Lock ON
NUM = Num Lock ON
SCRL = Scroll Lock ON
Resize gripper
When user wants to resize the
entire e-DPP screen, this gripper is
used.
1st Pane
2nd Pane
3rd Pane
4th Pane
5th Pane
Window group
4-21
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Ribbon Tabs
Cascade windows
Arranges multiple opened windows in an overlapped fashion
Tile-Vertical
Arranges multiple opened windows in non-overlapped tiles and in the

vertical direction (side-by-side)
Tile-Horizontal
Arranges multiple opened windows in non-overlapped tiles and in the

horizontal direction (up and down)
Switch Windows
When clicked, a list of currently opened windows is shown.

Selecting any item will bring the window to front.
License Manager group
Show
Manager
License
Open a dialog to view the status and number of authorized and

currently connected user licenses.
License Manager
Search an available network key and retrieve the license information stored in it.
The retrieved information is indicated in the dialog below.
Server
Configuration
This field indicates either "Network" or "Stand-Alone" depending on the license type of user's
key.
Server Name
This field indicates the name of server where the WIBU USB key is plugged. If the type of
4-22
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Ribbon Tabs
license is "Stand-Alone", it indicates "Local".
License
Module Name
This field indicates the name of all the program modules that e-DPP provides.
No. of Users
Total:
Connected:
Free:
The total number of licenses provided for this program module.

The number of users who are currently using this program module.
The number of licenses up to that additional users can use
this program module.
4-23
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Ribbon Tabs
4.3.10 Tools Tab

This tab contains the commands to launch the optional program modules to interface with external
application data such as ETAP and SPEL, and ground fault current calculation.
ETAP Interface group
MS Access to ETAP
Opens a dialog to export e-DPP project database to the

intermediate database which can be imported to ETAP by means
of ETAP DataX e-DPP module
MS Excel to ETAP
Opens a dialog to export e-DPP project database to MS Excel

Fixed Format which can be imported to ETAP by means of
ETAP DataX Excel - Fixed Format module
ReporTAP
Launches the separate application software ReporTAP to

import ETAP equipment information and analysis results
Applications group
Ground Fault Calculation
Opens a dialog box to calculate ground fault current and relay

sensitivities, etc.
SPEL Adaptor
Opens a dialog to export e-DPP project database to the

intermediate database which can be imported to SPEL by means
of SPEL Import Manager module
For more information, refer to Chapter 16, Tools.
4-24
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Optional Commands
4.4 Optional Commands

The optional commands and menus are available at the upper-right corner of Ribbon bar.
4.4.1 Options Menu

Options menu provides with 5 submenus as listed below:
Styles
Select a style which user wants to apply to Ribbon bar. The default
style is Blue.
The last selected style will be reloaded when any project is opened.
4-25
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Skin
Optional Commands
Select a skin which user wants to apply to the individual dialogs.
The default skin is System.
The last selected skin will be reloaded when any project is opened.
Font
Select a size of fonts
The last selected size will not be reloaded when any project is
opened. The default setting System Default is applied.
Right to Left
Horizontal arrangement of commands and menu items can be

switched between Right to Left and Left to Right.
The last selected option will not be reloaded when any project is
opened. The default setting Left to Right is applied.
Animation
When this option is checked, the background color of Ribbon groups

fades in and out when the mouse cursor is moved on and removed
from there.
The last selected option will not be reloaded when any project is
opened. The default setting Checked is applied.
4-26
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Optional Commands
4.4.2 Help Button

Click this button
to display the opening screen of Help. From this screen, you can jump to
step-by-step instructions for using e-DPP and various types of reference information. Once you open
Help, you can click on the Contents button to return to the opening screen. You can also use Index to
search for information on a specific topic.
4-27
e-DPP 4.0.2
Ribbon Bar
Optional Commands
4.4.3 About Button

Click this button
to display the copyright notice, version number of your copy of e-DPP. You also
see ELTECHS's phone, fax and numbers and e-mail address.
Clicking "System Info" button brings up Windows System Information dialog.
<End of Chapter 4>
4-28
e-DPP 4.0.2
Chapter 5
File Menu
The File Menu is accessible by clicking the system button with e-DPP icon and provides several
commands such as to open/close a project file, logout a user, create a new project, save/copy a project
file and show the print submenu. In addition, User Options and Exit e-DPP commands are
available at the bottom of menu pane.
5-1
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
Open Project
5.1. Open Project

You can open an existing project file (previously saved) by clicking on Open Project in the File
menu.
If you are editing a project and you want to open a previously saved project, you will be prompted to
save the current project.
Included in the e-DPP installation program is a file named Example.mdb. To open this file, click on
Open Project from the File Menu on the menu bar. This will open the Open File dialog box, as
shown here. Locate the folder called Example. The file Example.mdb is located in this folder. Select
the file and click on Open, as shown below. This will open the Example project file.
The Example file contains a sample project with sample values. Performing the actions described in
the remainder of the manual will help you to become familiar with e-DPP.
5-2
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
Open Project
Open File Dialog Box

The following options allow you to specify which file to open:
Look in
Select a network, drive, and directory in which the e-DPP project file that you want to open is located.
You can open a file irrespective of whether it's presently in use by another user in the network or not.
e-DPP allows you to open a file which is "read only" but you CANNOT open a file which is not an
e-DPP file.
File Name
Type or select the file name you want to open. This box lists files with the extension .mdb only.
Files of Type
e-DPP project files have an .mdb extension.
When Open button is clicked, the login dialog box appears as shown below:
Project File
This field indicates a full path &file name of e-DPP project database and is not editable by user.
Library File
This field indicates a full path &file name of e-DPP library database and is not editable by user.
Project Name
This field indicates a title of e-DPP project and is not editable by user.
Job No.
5-3
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
Open Project
This field indicates a job number of e-DPP project and is not editable by user.
Engineer Name
Select an engineer name from the pull down list or type in any new name. If the specified
new name does not exist in the list and OK button is clicked or Enter key is pressed, the
below message box appears. Please see Add New Engineer section below.
Add button
Instead of typing in a new engineer name in the Engineer Name field, you can register a
new engineer name by clicking this button. Please see Add New Engineer section
below.
Delete button
Clicking this button will bring up the below message box:
If the engineer name is protected by a password, you are prompted to enter the registered
password.
Password
Enter the password for the registered Engineer with a maximum of 20 characters (number and/or
alphabets). This cell is enabled only if "Password Required" option has been set "Yes".
5-4
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
Open Project
Add New Engineer dialog

Engineer Name
If you typed in the new engineer name, this field is not editable. If you clicked Add button,
this field is editable.
Password Required - Yes/No

If a password is required for the new Engineer Name, select "Yes", otherwise select "No".
Password
Enter any password for the registered Engineer with a maximum of 20 characters (number and/or
alphabets). This cell is enabled only if "Password Required" option has been set "Yes".
Confirmed Password
Enter the same password as the above for confirmation.
The new engineer name is referred by the Revision Control program and recorded as a person who
makes revisions in the Revision View and Revision List.
For more information on Revision Control, see Chapter-14, Revision Control.
5-5
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
Close Project
5.2. Close Project

A project can be closed any time. Closing a project can be done by clicking on Close Project in the
File Menu.
Before a project file is closed, you are promoted to save the project file.
If you click on Yes, all data is saved when the project is closed.
5-6
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
Logout
5.3. Logout
When you like to change an engineer (user) name, click on Logout in the File Menu.
Before the user project is logged out, you are promoted to save the project file.
If you click on Yes, all data is saved when the current user is logged out and then the below login
dialog box will appear:
Please refer to Section 5.1 Open Project for the details of this dialog.
5-7
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
New Project
5.4. New Project

To start a new project, click on File and select New Project. This opens the New Project dialog box,
as shown below.
Project Files
Project Database File Name
Enter a Project File Name with a maximum of 30 characters that is suitable for your project.
Project Database Directory

Specify a directory where the project file is located by entering a full path name or using "Browse..."
button.
Library Database File Name

Enter a Library File Name with a maximum of 30 characters that is suitable for your project. When
you enter the Project File Name, e-DPP automatically names "Lib"+<Project File Name> as a default
Library File Name. You can alter it if you want.
Library Database Directory

Specify a directory where the library file is located by entering a full path name or using "Browse..."
button. e-DPP automatically assigns the same directory as the Project File as a default. You can alter it
by specifying the existing library file if you want.
Personal Info
Engineer Name
Enter the name of Engineer with a maximum of 30 characters.
5-8
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
New Project
Password Required - Yes/No

If a password is required for the new Engineer Name, select "Yes", otherwise select "No".
Password
Enter the password for the new Engineer with a maximum of 20 characters (number and/or alphabets).
There is no lower limit in the length of password.
Confirmed Password
Enter the same password as the above for confirmation.
Standard
Overall
Select a standard applied to the entire project in e-DPP from IEC, ANSI and JIS. This choice is
reflected on the overall Standard in the menu Project Standard, the Value List, and Motor Default.
Motor
Select a standard applied to the project motors in e-DPP from IEC, ANSI and JIS. This setting will
influence the default selection in Motor library, Library Quick Pick, etc.
Cable
Select a standard applied to the project cables in e-DPP from IEC, ANSI and JIS. This setting will
influence the default selection in Cable library, Library Quick Pick, etc.
For more information on Project-Standard, see Chapter-8, Project Menu.
For more information on Value List and Motor Defaults, see Chapter-10, Defaults Menu.
Unit System
Overall
Select a Unit system applied to the entire project either "Metric" or "English". This choice is
reflected on the overall Units in the menu Project Standard.
Motor
Select a Unit system applied to motor output units, either "HP" or "kW". This is reflected on the Motor
Units in the menu Project - Standard and then the search key on the motor library.
Cable
Select a Unit system applied to cable properties, e.g. mm2 or AWG, meter or feet, mm or inch, etc
either "Metric" or "English". This choice is reflected on the overall Units in the menu Project
Standard and then the search key on the cable library.
Frequency
Power Frequency (Hz)
Select the frequency applied to the project from "50" and "60" in Hz.
5-9
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
Save Project As
5.5. Save Project As

This command makes a copy of the project file but does not open that copy. The copied file contains
the same passwords and user information as the original project file. You may copy a project file to a
new project file name or to a previously saved project file name. In order to copy the project file to a
new one, click on Save Project As from the File menu.
From this dialog box, select a directory for the new file name. Enter the new name, Example-1, (or a
previously saved project file name) for the new File Name, and click on Save. The new project file
name will be saved as Example-1.mdb.
5-10
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
Print
5.6. Print
When a cursor is moved on or the right-arrow is clicked, the right pane changes to Preview and print
the document as shown below:
Print
(Not available. For future.)
Print Setup
Open printer setup dialog.
Print Preview
Preview an editor spreadsheet (Enabled only when a template editor is open and active.)
5-11
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
Print
5-12
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
User Options
5.7. User Options

User Options command provides a dialog box to change the various settings for user preferences.
5.7.1 "General" tab
General Options
Auto Save
When this box is checked, e-DPP will save the changes made on MDI editor forms in every time
interval specified in "Every 'X' minutes" pull down list. (Note: X is the no. of minutes to execute auto
save). A "Popup Window" as mentioned on the next item will be shown every saving operation by auto
save.
Test Popup Window

When clicked, a sample dialog will be shown above the taskbar notification area indicating that
changes were saved on the project database.
5-13
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
User Options
Reload Last Project

When this box is checked, the project that was opened previously on e-DPP before exiting the program
will be loaded as displayed on the Log-in dialog
Backup Project & Library Files before Closing Project

When this box is checked, the latest project and library databases are copied to the sub-folder
"Backup" that is located under the project folder.
Display Project Editor at Login

When this box is checked, Project Editor window will be displayed upon user logs in the project.
Refresh Project Editor Automatically

When this box is checked, Project Editor is automatically refreshed when any item is moved to the
different node due to the change of its key property (for example, Equipment Type "IM" to "Static
Load").
Initial Sorting of Property List

Sorted Alphabetically
When this radio button is selected, main field
items on the property list will be displayed
alphabetically.
Grouped by Category
When this radio button is selected, main field
items on the property list will be displayed in
categories.
5-14
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
User Options
5.7.2 "Edit <General>" tab
Actions
Auto resize the column widths
When this box is checked, the column from a template containing a combo item will be automatically
resized upon selecting to show the full length of its contents. In this way, items can be selected easily.
Maximize editor screen at opening

When this box is checked, MDI editor forms are opened in the maximized window state.
Lock ID column (Always checked and disabled in the current version)

When this box is checked, all the fields related to "ID", i.e. "ID", "IDbody", "IDsuffix" and
"IDAllsufixes" are locked against user's modification. (Note: This checkbox will be enabled for user
editing in the future version.)
Lock cells inherited from parent table

When this box is checked, any inherited fields are locked against user's modification. For more details
on "Inherited" cells, please refer to the "project database " field "IsInherited".
Sort by clicking column header (Function to select an entire column is

disabled)
When this box is checked, user can instantaneously sort rows by the clicked column. Subsequent
clicks of the column header sorts the rows in descending or ascending order. Otherwise, unchecking
this option, "entire column selection" function will be enabled by clicking the column header.
5-15
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
User Options
Grid Colors
Odd Row Back
When this button is clicked, the dialog as below appears. Select the color to be applied to the
background of odd rows of MDI editor form.
Odd Row Fore

When this button is clicked, the dialog as shown above appears. Select the color to be applied to the
foreground of odd rows of MDI editor form.
Even Row Back

background of even rows of MDI editor form.
Even Row Fore

foreground of even rows of MDI editor form.
ID Col. Back
background of ID, ID related fields and inherited fields of MDI editor form.
Clear ID Col.
When this button is clicked, the background color of ID, ID related fields and inherited fields of MDI
editor form is cleared.
Display solid border lines in locked cells

When this box is checked, the cells of ID, ID related fields and inherited fields of MDI editor form are
surrounded by the solid lines when those fields are locked by the following options as described
above:
Lock ID column
Lock cells inherited from parent table
5-16
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
User Options
5.7.3 "Edit <Elec. Load> (1)" tab
Auto recalculation
For the formulas of auto recalculations, please refer to Chapter 7 "Edit Menu".
Action mode
Automatic (silent):
Recalculations are performed automatically with no indication to users
Warning message:
Warning message dialog appears before recalculations are performed
None (not recommended):
Recalculations are not performed at all.
When changed
kW
When this box is checked, auto recalculation will be executed on either "%Loading" or "BHP". Hence,
auto recalculation will be based on the selected radio button. Result will be incorporated on the
template with an indication (depending on the "Action mode" option selected) to the user.
%Loading
When this box is checked, auto recalculation will be executed based on the kW (fixed) to obtain the
calculated BHP. Hence, BHP result will be incorporated on the template with an indication (depending
on the "Action mode" option selected) to the user.
BHP
When this box is checked, auto recalculation will be executed based on the kW (fixed) to obtain the
calculated %Loading. Hence, %Loading result will be incorporated on the template with an indication
5-17
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
User Options
(depending on the "Action mode" option selected) to the user.

Note: The auto recalculations by changing kW, %Loading or BHP are not applied to a power
capacitor.
Unit, HP, kV, Efficiency, PF or Phase

When any of those field value changes, the recalculation of kW, inertia time constant and MVA will be
compulsory performed in order to maintain the fundamental electrical theories.
Poles
When Poles value changes, the recalculation of RPM (synchronous speed) and inertia time constant
will be compulsory performed in order to maintain the fundamental electrical theories.
GD2
When GD2 value changes, the recalculation of WR2 and inertia time constant will be compulsory
performed in order to maintain the fundamental electrical theories.
WR2
When WR2 value changes, the recalculation of GD2 and inertia time constant will be compulsory
performed in order to maintain the fundamental electrical theories.
The term "Machine" is defined as the summation of "Motor", "Coupler" and "Load" from the
mechanical viewpoint.
Therefore, GD2, WR2 or Inertia of "Machine" is the summation of GD2, WR2 or Inertia of "Motor",
"Coupler" and "Load".
5-18
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
User Options
5.7.4 "Edit <Elec. Load> (2)" tab
Synchronize cable length with power cable for:

When this box is checked, the length of cables for LCS, space heater and CCR are always the same as
that of power cable for the same electrical item. Individual boxes for the items to be synchronized with
the power cable must be checked to be included.
Note:
(1) Cable lengths of LCS, Space Heater and CCR are similarly synchronized with power cable when
"Data Filling Induction Motor" is performed.
(2) This option is also intended for MDI template editors. However, Data Import function is not
affected with this option.
(3) When a power cable length is modified, a message box will be displayed to confirm
synchronization.
Synchronize field values forcedly among identical items (Same IDbody)

When this box is checked, the specific fields will automatically have the same values among the items
which have the same "IDbody" value.
For example:
For items PM-1002A and PM-1002B, if this option is checked replacing %Load<1> to "80" on
PM-1002A, %Load<1> of PM-1002B will automatically be changed to "80".
5-19
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
User Options
Otherwise, if this option is unchecked, only individual item selected will only be modified (as shown
on the example screen capture below).
The fields that will be synchronized are defined in the tables "StruDPP" field "IsSychronized".
Note:
1. This synchronization feature is valid to MDI template editor only and invalid to Property List.
2. This option functions separately with the "Synchronize Now" command button. Modifying specific
fields having the same "IDbody"could be done on either of those items having suffixes which are
not the least (i.e. for PM-1002A, PM-1002B and PM-1002C, field values could be modified on
either of those three items.). Specific items modified on that item will be reflected on other items
having the same IDbody automatically.
"Synchronize Now" command button

When this button is clicked, the specific fields of Electrical Load Schedule table (DPPElecLoad) will
be updated to the same values as those of ID having the same IDbody based on the least ID suffix (i.e.
A for suffixes A, B, C).
For example, if there are PM-1002A, PM-1002B and PM-1002C, the field values of PM-1002B and
PM-1002C are synchronized with those of PM-1002A.
Note:
1. On items with the same IDbody but having "Item Nos." with suffixes other than the least, clicking
this command button will replace the modified fields by those fields on the "Item No." having the
least suffix.
2. This command button functions separately with "Synchronize field values forcedly among
identical items (Same IDbody)" option. Otherwise, Specific field
Caution:
Once this operation has been done, the database will be permanently updated and not be able to return
to the previous state.
5-20
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
User Options
5.7.5 "Cable Sizing" tab
Equipment Type
Include:
When any of these boxes is checked, the loads that belong to such equipment type will be included in
the cable sizing calculation.
Include as a static load (Equipment Type = 4):

the cable sizing calculation as if they behave as a static load.
5-21
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
User Options
5.7.6 "Load Summary (1)" tab
Equipment Type
Include:
the load summary calculation.
Include as a static load (Equipment Type = 4):

the load summary calculation as if they behave as a static load.
5-22
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
User Options
5.7.7 "Load Summary (2)" tab
Other Options
Scope of Total Load Calculation Method
As described in Chapter 12 (Method of Total Load Calculation), there are 3 different methods
available in Load Summary calculation:
1. [Total Load Demand] x [Coincidence Factor] (Method "1")
TotalKW =
(ContCF*TotalContKW+InterCF*TotalInterKW+SpareCF*TotalSpareKW)/100
2. Largest Individual Load (Method "2")
3. Larger one out of the above two (Method "3")
Calculating the Total Load involves the summation of the products of all loads (continuous,
intermittent and spare) and their corresponding coincidence factor as shown on the formula above for
the method "1". The same formula is also applied to the method "3" as an alternative.
However, with this option user may select "Load Operation Modes" (continuous, intermittent and
spare) to include in the calculation as desired. When a "Continuous" box is checked (same applies to
intermittent and spare) the method selected in the Load Summary menu will be applied. Conversely,
when the "Continuous" box is not checked (same applies with intermittent and spare), the method "1"
will be applied. (Note: these "Load Operation Mode" checkboxes functions separately with the
selected method from the Load Summary menu.)
5-23
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
User Options
Decimal Places Indicated in Result Grids

With the following pull down menus (as shown on image above) of this option, user can control the
display of decimal places on the Load Summary results grid.
Pull down menu "selection formats" as shown on image above are Microsoft-based formats. The
formats on the pull down selections include "#", "0", and ".". The following items will be described
accordingly.
"0" - Digit placeholder; prints a trailing or a leading zero in this position, if appropriate.
"#" - Digit placeholder; never prints trailing or leading zeros.
"." - Decimal placeholder.
Example:
For a number "8315.4", the following equivalent values for the combination of symbol formats above
is described below:
Format
00000.00
#####.##
Equivalent
08315.40
8315.4
5-24
e-DPP 4.0.2
File Menu
User Options
5.7.8 "Others" tab
Actions
Maximize grid dialog at opening
When this box is checked, the editor forms that can be maximized are opened in the maximized
window state. The following dialogs are influenced by this option:
Cable Sizing Result
Drum List
Drum Specification
Drum Schedule Move Cables
Lumped Motor Editor
Load Summary Grid (Bus, Switchboard & Lumped Load)
Load Summary Grid (Lumped Motor)
Theme & Skin Style (Disabled at current release)

Default Theme
Selected theme is applied after e-DPP is launched and until any project is logged in.
Once the project has been logged in, the theme defined by the project will govern.
Default Skin Style

Selected skin style is applied after e-DPP is launched and until any project is logged in.
Once the project has been logged in, the skin style defined by the project will govern.
<End of Chapter 5>
5-25
e-DPP 4.0.2
Chapter 6
Data Import
Data import functions are available in Start tab Import External Data group and enables users to
import an external user data in MS Access database or MS Excel worksheet format to e-DPP new or
existing project database.
Import MS Access
Import an external MS Access database (Note: Compatible

version of MS Access file is up to Office 2003 - .mdb
format)
Import MS Excel
Import an external MS Excel worksheet (Note: Compatible

version of MS Excel file is up to Office 2003 - .xls format)
6-1
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
Import MS Access
6.1 Import MS Access

You can import an external MS Access file (.mdb) that you or other engineers have already prepared
into the e-DPP project database.
To execute the Import of User MDB file, go to "Start tab Import External Data" group and
select "Import MS Access" command. Access File Import dialog box as shown below will be
opened:
The dialog has 2 tabs Settings and Mapping.
6.1.1 Settings tab

Mapping Selection
Mapping ID
Select one of the existing Mapping ID from the pull down list of which you want to retrieve a
particular pre-mapping setup. Once an ID is selected, all data stored in the database are populated
6-2
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
Import MS Access
in the dialog and the second tab Mapping is automatically selected. The dialog can be
maximized and resized.
Note:
The shipped Mapping ID Example (ACCESS) is always linked to the MS Access file
ExampleData.mdb that is placed in the subfolder Example under the e-DPP installed folder
(e.g. C:Program FileseDPPv400Example).
If user wants to customize this example Mapping ID, it is required to copy it to a new ID first and
then copy ExampleData.mdb file to any location.
Description
Enter a description for a particular Mapping ID up to 64 alphanumeric characters long.
Create...
Click the "Create" button to create a new Mapping ID. The Mapping ID can be up to 64
alphanumeric characters long. After creating the ID you can define the mapping structure and
save.
Copy...
Click the "Copy" button to copy an existing mapping.
any of the settings.
After copying you can modify and save
Delete...
Click the "Delete" button to delete permanently a currently selected Mapping ID.
When a record with the same ID exists

If your particular table has already data in it, you need to select one of the options from "Do not
overwrite", "Overwrite" or "Replace entire table".
Do not overwrite
When "Do not overwrite" option is selected, any field values for the same ID will not be
overwritten even though the field values in the existing DPP table are not blank or not zero.
Overwrite
When "Overwrite" option is selected, any field values for the same ID will be overwritten
regardless of the field values in DPP Electrical Load Schedule table.
In both options, new ID found in MS Access table is added to DPP table.
Replace entire table

When "Replace entire table" option is selected, the existing table (any DPP Table) will be
deleted before the data import action is taken place and an external MS Access database will be
newly imported as if there was no existing table. As the previous table (e.g. DPPElecLoad) is
automatically copied to another name of table (DPPElecLoad_Backup), you can restore the
previous data any time by copying or renaming it.
6-3
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
Import MS Access
When no record with the same ID exists

Once an external MS Access file has been imported, the destination table of e-DPP project database
should already have some records. When an external data are imported into the same table from the
second time, user is allowed to select one of the options as shown below:
Insert new records

If there are one or more records in the external file that do not exist in e-DPP target table, the new
records will be inserted to e-DPP table.
Note: This option must be selected at the first time of import.
Do not insert new records

When this option is selected, any new records in the external file will not be imported to e-DPP
table. Only the existing data in e-DPP table will be updated if the other option When a record
with the same ID exists Overwrite is selected.
Default Data
The field values Equipment Type (field name = EquipType) and Output Unit (field name =
HP_KW) are essential for e-DPP to properly perform the various operations and calculations.
e-DPP will not work as expected when Equipment Type and Output Unit fields are empty. In
that regard, option Default Data was added in order for users to populate data for the said fields
during the import process. Please be advised that a specific field (i.e. EquipType, HP_KW) must
be mapped from User Field (Source File) to e-DPP Field (Destination File) for these options to
work. Also, e-DPP will populate data (based from the selected Default Data options) during the
import process on a record with a blank/empty Equipment Type and Output Unit fields or replace
the contents (data which are not on the value list of said fields) with the appropriate data.
Equipment Type
Select Induction Motor or Static Load option.
Output Unit
Select HP, kW or kVA option.
Note: Even if the source datum is blank, the value 0 (zero) will not be substituted automatically
and should be explicitly selected.
Options for Electrical Load Table
6-4
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
Import MS Access
ID suffix
This option is available for the table DPPElecLoad only.
Extract ID suffix
If user wants to extract a suffix letter from equipment ID, check this checkbox.
e-DPP program automatically extracts suffixes according to the following selected criteria;
Only one(1) alphabet (e.g. PM-1200A, PM-1200B)

The last alphabetical character (letter) of series of IDs with only one trailing letter after a
numerical or non-alphabetical character is extracted as suffix of the said IDs. These IDs
then are grouped as one having identical properties. For example, the IDs "PM-1200A"
and "PM-1200B" are appearing to be in series and differentiated by the last letter. Since
the last letter is preceded by a numerical character "0", then this letter will be extracted i.e.
"A" and "B" from "PM-1200A" and "PM-1200B" respectively. In other words,
"PM-1200A" and "PM-1200B" will be grouped as "PM-1200" with suffixes "A" and "B".
Up to two(2) alphabets (e.g. P-1200-MA, P-1200-MB)

The last alphabetical character (letter) of series of IDs with up to two trailing letters after a
numerical or non-alphabetical character is extracted as suffix of the said IDs. These IDs
then are grouped as one having identical properties. For example, the IDs "PM-1200MA"
and "PM-1200MB" are appearing to be in series and differentiated by the last letter. Since
the last two letters is preceded by a numerical character "0", then the last letter will be
extracted i.e. "A" and "B" from "PM-1200MA" and "PM-1200MB" respectively. In other
words, "PM-1200MA" and "PM-1200MB" will be grouped as "PM-1200M" with suffixes
"A" and "B". In addition, the option "Only one(1) alphabet" explained above will also
qualify under this option.
Any number of alphabets (e.g. SS10-PANELA, SS10-PANELB)

The last alphabetical character (letter) of series of IDs with up to any number of trailing
letters after a numerical or non-alphabetical character is extracted as suffix of the said IDs.
These IDs then are grouped as one having identical properties. For example, the IDs
"PM-1200XGMA" and "PM-1200XGMB" seem to be in series and differentiated by the
last letter. Since the last four letters (or any number of letters in another case) is preceded
by numerical character "0", then the last letter will be extracted i.e. "A" and "B" from
"PM-1200XGMA" and "PM-1200XGMB" respectively.
In other words,
"PM-1200XGMA" and "PM-1200XGMB" will be grouped as "PM-1200XGM" with
suffixes "A" and "B". In addition, the option "Only one(1) alphabet" and "Up to two(2)
alphabets" explained above will also qualify under this option.
6-5
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
Import MS Access
Bus/Switchboard Tables
Create/Update bus and switchboard tables automatically

The data for buses and switchboards are used for the load summary calculation, creating a
datasheet, exporting to ETAP, etc. and stored in the tables DPPBus and DPPPanel respectively.
As a certain part of data is also included in DPPElecLoad, it is possible to create those tables
from DPPElecLoad automatically when the external data are imported to DPPElecLoad.
Insert new records

If there are one or more bus or switchboard ID (field names = Bus or Panel) in the
external file to be imported to DPPElecLoad that do not exist in DPPBus or DPPPanel table,
the new records will be inserted to DPPBus or DPPPanel.
The other relevant data will be also imported as well as the bus or switchboard ID as
indicated below:
Bus
Switchboard
DPPElecLoad Field
DPPBus Field
DPPElecLoad Field
DPPPanel Field
Bus
ID
Panel
ID
KV
BusKV (Note)
KV
PanelKV (Note)
Substation
Substation
Substation
Substation
Panel
Panel
Note: If System Nominal (kV) and Motor Rated (kV) have been already defined in
Project Electrical, System Nominal (kV) will be substituted instead of load KV in
DPPElecLoad.

When this option is selected, any new records will not be added to DPPBus or DPPPanel
table. Only the existing data in e-DPP table will be updated if target field is blank or zero.
6-6
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
Import MS Access
6.1.2 Mapping tab
e-DPP Field (Destination File)

File
The filename of the e-DPP project is displayed in this text box.
Table
Select one of the DPP tables from the pull down list into which you are importing external data.
Note:
All or part of data in DPPCable or DPPSwgrMcc is transferred from DPPElecLoad by e-DPP "Data
Filling" feature and data linkage information is maintained between 2 tables. (For example, Cable
ID "PM-1200A-P" in DPPCable links to motor ID "PM-1200A" in DPPElecLoad.)
If you want to maintain such a link with Data Import function when you import external data into
DPPCable or DPPSwgrMcc, it is required to map the particular Boolean field
FromDPPElecLoad.
6-7
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
Import MS Access
Chk
A check mark is automatically placed in the check box if a particular field name is mapped. The
user can manually check/uncheck these check boxes even not yet mapped for filtering purposes.
Except for field "ID" from any DPP tables, fields "ID", "ContQty", "InterQty" & "InterQty" from
DPPElecLoad and fields "ID", "PanelkV", & "PanelType" where user can not alter their status
(checked)
Field Name
The field names available for mapping from external file are displayed here which are filtered
according to the selected table in the Destination File (e-DPP Project Database).
The field "ID" is red-colored and always requires mapping from User Field (Source File) column on
any DPP table.
The yellow-colored rows are primary fields that will be an essential part of each DPP table.
The green-colored rows are other fields than "ID" or the primary ones.
Type
The type of the field is displayed here. In mapping, it is important that the type of the field of the
external MS Access file matches this one.
Len
The length property of the text type field is displayed here.
User Field
This column is where the fields of the MS Access file listed in User Field (Source File) are
dropped into and accommodated. In other words, the mapping structure from the external file is
established here.
Constant
When you like to fill out a certain DPP field with a constant value instead of the data from the
external MS Access file, enter a value in this column. DPP field will be filled out uniquely with it.
Date Type
If the data type is Date, double clicking the Constant cell changes the style of cell to Date and
shows spin button. When the cell is double clicked again, the popup calendar appears to ease data
input.
6-8
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
Import MS Access
Op
This is an arithmetic operator column. All the numeric type field name can be assign with one of
the arithmetic operators (+,-,x,/) and during the importing process e-DPP performs a mathematical
operation according to the selected operator (e.g. "+") with the external data as mapped from User
Field (Source File) by an object entered in the Operand column. For example, in field name "kV",
if an arithmetic operator is selected in the Op say "/" (division) and an object of "1000" is entered in
the Operand, e-DPP will divide the external data mapped on this field by 1000 during the importing
process.
Operand
This column works together with Op as mentioned above.
object of the mathematical operation.
A value entered in here will serve as the
Note: If you select "*" (multiplication) in the Op but don't enter any figure in the Operand, e-DPP
performs the multiplication by zero. On the other hand, if you select "/" (division) in the Op
but don't enter any figure in the Operand, e-DPP does not perform any arithmetic operation
to avoid an overflow.
Clear All (x)

Click "Clear All (x)" button to clear all existing mapping structure.
Show/Hide Field Description

Click "Show Field Description" button to see the description of the Field names.
Click "Hide Field Description" button to hide description of the same.
Conversely,
Show Checked Items Only/Show All Items (k)

Click "Show Checked Items" button to shortlist the Field names marked with check in Chk column.
Conversely, Click "Show All Items (k)" button to show all Field names.
User Field (Source File)

File
The associated external MS Access filename is displayed in this text box.
Find...
6-9
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
Import MS Access
Click the "Find..." button to associate the external MS Access file.
Table
Select the table of the external MS Access file from the pull-down list intended as the specific
source of data import.
The list of the fields available from the table of the MS Access source file are displayed here. Map
by drag and drop the fields of the external MS Access table to the corresponding fields in e-DPP
Field (Destination File).
Note: If you map a numeric type field of MS Access to a text type field of e-DPP Field, the numeric
values are converted to a text type during the importing process. However, if you map a text
field of the external MS Access to a numeric type field of e-DPP Field, the text data will be
lost.
6.1.3 Command buttons

Import
When the mapping structure and all criteria are setup, click on Import button to begin the import
action. You cannot specify the extent of import data in the external MS Access table. All the records
become the targets of import.
Note: When HP (Output) & BHP are imported and Unit=1 (kW), KW and Load factors
(PercentLoad0) in the electrical load schedule are automatically calculated and stored in the
database.
KW = HP
PercentLoad0 = 100 * BHP / KW (%)
PercentLoad1 = 100 * BHP1 / KW (%)
In an opposite way, when HP and Load factors are imported, BHP is automatically calculated.
KW = HP
BHP = PercentLoad0 * KW / 100 (kW)
BHP1 = PercentLoad1 * KW / 100 (kW)
Save
Click the "Save" button to save any changes made on the setting of a mapping.
Close
Click the "Close" button to close this dialog. If there are unsaved data, a prompt message will
appear.
Help
Click the "Help" button to launch the help topic for this dialog.
6-10
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
Import MS Excel
6.2 Import MS Excel

You can import an external MS Excel sheet (.xls) that you or other engineers have already prepared
into e-DPP project database.
6.2.1
Rules and Restriction
Here are some rules and restrictions in preparing the MS Excel sheet you are importing.
ID has to be included in MS Excel sheet.

One motor/load item has to be presented in a row of MS Excel sheet. For example, when you
intend to import two (2) motor loads PM-1200A/B, two rows for PM-1200A and PM-1200B have
to be included in MS Excel sheet.
If there are discrepancies in the technical data among the same motor/load items, e.g. between
PM-1200A and PM-1200B, a row (record) that is located physically at the top in MS Excel is
adopted in e-DPP database.
e-DPP treats load voltage in kilo-volts (not volt). Therefore, the numerical value being imported
to this field is interpreted in kilo-volts.
Expressions or Macro functions built in cells of MS Excel are ignored and treated as a blank cell.
When the source cell in MS Excel sheet is of Boolean type, TRUE is converted to 1, and
FALSE to 0 in e-DPP.
6.2.2
Importing MS Excel File
To execute the Import of User XLS file, go to "Start tab Import External Data" group and
select "Import MS Excel" command. Excel File Import dialog box as shown below will be opened:
6-11
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
Import MS Excel
The dialog has 2 tabs Settings and Mapping.
6.2.3
Settings tab
Mapping Selection
Mapping ID
Select one of the existing Mapping ID from the pull down list of which you want to retrieve a
particular pre-mapping setup. Once any ID is selected, all data stored in the database are populated
in the dialog and the second tab Mapping is automatically selected. The dialog can be maximized
and resized.
Note:
There are eleven (11) system-defined Mapping IDs which correspond to e-DPP standard templates
namely;
1) DPPCabSizingData (E-Standard)
2) DPPElecCable1 (E-Standard)
3) DPPElecCable2 (E-Standard)
4) DPPElecLoad1 (E-Standard)
5) DPPElecLoad2 (E-Standard)
6) DPPElecOthers1 (E-Standard)
7) DPPElecOthers2 (E-Standard)
8) DPPLoadSumData (E-Standard)
9) DPPMotorChar (E-Standard)
10) DPPMotorSch1 (E-Standard)
11) DPPMotorSch2 (E-Standard)
These system-defined Mapping IDs cannot be altered nor deleted. They can only be copied.
The shipped Mapping ID Example (EXCEL) is always linked to the MS Excel file Example.xls
that is placed in the subfolder Example under the e-DPP installed folder (e.g. C:Program
FileseDPPv400Example).
If user wants to customize this example Mapping ID, it is required to copy it to a new ID first and
then copy Example.xls file to any location.
Description
Enter a description for a particular Mapping ID up to 64 alphanumeric characters long.
Create...
Click the "Create" button to create a new Mapping ID. The Mapping ID can be up to 64
alphanumeric characters long. After creating the ID you can define the mapping structure and save.
6-12
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
Import MS Excel
Copy...
Click the "Copy" button to copy an existing mapping. After copying you can modify any settings
and save the changes.
Delete...
Click the "Delete" button to delete permanently a currently selected Mapping ID.
When a record with the same ID exists

If your particular table has already data in it, you need to select one of the options from "Do not
overwrite", "Overwrite" or "Replace entire table".
Do not overwrite
When "Do not overwrite" option is selected, any field values for the same ID will not be
overwritten even though the field values in the existing DPP table are not blank or not zero.
Overwrite
When "Overwrite" option is selected, any field values for the same ID will be overwritten
regardless of the field values in DPP table.
In both options, new ID found in MS Excel sheet is added to DPP table.
Replace entire table

When "Replace entire table" option is selected, the existing table (any DPP Table) will be deleted
before the data import action is taken place and an external MS Excel data will be newly imported
as if there was no existing table. As the previous table (e.g. DPPElecLoad) is automatically copied
to another name of table (DPPElecLoad_Backup), you can restore the previous data any time by
copying or renaming it.
When no record with the same ID exists

Once an external MS Excel file has been imported, the destination table of e-DPP project database
should already have some records. When an external data are imported into the same table from the
second time, user is allowed to select one of the options as shown below:
Insert new records

If there are one or more records in the external file that do not exist in e-DPP target table, the new
records will be inserted to e-DPP table.
Note: This option must be selected at the first time of import.

When this option is selected, any new records in the external file will not be imported to e-DPP
table. Only the existing data in e-DPP table will be updated if the other option When a record
with the same ID exists Overwrite is selected.
6-13
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
Import MS Excel
Default Data
The field values Equipment Type (field name = EquipType) and Output Unit (field name =
HP_KW) are essential for e-DPP to properly perform the various operations and calculations. e-DPP
will not work as expected when Equipment Type and Output Unit fields are empty. In that
regard, option Default Data was added in order for users to populate data for the said fields during
the import process. Please be advised that a specific field (i.e. EquipType, HP_KW) must be
mapped from User Field (Source File) to e-DPP Field (Destination File) for these options to work.
Also, e-DPP will populate data (based from the selected Default Data options) during the import
process on a record with a blank/empty Equipment Type and Output Unit fields or replace the
contents (data which are not on the value list of said fields) with the appropriate data.
Equipment Type
Select Induction Motor or Static Load option.
Output Unit
Select HP, kW or kVA option.
Note: Even if the source datum is blank, the value 0 (zero) will not be substituted automatically
and should be explicitly selected.
Options for Electrical Load Table
ID suffix
Extract ID suffix
If user wants to extract a suffix letter from equipment ID, check this checkbox.
e-DPP program automatically extracts suffixes according to the following selected criteria;
Only one(1) alphabet (e.g. PM-1200A, PM-1200B)

The last alphabetical character (letter) of series of IDs with only one trailing letter after a
numerical or non-alphabetical character is extracted as suffix of the said IDs. These IDs then
6-14
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
Import MS Excel
are grouped as one having identical properties. For example, the IDs "PM-1200A" and
"PM-1200B" are appearing to be in series and differentiated by the last letter. Since the last
letter is preceded by a numerical character "0", then this letter will be extracted i.e. "A" and
"B" from "PM-1200A" and "PM-1200B" respectively. In other words, "PM-1200A" and
"PM-1200B" will be grouped as "PM-1200" with suffixes "A" and "B".
Up to two (2) alphabets (e.g. P-1200-MA, P-1200-MB)

The last alphabetical character (letter) of series of IDs with up to two trailing letters after a
numerical or non-alphabetical character is extracted as suffix of the said IDs. These IDs then
are grouped as one having identical properties. For example, the IDs "PM-1200MA" and
"PM-1200MB" are appearing to be in series and differentiated by the last letter. Since the
last two letters is preceded by a numerical character "0", then the last letter will be extracted
i.e. "A" and "B" from "PM-1200MA" and "PM-1200MB" respectively. In other words,
"PM-1200MA" and "PM-1200MB" will be grouped as "PM-1200M" with suffixes "A" and
"B". In addition, the option "Only one(1) alphabet" explained above will also qualify under
this option.
Any number of alphabets (e.g. SS10-PANELA, SS10-PANELB)

The last alphabetical character (letter) of series of IDs with up to any number of trailing letters
after a numerical or non-alphabetical character is extracted as suffix of the said IDs. These
IDs then are grouped as one having identical properties.
For example, the IDs
"PM-1200XGMA" and "PM-1200XGMB" are appearing to be in series and differentiated by
the last letter. Since the last four letters (or any number of letters in another case) is preceded
by numerical character "0", then the last letter will be extracted i.e. "A" and "B" from
"PM-1200XGMA" and "PM-1200XGMB" respectively. In other words, "PM-1200XGMA"
and "PM-1200XGMB" will be grouped as "PM-1200XGM" with suffixes "A" and "B". In
addition, the option "Only one(1) alphabet" and "Up to two(2) alphabets" explained above
will also qualify under this option.
Bus/Switchboard Tables
Create/Update bus and switchboard tables automatically

The data for buses and switchboards are used for the load summary calculation, creating a
datasheet, exporting to ETAP, etc. and stored in the tables DPPBus and DPPPanel respectively.
As a certain part of data is also included in DPPElecLoad, it is possible to create those tables
from DPPElecLoad automatically when the external data are imported to DPPElecLoad.
Insert new records

If there are one or more bus or switchboard ID (field names = Bus or Panel) in the
external file to be imported to DPPElecLoad that do not exist in DPPBus or DPPPanel table,
the new records will be inserted to DPPBus or DPPPanel.
The other relevant data will be also imported as well as the bus or switchboard ID as
indicated below:
Bus
DPPElecLoad Field
DPPBus Field
Bus
ID
Switchboard
DPPElecLoad Field
DPPPanel Field
Panel
ID
6-15
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
Import MS Excel
Bus
Switchboard
DPPElecLoad Field
DPPBus Field
DPPElecLoad Field
DPPPanel Field
KV
BusKV (Note)
KV
PanelKV (Note)
Substation
Substation
Substation
Substation
Panel
Panel
Note: If System Nominal (kV) and Motor Rated (kV) have been already defined in
Project Electrical, System Nominal (kV) will be substituted instead of load KV in
DPPElecLoad.

When this option is selected, any new records will not be added to DPPBus or DPPPanel
table. Only the existing data in e-DPP table will be updated if target field is blank or zero.
MS-Excel Options
This option is available for MS Excel import only
Terminal Cell
Terminate by blank cell
Check this option to terminate the importation of records from MS Excel by virtue of a blank
cell or consecutive blank cells.
Number of consecutive blank cells (Max. 99)

Enter the number of consecutive blank cells as criteria of Terminate by blank cell option.
Terminate by specific string

Check this option to terminate the importation of records from MS Excel by virtue of specific
string.
Specific String (Max. 32 Chr)

Enter the specific string as criteria of Terminate by specific string option.
Note: When both "Terminate by blank cell" and "Terminate by specific string" are not checked,
data import process will terminate automatically after detecting 100 consecutive blank
cells.
Boolean Type Source Data

While both MS Excel and MS Access have the particular data type Boolean that takes TRUE or
FALSE value only, it is common practice for MS Excel users to use various symbols or strings to
represent Boolean data.
To provide users with flexibility, user is allowed to specify any symbols or strings for that
purpose before the import action takes place.
Note: For MS Excel import, user must consider the best selection for options/combinations (i.e.
checking both "YES" | "Yes" | "yes" and "NO" | "No" | "no" options when importing with a
Yes or No source data) to have a good results.
6-16
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
Import MS Excel
Yes / True
The symbols or strings which are used in MS Excel sheet and selected in this section are
converted to TRUE in e-DPP MS Access database.
Any Character(s)
When this box is checked, any MS Excel cells with any non-blank symbol or any non-blank
string are converted to TRUE.
When this box is checked, all the other checkboxes in both Yes / True and No / False
sections will be cleared and disabled. Only blank cells in MS Excel sheet are converted to
FALSE in e-DPP database. Blank Cell checkbox in No / False section will be checked.
"YES" | "Yes" | "yes"

When this box is checked, MS Excel cell with the string YES, Yes or yes is converted to
TRUE.
"Y" | "y"
When this box is checked, MS Excel cell with the string Y or y is converted to TRUE.
"X" | "x"
When this box is checked, MS Excel cell with the string X or x is converted to TRUE.
As X or x may be used for FALSE as well, if this box was checked the same checkbox in
No / False section will be disabled to avoid conflict.
"TRUE" | "True" | "true" | "1"

When this box is checked, MS Excel cell with the string TRUE, True, true or 1 is
converted to TRUE.
If MS Excel cell is Boolean type and its value is TRUE, the actual value in MS Excel is 1
(one) and will be converted to TRUE in e-DPP database.
If MS Excel cell is Text type and its value is TRUE in text format, the value is converted
to TRUE in Boolean format in e-DPP database as well.
"REQUIRED" | "REQ" | "REQ'D" | "Required" | "Req" | "Req'd" | "R" | "r"

When this box is checked, MS Excel cell with any of above enumerated strings or letters is
converted to TRUE.
"O" | "o" | "" | ""

When this box is checked, MS Excel cell with any of above enumerated symbols is
converted to TRUE.
As "O", "o" or "" may be used for FALSE as well, if this box was checked the same
checkbox without "" in No / False section will be disabled to avoid conflict.
Note: The double-byte characters such as and may not be recognized by English
Operating System and will be imported as No/False value even though those characters
are assigned to Yes/True. In addition, these characters will not be indicated correctly in
the User Field (Source File) pane when using an English OS.
""
When this box is checked, MS Excel cell with "" symbol is converted to TRUE.
As "" may be used for FALSE as well, if this box was checked the same checkbox in No
6-17
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
Import MS Excel
/ False section will be disabled to avoid conflict.

Note: The double-byte character such as may not be recognized by English Operating
System and will be imported as No/False value even though the character is assigned to
Yes/True. In addition, this character will not be indicated correctly in the User Field
(Source File) pane when using an English OS.
User Defined
When this box is checked, user is allowed to specify any string to be converted to TRUE in
addition to the above options.
Case Sensitive
When this box is checked, the user entered string is treated as case sensitive. For example,
ABC is not considered equal to abc.
Check for duplication with the same text box in No / False section will be performed
when Import or Save button is clicked.
No / False
The symbols or strings which are used in MS Excel sheet and selected in this section are
converted to FALSE in e-DPP MS Access database.
Blank Cell
When this box is checked, all blank cells in MS Excel are converted to FALSE.
"NO" | "No" | "no"

When this box is checked, MS Excel cell with the string NO, No or no is converted to
FALSE.
"N" | "n"
When this box is checked, MS Excel cell with the string N or n is converted to FALSE.
"X" | "x"
When this box is checked, MS Excel cell with the string X or x is converted to FALSE.
As X or x may be used for TRUE as well, if this box was checked the same checkbox in
Yes / True section will be disabled to avoid conflict.
"FALSE" | "False" | "false" | "0"

When this box is checked, MS Excel cell with the string FALSE, False, false or 0 is
converted to FALSE.
If MS Excel cell is Boolean type and its value is FALSE, the actual value in MS Excel is 0
(zero) and will be converted to FALSE in e-DPP database.
If MS Excel cell is Text type and its value is FALSE in text format, the value is converted
to FALSE in Boolean format in e-DPP database as well.
"NOT REQUIRED" | "NOT REQ" | "NOT REQ'D" | "Not Required" | "Not Req"
| "Not Req'd" | "NR" | "N/R" | "N.R." | "nr" | "n/r" | "n.r." | "NA" | "N/A" |
"N.A." | "na" | "n/a" | "n.a."
6-18
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
Import MS Excel
When this box is checked, MS Excel cell with any of above enumerated strings or letters is
converted to FALSE.
"O" | "o" | ""

When this box is checked, MS Excel cell with any of above enumerated symbols is
converted to FALSE.
As "O", "o" or "" may be used for TRUE as well, if this box was checked the same
checkbox with "" in Yes / True section will be disabled to avoid conflict.
""
When this box is checked, MS Excel cell with "" symbol is converted to FALSE.
As "" may be used for TRUE as well, if this box was checked the same checkbox in Yes /
True section will be disabled to avoid conflict.
User Defined
When this box is checked, user is allowed to specify any string to be converted to FALSE in
addition to the above options.
Case Sensitive
When this box is checked, the user entered string is treated as case sensitive. For example,
ABC is not considered equal to abc.
Check for duplication with the same text box in Yes / True section will be performed
when Import or Save button is clicked.
6-19
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
6.2.4
Import MS Excel
Mapping tab
e-DPP Field (Destination File)

File
The filename of the e-DPP project is displayed in this text box.
Table
Select one of the DPP tables from the pull down list into which external data will be imported.
Note:
All or part of data in DPPCable or DPPSwgrMcc is transferred from DPPElecLoad by e-DPP "Data
Filling" feature and data association is maintained between the 2 tables. (For example, Cable ID
"PM-1200A-P" in DPPCable is associated to motor ID "PM-1200A" in DPPElecLoad.)
If you want to maintain such a link with Data Import function when you import external data into
DPPCable or DPPSwgrMcc, it is required to map the particular Boolean field FromDPPElecLoad.
6-20
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
Import MS Excel
Chk
A check mark is automatically placed in the check box if a particular field name is mapped. The
user can manually check/uncheck these check boxes even not yet mapped for filtering purposes.
Except for field "ID" from any DPP tables, fields "ID", "ContQty", "InterQty" & "InterQty" from
DPPElecLoad and fields "ID", "PanelkV", & "PanelType" where user can not alter their status
(checked)
Field Name
The field names available for mapping from external file are displayed here which are filtered
according to the selected table in the Destination File (e-DPP Project Database).
The field "ID" is red-colored and always requires mapping from User Field (Source File) column on
any DPP table.
The yellow-colored rows are primary fields that will be an essential part of each DPP table.
The green-colored rows are other fields than "ID" or the primary ones.
Type
The type of the field is displayed here. In mapping, it is important that the type of the field (column)
of the external MS Excel file matches this one.
Len
The length property of the text type field is displayed here.
User Field
This column is where the columns of the spread view (corresponding to MS Excel file) in User
Field (Source File) are dropped into and accommodated. In other words, the mapping structure
from the external file is established here.
Constant
When you like to fill out a certain DPP field with a constant value instead of the data from MS
Excel, enter a value in this column. DPP field will be filled out uniquely with it.
Date Type
If the data type is Date, double clicking the Constant cell changes the style of cell to Date and
shows spin button. When the cell is double clicked again, the popup calendar appears to ease data
input.
6-21
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
Import MS Excel
Op
To all mapped numeric type fields, you can select arithmetic operators (+,-,x,/) or a LUT (Look-up
Table) in the pull down list available in this column for each field. Generally, there are two
categories involved as follows:
Arithmetic Operators
The arithmetic operators (+,-,x,/) are utilized to vary the magnitude of the raw data (data to be
imported) to another value. During the import process e-DPP performs a mathematical
operation according to the selected operator (e.g. "+") with the raw data as mapped from Field
(Source File) by an object entered in the Operand column.
To illustrate one of the practical uses of this procedure, let say that voltages to be imported are
expressed in unit of volt but since e-DPP uses unit of voltage in "kV" it is necessary to perform
conversion. You can do the conversion outside of e-DPP (edit directly the source file) before the
import process or do such during the import process. To do such during import process, in field
name "kV" in e-DPP Field (Destination File), select an arithmetic operator in Op column "/"
(division) and enter a value of "1000" in the Operand column, e-DPP will divide the raw data
by 1000 during the import process and will result to "kV".
LUT
"LUT" short for "Look-up Table" is a way of converting the raw data (data to be imported) into
data understandable to e-DPP. This procedure is useful when the raw data is presented in
another format that e-DPP cannot directly recognize. For example, in usual schedule
(document) the power rating of certain equipment is literally written in "kW". Human being can
understand this symbol but e-DPP cannot because it was not structured to directly understand
such (due to data handling in the database). Instead, e-DPP understood "1" for such symbol
(kW). To resolve this issue, the LUT system is implemented.
As the word "Look-up Table" implies, a table is utilized to compare the raw data and if matches
are found, the data corresponding to the raw data will be the ones which will be imported to
e-DPP database. When "LUT" is selected, a button "Show.." will surface in the "Operand"
column. Clicking this button will show a table which will be the one to be utilized as the
look-up table for the particular field.
Below is a sample of a Look-up Table for field "HP_KW".
6-22
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
Import MS Excel
In the above table, there are two columns, "User Data" and "e-DPP Data". The data under "User
Data" are the representation of the raw data. An equivalent data (recognized by e-DPP) for each
"User Data" is assigned in the "e-DPP Data" column. During the import process, if the raw data
matches one of the data in the "User Data" column, the equivalent data in "e-DPP Data" column
will be ones which will be imported to e-DPP database.
Note: a) The raw data should match the ones indicated in the "User Data" column of a relevant
Look-up Table. If match is not found for a particular field of particular record
(equipment), no data (blank) will be imported.
b) The structure (i.e. the contents) of the LUT(s) can be edited in menu Default
Value List
Operand
This column works together with Op as mentioned above. When arithmetic operator is selected in
the OP column, a value entered in here (Operand) will serve as the object of the mathematical
operation. While when LUT is selected in OP column, a "Show..." button will surface here to
view the applicable Look-up Table being utilized to the particular field.
Note: If you select "*" (multiplication) in the Op but didn't enter any figure in the Operand, e-DPP
performs the multiplication by zero. On the other hand, if you select "/" (division) in the Op
but didn't enter any figure in the Operand, e-DPP skips the arithmetic operation to avoid an
overflow.
Clear All (x)

Click "Clear All (x)" button to clear all existing mapping structure.
Show/Hide Field Description

Click "Show Field Description" button to see the description of the Field names.
6-23
Conversely, click
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
Import MS Excel
"Hide Field Description" button to hide description of the same.
Show Checked Items Only/Show All Items (k)

Click "Show Checked Items" button to shortlist the Field names marked with check in "Chk"
column. Conversely, click "Show All Items (k)" button to show all Field names.
User Field (Source File)

File
The filename of the source MS Excel file is displayed in this text box.
Find...
Click the "Find..." button to locate the source MS Excel file.
Sheet
Select the sheet name associated with the source MS Excel file from the pull-down list intended as
the specific source of data import.
The spread sheet view of the MS Excel source file is displayed here. Map the columns of in this
spread sheet view by drag and drop to the corresponding fields in e-DPP Field (Destination File).
You can drag at any point in the columns and drop to the User Field column of the corresponding
Field Name in e-DPP Field (Destination File).
Note: If you map a numeric type column of the MS Excel to a text type field of e-DPP Field, the
numeric values are converted to a text type during the import process. However, if you map a
text type column of MS Excel to a numeric type field of e-DPP Field, the text data will be
lost.
6-24
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Import
6.2.5
Import MS Excel
Command buttons
Starting Row #
Enter an integer number of the row where the actual load data start in User Field (Source File). This
option is available for MS Excel import only
Import
When the mapping structure and all criteria are set up, click on Import button to begin the import
action.
Note: When HP (Output) & BHP are imported and Unit=1 (kW), KW and Load factors
(PercentLoad0) in the electrical load schedule are automatically calculated and stored in the
database.
KW = HP
PercentLoad0 = 100 * BHP / KW (%)
In an opposite way, when HP and Load factors are imported, BHP is automatically calculated.
KW = HP
BHP = PercentLoad0 * KW / 100 (kW)
Save
Click the "Save" button to save any changes made on the setting of a mapping.
Close
Click the "Close" button to close this dialog. If there are unsaved data, a prompt message will
appear.
Help
Click the "Help" button to launch the help topic for this dialog.
<End of Chapter 6>
6-25
e-DPP 4.0.2
Chapter 7
Editor
e-DPP uses a spread type of edit form to facilitate updating, addition or deletion of a huge amount of
records stored in the database table. A number of edit forms for different electrical equipment are
available and have a similar look and almost the same functions. However, there are particular
functions on the individual forms that can enable you to perform practical electrical engineering.
Eight (8) different edit forms can be opened simultaneously as a maximum.
7-1
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Editor Functions
7.1 Editor Functions

The e-DPP Editors are intended to edit the data in the form of the individual Templates (document
forms). Each Template corresponds to each document in the styles of schedule sheet, data sheet or
vertical schedule sheet for electrical equipment and materials.
Schedule Sheet
The schedule sheets present more than one items of electrical equipment or materials in ONE sheet. In
the e-DPP standard templates, 25 items are presented in a landscape (horizontal) sheet and 40 items in
a portrait (vertical) sheet.
Landscape Schedule Sheet
Portrait Schedule Sheet
Data Sheet
The data sheets present just one item of electrical equipment or materials in ONE sheet.
Data Sheet
7-2
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Editor Functions
Vertical Schedule Sheet

The vertical schedule sheets are the special forms implemented in e-DPP and present three (3) items of
electrical equipment or materials in ONE sheet. However, the difference from the conventional
schedule sheets shown above is that the fields for one equipment item are expressed in the vertical
direction on the sheets.
Vertical Schedule Sheet
7.1.1 Opening Template Edit Form

When you like to edit the data for a certain document (Template), select a category or template of that
document from the Editor Selection tab.
This tab contains the commands to select and open an editor template in a spreadsheet
format. The maximum number of editors that can be opened simultaneously is 8.
Each group contains a split type command buttons.
When a cursor is moved on the command button, a split line is shown between the icon and
caption.
Clicking the icon will open the default editor template that was most recently opened one. If it
is the first time to open a template after a new project was created, the top one in the pull
down list is opened and checked as a default. The default template is checked in the list as
shown below.
Clicking the caption will show the drop down list containing the titles of all available editor
templates.
7-3
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Editor Functions
For more information on the relations between the categories and templates, see Chapter 3.4,
Templates and Documents.
Table
Category
Category
Category
Category
Template
Template
Template
Template
Note:
1. To view property list in an active template, right-click on the desired item select
[Properties]. Property List of the selected item will be displayed. This function is available on
all templates.
2. Clicking the "Column header" in an active template sorts all the rows in the template by the
selected column. Subsequent clicks toggle the ascending or descending order. This function can
be enabled/disabled with User Options Edit (General).
7-4
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Editor Functions
7.1.2 Editing on Edit Forms

When you open a certain Edit Form for the selected template, the spread type of Editor appears and
the below Edit Tools tab is selected:
Some of the commands on this tab are also available in the popup menu that can be brought up by
right clicking on the editor grid.
Clipboard group
Paste
Pastes selected part or group of parts from Clipboard
Cut
Deletes selected part or group of parts and attaches to Clipboard
Copy
Copies selected part or group of parts and attaches to Clipboard
Find group
7-5
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Editor Functions
Find
Searching for an item on MDI grid (active template) is available using this function. Clicking this
icon displays the dialog as shown below.
Target Column
Select a column for the target field from the pull down menu. Items will be searched from this
column.
Selected column may be a Boolean, Integer, Integer Combo, Double, Double Combo, Text, Text
Combo or Date Field Types.
Search Data
Specify an item to be searched from this area. Items to be specified may differ depending on the
selected Target Column, it could be a "Text box" or a "Combo box".
"Find Next" button
Click this button to start searching for the specified Search Data on the Target Column. Search
results will be shown one at a time. Subsequent click may be done to locate all the search results.
"Cancel" button
Click this button to cancel search operation or close search dialog when search operation is
finished.
"Exactly matches the case of whole text specified" checkbox option
Check this option when searching an item that is identical to what has been specified on the
"Search Data" area. This option will only be enabled when a selected "Target Column" is a "Text"
field.
"Matches or partially matches the specified text" checkbox option
When this option is checked, item that matches or partially matches the specified items will be
shown. This option will only be enabled when a selected "Target Column" is a "Text" field.
7-6
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Editor Functions
Replace
Searching and replacing item(s) on MDI grid (active template) is available using this function.
Clicking this icon displays the dialog as shown below.
Target Column
Select a column for the target field from the pull down menu. Items will be searched from this
column.
Selected column may be a Boolean, Integer, Integer Combo, Double, Double Combo, Text, Text
Combo or Date Field Types.
Search Data
Specify an item to be searched from this area. Items to be specified may differ depending on the
selected Target Column, it could be a "Text box" or a "Combo box". Search Data may be "All" or
"blank" for other fields.
Note:
1. Blank means 'All' for "Replace All" button only.
2. "Search Data = blank" will not be applicable for replacing an item with "Replace" button in a
category such as integer, double, etc.
3. Find Function for "Date" category will be enhanced on the next version.
Replace Data
Specify an item to replace a selected cell(s) when "Replace" button is clicked. Items to be
specified may differ depending on the selected Target Column, it could be a "Text box" or a
"Combo box".
Note:
1. Discrimination between "blank" and "zero" for some fields will be improved in the next
version.
2. Replace function for "Date" category will be enhanced on the next version.
"Find Next" button
Click this button to start searching for the specified Search Data on the Target Column. Search
results will be shown one at a time. Subsequent click may be done to show all the search results.
"Replace" button
Click this button to replace active cells on the MDI grid (active template) by the item specified on
"Replace Data".
7-7
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Editor Functions
"Replace All" button

Click this button to replace all the selected cells or all cells that match the search data on the MDI
grid (active template) by the item specified on "Replace Data".
Note:
If Target Column is one of the below properties and more than one items that have the same
IDbody (i.e. ID without suffix), MDI grid needs to be sorted by Item No. (ID) before clicking
this button:
kW, %Loading, BHP, Output Unit, HP, kV, Efficiency, PF and No. of Phase
"Cancel" button
Click this button to cancel search or replace operation or close this dialog when search or replace
operation is finished.
"Exactly matches the case of whole text specified" checkbox option
Check this option when searching an item that is identical to what has been specified on the
"Search Data" area. This option will only be enabled when a selected "Target Column" is a "Text"
field.
"Matches or partially matches the specified text" checkbox option
When this option is checked, item that matches or partially matches the specified items will be
shown. This option will only be enabled when a selected "Target Column" is a "Text" field.
"Blank or zero target data only" checkbox option
When this option is selected, only "blank" cells or cells containing "0" will be searched or
replaced on the specified target column.
Select All
Click this icon to select all the records in an active MDI grid (active template).
Edit group
Add ID
Add a new item ID to the template. When you click on this button, a new dialog box will appear.
7-8
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Editor Functions
The Add dialog box consists of five (5) tabs and only one tab from them becomes valid depending
on the template from where you call this dialog.
The procedure how this Add dialog is prepared is that any item ID is strictly controlled by e-DPP
since duplication of IDs could collapse most of transactions or processes of e-DPP.
For more details, see Section 7.2.
Copy ID
Copy the existing item ID to a new one. When you click on this button, a new dialog box will
appear.
The Copy dialog box consists of three (3) tabs and only one tab becomes valid depending on the
template from where you call this dialog. The name of "Other" tab varies depending upon the
selected template.
7-9
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Editor Functions
The procedure how this Copy dialog is prepared is the same as Add button.
For more details, see chapter-7.3.
Delete ID
Click this icon to delete one or more item(s) from the template. By selecting multiple adjacent rows
and clicking this icon, multiple items are deleted. (Note: Discrete multiple selection of rows will be
enhanced on the next version.)
Filter
You can filter the currently indicated template data with the following dialog:
Set
You can activate five (5) filtering conditions as a maximum. When you click on Set button, the
Expression list boxes become available for you to set the filtering condition. In the operand list
box, you will find the term "IN" and "NOT IN". Those are in accordance with the grammar of
MS-Access interface and "IN" means that when any of the candidates matches the data in the
7-10
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Editor Functions
template, a result becomes true.

"(" & ")"
You can control the priorities of estimating the filter expressions by enabling or disabling these
buttons.
Initial Filter
Some of the templates have their own filter condition that becomes effective when the template is
"initially" opened. You can remove this filtering by clicking on the Set button of the Initial Filter
and then clicking on OK button.
Since a table of e-DPP, e.g. DPPElecLoad, is generally assigned to more than one template, e.g.
Electrical Load Schedule and Induction Motor Data Sheet, the initial filtering is required to
extract the data belonging to the selected template only. (For example, a heater load may be
included in the Electrical Load Schedule, but that will never be presented in the Induction Motor
Data Sheet. This is why the initial filter is necessary for the individual templates.)
SQL WHERE clause
If you are familiar with SQL statements and the field configurations of e-DPP database, you may
directly enter SQL "Where" clause as a part of SQL "Select" statement. However, grammar errors
are not checked on this dialog.
Field Description / Field Name
You can switch the presentations of the fields either field name or field description by clicking on
this button.
Clear
You can clear all filter settings except for the initial filter.
Sort
You can sort the currently indicated template data with the dialog below.
7-11
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Editor Functions
Ascending / Descending
You can switch the sort order either alphabetically/numerically ascending or descending.
Field Description / Field Name
You can switch the presentations of the fields either field name or field description by clicking on
this button.
Compress
This button is applicable to the table DPPElecLoad only. For details, see Section-7.2.1.
(Note: Filter or Sort in a compressed MDI Editor is only temporary and will not be saved.)
Library Quick Pick

You can retrieve the complete data from the e-DPP equipment libraries. When you click on this
button, the dialog below appears:
The number and kinds of tabs (equipment) appeared here vary on the source template from where
you call the Library Quick Pick.
The data will be filled out into the records which are currently selected on the template. All field
values in the current template are replaced with the corresponding fields of the libraries.
"None" button is available on the Library Quick Pick dialog to clear the same fields as above.
The Library Quick Pick is prepared for the following libraries:
Motor
Cable
Conduit
Cable gland
Motor Sequence
Note:
7-12
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
1.
2.
Editor Functions
By selecting multiple adjacent rows, you can modify (replace) those selected rows with a new
values using Library Quick Pick. Discrete multiple selection of rows will be enhanced on the
next version.
icon and replace items using Library Quick
All rows can be modified by selecting
Pick.
Equipment Quick Pick

The function similar to Library Quick Pick is available with this command button. The difference
between them is that while the Library Quick Pick fetches the data from the libraries, the Equipment
Quick Pick fetches the data stored in DPP equipment tables, such as Switchboard List and LCS Data
Sheet.
The Equipment Quick Pick is prepared for the following equipment:

Switchboard
LCS
Note:
1. By selecting multiple adjacent rows, you can modify (replace) those selected rows with a new
values using Equipment Quick Pick with both the "Switchboard" and "LCS". Discrete multiple
selection of rows will be enhanced on the next version.
2. All rows can be modified by selecting
icon and replace items using Equipment Quick
Pick for both "Switchboard" and "LCS".
7-13
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Editor Functions
Freeze Panes group
Freeze Panes
Freeze the columns left to and the rows above the selected cell
Freeze Columns
Freeze the columns left to the selected cell
Freeze Rows
Freeze the rows above the selected cell
Unfreeze Pane
Unfreeze the columns left to and/or the rows above the selected cell where applicable
Calculations group
One Cable Sizing

Opens the below dialog to size power cables for single load.
For more information, refer to Chapter 13, Cable Management.
7-14
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Editor Functions
View group
Property List
Shows a Property List for the selected item
Refresh
Updates the spreadsheet screen to the latest data
Preview
Opens a Preview screen of the active Template Editor
File group
Save Active Editor

Click this icon to save all modified items on the active MDI grid (active template).
Export to Excel
Export the data in the current template to MS Excel sheet. When you click on this button, the dialog
below appears.
When you use the e-DPP standard template along with the same name of MS Excel file, no change
7-15
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Editor Functions
in the settings of this dialog is required. Select a field for the Page Feed if you need.
Boolean Type Data
You can specify any symbols or strings representing the Boolean type data (Yes/No, TRUE/FALSE,
etc.) by selecting from the pull down list or typing in these boxes.
Close Active Editor

Click this icon to close active MDI grid (active template).
Editor Help group
Show Context Help

Opens HTML style online help and goes to a topic associated with the active Template Editor
7-16
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Editor Functions
7.1.3 Add Command for Specific Templates

7.1.3.1 Electrical Load
Item ID in the Electrical Load Schedule has a quite similar nature reflecting the actual
plant-engineering environment. Generally, one load item may have more than one identical entity (in
terms of size & characteristic). For example, a pump motor item PM-1200 consists of running and
spare machines and then named as PM-1200A and PM-1200B respectively. However, if these two (2)
machines have the same characteristics then they can be treated as one item with respect to equipment
specification.
e-DPP considers such situation and has several fields to compose an ID, i.e. IDBody and IDsuffix.
ID
IDBody
IDsuffix
= PM-1200A
= PM-1200
=A
ID
IDBody
IDsuffix
= PM-1200B
= PM-1200
=B
e-DPP gathers the records having the same IDBody in the table DPPElecLoad, and can indicate such
identical items as "PM-1200A/B" on the Edit Form when Compress button
is clicked.
The suffixes are restricted to alphabets A-Z (uppercase only) and therefore the number of identical
items is limited to 26.
New ID
Enter IDBody without suffix as described above.
Find button
Check if the same IDBody already exists in the table. If it exists, enter a different New ID.
7-17
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Editor Functions
Suffix
Enter a starting suffix for the new ID. When the same IDBody already exists in the table, the
already assigned suffixes are not shown in this list box.
Q'ty
Specify additional quantities for each operation mode, i.e. Continuous, Intermittent and Spare.
Equip. Type
Specify an equipment type (0: IM, 1: SM, 2: MOV, 3: DCM, 4: Static Load, 5:Capacitor). If the
same IDBody already exists, this field becomes disabled since a different equipment type is not
permitted within the same IDBody.
Service
Enter any service name with a maximum 50 characters. Even if the same IDBody already exists,
you may enter a different Service name here.
7.1.3.2 Cable
New ID
Enter a new cable ID.
Find button
Check if the same ID already exists in the table. If it exists, enter a different New ID.
Purpose
Select one of the options. Purpose is referred in the Sort dialog on the template of Cable
Schedule.
7-18
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Editor Functions
7.1.3.3 Switchboard
New ID
Enter a new switchboard ID.
Find button
Switchboard Type
Select from the list box, SWGR (switchgear), MCC or DP (distribution panel).
System (KV)
Enter an applied voltage to the new switchboard in kilo-volt. System (kV) is different from the
rated voltage of the board.
7-19
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Editor Functions
7.1.3.4 SwgrMcc (Switchgear/MCC)
New ID
Enter a new unit, cell or compartment ID.
Find button
Switchboard Type
Select from the list box, SWGR (switchgear), MCC or DP (distribution panel).
System (KV)
Enter an applied voltage to the new switchboard in kilo-volt. System (kV) is different from the
rated voltage of the board.
7-20
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Editor Functions
7.1.3.5 LCS
New ID
Enter a new LCS ID.
Find button
7-21
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Editor Functions
7.1.4 Copy Command for Specific Templates

7.1.4.1 Electrical Load
New ID
Enter a new IDBody (Not ID. See chapter-7.2.1).
Find button
Check if the same IDBody already exists in the table. If it exists, enter a different New IDBody.
New Suffix
When the same IDBody is found, this field becomes valid. Enter a new suffix that does not exist
for the same IDBody.
7-22
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Editor Functions
7.1.4.2 Cable
New ID
Enter a new cable ID.
Find button
7-23
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Editor Functions
7.1.4.3 SwgrMcc (Others)
New ID
Enter a new ID.
Find button
7-24
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Template Features
7.2 Template Features

7.2.1 All Electrical Loads
This category contains all kinds of electrical loads, e.g. induction motors, synchronous motors, static
loads, MOV, power capacitors, etc. The available shipped templates are listed below:
Template Title
(Form-1)
(Form-2)
(Form-3)
(Form-4)
Input Data for Cable
Sizing
Input Data for Load
Summary (Note)
Input Data for Load
Summary (SHELL DEP
Form) (Note)
Input Data for Lumped
Loads
Purpose
Primary, loading and PF & EFF data of electrical loads
Initial Filter
EquipType <> 11
(Space Heater)
Accessories for electrical loads (RTD, cable entries, EquipType <> 11
etc.)
(Space Heater)
Space heater, RTD, instrument and surge protection, EquipType <> 11
etc.
(Space Heater)
Location, hazardous area and drawings, etc.
EquipType <> 11
(Space Heater)
Data required for power cable sizing calculation
Data required for load summary calculation based on
Bus or Switchboard
Data required for load summary calculation in SHELL
DEP form based on Bus or Switchboard
EquipType <> 11
(Space Heater)
EquipType <> 11
(Space Heater)
Data required for load summary calculation based on EquipType <> 11

Lumped Load
(Space Heater)
7-25
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Template Title
Input Data for Lumped
Motors
Load Cables (CCR and
Space Heater)
Load Cables (Power and
LCS)
Template Features
Purpose
Initial Filter
Data required for load summary calculation based on EquipType <> 11
Lumped Motor
(Space Heater)
Cables used for CCR (DCS) and load space heaters
EquipType <> 11
(Space Heater)
Cables used for main power and LCS (push button)
EquipType <> 11
(Space Heater)
(Note): For more detail information on Load Summary, see Chapter-12, Load Summary.
Compress and One Cable Sizing buttons are available for this category. When you click on Compress
button, a new editor form opens and the items (records) that have the same IDBody are compressed to
one row. It is not allowed to modify, create, delete or copy the data in the editor form. Only the limited
commands that will not modify the data are available in the 'compressed' form.
Though Filter and Sort commands are available on the compressed editor as well as non-compressed
editors, Filter key or Sort key settings will not be saved.
'Compressed' Editor Form
Auto Calculations
There are several fields theoretically dependent to one another. When a user alters one of these field
values, the other fields are automatically re-calculated.
KW
Output power or capacity (kW) is calculated when HP, PF100 or EFF100 value chages.
<HP_KW=0> (HP)
KW = 0.7457 HP
7-26
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Template Features
<HP_KW=1> (kW)
KW = HP
<HP_KW=2> (kVA)
<EquipType=0, 1, 2 or 3>
KW =
EFF100 PF100 HP
100
<EquipType<>0, 1, 2 and 3>
KW =
PF100 HP
100
Even if PF100 or EFF100 is zero, KW is calculated on the assumption that PF100 and EFF100 are
100. However, actual values of PF100 and EFF100 remain zero in the database.
<HP_KW=3> (kvar)
KW = 0
Full Load Current (A) [IFL]

When one of the fields [HP], [KV], [EFF100] or [PF100] value changes, [IFL] is re-calculated by
the following formula;
<[EquipType] = 0, 1, 2 or 3>
<[PhaseNo] ="1">
IFL =
10000 KW
KV EFF100 PF100
<[PhaseNo] ="3">
IFL =
10000 KW
3 KV EFF100 PF100
<[EquipType] = 4,, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 or 15>

<[PhaseNo] ="1" & [HP_KW] = 0 or 1>
IFL =
100 KW
KV PF100
<[PhaseNo] ="1" & [HP_KW] = 2>
IFL =
HP
KV
<[PhaseNo] ="3" & [HP_KW] = 0 or 1>
IFL =
100 KW
3 KV PF100
7-27
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Template Features
<[PhaseNo] ="3" & [HP_KW] = 2>
IFL =
HP
3 KV
[IFL] (A) = [HP] / (SQRT(3) * [KV] )

<[EquipType]= 5>
No calculation is performed.
BHP
When one of the fields [HP], [PercentLoad], or [PF100] value changes, [BHP] is re-calculated by
the following formula;
These recalculations are applicable to any of the loading categories; 1, 2, or 3.
<HP_KW=0> (HP)
BHP =
% Loading 0.7457 HP
100
<HP_KW=1> (kW)
BHP =
% Loading HP
100
<HP_KW=2> (kVA)
BHP =
% Loading PF100 HP
10000
Load Factor ([PercentLoad])

When one of the fields [HP], [BHP], or [PF100] value changes, the loading factor [PercentLoad]
(%Loading) is re-calculated by the following formula;
These recalculations are applicable to any of the loading categories; 1, 2, or 3.
<HP_KW=0> (HP)
% Loading =
100 BHP
0.7457 HP
<HP_KW=1> (kW)
% Loading =
100 BHP
HP
<HP_KW=2> (kVA)
% Loading =
100 BHP
PFF100 HP
MVA
7-28
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Template Features
The field [MVA] value is updated by the following formula for ETAP interface when one of the
fields [HP], [EFF100], or [PF100] value changes:
<[EquipType] = 0, 1, 2 or 3>
MVA(kVA) =
10000 KW
PF100 EFF100
<[EquipType] = 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 or 15>
MVA(kVA) =
100 KW
PF100
<[EquipType]= 5>
MVA(kVA) = 1 HP
RPM
When the field [Poles] changes, [MachineRpm] is reset to the synchronous speed corresponding to
the new number of poles by the following formula:
RPM =
120 Hz
Poles
Note: Even when Hz is changed in "Project" "Standard" menu, the above calculation is not
performed.
Inertia Time Constant H

When the field [Poles] ([RPM]) changes, [Inertia H] is re-calculated by the following formula:
This recalculation is applicable to any of Machine, Motor, Coupler and Load (Machine = Motor +
Coupler + Load).
Inertia H =
5.48 10 6 WR 2 RPM 2
MVA
GD2
When the field [WR2] changes, [GD2] is re-calculated by the following formula:
This recalculation is applicable to any of Machine, Motor, Coupler and Load.
WR 2 =
GD 2
4
Also, when the field [GD2] changes, [Machine GD2] (Machine = Motor + Coupler + Load) is
re-calculated by the following formula:
Machine GD 2 = Motor GD 2 + Coupler GD 2 + Load GD 2
7-29
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Template Features
WR2
When the field [GD2] changes, [WR2] is re-calculated by the following formula:
This recalculation is applicable to any of Machine, Motor, Coupler and Load.
GD 2 = 4 WR 2
Also, when the field [WR2] changes, [Machine WR2] (Machine = Motor + Coupler + Load) is
re-calculated by the following formula:
Machine WR 2 = Motor WR 2 + Coupler WR 2 + Load WR 2
Note: (Power Capacitor)

When you include a power capacitor ([EquipType]=5) for the purpose of PF improvement or else, the
output field [HP] needs to be negative value and the unit of output has to be kvar ([HP_KW]=3).
7-30
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Template Features
7.2.2 All Motors
This category contains motor loads only (IM, SM, DCM and MOV). The available shipped templates
are listed below:
Template Title
Purpose
Initial Filter
Motor Characteristic Data Primary, RPM, PF, EFF, torque data, etc. of electric EquipType
motors
IN(0,1,2,3)
Motor Schedule (Form-1) Mechanical data of electric motors
EquipType
IN(0,1,2,3)
Motor Schedule (Form-1) Accessory data of electric motors
EquipType
IN(0,1,2,3)
Compress and One Cable Sizing buttons are available for this category.
The same "Auto-Calculation" features as those for "All Elec. Loads" category (see the section 7.2.1)
are also available in this category.
7-31
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Template Features
7.2.3 Induction Motor
This category contains the induction motors only. The available shipped template is listed below:
Template Title
Purpose
Induction
Motor All the data to be indicated on Motor Datasheet
Datasheet
Initial Filter
EquipType IN(0)
Compress and One Cable Sizing buttons are available for this category.
The same "Auto-Calculation" features as those for "All Elec. Loads" category (see the section 7.2.1)
are also available in this category.
7-32
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Template Features
7.2.4 Cable
This category contains all kinds of cables, e.g. power, control, grounding, communication, etc. The
available shipped templates are listed below:
Template Title
Purpose
Initial Filter
Length, From/To, Drum, Conduit and Gland data, etc.
of all purposes of cables
Cable Schedule (Form-2) Manufacture, location, installation, Library ID,
dimensions, etc. of all purposes of cables
Cable Schedule for ETAP Data to be imported to ETAP
CableUse = 'TS'
Interface
OR CableUse =
'TT' OR CableUse
= 'P'
Cable Schedule for SPEL Data to be imported to SPEL
Interface
The Cable Schedule can be created from the Electrical Load Schedule with the Data Filling function.
7-33
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Template Features
7.2.5 Transformer
This category contains an index of all power transformers and has no relation with other categories.
The available shipped templates are listed below:
Template Title
Transformer Datasheet
Purpose
All the data to be indicated on Transformer Datasheet
Initial Filter
Transformer Schedule for Data to be imported to ETAP

ETAP Interface
Auto Calculations
There are several fields theoretically dependent to one another. When a user alters one of these field
values, the other fields are automatically re-calculated.
Impedance (Z), Reactance (X) & X over R (X/R)

When one of the fields [PSPosZ], [PSPosX] or [PSPosXoverR] changes its value, the other field
values are re-calculated by the following formula;
[PSPosZ]: Positive sequence impedance between primary and secondary windings
[PSPosX]: Positive sequence reactance between primary and secondary windings
[PSPosXoverR]: Positive sequence ratio of X and R between primary and secondary windings
7-34
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Template Features
Z = X 1+
1
( X / R )2
X = Z sin (arctan( X / R ))
The same equations are applicable to the other parameters as shown below:
[PTPosZ]: Positive sequence impedance between primary and tertiary windings
[PTPosX]: Positive sequence reactance between primary and tertiary windings
[PTPosXoverR]: Positive sequence ratio of X and R between primary and tertiary windings
[STPosZ]: Positive sequence impedance between secondary and tertiary windings
[STPosX]: Positive sequence reactance between secondary and tertiary windings
[STPosXoverR]: Positive sequence ratio of X and R between secondary and tertiary windings
[PSZeroZ]: Zero sequence impedance between primary and secondary windings
[PSZeroX]: Zerosequence reactance between primary and secondary windings
[PSZeroXoverR]: Zerosequence ratio of X and R between primary and secondary windings
[PTZeroZ]: Zerosequence impedance between primary and tertiary windings
[PTZeroX]: Zerosequence reactance between primary and tertiary windings
[PTZeroXoverR]: Zerosequence ratio of X and R between primary and tertiary windings
[STZeroZ]: Zerosequence impedance between secondary and tertiary windings
[STZeroX]: Zerosequence reactance between secondary and tertiary windings
[STZeroXoverR]: Zerosequence ratio of X and R between secondary and tertiary windings
Note:
1) e-DPP transformer table does not have fields for "esistance".
2) When Z is altered and X/R is zero, X becomes equal to Z.
3) When X is altered and X/R is zero, Z becomes equal to X.
4) When Z is altered and X/R is NOT zero, X is calculated from Z and X/R.
5) When X is altered and X/R is NOT zero, Z is calculated from X and X/R.
6) When Z is altered, X is NOT zero and X/R is zero, X/R is NOT calculated from X and Z. (Z =
X)
7) When X is altered, Z is NOT zero and X/R is zero, X/R is NOT calculated from X and Z. (Z =
X)
7-35
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Template Features
7.2.6 SWGR/MCC Sch
This category contains all units, cells, or compartments that are parts of Switchgear or MCC. The
available shipped templates are listed below:
Template Title
Circuit Schedule for
SPEL Interface
Control and Operation
Signals
HV/MV MCC Schedule
HV/MV MCC Schedule
(Vertical Style)
HV/MV
Switchgear
Schedule
HV/MV
Switchgear
Schedule (Vertical Style)
LV MCC Schedule
(Vertical Style)
Purpose
Circuit data to be imported to SPEL
Interface signal among Switchgear/MCC, CCR
(DCS), LCS (push button) and LP (Local panel)
Data to be indicated on High/medium voltage
MCC Schedule
MCC Schedule (Vertical Style)
Switchgear Schedule
Switchgear Schedule (Vertical Style)
Data to be indicated on Low voltage MCC
Schedule
Data to be indicated on Low voltage Switchgear
Schedule
Data to be indicated on Low voltage Switchgear
Schedule (Vertical Style)
7-36
Initial Filter
PanelType='MCC'
AND PanelKV>1.0
PanelType='MCC'
AND PanelKV>1.0
PanelType='SWGR'
AND PanelKV>1.0
PanelType='SWGR'
AND PanelKV>1.0
PanelType='MCC'
AND PanelKV<=1.0
PanelType='SWGR'
AND PanelKV<=1.0
PanelType='SWGR'
AND PanelKV<=1.0
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Template Features
7.2.7 SWGR/MCC DS
This category contains an index of all switchboards registered in e-DPP project. This information is
used for producing the data sheets of switchgears and MCCs, and Data Filling to Switchgear / MCC
Schedule for the major component properties, e.g. CB type, as defaults.
Template Title
HV MCC Datasheet
Purpose
Data to be indicated on High voltage MCC
Datasheet
HV
Switchgear Data to be indicated on High voltage Switchgear
Datasheet
Datasheet
LV MCC Datasheet
Data to be indicated on Low voltage MCC
Datasheet
LV Switchgear Datasheet Data to be indicated on Low voltage Switchgear
Datasheet
Switchboard Component Switchboard Component List for all voltage classes
List
and all panel types
7-37
Initial Filter
PanelType='MCC'
AND PanelKV>1.0
PanelType='SWGR'
AND PanelKV>1.0
PanelType='MCC'
AND PanelKV<=1.0
PanelType='SWGR'
AND PanelKV<=1.0
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Template Features
7.2.8 LCS Data Sheet
This category contains an index and individual items of all LCSs, and is created from Switchgear /
MCC Schedule by Data Filling LCS and Switchgear/MCC.
Template Title
LCS Datasheet
LCS Schedule
Purpose
Initial Filter
Data to be indicated on LCS datasheet. Only
unique types of LCS are included.
Start/Stop
signals,
Running
indications, EquipType IN(0,1,2,3)
Remote/Manual selections, etc. for individual AND
motors.
FromDPPElecLoad =
True
7-38
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Template Features
7.2.9 Bus
This category contains 2 groups:

Group-1:
All electrical loads along with Bus ID to which each load is connected. The same
"Auto-Calculation" features as those for "All Elec. Loads" category (see the section
7.2.1) are also available in former group.
Group-2:
Index of all buses registered in e-DPP project. This information is used for the Load
Summary calculation based on buses.

Template Title
Bus Connected Loads
Purpose
Refer to Group-1 above
Bus List
7-39
Initial Filter
EquipType <> 11
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Template Features
7.2.10 Switchboard
This category contains 2 groups:

Group-1:
All e electrical loads along with Switchboard ID to which each load is connected.
The same "Auto-Calculation" features as those for "All Elec. Loads" category (see
the section 7.2.1) are also available in former group.
Group-2:
Index of all switchboards registered in e-DPP project. This information is used for
the Load Summary calculation based on switchboards.

Template Title
Purpose
Switchboard Connected Refer to Group-1 above
Loads
Switchboard List
7-40
Initial Filter
EquipType <> 11
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Template Features
7.2.11 Lumped Load
This category contains the lumped loads only. The available shipped template is listed below:
Template Title
Lumped Load List
Purpose
Index of all lumped loads registered in e-DPP project.
This information is used for the Load Summary
calculation based on lumped loads.
7-41
Initial Filter
e-DPP4.0.2
Editor
Template Features
7.2.12 Lumped Motor
This category contains the lumped motors only. The available shipped template is listed below:
Template Title
Lumped Motor List
Purpose
Index of all lumped motors registered in e-DPP project.
This information is used for the lumped motor
calculation.
Initial Filter
<End of Chapter 7>
7-42
e-DPP4.0.2
Chapter 8
Project
The options available in Project group of Start tab are used to set parameters that affect the whole
project. This includes information such as system frequency, unit system, and voltage classes, etc. It is
highly recommended that you review and modify this information before you create your project
database. The Project Menu offers the following commands:
Information...
Standard...
Settings...
Loading
Categories...
System
Configurations...
Electrical...
Cable Entry...
Ambient Conditions...
Excel Report...
Provides a dialog box to enter general project information

Provides a dialog box to select project standards and system units
Provides a list of project settings
Provide a dialog box to define 3 loading categories
Provide a dialog box to define 10 system configurations
Provides a dialog box to enter voltage classes and parameters
Provides a dialog box to specify thread types of cable entry
Provides a dialog box to enter various ambient conditions of plant
site
Export the above information to MS Excel file
8-1
e-DPP 4.0.2
Project
Information
8.1 Information
When you select Information sub-menu, the display box below is provided:
Any information specified in these fields is for project identification only and is not crucial to
performing any transactions in e-DPP. The individual items will be printed on the document outputs or
able to refer from the Template Design menu for you to include them in user-designed templates.
Job No.
Enter the job number, up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
Contract No.
Enter the contract number, up to 30 alphanumeric characters.
Project Title
Enter the project title, up to 30 alphanumeric characters.
Customer
Enter the name of customer, up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Location
Enter the location of this plant site, up to 30 alphanumeric characters.
8-2
e-DPP 4.0.2
Project
Information
Country
Enter the country name, up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
Plant Name
Enter the plant name, up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Project Code
Enter the project code, up to 10 alphanumeric characters.
Consultant
Enter the name of consultant, up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Contractor
Enter the name of contractor, up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
8-3
e-DPP 4.0.2
Project
Standard
8.2 Standard
When you select Standard sub-menu, the display box below is provided:
Frequency (Hz)
Here you can enter the electrical system frequency in Hertz (Hz) either 50 or 60. It is important that
you set the system frequency correctly prior to entering data into e-DPP.
Caution: Changing the frequency does not automatically convert the frequency-dependent data, e.g.
cable reactance, motor rpm, etc.
Standard - Overall
Set the project Standard as IEC, ANSI or JIS. Setting the project Standard will determine some of the
project defaults. Depending on whether you select ANSI or IEC Standard, e-DPP uses different
element symbols for the Motor Sequence diagrams (JIS symbols are not available.).
The value lists used for the pull-down boxes on all the edit forms are also dependent on the Standard
ANSI, IEC or JIS. Note that after you change the standard, the value lists are newly created and the
previous one based on a different standard will be discarded.
Standard - Motor
Set the motor Standard as IEC, ANSI or JIS. The motor Standard specified here will be shown on
Induction Motor data sheets.
Standard - Cable
Set the cable Standard as IEC, ANSI or JIS. The cable Standard specified here will be used as a
default for the Minimum Cable Size menu, Conduit & Gland Selection Table, Cable Sizing, etc. The
Cable Standard entered here determines the key to search the cable library data from the various
e-DPP functions.
8-4
e-DPP 4.0.2
Project
Standard
Units - Overall (English, Metric)

The unit system entered here determines the display attributes used for the dimensional units
presentation (mm or inch, kg or lb) of the overall project. The defaults for the system elements are set
when you create a new project. That is why e-DPP asks you to select a unit system at the time you are
creating a new project file.
Units - Motor (HP, kW)

The unit system for motors entered here determines the unit for the maximum and minimum motor
output that you specify in the menu Project - Electrical (See the next section).
Caution: The unit of individual motors in the electrical load schedule can be specified individually and
is not restricted by the motor unit specified here.
Units - Cable (English, Metric)

The cable unit specified here will be used as a default for the Minimum Cable Size menu, Conduit &
Gland Selection Table, Cable Sizing, etc.
Area
Enter the code of hazardous area classification for which the candidates vary depending on the
Standard specified in Standard - Overall.
Standard
ANSI
IEC
Area Classification
Class I Division 1
Class I Division 2
Non-Class
Zone 0
Zone 1
Zone 2
Non-Class
Gas
Enter the code of gas group for explosion proofing for which the candidates vary depending on the
Standard
ANSI
IEC
Gas Group
A, B, C, D
II, IIA, IIB or IIC
You may enter any other code, up to 20 alphanumeric characters instead of the above.
Temperature
Enter the temperature class for explosion proof for which the candidates vary depending on the
Standard
ANSI
IEC
Temperature Class
T1, T2, T2A, T2B, T2C, T2D, T3, T3A, T3B, T3C, T4, T4A, T5, T6
T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6
8-5
e-DPP 4.0.2
Project
Settings
8.3 Settings
Select Settings command with an arrow icon pointing to the right to view 2 more menu options, i.e.
Loading Categories and System Configurations.
8.3.1 Loading Categories

By selecting Loading Categories, you can customize the name of any of 3 loading categories (the
remaining 7 categories are reserved for future use). You can change these names at any time when
running the project. Each name may be up to 12 characters.
When you run the load summary calculation, you can select any of these loading categories on the
dialog and the calculation is performed using individual % loading values specified to each load.
Running the load summary or lumped motor calculation, e-DPP uses the percent loading of the
specified loading category to calculate the operating power factor and efficiency of motors from the
values of power factor and efficiency specified at 100%, 75% and 50% loading. This is accomplished
by using a linear interpolation method. The calculated power factor and efficiency are then used to
calculate the operating kW and kvar loading.
(Note: % Loading can be modified as desired by the user on "Editor Selection" "All Elec. Loads"
"Input Data for Load Summary".)
8-6
e-DPP 4.0.2
Project
Settings
8.3.2 System Configurations

You can customize the name of any of the 10 system configurations by selecting System
Configurations. You can change these names at any time when running the project. Each name may be
up to 12 characters long.
When you run the load summary calculation, you can select any of these system configurations on the
dialog and the calculation is performed based on the selected configuration.
Each system configuration can be setup by specifying the source nodes (switchboard or bus) in the
menu "Editor Selection" "Switchboard" "Switchboard List" or "Editor Selection" "Bus"
"Bus List".
8-7
e-DPP 4.0.2
Project
Electrical
8.4 Electrical
When you select Electrical sub-menu, the display box below is provided:
The following 5 fields are referred and used by the various calculating functions of e-DPP:
System Nominal (kV)
Motor Rated (kV)
(*)
Motor Output Min.
(*)
Motor Output Max.
(*)
Cable Voltage
(*): These 3 parameters are not considered for the voltage class "DC" but reference only.
The other fields are reference only and shown in MS Excel output form of Project Information (See
chapter 8.7 "Excel Repot").
System Nominal (kV)

Enter the system nominal voltages applicable to your project for eight voltage classes as HV-1, HV-2,
MV-1, MV-2, LV-1 (3ph), LV-2 (3ph), LV (1ph) and DC. All of them do not have to be entered and
the voltage classes you don't apply to this project may be left blank.
The following relation is to be maintained among seven AC voltage classes when each value is not
zero:
HV-1 > HV-2 > MV-1 > MV-2 > LV-1 (3ph) > LV-2 (3ph) > LV (1ph)
The cable sizing program of e-DPP refers to those data to calculate voltage drops in cable runs.
When 3 is selected in Circuit System (wire) for LV (1ph), half value of System Nominal (kV) is
displayed under there as Line-Neutral voltage and referred by cable sizing calculation for LV
single-phase 3-wire loads which are connected between line and neutral wires.
8-8
e-DPP 4.0.2
Project
Electrical
Voltage Variation (%)

Enter the allowable variation of system nominal voltage for each voltage class in the text format.
Frequency Variation (%)

Enter the allowable variation of system frequency for each voltage class in the text format.
Circuit System (Wire)

Select the number of wires for circuit system of each voltage class from 2, 3 or 4.
Short Circuit Current (kA)

Enter the rated short circuit current of electrical equipment for each voltage in kA.
Short Circuit Current (kV)

Enter the system voltage in kV at which the rated short circuit current is defined.
Neutral Grounding System - Type

Enter the type of neutral grounding system in the text format for each voltage class.
Neutral Grounding System - Amp.

Enter the rated ampacity of neutral grounding system in amperes for the selected type of neutral
grounding system for Resistor, Reactor or any other user type.
Neutral Grounding System - Sec.

Enter the rated duration of neutral grounding system in second for the selected type of neutral
grounding system for Resistor, Reactor or any other user type.
Motor Rated (kV)

Enter the motor rated voltages applicable to your project for eight voltage classes as HV-1, HV-2,
MV-1, MV-2, LV-1 (3ph), LV-2 (3ph), LV (1ph) and DC in the same manner as "System Nominal
(kV)".
The Data Filling program fills those data except for DC voltage class into the Electrical Load table
referring "Min." and "Max." motor outputs specified as below.
When 3 is selected in Circuit System (wire) for LV (1ph), half value of Motor Rated (kV) is
displayed under there as Line-Neutral voltage, but for referernce purpose only and not used for any
calculation.
Motor Output - Min. & Max.

Enter the minimum and maximum motor rated outputs in the unit designated by the above "Unit of
Output Power". The maximum value always has to be greater than the minimum one for the same
voltage class and the minimum value of a certain voltage class has to be greater than the maximum
one of any other lower voltage classes.
Cable Voltage
Enter the cable rated voltages applicable to your project for eight voltage classes as HV-1, HV-2,
MV-1, MV-2, LV-1 (3ph), LV-2 (3ph), LV (1ph) and DC. As the type of those data is text form (not
numeric), they are not directly used for any of calculations of e-DPP. However, the selected cable
voltages are referred by the cable-sizing program on its sizing criteria window to (Refer to chapter
8-9
e-DPP 4.0.2
Project
Electrical
13.1.1 "Cable Sizing Criteria").
Space Heater Power - Phase

Set the number of phase for space heater power as either 1ph or 3ph.
Space Heater Power - Voltage

Enter the voltage for space heater power in volt. You may enter any other figure than those listed in the
pull-down box.
Lighting Power - Phase

Set the number of phase for lighting power as either 1ph or 3ph.
Lighting Power - Voltage

Enter the voltage for lighting power in volt. You may enter any other figure than those listed in the
pull-down box.
8-10
e-DPP 4.0.2
Project
Cable Entry
8.5 Cable Entry

When you select Cable Entry sub-menu, the display box below is provided:
Type of Cable Entry

Enter types of cable entry for Main Power, LCS (Local Control Station), CCR (Central Control Room),
Space Heater, Bearing RTD and Winding RTD from the candidates: Metric, NPT, PG, PF and ET.
The selected values are referred by the data filling - cable routine.
8-11
e-DPP 4.0.2
Project
Ambient Conditions
8.6 Ambient Conditions

When you select Ambient Conditions sub-menu, the display box below is provided:
The values entered here are for reference purpose only and outputted to MS Excel form "Project
Information" (See chapter 8.6).
Altitude (m)
Enter the site altitude from the sea level in meter.
Ambient Temperature (deg. C) - Min., Avg. & Max.

Enter the minimum, average and maximum ambient temperatures in degree Celsius.
The following relation is to be maintained among those three figures:
Minimum < Average < Maximum
Max. Temperature during Transportation (deg. C)

Enter the maximum temperature during transportation in degree Celsius.
8-12
e-DPP 4.0.2
Project
Ambient Conditions
Max. Temperature during Storage (deg. C)

Enter the maximum temperature during storage in degree Celsius.
Design Temperature (deg. C) - Min. & Max.

Enter the minimum and maximum design temperature for electrical equipment in degree Celsius. The
maximum design temperature needs to be greater than the minimum temperature.
Cooling Water Temperature (deg. C)

Enter the cooling water temperature utilized in your project in degree Celsius.
Max. Relative Humidity (%)

Enter the maximum relative humidity in percent in the range between 0 to 100.
Seismic Factor
Enter the seismic factor from the prepared options or any other value as you like.
Tropical Treatment
When you need any particular treatment for electrical equipment, select "Required".
Corrosion Protection
When you need any particular corrosion protection for electrical equipment, select "Required".
Direct Sunlight Protection

When you need any particular direct sunlight protection for electrical equipment, select "Required".
8-13
e-DPP 4.0.2
Project
Excel Report
8.7 Excel Report

When you select To Excel, the display box below is provided:
When you click on "Yes" button, MS Excel will be launched and show Project Information that you
have entered above.
<End of Chapter 8>
8-14
e-DPP 4.0.2
Chapter 9
Library
e-DPP provides customized libraries for several devices. Additional devices may be added to each
library through e-DPP's Library Editors. Details regarding each library are explained in this chapter.
The default name of e-DPP library file is Libxxxxx.mdb where "xxxxx" is a project name. e-DPP
displays the path along with the name of the current library in the Project Editor.
9-1
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Motor
9.1 Motor
The Motor Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. Select the desired frequency
and unit. Units are converted automatically during calculations so the selection of either kW or HP
provides complete information to e-DPP. Unlimited headers (manufacturers) within the library may be
specified. Within each header, various voltage levels are available. Motor data for each voltage level
can be selected, as shown below.
Header
Motor Library
50Hz
kW
Manufacturer
Enclosure Type
kV
Poles
60Hz
HP
Manufacturer
Enclosure Type
kV
Poles
Manufacturer
Enclosure Type
kV
Poles
Manufacturer
Enclosure Type
kV
Poles
A motor nameplate header consists of the frequency, unit system, voltage level, manufacturer,
enclosure type and the number of poles. You can have unlimited manufacturers for each header.
Frequency
kW/HP
Phase
Manufacturer
Enclosure Type
Voltage
Poles
50 or 60 Hz
Select unit type
3ph (Fixed)
Up to 25 characters long
Up to 20 characters long
In kV
Number of pole pair (even number)
9-2
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Motor
9.1.1 Motor Library: Entrance Menu
The Motor Library allows you to add new motor characteristic design classes and models or select
existing motor characteristic design classes and models, based on the selections made for Frequency,
Unit, Manufacturer and Enclosure Type for modification, deletion, or copying. To edit a Motor Library,
click on the Edit button after highlighting it. To delete a Motor Library entry, click on the Delete
button after highlighting a model. e-DPP will request confirmation to delete the selected library entry.
9-3
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Motor
9.1.2 Motor Library Editor

This spreadsheet editor allows you to view and edit Motor Library data. Select the motor design
operating frequency and units for motor mechanical rating of the selected motor.
Output (HP/kW)
Enter the motor nameplate power (HP or kW).
SF
Enter the motor service factor.
LRC (%)
Enter the locked-rotor current as a percentage of the rated full load current.
FLA (A)
Enter the motor full load current in amperes.
PFlr (%)
Enter the locked-rotor power factor in percent.
PF100 (%)
Enter the motor power factor at 100% loading in percent.
PF75 (%)
PF50 (%)
9-4
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Motor
EFF100 (%)
Enter the motor efficiency at 100% loading in percent.
EFF75 (%)
EFF50 (%)
Tlr (%)
Enter the motor locked-rotor torque in percent.
Tpu (%)
Enter the motor pull-up torque in percent.
Tmax (%)
Enter the motor maximum torque in percent.
Tfl (kg-m)
Enter the motor full load torque in kg-m.
GD2 (kgf-m2)
Enter the GD2 (flying wheel effect) in kg-m2.
AllowableGD2 (kgf-m2)
Enter the allowable GD2 (flying wheel effect) in kg-m2.
RPMfl
Enter the motor speed at full load in r.p.m.
Noise (dBA)
Enter the motor noise level in dBA.
Weight (kg)
Enter the motor weight in kg.
Frame No
Enter the motor frame no.
Design Letter
Enter the motor NEMA design letter.
KVA
Enter the motor rated kVA.
9-5
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Motor
9.1.3 Motor Library: Add Menu

Select this option to input the Manufacturer Name, kV, Poles, Enclosure Type, Frequency, ,Unit rating
and Phase of the motor you wish to add to the library. You can edit the properties of the new motor
selection by highlighting it from the list provided, then clicking on the Edit button.
9.1.4 Motor Library: Copy Menu

Select this option to copy the data corresponding to one header motor to a new one. This function can
be useful if you wish to change a few specifications in the library entry without modifying the original
data. The properties of the new selection can be edited by highlighting it from the list provided, then
clicking on the Edit button.
9-6
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Motor
9.1.5 Motor Library: Quick Pick

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by clicking on the button mentioned "Lib" on any Edit
sheet and then selecting the Tab "Induction Motor". The Library Quick Pick options are a compilation
of the information you have specified for this element.
From this dialog box, select a motor from the library. Specify HP tables or kW tables, and then select
the appropriate voltage level, manufacturer, enclosure type, KV, poles and output from the Motor
Library.
"None" button is available to clear all motor associated properties from a certain (cursor location)
record of database.
Quick Pick operation is effective against multiple rows selected in Template editor. When multiple
rows are selected and "OK" or "None" button is clicked, the message box below appears asking user's
confirmation:
9-7
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Cable
9.2 Cable
The Cable Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can have unlimited
cable headers (Cable Types) within the library and unlimited cable sizes for each header (type).
9.2.1 Cable Library: Entrance Menu
Cable headers are used to indicate the type and construction of a cable. Cable headers consist of the
following items:
Frequency
Unit System
Conductor Type
Installation
Manufacturer
Standard
Rated Voltage
Cable Type
Rated base frequency of the cable in Hz

Metric or English unit system; used for all cable physical dimensions
Copper or Aluminum
Magnetic or non-magnetic conduit installation
Name of cable manufacturer (e-DPP provides "DPP" as standard.)
Cable standard, IEC, ANSI or JIS
Rated voltage of the cable in text format
Insulation type such as XLPE/PVC, PVC/PVC, etc.
"-S" as a suffix denotes "Sector Shaped Stranded", e.g. "PVC/DSTA/PVC-S".
#Wires
Single conductor cables (1), 3 conductor cables (3), etc.
Wire-Type
Type of cable wire, Core (C), Pair (P), Core & Ground (C+G), etc.
Base Temp. for U/G Ampacity
Base temperature in degree C at which the ampacities in U/G raceway
installation are measured.
Base Temp. for A/G Ampacity
Base temperature in degree C at which the ampacities in A/G raceway
installation are measured.
9-8
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Cable
Max. Conductor Temp.

Maximum allowable conductor temperature in degree C
Burial Depth for U/G Ampacity

Burial depth in mm in which the ampacities in U/G raceway installation are
measured.
Base Soil Thermal Resistivity (RHO)
Soil thermal resistivity in degree C-m/Watt
Ohms per
Unit of length for cable impedance, /1000 ft, /km, /mile, etc.
Weight per
Units of length and weight for cable weight, kg/km, lbs/mile, etc.
The Cable Library allows you to add new cable headers or select existing cable headers for editing,
deleting, or copying. To edit a Cable Library, click on the Edit button after highlighting it. To delete a
cable, click on the Delete button after highlighting it. e-DPP will request confirmation to delete the
selected cable.
9.2.2 Cable Library Editor

To edit the Cable Library data, select a cable type from the Cable Library and click on the Edit button.
Each cable type (header) can contain an unlimited number of cable sizes. This spreadsheet editor
allows you to view and edit Cable Library data for a selected cable type. The description of the
selected cable header is displayed on top of the spreadsheet.
Available
Keep the checkbox checked for "Yes" and unchecked for "No". Use this option to flag the cables you
want to be used for this project. e-DPP selects cables from the library for cable sizing. When you are
picking a cable from the library (Cable Library Quick Pick), you can pick from available cables only
9-9
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Cable
or from all cables in the library.
Size
Cable size is specified in mm2 for metric cable data and in AWG or kcmil for English cable data.
Note: This field presents the cable sizes in the text format, not numeric.
Sect Area (mm2)

Any unit of cable sizes is converted to the sectional area in numeric format (mm2) in order to enable
the calculations associated to cables. Generally, the size in metric unit (mm2) seems the same as the
sectional area (mm2).
Duct bank (A)

Duct Bank refers to the cable base ampacity (in amperes) when a cable is installed in an isolated duct
bank. The base ampacity is selected from the library when Duct Bank Installation Type is selected. If
the base ampacity is zero for the specified installation type, a different cable should be selected or the
Cable Library should be modified for the specified cable type and size.
Buried (A)
Buried refers to the cable base ampacity (in amperes) when a cable is directly buried underground. The
base ampacity is selected from the library when Direct Buried Installation Type is selected. If the base
ampacity is zero for the specified installation type, a different cable should be selected or the Cable
Library should be modified for the specified cable type and size.
Free Air (A)

Free Air refers to the cable base ampacity (in amperes) when a cable is installed in free air or trays.
The base ampacity is selected from the library when Cable Tray or Air Drop Installation Type is
selected. If the base ampacity is zero for the specified installation type, a different cable should be
selected or the Cable Library should be modified for the specified cable type and size.
Cond Air (A)

Conduit in Air refers to the cable base ampacity (in amperes) when a cable is installed in a conduit in
air. The base ampacity is selected for the library when Conduit Installation Type is selected. If the base
ampacity is zero for the specified installation type, a different cable should be selected or the Cable
Library should be modified for the specified cable type and size.
R
Positive-sequence cable resistance in ohms per unit length. The resistance must be entered at the base
temperature specified for this cable header (type).
X
Positive-sequence cable reactance in ohms per unit length
Y
Capacitive susceptance of cable in siemens per unit length
Y C = j C
where: Yc = Capacitive susceptance (=Y)
C = Capacitance [F]
9-10
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Cable
Rdc25
DC resistance calculated at 25 degrees C in micro-ohms per unit length
Cond. O.D.
Conductor outside diameter in mm
Ins. Thick
Thickness of cable insulation layer in mm
Sheath Thick
Thickness of cable sheath in mm
Jacket Thick
Thickness of cable jacket in mm
Cable O.D.
Cable outside diameter in mm
Cond. Const.
Enter Cable Conductor Construction in a format of "aaa/bbb" where aaa is the number of raw wires
and bbb is size of them (e.g. 7/0.52, 37/2.03, etc.), or one of the following abbreviations:
ConRnd
ConRnd-Coated
ConRnd-Treated
CmpRnd-Treated
CmpSgm
CmpSgm-Coated
CmpSgm-Treated
CmpSct-Treated
Concentric Round
Concentric Round
Concentric Round
Compact Round
Compact Segmental
Compact Segmental
Compact Segmental
Compact Sector
None Coated
Coated
None Coated
None Coated
None Coated
Coated
None Coated
None Coated
None Treated
None Treated
Treated
Treated
None Treated
None Treated
Treated
Treated
Coating is tin or alloy. The term Treated implies a completed conductor which has been subjected to a
drying and impregnating process similar to that employed on paper power cables.
Cable Weight
Weight of the cable in kg or lb per unit length
Max. Drum Length (m)

Enter the maximum length of cable in meter that can be reeled on a cable drum.
(Note)
Spacing (S) for single core cables is assumed S=2D for ampacities and R, X data, where D is cable
diameter.
9-11
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Cable
9.2.3 Cable Library: Add Menu

This dialog box is used to add a new cable header (type).
A cable header consists of all the information you see in this dialog box. You can create a new cable
header by changing any one of the items in the cable header information.
9-12
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Cable
9.2.4 Cable Library: Copy Menu

This dialog box is used to copy an existing cable header.
A cable header consists of all the information you see in this dialog box. You can create a new cable
header by changing any one of the items in the cable header information.
9-13
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Cable
9.2.5 Cable Library: Quick Pick

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by clicking on the button "Lib" on the cable-related
Edit sheets and then selecting the Tab "Cable". The Library Quick Pick options are a compilation of
the information you have specified for this element.
From this dialog box, select a cable type (header) and cable size from the Cable Library. For a selected
cable header, the Library Quick Pick dialog box allows you to pick a cable size from the list of all
cable sizes in the library or from cables which are flagged as Available only.
"None" button is available to clear all cable associated properties from a certain (cursor location)
record of database.
confirmation:
9-14
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Conduit
9.3 Conduit
9.3.1 Conduit Library: Entrance Menu
The basic philosophy of Conduit Library is the same as Motor or Cable libraries. There are two lists
showing the Manufacturer name and the corresponding Conduit types.
In order to view the data corresponding to the selected (highlighted) Manufacturer and Conduit Type,
click on the Edit button. If you wish to delete a pattern, then select (highlight) that pattern and press
Delete. e-DPP will ask for confirmation before deleting the existing pattern.
9-15
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Conduit
9.3.2 Conduit Library Editor

e-DPP allows you to edit the existing data corresponding to a particular Manufacturer name and
Conduit Type. Select (highlight) your choice of Manufacturer Name and the corresponding Conduit
Type and click on Edit button. The window below appears:
Avail
Keep the checkbox checked for "Yes" and unchecked for "No". Use this option to flag the conduits
you want to be used for this project. e-DPP selects conduits from the library for the minimum cable
size selection. When you are picking a conduit from the library (Conduit Library Quick Pick), you can
pick from available conduits only or from all conduits in the library.
Size-Metric
Enter a nominal size of conduit for metric unit in the text format.
Size-English
Enter a nominal size of conduit for English unit in the text format.
Inner Diameter (mm)

Enter an inner diameter of conduit in mm (numeric format). This figure is used to size the conduits
comparing with cable O.D. values.
9-16
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Conduit
9.3.3 Conduit Library: Add Menu

Select this option to input the Manufacturer Name and Conduit Type you wish to add to the library.
You can edit the properties of the new selection by highlighting it from the list provided, then clicking
on the Edit button.
9.3.4 Conduit Library: Copy Menu

Select this option to copy the data corresponding to one Manufacturer Name to a new Manufacturer.
You can also input the Conduit Type of your choice .The selected conduits can be edited by
highlighting it from the list provided, then clicking on the Edit button.
9-17
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Conduit
9.3.5 Conduit Library Quick Pick

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by clicking on the button "Lib" on the conduit-related
Edit sheets (Cable Schedule) and then selecting the Tab "Conduit". The Library Quick Pick options are
a compilation of the information you have specified for this element.
Select your choice of Manufacturer, Conduit Type and Conduit Size depending on the Unit System
and Availability of Conduit Sizes.
"None" button is available to clear all conduit associated properties from a certain (cursor location)
record of database.
confirmation:
9-18
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Cable Gland
9.4 Cable Gland

9.4.1 Cable Gland Library: Entrance Menu
The basic philosophy of Cable Gland Library is the same as Motor or Cable libraries. There are two
lists showing the Manufacturer name and the corresponding Cable Gland types.
In order to view the data corresponding to the selected (highlighted) Manufacturer and Cable Gland
Type, click on the Edit button. If you wish to delete a pattern, then select (highlight) that pattern and
press Delete. e-DPP will ask for confirmation before deleting the existing pattern.
(Note) For more detailed or specific information regarding the already-stored data, please contact each
manufacturer.
9-19
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Cable Gland
9.4.2 Cable Gland Library Editor

e-DPP allows you to edit the existing data corresponding to a particular Manufacturer name and Cable
Gland Type. Select (highlight) your choice of Manufacturer Name and the corresponding Cable Gland
Type and click on Edit button. The window below appears:
Available
Keep the checkbox checked for "Yes" and unchecked for "No". Use this option to flag the cable glands
you want to be used for this project. e-DPP selects cable glands from the library for the minimum
cable size selection and the conduit and gland selection programs. When you are picking a cable gland
from the library (Cable Gland Library Quick Pick), you can pick from available cable glands only or
from all cable glands in the library.
Gland Size
Enter a nominal size of cable gland in the text format.
Entry Size Metric

Enter a nominal size of cable gland for metric unit in the text format.
Entry Size NPT

Enter a nominal size of cable gland for NPT standard in the text format.
Entry Size PG
Enter a nominal size of cable gland for PG standard in the text format.
Entry Size PF
Enter a nominal size of cable gland for PF standard in the text format.
9-20
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Cable Gland
Entry Size ET
Enter a nominal size of cable gland for ET (Imperial) standard in the text format.
CableIDMin (mm)
Enter the minimum inner (without insulation) diameter of cable in mm (numeric format) that can be
accommodated in a gland.
CableIDMax (mm)
Enter the maximum inner (without insulation) diameter of cable in mm (numeric format) that can be
CableODMin (mm)
Enter the minimum outside (overall) diameter of cable in mm (numeric format) that can be
CableODMax (mm)
Enter the maximum outside (overall) diameter of cable in mm (numeric format) that can be
accommodated in a gland. This figure is used to size the conduits comparing with cable O.D. values.
9.4.3 Cable Gland Library: Add Menu

Select this option to input the Manufacturer Name and Cable Gland Type you wish to add to the library.
You can edit the properties of the new selection by highlighting it from the list provided, then clicking
on the Edit button.
9-21
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Cable Gland
9.4.4 Cable Gland Library: Copy Menu

Select this option to copy the data corresponding to one manufacturer name to a new manufacturer.
You can also input the Cable Gland Type of your choice .The selected cable gland can be edited by
9.4.5 Cable Gland Library: Quick Pick

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by clicking on the button "Lib" on the
cable-gland-related Edit sheets (Cable Schedule) and then selecting the Tab "Cable Gland". The
Library Quick Pick options are a compilation of the information you have specified for this element.
9-22
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Cable Gland
Select your choice of Manufacturer, Cable Gland Type and Cable Gland Size and Entry Size
depending on the Thread Type and Availability of Cable Gland Sizes.
"None" button is available to clear all cable gland associated properties from a certain (cursor location)
record of database.
confirmation:
9-23
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
LCS Circuit
9.5 LCS Circuit

LCS denotes "Local Control Station" used for controlling motor operation locally and usually located
beside the motors. The LCS Circuit Library contains components that are fitted on LCS and limited to
those shown in sequence diagrams. For example, Start Button is included in the library, but the color
of Start Button is not, since the latter is not usually shown in the diagrams.
The LCS Circuit Library allows you to add new LCS Circuit or select existing LCS Circuit for
modification, deletion, or copying. To delete a LCS Circuit Library data, click on the Delete button on
the current page. e-DPP will request confirmation to delete the selected library data.
9.5.1 LCS Circuit Library Editor

This editor allows you to view and edit LCS Circuit Library data.
Circuit Name
You can select one of the already-stored LCS Circuit Names from the pull-down list. The Circuit
Name is unique in a library file dedicated to the project.
Circuit ID (Not editable)

System internal code to identify the circuit pattern
On Switch - CT
When the checkbox for each component is checked, that component will be included in the current
LCS Circuit.
9-24
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
LCS Circuit
The same combination of "Checked" or "Unchecked" in all checkboxes is allowed, but the Circuit
Name need to be different to one another.
9.5.2 LCS Circuit Library: Add Menu

Select this option to input the new LCS Circuit Name and requirements of each component you wish
to add to the library.
9-25
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
LCS Circuit
9.5.3 LCS Circuit Library: Copy Menu

Select this option to copy the data corresponding to one LCS Circuit to a new one.
9-26
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
LCS Circuit
9.5.4 LCS Circuit Library: Quick Pick

Quick Pick function is not available for the LCS Circuit library. Instead, you can select one of the LCS
pattern data from Equipment Pick - LCS on the LCS related Edit sheets (LCS Schedule or
Switchgear/MCC schedule).
LCS pattern data are created in the Edit sheet "LCS Data Sheet".
Select your choice of LCS Type ID from the list box.

"None" button is not available for the Equipment Pick - LCS.
confirmation:
9-27
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Motor Sequence
9.6 Motor Sequence

The Motor Sequence Library contains components that are fitted on MCC starter unit and LCS, and
limited to those shown in sequence diagrams. For example, Start Button on MCC unit is included in
the library, but the color of Start Button is not, since the latter is not usually shown in the diagrams.
The Motor Sequence Library allows you to add new Motor Sequence or select existing Motor
Sequence for modification, deletion, or copying. To delete a Motor Sequence Library data, click on the
Delete button on the current page. e-DPP will request confirmation to delete the selected library data.
The Motor Sequence Library also contains a certain LCS Circuit. In another word, LCS Circuit
components are a subset of a certain Motor Sequence. Therefore, when you change the LCS Circuit
Name on the Motor Sequence Library Editor, the fields associated with LCS Circuit will be updated
accordingly.
9.6.1 Motor Sequence Library Editor

This editor allows you to view and edit Motor Sequence Library data.
<Image Tab>
Name of The Sequence Diagram

You can select one of the already-stored Names of Motor Sequence Diagram from the pull-down list.
9-28
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Motor Sequence
The Names of Motor Sequence Diagram is unique in a library file dedicated to the project.
Sequence ID (Not editable)

System internal code to identify the sequence pattern
File (Image File Path & Name)

The full path and image file name corresponding to the Motor Sequence Diagram are shown in this
field. You can replace with any other image files for that the file types are .gif, .jpeg or .wmf supported
by MS Windows system.
Note: Image files cannot be edited and are not exactly linked to the patterns of checkboxes in the tabs
"MCC/LCS" and "CCR/LP (PLC)".
<MCC/LCS Tab>
Start Button/Switch, etc

When the checkbox for each component is checked or the values are selected from the pull-down
boxes, that component and properties will be included in the current Motor Sequence Diagram.
Note: Even when the data of LCS Circuit have been updated in the LCS Circuit library, the
corresponding data in the Motor Sequence library are not automatically updated. You need to select
9-29
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Motor Sequence
the same LCS Circuit Name from the pull-down box again to update the associate data from LCS
Circuit library.
<CCR/LP (PLC) Tab>
The same combination of "Checked" or "Unchecked" in all checkboxes is allowed, but the Name of
Motor Sequence Diagram need to be different to one another. e-DPP will ask you to differentiate the
same pattern of Motor Sequence by counting up the last digits of Sequence ID which has to be always
unique.
9-30
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Motor Sequence
9.6.2 Motor Sequence Library: Add Menu

Select this option to input the new Motor Sequence Diagram Name and requirements of each
component you wish to add to the library.
unique.
9-31
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Motor Sequence
9.6.3 Motor Sequence Library: Copy Menu

Select this option to copy the data corresponding to one Motor Sequence Diagram to a new one.
unique.
9-32
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Motor Sequence
9.6.4 Motor Sequence Library: Quick Pick

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by clicking on the button "Lib" on the
motor-sequence-related Edit sheets (Switchgear/MCC Schedule). The Library Quick Pick options are a
compilation of the information you have specified for this element.
Select your choice of Name of the Sequence Diagram.

"None" button is available to clear all motor sequence associated properties from a certain (cursor
location) record of database.
confirmation:
9-33
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
HV Circuit Breaker
9.7 HV Circuit Breaker

The High Voltage Circuit Breaker Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system.
ANSI, IEC or JIS libraries are available, depending upon which standard is selected for each
individual circuit breaker. The library header is defined by Standard and Manufacturer information.
You can have unlimited manufacturers within the library for each standard. Unlimited models are
available within each manufacturer, as shown below.
Header
High Voltage
Circuit Breaker
Library
Record
ANSI
Manufacturer
Model
IEC
Manufacturer
Model
JIS
Manufacturer
Model
Manufacturer
Model
9.7.1 HV Circuit Breaker Library: Entrance Menu
The High Voltage Circuit Breaker Library allows you to add new high voltage circuit breaker models
or select existing high voltage circuit breaker models for modification, deletion, or copying. To edit a
high voltage circuit breaker model, click on the Edit button after highlighting it. To delete a high
voltage circuit breaker model, click on the Delete button after highlighting a model. e-DPP will
request confirmation to delete the selected model.
manufacturer.
9-34
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
HV Circuit Breaker
9.7.2 HV Circuit Breaker Library Editor

e-DPP allows you to edit the existing data corresponding to a particular Manufacturer name. Select
(highlight) your choice of Manufacturer Name and click on Edit button. The window below appears:
ANSI Standard
Model ID
Enter the manufacturer designated model ID or number. Model ID has to be unique within a selected
standard and a selected manufacturer name.
Model Name
Enter the manufacturer designated model name.
Test Std.
Select the circuit breaker standard as Sym or Tot rated from the list box.
Sym Rated AC high voltage circuit breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis
Tot Rated AC high voltage circuit breaker rated on a total current basis
Int. Cy
Select the rated interrupting time for ac high voltage circuit breakers in cycles from the list box.
CB Cycle
2
3
Description
2-cycle ac high voltage circuit breakers with 1.5-cycle minimum contact parting time
3-cycle ac high voltage circuit breakers with 2-cycle minimum contact parting time
9-35
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
CB Cycle
5
8
HV Circuit Breaker
Description
Continuous (A)
Enter the continuous current rating of the HV CB in amperes.
Max. Rated (kV)

Enter the rated maximum kV of the HV CB in rms kV.
Rated Int. (kA)

Enter the rated short-circuit current (rated interrupting capability) at the rated maximum kV in rms kA.
C & L rms (kA)

Enter the closing and latching capability of the HV CB in asymmetrical rms kA. This value is equal to
1.6 times the maximum interrupting capability.
C & L Crest (kA)

Enter the closing and latching capability of the HV CB in crest kA. This value is equal to 2.7 times the
maximum interrupting capability.
TRV T1 (micro-s)
Enter the transient recovery voltage delay time in micro-seconds.
TRV T2 (micro-s)
Enter the transient recovery voltage time to peak value in micro-seconds.
TRV Rate
Enter the transient recovery voltage rated increase rate in kV/micro-second.
IEC & JIS Standard

Model ID
Model Name
FPC Factor
Enter the first-pole-to-clear factor of the HV CB.
Rated (A)
Enter the rated normal current of the HV CB in amperes.
Rated (kV)
Enter the rated voltage of the HV CB in kV.
9-36
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
HV Circuit Breaker
TRV
Enter the transient recovery voltage of the HV CB in kV.
Making (kA)
Enter the rated making capacity of the HV CB in peak kA. The rated making capacity for a circuit
breaker is determined by the evaluation of the maximum possible peak value of the short-circuit
current at the point of application of the circuit breaker.
AC Breaking (kA)
Enter the AC component of the rated short-circuit breaking current in kA.
Min. Time Delay (sec)

Enter the minimum time delay, including the circuit breaker and relays, in seconds.
(Note)
In case that the manufacturers specify the minimum time delay in cycle, the data in cycle have been
converted into second on 60cycle/sec basis.
9.7.3 HV Circuit Breaker Library: Add Menu

Select this option to input the Manufacturer Name you wish to add to the library. You can edit the
properties of the new selection by highlighting it from the list provided, then clicking on the Edit
button.
9-37
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
HV Circuit Breaker
9.7.4 HV Circuit Breaker Library: Copy Menu

The selected HV circuit breaker can be edited by highlighting it from the list provided, then clicking
on the Edit button.
9-38
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
LV Circuit Breaker
9.8 LV Circuit Breaker

The Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. ANSI,
IEC or JIS libraries are available, depending upon which standard is selected for each individual
circuit breaker. The library header is defined by Standard and Manufacturer information. You can have
unlimited manufacturers within the library for each standard. Unlimited models are available within
each manufacturer, as shown below.
Header
Low Voltage
Circuit Breaker
Library
Record
ANSI
IEC
Manufacturer
Model
Manufacturer
Model
JIS
Manufacturer
Model
Manufacturer
Model
9.8.1 LV Circuit Breaker Library: Entrance Menu
The Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Library allows you to add new low voltage circuit breaker models or
select existing low voltage circuit breaker models for modification, deletion, or copying. To edit a low
voltage circuit breaker model, click on the Edit button after highlighting it. To delete a low voltage
circuit breaker model, click on the Delete button after highlighting a model. e-DPP will request
confirmation to delete the selected model.
manufacturer.
9-39
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
LV Circuit Breaker
9.8.2 LV Circuit Breaker Library Editor

ANSI Standard
Model ID
Model Name
Continuous (A)
Enter the continuous current rating of the LV CB in amperes.
Rated (kV)
Enter the rated voltage of the LV CB in kV.
Interrupting (kA)
Enter the rated interrupting capability in rms kA.
Test PF
This is the power factor of test equipment on which the rating of the circuit breaker has been
established.
9-40
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
LV Circuit Breaker
Fused
For power and insulated case circuit breakers, select Fused or Unfused by clicking on the selection
box.
IEC & JIS Standard

Model ID
Model Name
Rated (A)
Enter the rated normal current of the LV CB in amperes.
Rated (kV)
Enter the rated voltage of the LV CB in kV.
Making (kA)
Enter the rated making capacity of the LV CB in peak kA. The rated making capacity for a circuit
breaker is determined by evaluation of the maximum possible peak value of the short-circuit current at
the point of application of the circuit breaker.
Breaking (kA)
Enter the rated breaking capacity of the LV CB in kA.
Min. Time Delay (sec)

Enter the minimum time delay, including the circuit breaker and relays, in seconds.
9-41
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
LV Circuit Breaker
9.8.3 LV Circuit Breaker Library: Add Menu

button.
9.8.4 LV Circuit Breaker Library: Copy Menu

The selected LV circuit breaker can be edited by highlighting it from the list provided, then clicking on
the Edit button.
9-42
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Fuse
9.9 Fuse
The Fuse Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. ANSI, IEC or JIS libraries are
available, depending upon which standard is selected for each individual fuse. The library header is
defined by Standard and Manufacturer information. You can have unlimited manufacturers within the
library for each standard. Unlimited models are available within each manufacturer, as shown below.
Header
Fuse Library
Record
ANSI
Manufacturer
Model
IEC
Manufacturer
Model
JIS
Manufacturer
Model
Manufacturer
Model
9.9.1 Fuse Library: Entrance Menu
The Fuse Library allows you to add new fuse models or select existing fuse models for modification,
deletion, or copying. To edit a fuse model, click on the Edit button after highlighting it. To delete a
fuse model, click on the Delete button after highlighting a model. e-DPP will request confirmation to
delete the selected model.
manufacturer.
9-43
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Fuse
9.9.2 Fuse Library Editor

ANSI Standard
Model ID
Model Name
Rated (A)
Enter the rated continuous current in amperes.
Rated (kV)
Enter the rated maximum voltage in kV.
Interrupting (kA)
Enter the rated interrupting capability of the fuse in symmetrical rms kA.
Test PF
Enter the testing short-circuit power factor in percent.
9-44
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Fuse
IEC & JIS Standard

Model ID
Model Name
Rated (A)
Rated (kV)
Enter the rated maximum voltage in kV.
Breaking (kA)
Enter the rated breaking capacity in kA.
TRV
Enter the transient recovery voltage (kV peak) in kV.
9.9.3 Fuse Library: Add Menu

button.
9-45
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Fuse
9.9.4 Fuse Library: Copy Menu

The selected fuse can be edited by highlighting it from the list provided, then clicking on the Edit
button.
9-46
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
MCCB
9.10 MCCB
The MCCB (Molded Case Circuit Breaker) Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory
system. ANSI, IEC or JIS libraries are available, depending upon which standard is selected for each
individual MCCB. The library header is defined by Standard, Manufacturer, Rated Voltage and
Number of Poles information. You can have unlimited manufacturers within the library for each
standard. Unlimited models are available within each manufacturer, each rated voltage and each
number of poles, as shown below.
Header
MCCB Library
ANSI
IEC
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
JIS
Manufacturer
Record
Volt
Volt
Volt
Manufacturer
Pole
Pole
Model
Model
Pole
Model
Pole
Model
9.10.1 MCCB Library: Entrance Menu
The MCCB Library allows you to add new MCCB models or select existing MCCB models for
modification, deletion, or copying. To edit a MCCB model, click on the Edit button after highlighting
it. To delete a MCCB model, click on the Delete button after highlighting a model. e-DPP will request
confirmation to delete the selected model.
manufacturer.
9-47
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
MCCB
9.10.2 MCCB Library Editor

ANSI Standard
Model ID
standard, manufacturer name, rated voltage and number of poles.
Model Name
Frame (A)
Enter the frame current in amperes.
Rated (A)
Interrupting (kA)
Enter the rated interrupting capability of the MCCB in symmetrical rms kA.
Momentary (kA)
Enter the rated momentary capability of the MCCB in symmetrical rms kA.
9-48
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
MCCB
IEC & JIS Standard

Model ID
standard, manufacturer name, rated voltage and number of poles.
Model Name
Frame (A)
Enter the frame current in amperes.
Rated (A)
Breaking (kA)
Enter the rated breaking capability of the MCCB in symmetrical rms kA.
(Note)
In case that there are two kinds of Breaking kA indicated in manufacturer's technical data sheets, i.e.
"Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking current" (Icu) and "Rated service short-circuit breaking current"
(Ics), the Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking currents have been stored in e-DPP standard library as
the Rated short circuit breaking current (this column).
Making (kA)
Enter the rated making capability of the MCCB in symmetrical rms kA.
9-49
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
MCCB
9.10.3 MCCB Library: Add Menu

Select this option to input the Manufacturer Name, Rated Voltage and Number of Poles you wish to
add to the library. You can edit the properties of the new selection by highlighting it from the list
provided, then clicking on the Edit button.
9.10.4 MCCB Library: Copy Menu

Select this option to copy the data corresponding to one header consisting of manufacturer name, rated
voltage and number of poles to a new header. The selected MCCB can be edited by highlighting it
from the list provided, then clicking on the Edit button.
9-50
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Static Load
9.11 Static Load

9.11.1 Static Load Library: Entrance Menu
The Static Load Library allows you to add new static load characteristics or select existing
characteristics, based on the selections made for Frequency, Unit, Phase, Manufacturer and KV for
modification, deletion, or copying. To edit a Static Load Library, click on the Edit button after
highlighting it. To delete a Static Load Library entry, click on the Delete button after highlighting an
index you are deleting. e-DPP will request confirmation to delete the selected library entry.
9-51
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Static Load
9.11.2 Static Load Library Editor

This spreadsheet editor allows you to view and edit Static Load Library data.
Output (HP/kW)
Enter rated capacity of static load (HP or kW).
FLA (A)
Enter full load current of static load in amperes.
PF100 (%)
Enter power factor of static load at 100% loading in percent.
KVA
Enter rated kVA of static load.
Note: The mathematical relation among those 4 parameters should be maintained.
9-52
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Static Load
9.11.3 Static Load Library: Add Menu

Select this option to input the Manufacturer Name, kV, Frequency, Unit and Phase of the static load
you wish to add to the library. You can edit the properties of the new static load selection by
9.11.4 Static Load Library: Copy Menu

Select this option to copy the data corresponding to one header static load to new one. This function
can be useful if you wish to change a few specifications in the library entry without modifying the
original data. The properties of the new selection can be edited by highlighting it from the list
provided, then clicking on the Edit button.
9-53
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Open (Changing Library File)
9.12 Open (Changing Library File)
This option allows you to choose a new library to be associated with the current e-DPP project. The
old library will be disconnected. To open a library, locate the appropriate directory and highlight the
file located in the directory, then click on Open. This is now the library attached to the project file.
9-54
e-DPP 4.0.2
Library
Save As
9.13 Save As
Select this option to save the current library as a new library file. The new library file contains all the
information in the current library under a new name in a new or same location (directory). If the name
for the new library already exists in the selected directory, e-DPP gives you a message to change the
new file name. The new library must have a .mdb extension.
<End of Chapter 9>
9-55
e-DPP 4.0.2
Chapter 10
Defaults
Defaults group can be accessed from Start ribbon tab. The options available in this group are
used to set default parameters that affect the whole project.
This includes information such as equipment defaults, site area and value list. It is highly
recommended that you review and modify this information before you start various e-DPP
transactions. The Defaults group provides the following commands:
Induction Motor
Specify the default data for induction motors that will be

referred by Data Filling program.
Site Area
Specify the site area information that will be referred by Data

Filling program.
Value List
Edit the value list that is widely referred by e-DPP program.
10-1
e-DPP 4.0.2
Defaults
Site Area
10.1 Site Area

Information on the Site Area entered here is referred by the Data Filling - Motor program. The
individual loads in the Electrical Load Schedule have the field of Site Area, and then are linked to the
information entered here.
For more information on Data Filling - Motor, see Section-11, Data Filling.
Site Area ID
Enter the area ID (code) of plant site with a maximum 20 characters.
Hazardous Area Class

<IEC>
Zone 0, Zone 1, Zone 2 or Non-Class
<ANSI>
Class 1 Div 1, Class 1 Div 2 or Non-Class
<JIS>
None
Explosion Protection - Symbol

Explosion protection
<IEC>
"Exd", "Exp", "Exq", "Exo", "Exe", "ExIa", "ExIb", "Exs", "Exn" or "Type N"
<ANSI>
None
<JIS>
"d", "e", "i", "ia", "ib", "f", "o" or "s"
Explosion Protection - Class

Explosion class
<IEC>
II, IIA, IIB or IIC
<ANSI>
A, B, C or D
<JIS>
1, 2, 3a, 3b, 3c or 3h
10-2
e-DPP 4.0.2
Defaults
Site Area
Explosion Protection - Temp

Explosion temperature
<IEC>
"T1", "T2", "T3", "T4", "T5" or "T6"
<ANSI>
"T1", "T2", "T2A", "T2B", "T2C", "T2D", "T3", "T3A", "T3B", "T3C", "T4", "T4A", "T5" or "T6"
<JIS>
"G1", "G2", "G3", "G4" or "G5"
Enclosure Type
Type of motor enclosure
"TEFC", "TENV", "CACA" or "CACW"
Degree of Protection
Degree of protection
<IEC>
"IP44", "IP54", "IP55", "IPW44", "IPW54" or "IPW55"
<ANSI>
"NEMA 3", "NEMA 3R", "NEMA 3S", "NEMA 4", "NEMA 4X" or "NEMA 5"
Insulation Class
Insulation class
"Y": 90, "A": 105, "E": 120, "B": 130, "F": 155, "H": 180 or "C": over 180
Temperature Rise
Temperature rise of insulation
"A": 60, "E": 75, "B": 80, "F": 100 or "H": 125
Method of Corrosion Proof

Corrosion proofing
"By Paint", etc.
Noise (dBA)
Allowable Noise Level in dBA at 1meter and at full load
Raceway Type
Type of raceway of main power cable
0: U/G Duct, 1: U/G Buried, 2: A/G Trays, 3: A/G Conduit or 4: Air drop
10-3
e-DPP 4.0.2
Defaults
Induction Motor
10.2 Induction Motor

The default data associated with the electrical equipment treated in e-DPP can be entered in this menu.
The Equipment menu option allows you to select one of the following types of equipment:
Motor
- Induction Motors
Static Load - Static Loads
SM
- Synchronous Motors
(future)
MOV
- Motor Operated Valves
(future)
Transformer - Power Transformers
(future)
UPS
- Uninterruptible Power Systems (future)
BC
- Battery Chargers
(future)
Capacitor
- Power Capacitors
(future)
The Equipment Defaults Editor for motor (Induction Motor) includes three pages of information.
Rating and Specification Page
Accessories and Others Page
Cables Page
Electrical Load Schedule table is filled out with the values specified here by the Data Filling menu for
which the details are described in Section 11, Data Filling.
10-4
e-DPP 4.0.2
Defaults
Induction Motor
10.2.1 Rating and Specification Page

Within the Rating and Specification Page, specify the "Rating and Specification" and "Construction"
for induction motors.
Rating and Specification

Output Unit (HP, kW, kVA)
Select the unit system for motor rated outputs from HP, kW or kVA.
Poles
Select or enter number of pole pairs. Odd numbers are not allowed by e-DPP.
No. of Phase
Select number of phase from 3ph, 1ph or DC (direct current).
Rating (Duty)
Duty rating of motor
"Cont", "15min" or "30min"
Rotation Direction
Direction of motor rotation viewed from shaft end
"CW", "CCW" or "REV"
10-5
e-DPP 4.0.2
Defaults
Induction Motor
%Loading <1> (%)

Design loading factor in % for the loading category #1 specified in the menu "Project"
"Settings..." "Loading Categories...".
%Loading <2> (%)

%Loading <3> (%)

Starting Method
Type of motor start
0: Direct On Line, 1: Auto-xfrm, 2: Resistor, 3: Reactor, 4: Capacitor-Bus, 5: Capacitor-Terminal, 6:
Variable Freq. Drive or 7: Star-Delta
Speed Control
Speed control for motor
"C": Constant, "R": Reversible, "V": Variable, "M": Multi-Speed or "P": Pole-Change
Noise (dBA) at 1m, Full Load

Allowable Noise Level in dBA at 1meter and at full load
Service Factor
Motor service factor (1.0-1.25)
Number of Start - (Hot)

Allowable number of hot starts
Number of Start - (Cold)

Allowable number of cold starts
Motor Structure
Type of motor structure
"S": Squirrel cage or "W": Wound rotor
Construction
Type of Motor
Type of motor
"IM", "SM", "DCM", "Canned" or "Geared"
Enclosure Type
Type of motor enclosure
"TEFC", "TENV", "CACA" or "CACW"
10-6
e-DPP 4.0.2
Defaults
Induction Motor
Location
Installation location of equipment
"OD": Outdoor or "ID": Indoor
Degree of Protection
Degree of protection
<IEC>
"IP44", "IP54", "IP55", "IPW44", "IPW54" or "IPW55"
<ANSI>
"NEMA 3", "NEMA 3R", "NEMA 3S", "NEMA 4", "NEMA 4X" or "NEMA 5"
Mounting Direction
Mounting direction
"H": Horizontal or "V": Vertical
Mounting Base
Mounting base
"Foot", "Flange" or "Skirt"
Mounting Form
Mounting form
"IM1001", "IM1011", "IM1031", "IM3001", "IM3011" or "IM3031"
Hazardous Area Class

"Zone 0", "Zone 1", "Zone 2" or "Non Class"
Explosion Protection - Symbol

Explosion protection
<IEC>
"Exd", "Exp", "Exq", "Exo", "Exe", "ExIa", "ExIb", "Exs", "Exn" or "Type N"
<ANSI>
None
<JIS>
"d", "e", "i", "ia", "ib", "f", "o" or "s"
Explosion Protection - Class

Explosion class
<IEC>
II, IIA, IIB or IIC
<ANSI>
A, B, C or D
<JIS>
1, 2, 3a, 3b, 3c or 3h
Explosion Protection - Temp

Explosion temperature
<IEC>
"T1", "T2", "T3", "T4", "T5" or "T6"
<ANSI>
"T1", "T2", "T2A", "T2B", "T2C", "T2D", "T3", "T3A", "T3B", "T3C", "T4", "T4A", "T5" or "T6"
10-7
e-DPP 4.0.2
Defaults
Induction Motor
<JIS>
"G1", "G2", "G3", "G4" or "G5"
Insulation Class
Insulation class
"A": 105, "E": 120, "B": 130, "F": 155, "H": 180 or "C": over 180
Temperature Rise
Temperature rise of insulation
"A": 60, "E": 75, "B": 80, "F": 100 or "H": 125
Cooling Method
Code of cooling method
"IC4A1A1", "IC4A1A0", "IC6A1A1" or "IC8A1W7"
10-8
e-DPP 4.0.2
Defaults
Induction Motor
10.2.2 Accessories and Others Page

Within the Accessories and Others Page, specify the Space Heater, Bearing RTD, Winding RTD,
Mechanical Requirements and Others for induction motors.
Space Heater
HV Motor
Specify requirements and rating of electrical supply to space heaters for high voltage motor body.
Yes / No options
Space heaters for high voltage motors are required or not.
Minimum motor output rating
Specify the minimum output rating of high voltage motors for and above which motor space heaters
are required. Enter a value in the text box on the right of >= symbol and select its unit (HP, kW or
kVA) from the list.
Note: If kVA is selected from the list but kVA, PF or EFF value at full load is zero in the project
database, kW value is compared instead of kVA in the project database.
Phase list
10-9
e-DPP 4.0.2
Defaults
Induction Motor
Select the number of phases of space heater power for high voltage motors.
"1ph" or "3ph"
Voltage list
Select rated voltage of space heater power for high voltage motors in Volt
<Phase = "1ph">
100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 220, 230, 235 or 240
<Phase ="3ph">
380, 400, 415, 435, 440, 460 or 480
User is also allowed to enter any different value.
LV Motor
Specify requirements and rating of electrical supply to space heaters for low voltage motor body.
Yes / No options
Space heaters for low voltage motors are required or not.
Specify the minimum output rating of low voltage motors for and above which motor space heaters
are required. Enter a value in the text box on the right of >= symbol and select its unit (HP, kW or
kVA) from the list.
Phase list
Select the number of phases of space heater power for low voltage motors.
"1ph" or "3ph"
Voltage list
Select rated voltage of space heater power for low voltage motors in Volt
<Phase = "1ph">
100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 220, 230, 235 or 240
<Phase ="3ph">
380, 400, 415, 435, 440, 460 or 480
User is also allowed to enter any different value.
Bearing RTD
HV Motor
Specify required quantity and type (raw material) of bearing temperature detectors for high voltage
motors. Both drive-end (DE) and non-drive-end (NDE) may be included.
Qty
Enter quantity of bearing temperature detectors for high voltage motor.
10-10
e-DPP 4.0.2
Defaults
Induction Motor
Type
Select type of bearing temperature detectors from the list.
"Pt100", "Jpt100", "Ni100" or "Ni120"
User is also allowed to enter any different type.
Specify the minimum output rating of high voltage motors for and above which bearing temperature
detectors are required. Enter a value in the text box on the right of >= symbol and select its unit
(HP, kW or kVA) from the list.
LV Motor
Specify required quantity and type (raw material) of bearing temperature detectors for low voltage
motors. Both drive-end (DE) and non-drive-end (NDE) may be included.
Qty
Enter quantity of bearing temperature detectors for low voltage motor.
Type
Select type of bearing temperature detectors from the list.
"Pt100", "Jpt100", "Ni100" or "Ni120"
Specify the minimum output rating of low voltage motors for and above which bearing temperature
10-11
e-DPP 4.0.2
Defaults
Induction Motor
Winding RTD
HV Motor
Specify required quantity and type (raw material) of winding temperature detectors for high voltage
motors.
Qty
Enter quantity of winding temperature detectors for high voltage motor.
Type
Select type of winding temperature detectors from the list.
"Pt100", "Jpt100", "Ni100" or "Ni120"
Specify the minimum output rating of high voltage motors for and above which winding
temperature detectors are required. Enter a value in the text box on the right of >= symbol and
select its unit (HP, kW or kVA) from the list.
LV Motor
Specify required quantity and type (raw material) of winding temperature detectors for low voltage
motors.
Qty
Enter quantity of winding temperature detectors for low voltage motor.
Type
Select type of winding temperature detectors from the list.
"Pt100", "Jpt100", "Ni100" or "Ni120"
Specify the minimum output rating of low voltage motors for and above which winding temperature
10-12
e-DPP 4.0.2
Defaults
Induction Motor
Mechanical Requirements
Type of Load
Type of load
"Pump", "Fan", "Comp", "Mixer" or "Blower"
Type of Coupling
Type of coupling
"D": Direct, "B": Belt or "G": Gear
Shaft Ends
Shaft ends
"S": Single end or "D": Double ends
Type of Bearing DE
Bearing type for driving end
Ball, Sleeve or Roller
Type of Bearing NDE

Bearing type for non driving end
Ball, Sleeve or Roller
Type/Name of Lubricant
Type or brand of lubricant
"G": Grease, "O": Oil or "OM": Oil Mist
Bearing Insulation
Bearing insulation required or not
Base for Motor

Base for motor required or not
Key for Coupling

Shaft end key required or not
Canopy
Canopy required or not
Others
Code of Finish Paint
Final paint color
"RAL7034", "Munsell N7" or "Munsell 5Y7/1"
Method of Corrosion Proof

Corrosion proofing
10-13
e-DPP 4.0.2
Defaults
Induction Motor
"By Paint", etc.
10-14
e-DPP 4.0.2
Defaults
Induction Motor
10.2.3 Cables Page

Within the Cables Page, specify the Cable Specification, Main Power Cable, Cable Installation and
Cable Numbering for induction motors.
Cable Specification
Cable Type
Type of cable in text format
(e.g. "XLPE/PVC", "CV", "PEI")
Cable Voltage
Rated voltage of cable
(e.g. "600V")
Number of Wires
Number of wires (conductors) in cable
Units of Wires
Description of cores
"C" core, "P" pair, "T" tri or "Q" quad
10-15
e-DPP 4.0.2
Defaults
Induction Motor
Cable Size
Cable Size in text format
Main Power Cable

Default Length (m)
Default length of power cable run in meter
Position of TB
TB position on motor viewed from shaft end
"Side", "Left", "Right", "Top" or "Bottom"
Cable Installation
Raceway Type
Type of raceway of main power cable
0: U/G Duct, 1: U/G Buried, 2: A/G Trays, 3: A/G Conduit or 4: Air drop
Cable Numbering
Head
Header part of cable ID for auto-numbering
"Item No.", "P" or "P1" (For power cable)
Foot
Footer part of cable ID for auto-numbering
"Item No.", "P" or "P1" (For power cable)
Note: The same combination of Head and Foot, e.g. "Item No." + "P", among Power, LCS, CCR and
SH (space heater) is not allowed to avoid duplications in cable IDs.
Suffix for Over One Cables / Phase

Suffix for auto-numbering for over one cables per phase for one load
0: Numeric & Foot
1: Numeric & Head
2: Alphabet & Foot
3: Alphabet & Head
Suffix for Single Core Cables

Suffix for auto-numbering for single core cables for one load
0: Alphabet-1 "A", "B", "C"
1: Alphabet-2 "R", "S", "T"
2: Numeric "1", "2", "3"
10-16
e-DPP 4.0.2
Defaults
Value List
10.3 Value List

The "Value List" is one of the e-DPP database tables and manages the candidate values that are shown
on the pull-down boxes in all Edit forms.
You can edit, add or delete those items and/or the registered values. The exception is that you are not
allowed to alter the system lists for that "Lock" cells are checked.
Each field has to have at least one record in the list, so you cannot delete the last one record of any
items.
Table List
Select a table from the list, which you want to view its field list.
Field List
Select a field from the list, which you want to view or edit it contents.
Lock
When this cell is checked, you cannot edit or delete this record which is controlled by the e-DPP
system.
Text
If the field is text type, enter characters into this cell. For information on the maximum lengths you
can enter, see Chapter-16, Database Field Descriptions.
Numeric
If the field is numeric type, enter a value into this cell. Even if the field type is NOT numeric, the
entered values are used to sort the records. So, if you have preference in indicating the text contents in
a certain order, you can control that with this field.
10-17
e-DPP 4.0.2
Defaults
Value List
Yes/No
This cell cannot be edited.
Full Description
Enter any description with a maximum 20 characters corresponding to the field content.
Abbr.
Enter any abbreviation with a maximum 10 characters corresponding to the field content.
System Default
(Not used in the current e-DPP version.)
User Default
(Not used in the current e-DPP version.)
<End of Chapter 10>
10-18
e-DPP 4.0.2
Chapter 11
Data Filling
e-DPP provides a function to fill up a number of table fields with the defaults data specified by user or
the field values of the other upstream (source) tables.
10-1
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Filling
Outline
11.1 Outline
The target tables into which the Data Filling is performed are:
Induction Motors
Static Loads
Cable
Switchgear / MCC
LCS
(DPPElecLoad table)
(DPPElecLoad table)
(DPPCable table)
(DPPSwgrMcc table)
(DPPLCS)
The table relations for the Data Filling are illustrated below.
The Electrical Load Schedule table is filled out with the defaults data specified in the Motor Default
(See Section 10.2) and Static Load Default (See Section 11.3) tables, and also with Motor and Cable
libraries.
Therefore, the fields for induction motors and static loads in the Electrical Load Schedule table will be
filled. The other type of equipment, e.g. SM, MOV, Capacitor, will NOT be filled out with any values
(in this e-DPP version).
Note: The records of table that will be targeted by the Data Filling can be protected against
overwriting by means of the flag "Lock" (Field name is [FinalData]).
10-2
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Filling
Motor (Induction Motors)
11.2 Motor (Induction Motors)

A great part of Electrical Load Schedule (DPPElecLoad) may be filled up with default data defined in
Project Information (DPPProjectRec), Motor Default Data (DPPMotorDefault), Static Load Default
Data (DPPStaticDefault), Motor Library (LIBMotor) and Cable Library (LIBCable) by selecting the
menu bar "Defaults - Data Filling - Motor".
However, if the field DPPElecLoad [FinalData] ("Lock") is "Yes", "Data Filling" is not performed on
the record. If you like to overwrite the record, [FinalData] needs to be altered to "No" prior to
overwriting as shown above.
Fill Up button
Start the Data Filling.
Target of Data Filling

"Data Filling" has the following 2 modes:
10-3
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Filling
Blank/Zero Data Only

Limiting to the fields of which contents are blank or zero
All Data
All the applicable fields regardless of their contents (blank or not)
You may select one of the above 2 modes before starting "Data Filling".
Set All
If "Set All" button is clicked, all the check boxes become true.
Reset All
If "Reset All" button is clicked, all the check boxes become false.
Set
If "Set" button is clicked, all the check boxes within that area become true.
Reset
If "Reset" button is clicked, all the check boxes within that area become false.
Options - Motor Library

When Options button is clicked, the following dialog appear:
Manufacturer Name Page

You can select an option to determine a value of search key field for motor manufacturer.
HV Motor (Over 1 kV)

When "Specify MFR" (toggle button) is selected, the pull down box that shows the uniquely filtered
Manufacturer Names will appear. A default value shown in this box is "DPP".
When "Specify MFR" is selected and a certain MFR is specified, that MFR will become a search key
regardless of the actual values of Manufacturer Name in the Electrical Load Schedule (DPPElecLoad
[MFRName]).
Another toggle button is "As per Elec. Load Schedule". When this option is selected, actual values of
Manufacturer Name in the Electrical Load Schedule (DPPElecLoad [MFRName]) have priorities as
10-4
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Filling
a search key. If DPPElecLoad [MFRName] is blank, a search key is automatically set to "DPP".
Changing the Manufacturer Name in this dialog does not affect the field values in the Electrical Load
Schedule (DPPElecLoad [MFRName]).
LV Motor
Same as "HV Motor" except that the filtering key is KV <= 1.0.
Enclosure Type Page

When the check box "Apply Default Enclosure Type" is selected, the pull down box that shows the
uniquely filtered Enclosure Types of the motor library will appear. A default value shown in this box is
"TEFC".
When this check box is checked and DPPElecLoad [EnclosureType] is blank, a search key is set to
the selected value of the pull down box.
When this check box is checked and DPPElecLoad [EnclosureType] is not blank, an actual value of
DPPElecLoad [EnclosureType] has priority as a search key.
When this check box is not checked, the actual values of DPPElecLoad [EnclosureType] including
"blank" values have priorities as a search key.
(This means that non-blank values have always priorities.)
The default status of this check box is "Checked".
Changing the Enclosure Type in this dialog does not affect the field values in the Electrical Load
Schedule (DPPElecLoad [EnclosureType]).
When "OK" button is finally clicked, all the above options set by a user are saved in the system and
displayed at the next time.
10-5
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Filling
Options - Cable Library

When Options button is clicked, the dialog below appear:
You can select an option to determine a value of search key field for cable manufacturer from the pull
down box that shows the uniquely filtered cable manufacturers in the cable library. A default value
shown in this box is "DPP".
When "OK" button is finally clicked, the manufacturer name set by the user is saved in the system and
displayed at the next time.
Execution of Data Filling

When "Fill Up" button is clicked, the data filling process begins in the following order where the
checkboxes are checked:
By Motor Default Data (Part-1)

By Motor Default Data (Part-1)
By Project Information
By Motor Library
By Cable Library
By Motor Default Data (DPPMotorDefault)

Most of the applicable fields in DPPElecLoad are filled with contents in DPPMotorDefault as they
are, with no alternation. The exceptions are shown below.
(1) Standard Dependent Fields

e-DPP switches default values of the standard dependent fields reflecting the selected standard in
DPPProjectRec [Standard]. An example of such field is [DegreeProtection].
i)
[SpaceHeaterHV] & [SpaceHeaterLV]

[SpaceHeaterHV] and [SpaceHeaterLV] are transferred to DPPElecLoad [SpaceHeater]
on the following conditions;
[SpaceHeaterHV] is applied to records of [KV] > 1.0 and [HP_KW] >= xxx.
[SpaceHeaterLV] is applied to records of [KV] <= 1.0 and [HP_KW] >= yyy.
Where xxx and yyy are values specified in the Default Data Induction Motor.
For more details, refer to Chapter-10.2.2.
10-6
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Filling
Only when the resultant DPPELecLoad [SpaceHeater] = Yes, the associated fields
[SpaceHeaterPhase] and [SpaceHeaterVolt] are transferred from DPPMotorDefault.
When DPPELecLoad [SpaceHeater] is changed to "No" from "Yes" by Data Filling,
DPPELecLoad [SpaceHeaterPhase] and [SpaceHeaterVolt] will be cleared.
ii) [BearingRTDQtyHV] & [BearingRTDQtyLV]
[BearingRTDQtyHV] and [BearingRTDQtyLV] are transferred to DPPElecLoad
[BearingRTDQty] on the following conditions;
[BearingRTDQtyHV] is applied to records of [KV] > 1.0 and [HP_KW] >= xxx.
[BearingRTDQtyLV] is applied to records of [KV] <= 1.0 and [HP_KW] >= yyy.
Where xxx and yyy are values specified in the Default Data Induction Motor.
For more details, refer to Chapter-10.2.2.
At the same time, DPPElecLoad [BearingRTD] is set "Yes" if the resultant DPPElecLoad
[BearingRTDQty] is not zero. When DPPELecLoad [BearingRTDQty] is changed to zero
from non-zero values by Data Filling, DPPELecLoad [BearingRTD] will be changed to
"No".
iii) [WindingRTDQtyHV] & [WindingRTDQtyLV]
The same procedure as the above ii) is applied.
iv) [BearingRTDType] & [WindingRTDType]
These 2 fields are filled up only when the corresponding quantities [BearingRTDQty] and
[WindingRTDQty] are not zero.
When DPPELecLoad [BearingRTD] or [WindingRTD] is changed to "No" from "Yes" by
Data Filling, DPPELecLoad [BearingRTDType] or [WindingRTDType] will be cleared
respectively.
v) [LCSLengthValue]
When "Power Cable" is selected for Data Filling on the entrance menu, [LCSLengthValue]
is filled out with the same value [LengthValue].
vi) [SHLengthValue] & Other Fields Related to SH Cable
When "Power Cable" is selected for Data Filling on the entrance menu and the resultant
DPPELecLoad [SpaceHeater] = Yes, [SHLengthValue] is filled out with the same value
[LengthValue] for Power Cable.
Moreover, the following 6 fields related to SH cables are synchronized with the resultant
DPPELecLoad [SpaceHeater] (Yes or No) as well as [SHLengthValue].
[SHCableID]
[SHCableTypeText]
[SHCableVoltage]
[SHNumberOfWires]
[SHUnitsOfWire]
[SHCabSize]
That is, only when DPPELecLoad [SpaceHeater] is "Yes", the above 6 fields are filled out.
When it's "No", these fields plus [SHCableODValue], [SHCondODValue] will be cleared.
vii) [PowerCableID] (DPPElecLoad)
When [PowerCableIDHead] and [PowerCableIDFoot] of DPPMotorDefault are not
empty, [PowerCableID] in DPPElecLoad is filled up with the following string;
10-7
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Filling
[PowerCableID]
= [PowerCableIDHead] + [PowerCableIDFoot]
When [PowerCableIDHead] is "Item No.", a content of [PowerCableIDHead] becomes a

variable (a pointer to the other field or sequential numbers). For example, if
[PowerCableIDHead] = "Item No." ([ID]), [ID] = "PM-1200A" and [PowerCableIDFoot]
= "P":
[PowerCableID] = [PowerCableIDHead] + [PowerCableIDFoot]
= [ID] + [PowerCableIDFoot]
= "PM-1200A" + "P"
= "PM-1200A-P" (A hyphen is automatically inserted.)
The above procedures and rules are analogically applied to the other cable categories; LCS,
CCR and Space heater.
The same combination among Power, LCS, CCR and SH is not permitted because this may
produce the same cable ID. (Cable ID has to be always unique in an overall project.)
For example, when [PowerCableIDHead] & [SHCabelIDHead] = "Item No." ([ID]) and
[PowerCableIDFoot] & [SHCableIDFoot] = "P", both of [PowerCableID] and
[SHCableID] become "PM-1200A-P" and are not unique anymore.
viii) Site Area Table ([DPPSiteArea])
If the Site Area table (DPPSiteArea) exists and has one or more records in it, the following
fields will be transferred from DPPSiteArea to DPPElecLoad instead of
DPPMotorDefault with the key field [SiteArea];
[HazardAreaClass]
[ExpProtection]
[ExpClass]
[ExpTemp]
[EnclosureType]
[DegreeProtection]
[InsulationClass]
[InsulationTemp]
[Corrosion]
[Noise]
[RacewayType]
However, the following exceptions exist;
If DPPElecLoad [SiteArea] is blank, DPPMotorDefault is referred instead.

If DPPElecLoad [SiteArea] is not found in DPPSiteArea [SiteArea],
DPPMotorDefault is referred instead.
When a certain field (not [SiteArea]) value of DPPSiteArea is blank or zero after
[SiteArea] is matched between DPPElecLoad and DPPSiteArea, blank or zero may be
filled out into DPPElecLoad. It will not perform to refer DPPMotorDefault instead. (That
is regarded as an intentional zero or blank.)
By Project Information (DPPProjectRec)

Motor rated voltage [KV] is filled up according to the following procedure:
10-8
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Filling
<DPPProjectRec [HP_KW] = 1 (KW)>

When motor output [KW] is between DPPProjectRec [MinKWfor***] and DPPProjectRec
[MaxKWfor***], a value of DPPProjectRec [Voltage***] is filled into [KV] (*** is HV1, HV2,
MV1, MV2, LV3Ph1 or LV3Ph2).
For example;
Motor [KW]
= 350
[MinKWforMV2] = 151
[MaxKWforMV2] = 1500
[VoltageMV2]
= 3.3
[KV] of DPPElecLoad becomes 3.3
<DPPProjectRec [HP_KW] = 0 (HP)>
If DPPElecLoad [HP_KW] <> 0 and <> 1, skip the record for [KV] data filling.
If DPPElecLoad [HP_KW] = 1 (kW), the following unit adjustment is done prior to the comparison
with DPPProjectRec [MinKWfor***] and DPPProjectRec [MaxKWfor***];
DPPElecLoad [HP] = DPPElecLoad [HP] / 0.7457
If DPPElecLoad [HP_KW] = 0, a similar procedure to the above is applied.
For example;
Motor [HP]
= 500
[MinKWforMV2] = 200
[MaxKWforMV2] = 2000
[VoltageMV2]
= 4.16
[KV] of DPPElecLoad becomes 4.16
"Data Filling" is performed for induction motors only on this dialog, of which the field [EquipType] =
0 ("IM"), and not done for [VoltageLV1Ph] since [KW] range for [VoltageLV1Ph] is usually over
wrapped by that for [VoltageLV3Ph1] or [VoltageLV3Ph2].
By Motor Library (LIBMotor)

The following fields for induction motors are filled up with the motor library data (LIBMotor), as a
user's preference;
Noise
IFL
MachineRpm
PF100
PF75
PF50
EFF100
EFF75
EFF50
LRC
PFlr
MotorLRTrq
MotorPullUpTrq
MotorBreakDownTrq
MotorFullLoadTrq
10-9
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Filling
MotorGD2
MotorWR2 (*)
(*) MotorWR2 is not included in the motor library (LIBMotor). It is calculated from MotorGD2.
If the record is found in the motor library (LIBMotor), the above listed fields of DPPElecLoad are
replaced with those of the motor library.
If the record is not found in the motor library, the search conditions are relaxed or linear
interpolation/extrapolation are performed.
By Cable Library (LIBCable)

The following fields for power, LCS, CCR and SH cables are filled up with the cable library data
(LIBCable), as a user's preference;
CableODValue
CondODValue
LCSCableODValue
LCSCondODValue
CCRCableODValue
CCRCondODValue
SHCableODValue
SHCondODValue
10-10
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Filling
Static Load
11.3 Static Load
Fill Up
Start the Data Filling.
"Data Filling" has the following 2 modes:
Blank/Zero Data Only

Limited to the fields of which contents are blank or zero
All Data
All the applicable fields regardless of their contents (blank or not)
You may select one of the above 2 modes before starting "Data Filling".
Set All
If "Set All" button is clicked, all the check boxes become true.
Reset All
If "Reset All" button is clicked, all the check boxes become false.
By Static Load Default Data (DPPStaticDefault)

Some of the applicable fields for static loads in the Electrical Load Schedule (DPPElecLoad) are
filled with the values in the Static Load Default data (DPPStaticDefault) as they are, with no
alteration. The exceptions are shown below.
10-11
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Filling
Static Load
i) Braking Horse Power ([BHP])

<HP_KW=0> (HP)
BHP =
% Loading 0.7457 HP
100
<HP_KW=1> (kW)
BHP =
% Loading HP
100
<HP_KW=2> (kVA)
BHP =
% Loading PF100 HP
10000
<HP_KW=3> (kvar)
BHP = 0
These formulas are applicable to [BHP] vs. [PercentLoad0], [BHP1] vs. [PercentLoad1] and
[BHP2] vs. [PercentLoad2].
ii) Full Load Current ([IFL])

<[PhaseNo] ="1" & [HP_KW] = 0 or 1>
IFL =
100 KW
KV PF100
<[PhaseNo] ="1" & [HP_KW] = 2>
IFL =
HP
KV
<[PhaseNo] ="3" & [HP_KW] = 0 or 1>
IFL =
100 KW
3 KV PF100
<[PhaseNo] ="3" & [HP_KW] = 2>
IFL =
HP
3 KV
[IFL] (A) = [HP] / (SQRT(3) * [KV] )
iii) Main Power Cable ID ([PowerCableID])

[PowerCableID] is filled out by the same procedure as for Induction Motor ([EquipType]=0).
By Cable Library (LIBCable)

The following fields for power cables are filled up with the cable library data (LIBCable), as a user's
preference;
10-12
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Filling
Static Load
CableODValue
CondODValue
10-13
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Filling
Cable
11.4 Cable
Electrical Load Schedule (DPPElecLoad) contains cable data directly associated with the loads.
These cable data may be transferred to Cable Schedule (DPPCable) through Data Filling Cable
process.
As long as Cable IDs exists in Electrical Load Schedule (DPPElecLoad), these cables are candidates
for transfer to Cable Schedule (DPPCable). And once transferred to Cable Schedule, these cables
still maintain association with their counterpart in Electrical Load Schedule.
Refer to Table 1 and Table 2 for the correlation of relevant fields in Project Standard (DPPProjRec)
and in Electrical Load Schedule (DPPElecLoad) respectively with some of the fields in Cable
Schedule (DPPCable).
The rest of the fields in Cable Schedule (DPPCable) not listed in Table 1 and Table 2 are independent,
hence their value are not affected by cable data filling process.
In addition, those cables which were created within Cable Schedule (not through Electrical Load
Schedule) exercise independency. Meaning, these cables are not affected by Cable Data filling
process too.
Notes:
1. Cables for bearing RTDs and winding RTDs are not treated in the Electrical Load Schedule and
therefore cannot be transferred to the Cable Schedule.
2. If you specify "Triplex Cable" (UnitsOfWire="T") for power cables, NumberOfWires has to be
10-14
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Filling
Cable
set "3" for one cable in the Electrical Load Schedule. If NumberOfWires is set "1" and
UnitsOfWire is "T", e-DPP expands it to "3" cables in the Cable Schedule in a similar way to
other types of cables against your intent. You need to be careful that all triplex cables in the
e-DPP Cable Library are set as NumberOfWires is "1" for conventional engineering application.
Therefore, when you retrieve triplex cable data from the library, NumberOfWires needs to be
altered to "3" for that purpose.
Target Cables
Select the following type (according to uses) of cables as the target for transfer to Cable Schedule
Power
Power Cable
LCS (Push Button)

Local control cable
CCR (DSC)
Control cable from DCS or PLC
SH (Space Heater)
Space heater cable
Cable ID - Naming Convention

Transfer IDs from Electrical Load Schedule
This option will transfer the Cable ID (as is structure) from Electrical Load Schedule to Cable
Schedule except for power cables with parallel and single core configuration which are further treated
as follows;
Electrical Load Schedule treats equipment and its power cable in 1 is to 1 approach, meaning
two or more cables are considered only as one entity when supplying the same equipment.
However, in Cable Schedule system, these cables are generally treated as individual entities and
are entitled for individual ID.
Suffix for Parallel Cables

Suffix will be concatenated to the power cable ID emanating from Electrical Load Schedule in
increment of 1 unit.
1,2,3 (PM-1200A-P"1")
Numerical suffix
A,B,C (PM-1200A-P"A")
Alphabetical suffix
Hyphen (PM-1200A-P"-"1)
Option to insert hyphen before the suffix.
Suffix for Single Core Cables

Suffix will be concatenated to the power cable ID emanating from Electrical Load Schedule.
10-15
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Filling
Cable
A,B,C (PM-1200A-P1"A")
Alphabetical suffixes A, B, & C
R,S,T (PM-1200A-P1"R")
Alphabetical suffixes R, S, & T
1,2,3 (PM-1200A-P1"1")
Numerical suffixes 1, 2, & 3
Hyphen (PM-1200A-P1"-"A)
This option insert hyphen before the suffix.
Note: If an entity of cable is in combination of single core and parallel configuration, e-DPP
will generate a compound suffix which is a combination (in order) of the suffix for parallel
cables and suffix for single core cables.
Illustration:
Electrical Load Schedule:
PowerCableID
= "PM-1200A-P"
Cable entity
= 2 - 1/C 25mm2
(2 parallel-single core cable)
Selected options:
Suffix for Parallel Cables
= 1,2,3 (PM-1200AP"1")
Suffix for Single Core Cable = A,B,C (PM-1200AP1"A")
Result in Cable Schedule (Six Cable IDs):
"PM-1200A-P1A",
"PM-1200A-P1B",
"PM-1200A-P1C",
"PM-1200A-P2A",
"PM-1200A-P2B",
"PM-1200A-P2C"
Rename as per Present Naming Convention

This option will populate the Cable Schedule with new Cable ID that will be re-generated according to
the naming convention specified in menu "DefaultEquipmentMotorCable Tab" for motors
and "DefaultEquipmentStatic Load" for static load.
Data Mapping
Select from the following which entities will be populated to Cable Schedule and how the other fields
in Cable Schedule will be regarded against the Electrical Load Schedule:
Cable Length
Length of the cables.
Specification
Specification of the cables, e.g. PVC/XLPE/SWA.
10-16
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Filling
Cable
Clear Drum Number when changed

In cable schedule the drum number assigned to certain cables will be cleared (cables will be
unscheduled from the drums) if in Electrical Load Schedule the specification of those cables
were modified.
Cable Size
Size of cables.
Clear Conduit and Gland Sizes when changed

The specified conduit and gland sizes of certain cables in Cable Schedule will be cleared if in
Electrical Load Schedule the sizes of those cables were modified.
Bus ID
ID of the Buses.
Cable From
The field "CableFrom" in the Cable Schedule will be populated by ID of the buses.
Note: "Cable From" can be populated either by "Bus ID" or "Panel ID". See Panel ID below.
From Bus
The field "FromBus" in the Cable Schedule will be populated by ID of the buses.
necessary for ETAP interface.
This field is
Panel ID
ID of the Panels.
Cable From
The field "CableFrom" in the Cable Schedule will be populated by ID of the Panels.
Elec. Load ID
ID of the Electrical Loads.
Cable To
The field "CableTo" in the Cable Schedule will be populated by ID of the Loads.
Exclude CCR
The field "CableTo" of the CCR cables will not be populated by ID of the Loads instead
this field will be left blank. The apparent reason is CCR cables are directed to the
control panels like DCS & PLC or marshalling cabinets.
To Bus
The field "ToBus" in the Cable Schedule will be populated by ID of the Loads concatenated
with a prefix specified in the adjacent textbox. The field "To bus" is used in ETAP interface
when a cable is classified as "Equipment Cable" (refer to Equipment Cable below) as
intermediate connection between the load and the cable.
Prefix
Specify a prefix up to five characters long
10-17
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Filling
Cable
Entry Size
Size of entry of the terminal box of the loads.
Cable & Conductor OD

Outer diameter of the cable and conductors.
Raceway Type
Type of raceway the cable is installed.
Service Name
Description of the Load.
When "Option >>" button is clicked, the additional frame below appears. You can enter any prefix
strings for each type (use) of cables that will be attached to the head of Service Name.
Equipment Cable
Classification of the cables when transferred to Cable Schedule. This classification is employed in
ETAP environment. There are two classifications of cable in ETAP;
Equipment Cable - are cables directly attached to electrical load but do not appear graphically as a
separate element on the one-line diagram.
One-Line Cable - are cables which appear as graphical element on the one-line diagram.
Yes / No
Yes Equipment cable; No One-line cable
Command Button
Fill Up
Click "Fill Up" button to execute cable data filling.
Table 1: Fields Correlation between Project Standard and Cable Schedule
DPPProjectRec
PowerCableEntryType
LCSCableEntryType
CCRCableEntryType
SHCableEntryType
DPPCable
EntryType (for Main power)
EntryType (for LCS cable)
EntryType (for CCR cable)
EntryType (for space heater cable)
10-18
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Filling
Cable
Table 2: Fields Correlation between Electrical Load Schedule and Cable Schedule
DPPElecLoad
DPPCable
CableUse
"P" for Main power,
"CCR" for CCR cable
"LCS" for LCS cable
"SH" for space heater cable
DPPElecLoad
CableVoltage
LCSCableVoltage
CCRCableVoltage
SHCableVoltage
DPPCable
CableVoltage
PowerCableID
LCSCableID
CCRCableID
SHCableID
ID
UnitsOfWire
LCSUnitsOfWire
CCRUnitsOfWire
SHUnitsOfWire
UnitsOfWire
LengthValue
LCSLengthValue
CCRLengthValue
SHLengthValue
LengthValueMeter
Panel
CableFrom (*2)
Panel
CableODValue
LCSCableODValue
CCRCableODValue
SHCableODValue
CableODValue
ID
ElecLoadID
CableTo (*2)
To Bus (*2)
NumberOfWires
LCSNumberOfWires
CCRNumberOfWires
SHNumberOfWires
NumberOfWires
PowerCableEntrySize
LCSCableEntrySize
CCRCableEntrySize
SHCableEntrySize
EntrySize
CabSize
LCSCabSize
CCRCabSize
SHCabSize
CabSize
ProcessUnitID
ProcessUnitID
RacewayType
RacewayType
SiteArea
SiteArea
ConductorType
ConductorType
(Only for main power cable;
[CableUse]="P")
Substation
Substation
CondODValue
LCSCondODValue
CCRCondODValue
SHCondODValue
CondODValue
KV
OperationKV
(For main power cable;
[CableUse]="P")
EquipName
EquipName (*1)
SpaceHeaterVolt / 1000
OperationKV
(For space heater cable;
[CableUse]="SH")
CableTypeText
LCSCableTypeText
CCRCableTypeText
SHCableTypeText
CableTypeText
Bus
Bus
CableFrom (*2)
FromBus (*2)
LumpedLoad
LumpedLoad
PhaseValue
PhaseValue
*1
- [EquipName] field is filled with data according to following concatenation philosophy;

For cables with field [CableUse] ="P"
"Main Power Cable for" + value of the field [EquipName] in Electrical Load Schedule
For cables with field [CableUse] ="CCR"
"CCR Cable for" + value of the field [EquipName] in Electrical Load Schedule
For cables with field [CableUse] ="LCS"
"LCS Cable for" + value of the field [EquipName] in Electrical Load Schedule
For cables with field [CableUse] ="SH"
"SH Cable for" + value of the field [EquipName] in Electrical Load Schedule
*2
- Optional
10-19
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Filling
Switchgear/MCC
11.5 Switchgear/MCC
The part of data in the Electrical Load Schedule (DPPElecLoad) along with the associated data in
Switchboard Index (DPPPanel) is transferred to the Switchgear/MCC Schedule (DPPSwgrMcc).
By Electrical Load Schedule (DPPElecLoad)

When DPPSwgrMcc does not exist yet, DPPSwgrMcc is created appending the same number of
records as DPPElecLoad.
The following fields in DPPElecLoad are transferred to DPPSwgrMcc respectively.
DPPElecLoad
EquipType
ID
EquipName
HP_KW
HP
Poles
KV
StartType
SpeedControl
IFL
LRC
Substaion
RestartReq
Panel
DPPSwgrMcc
EquipType
ID
EquipName
HP_KW
HP
Poles
KV
StartType
SpeedControl
IFL
LRC
Substaion
RestartReq
PanelID
By Switchboard Index (DPPPanel)

When DPPSwgrMcc is initially created or a new record is added to DPPSwgrMcc, the following
field values of DPPPanel are copied to DPPSwgrMcc as default.
DPPPanel
CBType
CBRatedKV
FuseType
FuseRatedKV
ContactorType
ContactorRatedKV
IncomingType
DPPSwgrMcc
CBType
CBRatedKV
FuseType
FuseRatedKV
ContactorType
ContactorRatedKV
MainPowerType
([UnitType]="IN")
10-20
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Filling
Switchgear/MCC
DPPPanel
OutgoingType
IncomingSize
ControlCabType
ControlCabSize
SchematicDWG
AccuracyVT
CPTSecVoltage
AccuracyCT
DPPSwgrMcc
MainPowerType
([UnitType]="FDR")
MainPowerSize
([UnitType]="IN")
ControlCabType
ControlCabSize
SchematicDWG
VT1Class
VT2Class
CPTSecondaryV
CT1Class
CT2Class
However, the original records in the Switchgear/MCC Schedule that do not exist in the Electrical Load
Schedule remain the same even after the Data Filling is performed. Also, the values of the original
fields in the Switchgear/MCC Schedule that do not exist in the Electrical Load Schedule remain the
same as well.
10-21
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Filling
LCS (Local Control Station)
11.6 LCS (Local Control Station)

The part of data in the Switchgear/MCC Schedule (DPPSwgrMcc) is transferred to the LCS Data
Sheet (DPPLCS).
DPPLCS is created by distinctly selecting DPPSwgrMcc with the key field DPPSwgrMcc
[LCSTypeID]. Although a number of fields are transferred to DPPLCS from DPPSwgrMcc, field
values of the physically top record within distinctly selected records that have the same [LCSTypeID]
are transferred to DPPLCS.
The process of creating DPPLCS can also be deemed as a process to count the number of records that
have the same [LCSTypeID] in DPPSwgrMcc. The resultant value is substituted to the field
DPPLCS [Quantity].
Records of [LCSTypeID] = blank in DPPSwgrMcc are not included in DPPLCS.
By Switchgear/MCC Schedule (DPPSwgrMcc)

The following fields in DPPSwgrMcc are transferred to DPPLCS respectively.
DPPSwgrMcc
LCSTypeID
(Number of records)
LCSCircuitID
LCSCircuitName
LCSExpProof
LCSStart
LCSStop
LCSStartStop
LCSAutoManual
LCSOnLamp
LCSOnLampColor
LCSOffLamp
LCSOffLampColor
LCSAlarmLamp
LCSAlarmLampColor
LCSEmergStop
LCSAmmeter
LCSCT
DPPLCS
ID
Quantity
LCSCircuitID
LCSCircuitName
LCSExpProof
LCSStart
LCSStop
LCSStartStop
LCSAutoManual
LCSOnLamp
LCSOnLampColor
LCSOffLamp
LCSOffLampColor
LCSAlarmLamp
LCSAlarmLampColor
LCSEmergStop
LCSAmmeter
LCSCT
10-22
e-DPP 4.0.2
Data Filling
LCS (Local Control Station)
If a record that has the same value between DPPSwgrMcc [LCSTypeID] and DPPLCS [ID] still
exists in both tables, values of the following fields that exist in DPPLCS only remain unchanged:
TagPlate
WarningPlate
ExplosionProtection
DegreeProtection
OperationVoltage
RatedA
Mounting
CableEntry
CableEntrySize
EnclosureMaterial
Painting
TerminalBlock
CableGland
CableGlandQty
CableGlandType
CableGlandSize
BlindPlug
MountingBolt
ControlCableType
ControlCabSize
GndWireSizeIn
GndWireSizeOut
OffLockStop
LockAutoManual
LCSAmmeterRange
LCSCTRatio
<End of Chapter 11>
10-23
e-DPP 4.0.2
Chapter 12
Load Summary
e-DPP is provided with functions to perform the load summary calculation which is intended to
summate the entire or partial electrical demands in the plant.
Edit group
Bus Load
Switchboard Load
Lumped Load
Assign individual loads to a bus and create/delete buses

Assign individual loads to a switchboard and create/delete
switchboards
Assign individual loads to a lumped load and create/delete
lumped loads
Run group
Run Load Summary
Execute load summary calculation based on bus,

switchboard or lumped load
Lumped Motor group
Restart Group
Lumped Motor
Specify motor restart groups referred by lumped motor

calculation
Specify data required for and executes the lumped motor
calculation
12-1
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Outline
12.1 Outline
Load Summary program provides with 2 different types of calculation. One is a conventional load
summary calculation based on bus, switchboard or lumped load, and another is to group (so called
lump) individual motors into one model motor (so called Lumped Motor).
12.1.1 Conventional Load Summary

It is required to understand the elementary rules and steps to succeed the conventional load summary
calculations.
"Bus", "Switchboard" and "Lumped Load"

The Load Summary program of e-DPP can be executed on three kinds of bases as a node to which
the individual electrical loads are connected. The first base is "Bus", the second is "Switchboard"
and the other is "Lumped Load". In the terminology of e-DPP, "Switchboard" denotes all types of
switching panel, such as switchgear, MCC, distribution panel, etc.
"Bus" is a major component of each "Switchboard". Generally, one switchboard contains one or
more than one bus sections. Each bus section is connected each other with a section tie breaker
when a switchboard contains more than one buses.
e-DPP is capable of treating such a relation between Bus and Switchboard. One switchboard can
contain four buses as a maximum.
You can execute the Load Summary calculation on Bus, Switchboard or Lumped Load base.
Roll-Up
e-DPP has another particular feature called "Roll-Up" calculation.
You can summate electrical demands within a certain Bus or Switchboard independent of the other
Buses or Switchboard in the same power system. The results of such calculations can be referred by
motor start study as a base load before starting motors.
On the other hand, "Roll-Up" calculation is intended to summate all electrical demand in the power
system by rolling up the demands from the bottom of the system toward upstream. The results of
this style of calculations are referred by transformer sizing consideration.
"Roll-Up" calculation is not applicable to Lumped Load base.
Steps to Execute Load Summary

When you execute the Load Summary calculation, it is recommendable to take the following steps:
Step-1
Register all bus IDs into the Bus List (Index) table (DPPBus) and set up the connection topology in
the Edit menu - "Bus List".
Step-2
Register all switchboard IDs into the Switchboard List (Index) table (DPPPanel) and set up the
connection topology in the Edit menu - "Switchboard List". It is recommended to set up all
contained buses for each switchboard here.
Step-3
Assign the individual loads of the Electrical Load Schedule to the registered buses in the Load
12-2
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Outline
Summary menu - "Bus Loads". For detail procedures, see Section 12.2, Bus Loads.
Step-4
If you have assigned the contained buses for each switchboard, the electrical loads are automatically
assigned to the registered switchboards.
If not, assign the individual loads to the registered switchboards in the Load Summary menu "Switchboard Loads". For detail procedures, see Section 12.3, Switchboard Loads.
Step-5
Execute the Load Summary in the Load Summary menu - "Run Load Summary". For detail
procedures, see Section 12.5, Run Load Summary.
To execute the load summary calculation based on Lumped Load, you need to register all lumped
load IDs into the Lumped Load table (DPPLump) in the Edit menu - "Lumped Load". And then,
assign the individual loads of the Electrical Load Schedule to the registered lumped loads in the
Load Summary menu - "Lumped Loads". For detail procedures, see Section 12.4, Lumped Loads.
These activities for lumped loads can be taken independently of the above steps for the bus or
switchboard based calculations.
12.1.2 Lumped Motor

Lumped Motor is an independent function from the conventional load summary. Its details are
described in Section 12.6, Lumped Motor.
12-3
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Bus Loads (Bus Contents)
12.2 Bus Loads (Bus Contents)

Prior to execution of load summary, you need to assign individual electrical loads to each bus that
should have been already defined in the edit menu "Bus List".
<Important Note>
This Editor form treats one bus only at a time and therefore any changes made here have to be saved
with "Save" button whenever you move to another bus. Otherwise, any changes made here will be
lost.
Bus System
System Configuration
Select a name of system configuration with which the load summary calculation is conducted. The
names of system configurations can be edited in the menu "Project" "Settings" "System
Configurations".
Configurations can be edited in the menu "Edit" "Bus" "Bus List". There are three columns,
i.e. "Source Bus1", "Source Bus2" and "Source Bus3" as default. Filling these columns sets up system
configurations. If more than 3 system configurations are required, a new user defined template needs
to be created. To do that, go to the menu "Template" "Schedule Sheet", select the category "Bus"
12-4
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
and create a new template by "Create" button or copy an existing template to a new one for editing.
Bus No.
You can select a bus No. to edit from the list box. Bus Nos. registered through the menu "Edit" - "Bus
List" appear here.
Rated kV
Bus rated voltage can be selected from the list box that shows the system voltages defined through the
menu "Project" - "Electrical".
Source Bus
To execute the roll-up summary calculation, a source bus needs to be assigned to each bus. As the bus
located at the top (summit) of your power system does not have the source bus, the special term "< top
>" has to be assigned. If the top node of your power system applies a double-ended secondary
selective system, a dummy bus needs to be set up like "TOTAL" as a bus name.
"Check Connection" button

This function is required to succeed the roll-up summary calculation that treats a simple radial
configuration of power system. If your power system has more than one separated systems or a looped
configuration, e-DPP detects such conditions and present a warning message. Until such improper
connections are not solved, the Load Summary calculation cannot be executed.
Coincidence Factors
Three coincidence factors for continuous, intermittent and spare loads can be specified for individual
buses. The value range is 0-100 (%).
Margin
When it is required to take contingencies against calculated power demands into account, enter the
numbers for the maximum plant load and peak load in percentage.
e-DPP can indicate the values of power demands with and without the margins.
Command Buttons
Create
Register a new Bus ID. The list box for "Voltage (kV)" shows the already registered system voltages.
You can enter another figure than those.
12-5
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Delete
Delete the existing Bus ID. This will not delete the electrical loads from the Electrical Load Schedule.
To Excel
Output "Schedule of Bus Loads" to MS Excel sheet for the current Bus ID on the dialog.
Save
Save the data presented on the dialog to the e-DPP database.
Help
Bring up Oneline Help window.
Close
Close this dialog.
Load Allocation
Not Allocated to Bus Allocated to Bus
The electrical loads that exist in the Electrical Load Schedule but do not belong to any bus yet are
listed in the left-hand box. Their rated voltages are also limited to the range of +/-40% of the bus rated
voltage.
The electrical loads that belong to the current Bus ID are listed in the right-hand box.
You can assign or remove each electrical load to/from the current Bus ID with the single-,
double-arrow buttons.
<Note>
Even if "Lock" flags are set on for electrical loads to protect against overwriting, changes in Bus ID's
made on this dialog are reflected in the Electrical Load Schedule irrespective of the status of "Lock"
flags.
"(*) Voltage Mismatch has occurred before"

If the individual load voltages become out of range +/-40% of the bus rated voltage, the message
appears as below. This could occur when you change the bus or individual load voltages (kV).
If you click on "Exclude" button, the loads listed in "Electrical Load ID" box are excluded from the
12-6
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
bus (moved to left from right box).

If you click on "Ignore" button, asterisk (*) marks will be affixed to the load ID's inside Bus Contents
box. This voltage mismatch status does not affect the results of load summary.
When the mismatch status has been cleared, clicking "Reset the Mismatch Ignore Status" button will
remove the (*) marks from the load ID's.
<Note>
The "Reset the Mismatch Ignore Status" button will be displayed when one of the items which yielded
mismatch (marked with *) is selected.
12-7
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Switchboard Loads (Switchboard Contents)
12.3 Switchboard Loads (Switchboard Contents)

Prior to execution of load summary, you need to assign individual electrical loads to each switchboard
that should have been already defined in the edit menu "Switchboard List".
<Important Note>
This Editor form treats one switchboard only at a time and therefore any changes made here have to be
saved with "Save" button whenever you move to another switchboard. Otherwise, any changes made
here will be lost.
Switchboard System
Select a name of system configuration with which the load summary calculation is conducted. The
names of system configurations can be edited in the menu "Project" "Settings" "System
Configurations".
Configurations can be edited in the menu "Edit" "Switchboard" "Switchboard List". There are
three columns, i.e. "Source Swbd1", "Source Swbd2" and "Source Swbd3" as default. Filling these
columns sets up system configurations. If more than 3 system configurations are required, a new user
defined template needs to be created. To do that, go to the menu "Template" "Schedule Sheet",
select the category "Switchboard" and create a new template by "Create" button or copy an existing
template to a new one for editing.
12-8
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Switchboard No.
You can select a switchboard No. to edit from the list box. Switchboard Nos. registered through the
menu "Edit" - "Switchboard List" appear here.
System kV
Switchboard rated voltage can be selected from the list box that shows the system voltages defined
through the menu "Project" - "Electrical".
Source Switchboard
To execute the roll-up summary calculation, a source switchboard needs to be assigned to each
switchboard. As the switchboard located at the top (summit) of your power system does not have the
source switchboard, the special term "< top >" has to be assigned.
Switchboard Type
Select a switchboard type, SWGR (switchgear), MCC or DP (distribution panel).
Contained Bus No.

Select Bus ID(s) that are contained in the current switchboard ID. Maximum 4 buses are assigned for
one switchboard. To clear the assigned bus(es), select "< none >" from the list box.
Check Connection
This function is required to succeed the roll-up summary calculation that treats a simple radial
configuration of power system. If your power system has more than one separated systems or a looped
configuration, e-DPP detects such conditions and present a warning message. Until such improper
connections are not solved, the Load Summary calculation cannot be executed.
Coincidence Factors
switchboards. The value range is 0-100 (%).
Margin
When it is required to take contingencies against calculated power demands into account, enter the
numbers for the maximum plant load and peak load in percentage.
e-DPP can indicate the values of power demands with and without the margins.
Command Buttons
Create
Register a new Switchboard ID. The list box for "System Voltage (kV)" shows the already registered
system voltages. You can enter another figure than those.
12-9
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Delete
Delete the existing Switchboard ID. This will not delete the electrical loads from the Electrical Load
Schedule.
To Excel
Output "Schedule of Switchboard Loads" to MS Excel sheet for the current Switchboard ID on the
dialog.
Save
Help
Close
Close this dialog.
Load Allocation
Not Allocated to Switchboard Allocated to Switchboard
The electrical loads that exist in the Electrical Load Schedule but do not belong to any switchboard yet
are listed in the left-hand box. Their rated voltages are also limited to the range of +/-40% of the
switchboard system voltage.
The electrical loads that belong to the current Switchboard ID are listed in the right-hand box.
You can assign or remove each electrical load to/from the current Switchboard ID with the single-,
<Note>
Even if "Lock" flags are set on for electrical loads to protect against overwriting, changes in
Switchboard ID's made on this dialog are reflected in the Electrical Load Schedule irrespective of the
status of "Lock" flags.
12-10
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary

If the individual load voltages become out of range +/-40% of the switchboard rated voltage, the
message appears as below. This could occur when you change the switchboard or individual load
voltages (kV).
switchboard (moved to left from right box).
If you click on "Ignore" button, asterisk (*) marks will be affixed to the load ID's inside Switchboard
Contents box. This voltage mismatch status does not affect the results of load summary.
12-11
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
<Note>
12-12
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Loads (Lumped Load Contents)
12.4 Lumped Loads (Lumped Load Contents)

Prior to execution of load summary on Lumped Load base, you need to assign individual electrical
loads to each lumped load that should have been already defined in the edit menu "Lumped Load".
<Important Note>
This Editor form treats one lumped load only at a time and therefore any changes made here have to
be saved with "Save" button whenever you move to another lumped load. Otherwise, any changes
made here will be lost.
Lumped Load System

Lumped Load ID
You can select a lumped load ID you are going to edit from the list box. Lumped load ID's registered
through the menu "Edit" - "Lumped Load" appear here.
Voltage (kV)
Rated voltage of lumped load can be selected from the list box that shows the system voltages defined
through the menu "Project" - "Electrical".
Connected Bus No.

Usually, a group of electrical loads that you are going to lump are connected to the same bus. If you
select a certain bus no. from this list box and then click on "Filter" button rightward, the electrical
12-13
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
loads belonging to that bus are extracted from the electrical load schedule and listed in the box
"Electrical Load List" for your convenience to select target loads quickly.
"3 Phase"/ "1 Phase" Buttons

Select the number of phase of the currently indicated lumped load.
"Filter" Button
When this button is clicked, load items shown in the left list box "Not Allocated to Lumped Load" are
limited to those directly connected the bus shown in "Connected Bus No." pull down list.
Coincidence Factors
lumped loads. The value range is 0-100 (%).
Command Buttons
Create
Register a new lumped load ID. The list box for "Voltage (kV)" shows the already registered system
voltages. You can enter another figure than those.
Delete
Delete the existing lumped load ID. This will not delete the electrical loads from the Electrical Load
Schedule.
To Excel
Output "Schedule of Lumped Loads" to MS Excel sheet for the current lumped load ID on the dialog.
Save
Help
Close
Close this dialog.
Load Allocation
12-14
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Not Allocated to Lumped Load Allocated to Lumped Load

The electrical loads that exist in the Electrical Load Schedule but do not belong to any lumped load yet
are listed in the left-hand box. Their rated voltages are also limited to the range of +/-40% of the
lumped load rated voltage.
The electrical loads that belong to the current lumped load ID are listed in the right-hand box.
You can assign or remove each electrical load to/from the current lumped load ID with the single-,
<Note>
Even if "Lock" flags are set on for electrical loads to protect against overwriting, changes in lumped
load ID's made on this dialog are reflected in the Electrical Load Schedule irrespective of the status of
"Lock" flags.

If the individual load voltages become out of range +/-40% of the lumped load rated voltage, the
message appears as below. This could occur when you change the lumped load or individual load
voltages (kV).
lumped load (moved to left from right box).
If you click on "Ignore" button, asterisk (*) marks will be affixed to the load ID's inside Lumped Load
Contents box. This voltage mismatch status does not affect the results of load summary.
12-15
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
<Note>
12-16
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Run Load Summary
12.5 Run Load Summary

12.5.1 Entrance Menu
There are eight options for the load summary calculations.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
One lumped load

All lumped loads with no roll-up
One bus
All buses with no roll-up
All buses with roll-up
One switchboard
All switchboards with no roll-up
All switchboards with roll-up
"Roll-up" option is to accumulate the load demands from the bottom of power system up to the top.
Summary Base
Select Lumped Load, Bus or Switchboard as a load summary base (node).
12-17
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Run Load Summary
Targets of Load Summary
Select One or All Lumped Load / Bus / Switchboard.

When you select One Lumped Load / Bus / Switchboard, select a target Lumped Load / Bus /
Switchboard ID from the list box.
When you select All Buses/Switchboards, check or uncheck the "Roll-Up" checkbox.
Type of Electrical Equipment - "Details" button

Clicking "Details" button brings up "User Options" - "Load Summary" tab. Users could select
equipment types to include in the load summary calculation.
The equipment types are specified in the menu "Editor Selection" category "All Elec. Loads"
some editor screens.
Select a name of system configuration from the pull down list with which the load summary
calculation is conducted. Refer to the sections 12.2 and 12.2.
Loading Category
Select a name of loading category from the pull down list with which the load summary calculation is
conducted.
The names of loading categories can be edited in the menu "Project" "Settings" "Loading
Categories". User is allowed to enter different load demands for the same load of each category in the
editor screen "Editor Selection" "All Elec. Loads" "Input Data for Load Summary". There are
six columns, i.e. "%Load<1>", "BHP<1>", "%Load<2>", "BHP<2>", "%Load<3>" and "BHP<3>".
"<1>" corresponds to the first loading category in the list, "<2>" the second one in the list and so on.
Maximum three loading categories can be assigned.
12-18
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Run Load Summary
Reporting
Report Type
Select one of the following report types that will be generated in MS Excel when the "To Excel"
button is clicked:
Digest
"Load Summary Digest" is a summary table of calculation results for all switchboards, buses or
lumped loads specified in "Target of Load Summary". The digest form does not show any individual
load details.
Summary
"Load Summary" is a table that shows detailed calculation data and results of individual loads
involved in the calculation.
Load Schedule
"Load Schedule" is a list of loads that are connected to each switchboard, bus or lumped load and does
not show any calculation results.
Switchboard List / Bus List / Lumped Load List

"Switchboard List", "Bus List" or "Lumped Load List" is an index of switchboard IDs, .bus IDs or
lumped load IDs and does not show any individual load details.
MS Excel Form for Report Type 'Summary'

Select one of the following forms to be associated with the Report Type "Summary" above:
e-DPP Predefined Form

Use the e-DPP predefined form.
User Defined Form

Use one of the user defined forms available on the adjacent pull down list.
customizable. Refer to chapter 15 "Template ", section 15.4.
12-19
These forms are user
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Run Load Summary
Method of Total Load Calculation

As described in the section 12.5.5 "Calculation Formulas", the total plant load in kW is calculated by
the formula:
TotalKW =
where
TotalContkW =
TotalInterkW =
ToatlSparekW =
ContCF =
InterCF =
SpareCF =
Sum of all continuously operating loads

Sum of all intermittent loads
Sum of all spare loads
Coincidence factor for continuous loads
Coincidence factor for intermittent loads
Coincidence factor for spare loads
It is often the case that there is a particular requirement for project, for example, InterCF *
TotalInterkW may not be less than the largest individual intermittent load. Such a requirement would
be applied to continuous and spare loads as well.
To fulfill the above requirement, three options are prepared in this section.
Note: : Selection of items (Continuous, Intermittent & Spare) on "Operation Mode subject to Method
<2> or <3>" options ("User Options "Load Summary (2) Other Options") to be included in
the calculation affect the Methods <1>, <2> and <3>. For more details, see Chapter 05 File Menu
(User Options).
Method <1>: [Total Load Demand] x [Coincidence Factor]

For each load status (i.e. continuous, intermittent, spare), the total demand is equal to the product of
the sum of all loads and the specified bus / switchboard coincidence factor.
Method <2>: Largest Individual Load

the sum of all loads and the recalculated bus / switchboard coincidence factor (see <Example>, Case 1
to 3 below).
Method <3>: Larger one out of the above two

the sum of all loads and the largest recalculated bus / switchboard coincidence factor among the two
options above.
12-20
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Run Load Summary
Auto save updated coincidence factors

Check this option to update the bus / switchboard coincidence factors based on the recalculated value
according to algorithm of the "Largest Individual Load" or "Larger one out of the above two" options
whichever is selected.
Consider Downstream Loads for Largest Load

Check this option to calculate the coincidence factor using the ratio of the largest load (whichever is
largest among the direct connected loads and downstream loads) to the total bus/switchboard loads
(direct connected loads plus the downstream loads). In addition, "Include Downstream Loads in CF
Update" checkbox is checked and disabled for this option.
Include Downstream Loads in CF Update

Check this option to calculate the coincidence factor using the ratio of the largest direct connected load
to the total bus / switchboard loads (direct connected loads plus the downstream loads). In addition,
this option will be enabled when "Consider Downstream Loads for Largest Load" option is unchecked.
<Examples>
Case-1:
"Consider Downstream Loads for Largest Loads" box is unchecked.

"Include Downstream Loads in CF Update" box is unchecked.
kW
100
200
300
150
180
120
200
250
900
250
250/900 = 27.7%
Downstream Loads
Direct Connected Loads
Total kW for CF Update

Largest Load kW
Updated CF % (Note 1 & 2)
Case-2:
"Consider Downstream Loads for Largest Loads" box is checked.

"Include Downstream Loads in CF Update" box is checked.
12-21
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Run Load Summary
Downstream Loads

Largest Load kW
Case-3:
kW
100
200
300
150
180
120
200
250
1,500
300
300/1,500 = 20.0%
"Consider Downstream Loads for Largest Loads" box is unchecked.

"Include Downstream Loads in CF Update" box is checked.
Downstream Loads

Largest Load kW
kW
100
200
300
150
180
120
200
250
1,500
250
250/1,500 = 16.7%
Notes:
1)
2)
3)
When no direct load connected on the bus / switchboard, the specified coincidence factor of
the bus / switchboard will be applied.
The largest among the direct connected loads will be used as the numerator.
The largest among the direct connected loads and the downstream loads will be used as the
numerator.
Power Factor Compensation

If power factor calculated on switchboard or bus needs to be improved by adding power capacitor
bank, check the "Apply" checkbox. This option is not applicable to lumped load.
12-22
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Run Load Summary
Target PF (%)
Enter a desired power factor improved by additional power capacitor banks in percent.
Switchboard / Bus
Select switchboard or bus ID to which power capacitor will be planned to install from the pull down
list.
Calculation result of power factor compensation will be shown in the output form. If the power factor
with no power capacitor is greater than the specified target power factor, a negative value in kvar is
shown. That means new installation of power capacitor is not necessary.
Include Spare Loads

When this box is checked, the total spare loads are taken into account for the PF compensation.
PF =
TotalKW
(TotalKW )2 + (TotalKVAR )2
TotalKW = TotalContKW + TotalInterKW + TotalSpareKW

TotalKVAR = TotalContKVAR + TotalInterKVAR + TotalSpareKVAR
When this box is unchecked, the total spare loads are NOT taken into account for the PF
compensation.
PF =
TotalKW
(TotalKW )2 + (TotalKVAR )2
TotalKW = TotalContKW + TotalInterKW

TotalKVAR = TotalContKVAR + TotalInterKVAR
where
TotalContKW = Sum of all active continuous loads

TotalInterKW =
Sum of all active intermittent loads
ToatlSpareKW =
Sum of all active spare loads
TotalContKVAR =
Sum of all reactive continuous loads
TotalInterKVAR =
Sum of all reactive intermittent loads
ToatlSpareKVAR =
Sum of all reactive spare loads
12-23
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Run Load Summary
Command Buttons
Run
Execute the Load Summary calculation in accordance with the settings on this dialog and display the
summary result (see Chapters 12.5.2 and 12.5.3).
To Excel
Clicking "To Excel" button exports the calculation results to MS Excel based on the selections in
"Reporting" section.
<Note>
When "To Excel" button is clicked without or in prior to executing the "Run" command, the previous
calculation results (if any) will be reported.
Help
Close
Close this dialog.
12.5.2 Results - Digest

There are two types of output for the results of load summary calculations.
1) Load Summary
2) Load Summary Digest
These two forms are available on e-DPP windows and MS Excel.
The Load Summary Digest indicates the total electrical demands and associated figures, e.g. PF, for
the individual lumped loads, buses or switchboards. The electrical consumption by each load is not
included.
<Load Summary Digest>
12-24
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Run Load Summary
Command Buttons
Preview
Click on "Preview" button to show printable layout of the generated cable sizing result.
Summary View
To view the Load Summary form that includes the electrical consumptions by the individual loads,
click on this button. The following new window appears:
To Excel
Exports the Load Summary Digest form to MS Excel.
12-25
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Run Load Summary
PF-Calculation
See Section 12.5.4 PF Calculation.
Re-Calculation
You can alter the figures for the coincidence factors, i.e. Cont CF (%), Inter CF (%) and Spare CF (%).
When you click on this button all the associated fields are re-calculated based on the altered CF
figures. A value for each CF (%) is restricted to the range of 0 to 100.
Note: Re-Calculation affects the results of the Lumped Load / Bus / Switchboard ID where you have
altered CF figures. When you have executed Roll-Up calculation, the figures for the upstream nodes
might be inconsistent.
Save CF
When any of the two options below is selected on the entrance menu, some of coincidence factors will
be updated and shown in this grid.
[Method <2>: Largest Individual Load]

[Method <3>: Larger one out of the above two]
Click this button to save the updated values to the database permanently.
If the option "Auto save updated coincidence factors" is selected, the updated values were already
saved and it is not necessary to use this button.
Help
Bring up Online Help screen.
Cancel
Close this window.
12.5.3 Results - Summary

"Load Summary" form indicates all individual loads on the form in lumped load, bus or switchboard
wise.
<Load Summary Form>
12-26
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Run Load Summary
Command Buttons
Preview
To Excel
Exports the Load Summary form to MS Excel.
PF-Calculation
See Section 12.5.4 PF Calculation.
Re-Calculation
You can alter the figures for the load factor and coincidence factors, i.e. Load Factor (%), Cont CF (%),
Inter CF (%) and Spare CF (%). When you click on this button, all the associated fields are
re-calculated based on the altered figures. Values for Load Factor and each CF (%) are restricted to the
range of 0 to 100.
Note: Re-Calculation affects the results of the Lumped Load / Bus / Switchboard ID where you have
altered CF figures. When you have executed Roll-Up calculation, the figures for the upstream nodes
might be inconsistent.
Save
The results of original calculation and re-calculation can be saved to the database by clicking on
"Save" button.
Help
Cancel
Close this window.
12-27
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Run Load Summary
12.5.4 PF Calculation
To study PF improvement with an additional power capacitor, this dialog helps you.
There are two (2) ways to calculate PF improvement.
Enter the target PF (%) between 75 and 100

Enter the additional capacitor rating (kVAR) that needs to be equal to or less than "Calculated
Total KVAR"
When you enter either of them and click on "Calculate" button, e-DPP calculates the required
capacitor rating or new PF respectively with the following calculation formulas:
"New Total KVAR"
When "Target PF" is input and "Required Capacitor Rating" is calculated,
"New Total KVAR" = [TotalKVAR] - "Required Capacitor Rating"
When "Additional Capacitor Rating" is input,
"New Total KVAR" = [TotalKVAR] - "Additional Capacitor Rating"
"New Total KVA"
NewTotalKVA = [TotalKW ] 2 + NewTotalKVAR 2

"New Total PF"
NewTotalPF =
[TotalKW ]
NewTotalKVA
"Target PF (Lagging)"
You can enter a value between 75 and 100.
"Required Capacitor Rating"
When a proper value is entered to "Target PF", the following calculation is performed;
RequiredCapacitorRating = [TotalKVAR ] [TotalKW ]
12-28
1
1
TargetPF 2
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Run Load Summary
"Additional Capacitor Rating"

You can enter a positive value less than or equal to "Calculated Total KVAR".
"New PF"
When a proper value is entered to "Additional Capacitor Rating", the following calculation is
performed;
NewPF =
[TotalKVAR ] AdditionalCapacitorRating
+ 1
[TotalKW ]
Command Buttons
Help
Clear
Clears the inputted and computed values for a new set of calculation.
Calculate
New values (Total kW, Total kvar, Total kVA, etc.) will be displayed as a result for a specified "Target
PF (Lagging)" or "Additional Capacitor Rating"
Print Screen
Displays a printable screen capture of the dialog with the calculated values.
Exit
Closes this window and returns to summary view.
12-29
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Run Load Summary
12.5.5 Calculation Formulas

The detailed procedures and formulas for load summary calculation are described below.
12.5.5.1 Load Efficiency and Power Factor

Values of load efficiencies and power factors at loading factor (%) are calculated from those at 100%,
75% and 50% stored in the motor library by means of linear interpolation/extrapolation calculations.
(1) AC and DC Motors (EquipType = 0, 1, 2, 3)

1) [PFatLF] (Power factor at load factor)
SubCase-1 (75<=[PercentLoad0]<=100) - Interpolation
[PFatLF] = ([PF100]-[PF75])*([PercentLoad0]/100-0.75)/0.25+[PF75]
SubCase-2 (50<=[PercentLoad0]<75) - Interpolation
[PFatLF] = ([PF75]-[PF50])*([PercentLoad0]/100-0.50)/0.25+[PF50]
SubCase-3 (0<[PercentLoad0]<50)
[PFatLF] = 100*(1-a)/sqrt(b-2*a+c)
Where
a = (1-2*[PercentLoad0]/100)*[EFF50]/100
b = 1/([PF50]/100)**2
c = a**2
2) [EFFatLF] (Efficiency at load factor)
SubCase-1 (75<=[PercentLoad0]<=100) - Interpolation
[EFFatLF]=([EFF100]-[EFF75])*([PercentLoad0]/100-0.75)/0.25+[EFF75]
SubCase-2 (50<=[PercentLoad0]<75) - Interpolation
[EFFatLF] = ([EFF75]-[EFF50])*([PercentLoad0]/100-0.50)/0.25+[EFF50]
SubCase-3 (0<[PercentLoad0]<50)
[EFFatLF] = 100/(1+(1-[EFF50]/100)/(2*[PercentLoad0]/100*[EFF50]/100))
(2) Static and Other Loads (EquipType = 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15)
1) [PFatLF] (Power factor at load factor)
SubCase-1 ([PF100]<>0)
[PFatLF] = PF100
SubCase-2 ([PF100]=0)
[PFatLF] = 100.0
2) [EFFatLF] (Efficiency at load factor)
SubCase-1 ([EFF100]<>0)
[EFFatLF] = EFF100
12-30
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Run Load Summary
SubCase-2 ([EFF100]=0)
[EFFatLF] = 100.0
(3) Power Capacitor (EquipType = 5)

1) [PFatLF] (Power factor at load factor) = 0
2) [EFFatLF] (Efficiency at load factor) = 0
12.5.5.2 Electrical Consumptions

When the load summary calculation starts, electrical consumption for each load with respect to the
operation modes, "Continuous", "Intermittent" and "Spare", are calculated by means of the following
formulas at first;
(1) Motor, Static and Other Loads (EquipType = 0 - 4, 6 - 15)

(a) [ContKW] (Continuous kW)
[ContKW] = 100 * [BHP] / [EFFatLF] only when [ContQty] <> 0
(b) [ContKVAR] (Continuous kvar)
[ContKVAR] = sqrt([ContKVA]**2- [ContKW]**2) only when [ContQty] <> 0
Note: [ContKVA] needs to be calculated before [ContKVAR].
(c) [ContKVA] (Continuous kVA)
[ContKVA] = 100 * [ContKW] / [PFatLF] only when [ContQty] <> 0
(d) [InterKW] (Intermittent kW)
[InterKW] = 100 * [BHP] / [EFFatLF] only when [InterQty] <> 0
(e) [InterKVAR] (Intermittent kvar)
[InterKVAR] = sqrt([InterKVA]**2- [InterKW]**2) only when [InterQty] <> 0
Note: [InterKVA] needs to be calculated before [InterKVAR].
(f) [InterKVA] (Intermittent kVA)
[InterKVA] = 100 * [InterKW] / [PFatLF] only when [InterQty] <> 0
(g) [SpareKW] (Spare kW)
[SpareKW] = 100 * [BHP] / [EFFatLF] only when [SpareQty] <> 0
(h) [SpareKVAR] (Spare kvar)
[SpareKVAR] = sqrt([SpareKVA]**2- [SpareKW]**2) only when [SpareQty] <> 0
Note: [SpareKVA] needs to be calculated before [SpareKVAR].
(i) [SpareKVA] (Spare kVA)
[SpareKVA] = 100 * [SpareKW] / [PFatLF] only when [SpareQty] <> 0
12-31
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Run Load Summary
(2) Power Capacitors (EquipType = 5)

[ContKVAR] =
[ContKVA] =
[InterKVAR] =
[InterKVA] =
[SpareKVAR] =
[SpareKVA] =
[HP] (negative value) only when [ContQty] <> 0

[HP] (negative value) only when [ContQty] <> 0
[HP] (negative value) only when [InterQty] <> 0
[HP] (negative value) only when [InterQty] <> 0
[HP] (negative value) only when [SpareQty] <> 0
[HP] (negative value) only when [SpareQty] <> 0
The other fields, i.e. [BHP], [PercentLoad0], [PFatLF], [EFFatLF], [ContKW], [InterKW]
and [SpareKW] are left blank (zero).
12.5.5.3 Summary Calculations

The total demands (kW, kvar, kVA) are calculated for continuous, intermittent and spare loads
respectively and shown on the bottom section of the form.
<Important Note>
[TotalContKVA], [TotalInterKVA] and [TotalSpareKVA] are not the total values of [ContKVA],
[InterKVA] and [SpareKVA] for each load respectively and calculated with the following formulas;
[TotalContKVA] = sqrt([TotalContKW]**2 + [TotalContKVAR]**2)
[TotalInterKVA] = sqrt([TotalInterKW]**2 + [TotalInterKVAR]**2)
[TotalSpareKVA] = sqrt([TotalSpareKW]**2 + [TotalSpareKVAR]**2)
The power factors for the total demands of continuous, intermittent and spare loads are calculated as;
[TotalContPF] = 100 * [TotalContKW] / [TotalContKVA]
[TotalInterPF] = 100 * [TotalInterKW] / [TotalInterKVA]
[TotalSparePF] = 100 * [TotalSpareKW] / [TotalSpareKVA]
You may specify the coincidence factors for continuous, intermittent and spare loads on the output
form.
The total demand (kW, kvar, kVA) and PF are calculated with user specified C.F.s by the following
formulas;
TotalKW=
TotalKVAR=
(ContCF*TotalContKVAR+InterCF*TotalInterKVAR+SpareCF*TotalSpareKVAR)/100
TotalKVA=sqrt (TotalKW**2+TotalKVAR**2)
PF=TotalKW / TotalKVA * 100
12.5.5.4 Motor Load Percentage

Ratio of motor loads against motor and static loads is derived by the following calculation;
MTLoadKW = [ContCF] / 100 * [ContKW]
+ [InterCF] / 100 * [InterKW]
+ [SpareCF] / 100 *[SpareKW]
12-32
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Run Load Summary
MTLoadKVAR = [ContCF] / 100 * [ContKVAR]

+ [InterCF] / 100 * [InterKVAR]
+ [SpareCF] / 100 *[SpareKVAR]
for all motor loads.
STLoadKW = (Same formula as MTLoadKW)
STLoadKVAR = (Same formula as MTLoadKVAR)
for all NON-motor loads
[MTLoadPercent] = 100 * [MTLoadKVA] / ([MTLoadKVA] + [STLoadKVA])
[STLoadPercent] = 100 - [MTLoadPercent]
The vector relation diagram used to calculate motor and static load amounts and ratios are
illustrated below.
12-33
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
12.6 Lumped Motors

A lumped motor is an imaginary element created from more than one AC electric motors and used for
dynamic simulation of electrical system, i.e. dynamic motor start calculation, transient stability
calculation, etc. When there are hundreds or more than a thousand motors in the system to be analyzed,
convergence of the dynamic calculations could be rather difficult or sometimes not possible.
Replacing a group of motors with single lumped motor will reduce the dimension of electrical system
matrix and have it easier to succeed in the calculation with an acceptable level of accuracy maintained.
While a lumped load is summation of several motors & static loads and does not retain any dynamic
features from individual loads, the lumped motor retains several key parameters required for dynamic
simulations. The key parameters are retrieved from the motor library or project database after a model
motor has been determined with the method of best approximation as described in the below section
Method of Lumping Motors. The model motor is also an imaginary element and equivalent to one
of the library or project motors.
kVA1
Pole1
H1
%Load1
Capacity
#Poles
Inertia Constant
Loading Factor
kVA2
Pole2
H2
%Load2
kVA3
Pole3
H3
%Load3
kVA4
Pole4
H4
%Load4
kVA0
Pole0
H0
%Load0
Seven out of these key parameters are also used by the program of motor parameter estimation (PE) of
ETAP software and listed below.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
LRC (%):
PFlr (%):
Tlr (%):
Tmax (%):
S (%):
PF100 (%):
EFF100 (%):
Locked rotor current

Locked rotor power factor
Locked rotor torque
Breakdown (Max) torque
Motor slip
Power factor at full load
Efficiency at full load
Once the lumped motor calculation has been carried out, you can export these calculated values to
ETAP database through DataX e-DPP interface. Please see Chapter 16, section 16.1 for more
details.
12.6.1 Method of Lumping Motors

Lumping of motors is the process to calculate or determine the following parameters of a lumped
motor:
(1) Capacity (kVA)
(2) Inertia constant (sec)
(3) Loading factor (%)
12-34
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
(4) Number of poles
Calculation Formulas
When there are n sets of motors to be lumped to a single motor and their capacities are represented as:
kW1 , kW2 , kW3 , K , kWn

kVA1 , kVA2 , kVA3 , K , kVAn
The inertia constants are represented as:
H 1 , H 2 , H 3 ,K , H n
And loading factors are represented as:
% Load 1 , % Load 2 , % Load 3 , K , % Load n

The capacities kW0 and kVA0 of lumped motor are calculated as a total of individual motor
capacities:
n
kW0 = kWi
i =1
kVA0 = kVAi
i =1
The inertia constant H 0 and loading factor %Load 0 of lumped motor are calculated as a weighted
average by the individual capacities kVAi and kWi respectively:
n
H0 =
H
i =1
kVAi
kVA0
(sec)
% Load 0 =
% Load
i =1
kWi
kW0
The number of poles Pole0 of lumped motor is determined in the following steps:
Step-1: Summate kW of the motors with the same number of poles.
Step-2: Select the number of poles for which the summated kW is the maximum.
The inertia constant H is a total value of motor load and coupling and calculated by the following
12-35
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
formula:
H=
5.48 10 9 WR 2 RPM 2
MVA
(sec)
Where:
WR is a total inertia moment of motor, coupling and load
RPM is a rated machine speed
MVA is a capacity of motor
Model Motor
The next step is to determine a model motor which is used to retrieve the characteristic data including
the abovementioned key parameters from the motor library database. The model motor is defined by
the following attributes:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Frequency (50 or 60Hz)

Code/Standard (ANSI, IEC, JIS)
Rated voltage
Number of poles
Rated kW
The frequency and code/standard are the same as those defined for the current project.
The rated voltage of model motor can be entered by user on the dialog of Lumped Motor Editor as
detailed in the below section 12.6.2. The default value is retrieved from the menu Settings ->
Electrical -> Motor Rated (kV) and set on the dialog.
The number of poles is determined in the steps described above.
The rated kW of model motor is determined in the following steps:
Step-1: Summate kW of the motors with the same kW and the determined number of poles.
Step-2: Select the maximum rated kW.
For example, when there are 6 motors to be lumped together as shown below,
kW
kVA
Poles
H (sec)
%Load
Motor 1
37
43
2
2.0
85
Motor 2
55
65
2
2.0
80
Motor 3
55
65
2
1.6
77
Motor 4
75
88
2
3.6
80
Motor 5
55
66
4
0.8
90
Motor 6
75
94
6
0.6
80
Lumping process will be as follows:

6
kW0 = kWi = 37 + 55 + 55 + 75 + 55 + 75 = 352 (kW )

i =1
12-36
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
kVA0 = kVAi = 43 + 65 + 65 + 88 + 66 + 94 = 421 (kVA)

i =1
The capacity of lumped motor is calculated 352kW (421kVA).

6
H0 =
H
i =1
kVAi
kVA0
2 43 + 2 65 + 1.6 65 + 3.6 88 + 0.8 66 + 0.6 94

= 1.77 (sec)
421
The constant inertial of lumped motor is calculated 1.77sec.

6
% Load 0 =
% Load
i =1
kWi
kW0
0.85 37 + 0.80 55 + 0.77 55 + 0.80 75 + 0.90 55 + 0.80 75

352
= 0.816
The loading factor of lumped motor is calculated 81.6%.
To summate kW for Poles = 2:
37+55+55+75=222kW
55kW (only one motor)
As 222kW is the maximum, Poles = 2 is determined as the number of poles of both lumped and model
motor.
To summate kW for Poles = 2 and kW=37:

55+55=110kW
As 110kW is the maximum, kW = 55 is determined as the rate kW of model motor.
kW
kVA
Poles
H (sec)
%Load
Calculation Results
Lumped Motor
Model Motor
352
55
421
2
2
1.77
81.6
-
12.6.2 Motor Restart Group

When momentary interruption of electrical power occurs in normal plant operation, running motors
will drop off and restart after predetermined time intervals by means of motor restart function of
protective relay. One of the purposes to calculate a lumped motor is to provide an adequate model of
motor to be restarted.
The Lumped Motor program provides users with the options to select a way of grouping motors:
By motor restart group
12-37
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
By number of poles
By number of poles and load type
By number of poles and inertia
By load type
By inertia
When the above option (1) is selected, none of the other options can be selected.
When any of the options (2) thru (6) is selected, the option (1) cannot be selected.
When the load type is selected, the inertia cannot be selected.
When the inertia is selected, the load type cannot be selected.
If user wants to apply the option (1), Motor Restart Group table needs to be defined beforehand by
going to the tab Load Summary -> Restart Group.
Group ID
Enter a unique identifier of motor restart group up to 26 characters.
Code
Enter any code or abbreviation of motor restart group up to 20 characters.
Priority
Enter a priority of motor restart group in integer number. The lower the priority is, the earlier the
motor will restart. More than one group can have the same priority. As a common practice, 4 or 5
priorities are defined.
This input is not used for calculation and just for indication purpose only.
Restart Time Delay (s)
Motor will enter stand-by mode for restarting if the voltage does not restore within Max. Auto Restart
Time (s) and restores after Restart Time Delay (s) elapses.
Max. Trip Delay (s)
Motor does not stop within Max. Trip Delay (s) after power interruption occurs and will continue
running.
Max. Auto Restart Time (s)
12-38
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
Motor will immediately restart if the voltage restores within Max. Auto Restart Time (s) after power
interruption occurs.
Alarm Voltage (%)
Alarm contact is activated or alarm signal is issued when the voltage decreases under this level.
Enter the ratio of rated voltage in percent.
Trip Voltage (%)
Trip contact is activated or trip signal is issued when the voltage decreases under this level.
Reset Voltage (%)
Alarm and/or trip contacts are deactivated when the voltage restores over this level.
Description
Enter any descriptions, notes or remarks up to 65,535 characters.
12.6.3 Lumped Motor Editor

Lumped Motor editor is a dialog where user can edit the data required for lumping, carry out the
calculations and export the results to MS Excel.
12-39
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
12.6.3.1 Editing Data

Criteria
Bus Selection
Substation
Substation ID where the active lumped motor exists. When Bus ID (see below) changes, this
indication is updated.
Switchboard
Switchboard ID where the active lumped motor is contained. When Bus ID (see below) changes,
this indication is updated.
Bus ID
Select the existing bus ID from the pull down list to which a lumped motor and its constituent
motors are connected.
All AC motors connected to the selected bus are shown in the spreadsheet editor.
<Important Note>
Individual motors which will be lumped together must be connected to the same bus ID and
cannot be scattered across more than one bus.
Bus kV
Bus rated voltage. When Bus ID changes, this indication is updated.
Lumped Motor Selection
ID
Select any existing lumped motor ID from the pull down list.
12-40
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
Note: If there are motors belonging to the selected bus (Bus ID, see Chapter 12.6.3.1) and
whether or not selected (checked Select checkbox on spreadsheet editor) for a Lumped Motor
ID, their cell color changes to light yellow on the spreadsheet editor upon selecting a Lumped
Motor ID and parameters such as Select checkbox, Restart checkbox and Restart Group ID
will become editable. On the other hand, motors which belong to the same bus but were not
selected (checked Select checkbox on spreadsheet editor) for a Lumped Motor ID will have
their cells in light gray color upon selection of Lumped Motor ID. In addition, when no
Lumped Motor ID was selected from the pulldown list (blank is shown), the individual motors
which do not have Lumped Motor ID will have a cell color of light gray.
kV
Rated voltage of the selected lumped motor. When Lumped Motor ID changes, the voltage
corresponding to the selected Lumped Motor ID will be shown. This value can be specified when
creating a new lumped motor and altered in the tab Editor-> Lumped Motor.
Restart
Check this checkbox if the selected lumped motor is subject to auto restart. If there are motors
shown in the spreadsheet editor belonging to the selected lumped motor, their corresponding
checkboxes Restart are automatically updated upon checking the checkbox.
This information is not referred to by any function and just for indication purpose only.
Note:
This option is disabled when there is no Lumped Motor ID selected.
Restart Group ID
Select a motor restart group ID from the pull down list. If there are motors shown in the
spreadsheet editor belonging to the selected lumped motor, their corresponding fields Restart
Group are auto updated.
IDs are defined with Restart Group editor. See section 12.6.2 for more information.
Note:
This option is disabled when there is no Lumped Motor ID selected.
Filter button
When clicked, only the motors belonging to the lumped motor selected in ID pull down list
above are shown on the spreadsheet editor.
Create button
When clicked, the below dialog appears.
Enter a unique ID of new lumped motor to be created up to 16 characters.

Lumped Motor Voltage (kV) is retrieved from the menu Settings -> Electrical -> Motor Rated
(kV) and shown on the dialog.
12-41
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
Delete button
When clicked, the below dialog appears.
If Yes is clicked, the selected lumped motor will be removed from the project database
permanently.
Spreadsheet Editor
User is allowed to assign a lumped motor ID to the individual motors in this editor. If no lumped
motor is assigned to motors, the column Restart and Restart Group are enabled for editing by
users.
The rows of motors to which the same lumped motor ID as that selected from ID pull down list
in Lumped Motor Selection section are colored light yellow. Other rows are colored light gray.
Select
If the rows are colored light yellow (active lumped motor), this column is colored white and
editable.
When this checkbox is checked, the active lumped motor ID is populated in the column Lumped
Motor ID and Restart & Restart Group columns are populated with the values specified in
Lumped Motor Selection section.
When this checkbox is unchecked, the columns Lumped Motor ID and Restart Group are
cleared and Restart & Restart Group columns become editable.
Restart
Check this checkbox if the selected motor is subject to auto restart. This checkbox is editable only
when the column Lumped Motor ID is empty.
This information is not referred to by any function and just for indication purpose only.
Note: The Restart cell from the spreadsheet editor is in light yellow when the motor belongs to
the selected bus (Bus ID) and selected Lumped Motor ID. The cell is in light gray if the
motor belongs to the same bus but not to the selected Lumped Motor ID. In addition, if there
is no Lumped Motor ID associated to an individual motor, users may select Restart option
manually.
Restart Group
12-42
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
Select a motor restart group ID for the selected motor from the pull down list.
IDs shown in the pull down list are defined with Restart Group editor. See section 12.6.2 for more
information.
Note: The Restart Group cell from the spreadsheet editor is in light yellow when the motor
belongs to the selected bus (Bus ID) and selected Lumped Motor ID. The cell is in light gray
if the motor belongs to the same bus but not to the selected Lumped Motor ID. In addition, if
there is no Lumped Motor ID associated to an individual motor, users may define a Restart
Group manually.
Command Button Section
Select All
When this button is clicked, the below dialog appears. If OK button is clicked, Select
checkboxes are checked and Lumped Motor ID column is populated with the active lumped
motor ID selected in the ID pull down list in Lumped Motor Selection section for all motors
shown in the spreadsheet editor regardless of row colors.
Deselect All
When this button is clicked, the below dialog appears. If OK button is clicked, Select checkbox
is unchecked and Lumped Motor ID column is cleared for all motors shown in the spreadsheet
editor regardless of row colors.
Selected Item Only / All Items

When clicked, only the rows with the column Select checked are shown and the caption of
button changes to All Items. Clicking again shows all rows.
Select Filter
The rows are filtered by the value of cell in the selected row. Clicking again resets the filter.
12-43
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
Light Inertia (H <= xxx)

When selected, only the motors with the machine inertia (*) values equal to or less than that (xxx)
defined in Defaults of Inertia editor. Please see the section 12.6.3.2 for more information.
(*) Machine inertia is total of motor, coupler and load inertias.
Heavy Inertia (H > xxx)

When selected, only the motors with the machine inertia values greater than that (xxx) defined in
Defaults of Inertia editor. Please see the section 12.6.3.2 for more information.
Both
When selected, all motors are shown regardless of inertia values.
Note: All the above filters are dependent one another. When more than one filters are applied, the
conditions are combined with logical AND.
12.6.3.2 Setting up Criteria

Once all required data have been entered, the next step is to set up the criteria for lumped motor
calculations.
Operation Mode
Select the operation modes of motors that will be included in the calculation of lumped motors.
Continuous mode needs to be always included for any dynamic analysis for a normal system
configuration.
Intermittent mode is sometimes included. Inclusion of this mode will yield larger size of
lumped motors and give conservative results of analysis.
Spare mode is rarely included.
Restart Group
Group by Group
When Run button is clicked with this option, the calculation of lumping motors is carried out
based on the motor restart groups specified for both predetermined (user defined) lumped motors
and the individual AC motors.
12-44
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
In the example diagram shown above:

-
The motors M1, M2 and M3 are grouped to the lumped motor LM-1 by user.
The motors M4 and M5 are grouped to the lumped motor LM-2 by user.
The motors M6, M7 and M8 are not grouped to any lumped motor by user.
The lumped motor LM-1 is assigned to the restart group G-1.

The lumped motor LM-2 is assigned to the restart group G-2.
The motor M-6 and M-7 are assigned to the restart group G-1.
The motor M-8 is assigned to the restart group G-2.
When the lumping calculation is carried out by clicking Run button, e-DPP lumps:
-
The motors M1, M2 and M3 to LM-1 as user specified.

The motors M4 and M5 to LM-2 as user specified.
The motors M6 and M7 to BUS-1-G001 according to the fixed naming convention (See
below).
The motors M8 to BUS-1-G002 according to the fixed naming convention (See below).
<Naming Convention>
The naming convention for new lumped motors created by e-DPP is:
[Bus ID] + [-G] + [xxx]
Where xxx is 3 digits serial number starting from 001.
When this option is selected, the other 3 criteria sections, i.e. Number of Poles, Load Type
and Moment of Inertia, are disabled and invisible. Group by Group option is exclusive to
them. Please refer to the below image.
12-45
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
Regardless of Groups
When this option is selected, e-DPP ignores the motor restart groups for lumping and the other 3
criteria sections, i.e. Number of Poles, Load Type and Moment of Inertia, are enabled and
visible.
Number of Poles
This option is available when Regardless of Groups option is selected in Restart Group
section.
Pole by Pole
When this option is selected, e-DPP groups the motors within the same lumped motor into
smaller lumped motors (called child lumped motors) based on the number of poles of individual
motors.

-
The motors M1 thruM7 are grouped to the lumped motor LM-1 by user.
The motor M8 is not grouped to any lumped motor by user.
The number of poles for the motors M-1, M2 and M3 is 2.

The number of poles for the motors M-4 and M5 is 4.
The number of poles for the motors M-6 and M7 is 6.
The number of poles for the motor M-8 is 4.
12-46
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
-
The motors M1, M2 and M3 to LM-1-P02 according to the fixed naming convention (See
below).
The motors M3 and M4 to LM-1-P04 according to the fixed naming convention (See below).
The motors M5 and M6 to LM-1-P06 according to the fixed naming convention (See below).
The motor M8 is not lumped since this motor does not belong to any user-defined lumped
motor.
<Naming Convention>
[Lumped Motor ID] + [-P] + [xx]
Where xx is 2 digits number of poles padded with 0 when less than 10.
Regardless of Poles
When this option is selected, e-DPP ignores the number of poles for lumping.
Load Type
This option is available when Regardless of Groups option is selected in Restart Group
section.
Type by Type
When this option is selected, e-DPP groups the motors within the same lumped motor into
smaller lumped motors (called child lumped motors) based on the load type of individual
motors.

-
12-47
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
-
Lumped Motors
The load type for the motors M-1, M2 and M3 is Pump.

The load type for the motors M-4 and M5 is Compressor.
The load type for the motors M-6 and M7 is Fan.
The load type for the motor M-8 is Pump.
-
The motors M1, M2 and M3 to LM-1-T00 according to the fixed naming convention (See
below).
The motors M3 and M4 to LM-1-T01 according to the fixed naming convention (See below).
The motors M5 and M6 to LM-1-T02 according to the fixed naming convention (See below).
motor.
<Naming Convention>
[Lumped Motor ID] + [-T] + [yy]
Where yy is 2 digits number of the numeric order of load type in Value List padded with
0 when less than 10 (See below image).
Regardless of Types
When this option is selected, e-DPP ignores the load type for lumping.
Moment of Inertia
This option is available when both Regardless of Groups and Regardless of Types options are
selected in Restart Group and Type of Load sections respectively.
12-48
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
Group into Heavy & Light Inertia Loads

When this checkbox is checked, e-DPP groups the motors within the same lumped motor into
smaller lumped motors (called child lumped motors) based on the inertia level, i.e. light or
heavy of individual motors. The boundary limit of light and heavy levels can be defined in the
dialog Edit Defaults of Inertia. See the below paragraph for details.

-
The inertia constant for the motors M-1, M2 and M3 is 0.6 (sec) and categorized light.
The inertia constant for the motors M-4 thru M7 is 2.0 (sec) and categorized Heavy.
The inertia constant for the motor M-8 is 0.8 (sec) and categorized light.
-
The motors M1, M2 and M3 to LM-1-L according to the fixed naming convention (See
below).
The motors M4 thru M7 to LM-1-H according to the fixed naming convention (See below).
motor.
<Naming Convention>
[Lumped Motor ID] + [-z]
Where z is L for light inertia level and H for heavy inertia level.
Naming Conventions for Multiple Criteria 1 (Pole by Pole & Type by Type)
When Pole by Pole and Type by Type options are selected, the naming convention is as follow:
12-49
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
[Lumped Motor ID] + [-P] + [xx] + [-T] + [yy]
Naming Conventions for Multiple Criteria 2 (Pole by Pole & Inertia Level)
When Pole by Pole and Moment of Inertia options are selected, the naming convention is as
follow:
[Lumped Motor ID] + [-P] + [xx] + [-z]
Details
12-50
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
When this button is clicked, the below dialog appears and user is allowed to define the default
criteria of inertia values for different types of loads and the boundary limit between light and
heavy inertia levels.
Boundary Limit of Inertia

Light inertia H (sec) <=
Enter the boundary limit between light and heavy inertia constant levels. The entered value
is regarded as the upper limit and included in the light inertia level.
Heavy inertia H (sec) >
The same value entered above is displayed here and not editable.
Defaults of Inertia H (sec.)

User is allowed to define the default values of inertia constants of motor, coupling and load
separately for different types of load.
Type of Load
<Upper 5>
The first 5 of load types are retrieved from Value List and indicated here. These fields are
not editable.
<Lower 5>
User can select a load type from the pull down list. The list contains the sixth and higher
numeric order of load types in Value List.
12-51
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
Motor
Enter a default inertia constant in second for the motor section of entire machine for
individual load type.
Coupling
Enter a default inertia constant in second for the coupler section of entire machine for
Load
Enter a default inertia constant in second for the load section of entire machine for
Total
Summation of the entered values for motor, coupling and load is indicated here and not
editable. The string Light or Heavy is also indicated at right hand side of this field and
updated whenever any inertia value of motor, coupling or load is altered.
Auto Assignment of H Values to Individual Loads
Once the default values have been entered in the above sections, user is allowed to populate
those values in the electrical load schedule of the project database.
None
When this option is selected, auto assignment is inhibited.
Dont overwrite
Where values are already entered (non-zero) in the electrical load schedule, the default
values defined on this dialog are not overwritten.
Overwrite
The default values defined on this dialog are compulsory overwritten irrespective of the
existing values in the electrical load schedule, zero or non-zero.
Assign button
Click this button to populate the defined inertia constant values in the electrical load
schedule.
When clicked this button with Overwrite option, the below message dialog appears.
When Yes button is clicked, all the inertia constant data will be overwritten.
Command buttons
Save
Clicking this button saves all changes made on this dialog.
12-52
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
Help
Clicking this button launches the online help for this dialog.
Close
Clicking this button closes this dialog.
12.6.3.3 Calculating Lumped Motors

Once all the required data have been entered and the criteria were set up, user can execute the
calculation to lump the motors.
Calculate All Buses

When this checkbox is checked, all motors connected to all buses are calculated and lumped into new
or child lumped motors.
With this checkbox checked the underneath checkbox Calculate All Lumped Motors is disabled with
the checked state.
Calculate All Lumped Motors
When this checkbox is checked, all motors connected to the selected bus only are calculated and
lumped into new or child lumped motors.
This checkbox is invisible when Group by Group option is selected in Restart Group section.
Clear All Sub IDs button
When this button is clicked, the below message dialog appears.
Clicking Yes button will removes all sub IDs from the project database permanently.
Sub ID is a child lumped motor ID which is created by e-DPP program. The parent lumped motor
IDs which user has created manually are not removed with this operation.
Note:
If none of the criteria options (Restart Group, Number of Poles, Load Type and Moment of
Inertia) is selected and the lumping calculation is executed, any child lumped motors that were
created at the last time or previously will not be cleared and will remain in the database.
If they are not required anymore, you may clear them by clicking this button.
Command button
12-53
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
Run
Click this button to execute the lumping calculation. The dialog of calculation results appears. See
the next section 12.6.3.4 Viewing Results of Calculation.
To Excel
Clicking this button exports all the data of the active bus ID shown in dialog to MS Excel.
Save
Clicking this button saves all changes made on this dialog.
Help
Close
12.6.3.4 Viewing Results of Calculation

User can view, export to MS Excel and print the calculation results in two different forms, i.e. Digest
and Breakdown.
Digest (Summary)
Once the calculation completed by clicking Run button, the below dialog appears.
12-54
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
This dialog shows the digest (summary) of the calculation results for the individual lumped motors
and does not include any details of individual AC motors.
Sub-command buttons
Preview
Clicking this button brings up the preview screen.
Breakdown
Clicking this button goes to the breakdown screen of individual AC motors contained in the
lumped motors per sheet. Refer to the section Breakdown below.
To Excel
Clicking this button exports all the data shown in this dialog to MS Excel.
12-55
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
Help
Close
Breakdown
When Breakdown button is clicked on the Digest screen, the below dialog appears.
12-56
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
This dialog indicates all the details of calculated lumped motors and individual AC motors
inclusive of the parameters of model motors which are referred to by ETAP Parameter
Estimation program.
Sub-command buttons
Preview
Clicking this button brings up the preview screen.
To Excel
Clicking this button exports all the data shown in the dialog to MS Excel.
12-57
e-DPP 4.0.2
Load Summary
Lumped Motors
Help
Close
Note:
If none of the criteria options (Restart Group, Number of Poles, Load Type and Moment
of Inertia) is selected and the lumping calculation is executed, any child lumped motors that
were created at the last time or previously will not be cleared and will remain in the database.
If you want to clear the child lumped motors, click Clear All Sub IDs button.
<End of Chapter 12>
12-58
e-DPP 4.0.2
Chapter 13
Cable Management
e-DPP is provided with functions to determine sizes of power cables and associate conduits/glands.
The power cable sizing is performed for electrical loads, e.g. electrical motors static loads, distribution
panels and lighting panels stored in the electrical load schedule.
In order to perform the sizing, you need to input all the required data in the edit form dedicated to this
purpose. The details are described in the Section 13.1.
Also, the library data of motors and cables are referred by the sizing program.
The conduit and cable gland sizing is performed for all or part of cables (power, control, etc.) stored in
the cable schedule.
In order to perform the sizing, "Conduit and Cable Gland Selection Table" needs to be created
beforehand with the menu "Cable Management - Conduit and Gland Size".
e-DPP Cable Management menu covers the following features:
Power Cable Sizing (Batch)

Power Cable Sizing (Individual Loads)
Cable Sizing Chart
Drum Scheduling
Conduit & Gland Sizing
Cable Summary
Gland Summary
Minimum Cable Size
Conduit & Gland Size Table
13-1
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
13.1 Power Cable Sizing (Batch)

Prior to the execution of power cable sizing, the data described below are to be inputted for electrical
loads. Select "All Electrical Loads" from "Edit" menu in the menu bar and then select "Input Data
for Cable Sizing" from the template list when using the e-DPP standard form.
Motors (Induction, Synchronous and MOV)
Equip. Code (0, 1, and 2)

Motor Output
Unit of Motor Output (HP, kW or KVA) (*1)
Motor Rated Voltage (kV) (*1)
No. of Phase (*1)
Full Load Current (A) (*1)
PF at 100% Load (%) (*1)
Locked Rotor Current (%) (*1)
Locked Rotor PF (%) (*1)
Raceway type
Conductor type (Cu or Al) (*2)
Cable Voltage (*2)
Cable Type (XLPE/SWA, etc) (*2)
No. of Cable Conductors (*2)
Unit for No. of Cable Conductors (Usually "Core" for power cables) (*2)
Cable Length (m)
DC Motors
Static Loads
Capacitors
Lumped Loads
UPS's
VFD's
Battery Chargers
Heaters
Space Heaters
Feeder Circuits
Lighting Circuits
Equip. Code (3 to 15)

Rated Capacity
Unit of Rated Capacity (HP, kW, KVA or kvar) (*1)
Load Rated Voltage (kV)
Full Load Current (A) (*1)
PF at 100% Load (%) (*1)
Raceway type
Conductor type (Cu or Al) (*2)
Cable Voltage (*2)
Cable Type (XLPE/SWA, etc) (*2)
No. of Cable Conductors (*2)
13-2
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Unit for No. of Cable Conductors (Usually "Core" for power cables) (*2)
Cable Length (m)
(*1) The characteristic data for motors and static loads can be filled out with the Data Filling program,
as required.
(*2) The data for cable specification may be omitted since the sizing program has the option to fill out
user specified defaults. See the section 13.1.1 for further details.
(*3) Power cable ID is not necessarily required for the power cable sizing. However, cables with no
ID's will not be transferred to a cable schedule since cable ID is essential.
13.1.1 Cable Sizing Criteria
<Dialog of Cable Sizing Criteria>

When you select the menu "Cable Management" "Power Cable Sizing", the dialog as shown
above will appear. Here, you can specify the various parameters required for the sizing.
Criteria of Cable Sizing

Allowable Voltage Drop (%)
Motor - Running - LV
Allowable voltage drop in % against a system voltage for low voltage motors (kV <= 1.0) at normal
13-3
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
running. Typical value is 3-5%.
Motor - Starting - LV
Allowable voltage drop in % against a system voltage for low voltage motors (kV <= 1.0) at starting.
Typical value is 15-20%.
Motor - Running - HV
Allowable voltage drop in % against a system voltage for high voltage motors (kV > 1.0) at normal
running. Typical value is 3-5%.
Motor - Starting - HV
Allowable voltage drop in % against a system voltage for high voltage motors (kV > 1.0) at starting.
Motor - Running - DC
Allowable voltage drop in % against a system voltage for DC voltage motors at normal running.
(Note: Starting current of DC motor is not considered.)
Static Load - Operating - LV

Allowable voltage drop in % against a system voltage for low voltage static loads (kV <= 1.0) at
normal operation. Typical value is 1-5%.
Static Load - Operating - HV

Allowable voltage drop in % against a system voltage for high voltage static loads (kV > 1.0) at
normal operation. Typical value is 1-5%.
Feeder - Main - LV
Allowable voltage drop in % against a system voltage for low voltage main feeder circuits going to
medium or large distribution panels (kV <= 1.0) at normal operation. Typical value is 1-3%.
Feeder - Branch - LV
Allowable voltage drop in % against a system voltage for low voltage branch feeder circuits going to
small distribution panels (kV <= 1.0) at normal operation. Typical value is 2-5%.
Feeder - Main - HV
Allowable voltage drop in % against a system voltage for high voltage main feeder circuits going to
medium or large distribution panels (kV > 1.0) at normal operation. Typical value is 1-3%.
Feeder - Branch - HV
Allowable voltage drop in % against a system voltage for high voltage branch feeder circuits going to
small distribution panels (kV > 1.0) at normal operation. Typical value is 2-5%.
Lighting - Main - LV
Allowable voltage drop in % against a system voltage for low voltage main lighting circuits going to
medium or large lighting panels (kV <= 1.0) at normal operation. Typical value is 1-5%.
13-4
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Lighting - Branch - LV
Allowable voltage drop in % against a system voltage for low voltage branch lighting circuits going to
small lighting panels (kV <= 1.0) at normal operation. Typical value is 1-5%.
(Note: System voltages are specified in the menu "Project" "Electrical".)
Calculation Formulas Button

Click this button to display Select Calculation Formulas dialog.
e-DPP provides two different formulas for normal running motors and three different formulas for
starting motors.
Normal Running Formula 1:
e-DPP default formula. Compensation factor Vm/Vs is not considered.
Normal Running Formula 2:
Multiplying compensation factor Vm/Vs. This formula results in smaller voltage drop than
Formula-1 when Vm < Vs.
Motor Start Formula 1:
Same as Normal Running Formula 1 except the parameters Is and s instead of I and .
Same as Normal Running Formula 2 except the parameters Is and s instead of I and .
e-DPP default formula. Based on constant Z motor model.
13-5
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
For the details of those formulas, refer to Section 13.1.4.
Apply Default Minimum Cable Sizes

Check this box to apply predetermined minimum cable sizes for individual motor loads. When this
option is applied and then calculated cable sizes are less than the corresponding minimum cable sizes,
the latter is taken as calculation results.
When motor kW or HP is greater than the maximum kW or HP registered in Minimum Cable Size
table, the minimum cable size for the maximum kW or HP in the table is taken.
"Show Min. Cable Size" Button

To define or edit the minimum cable sizes for motor loads, click "Show Min. Cable Size" button.
"Minimum Cable Sizes" dialog box appears.
(Note: The minimum cable sizes can be also accessed from the menu "Cable Management"
"Minimum Cable Size".)
<Dialog of Minimum Cable Sizes>

When cable sizing is run, the saved values from this dialog box will be reflected on the power cable
sizing results.
(Note: For DC motor cables, option for "Minimum Cable Sizes" is ignored.)
Adjust by Ambient Temp. (deg.C) (Ta)

When this option is selected, the temperature adjustment factors Fta is calculated (approximately) for
each installation method ("U/G" or "A/G") by the difference between the base and actual ambient
temperatures of cable installation with the following formula;
13-6
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Fta =
Tc T
Tc Ta
Where
Tc: Maximum conductor temperature
Ta: Base ambient temperature
T : Actual ambient temperature
Tc and Ta are stored in the cable library. T is selected from the pull down list "U/G" or "A/G" by user.
Calculation results are shown in the column "Temp Factor" in "Cable Application" section below.
Apply Grouping Factor (GF)

Grouping factors can be specified in 2 different ways.
Global:
Individual:
Specify GF for each voltage class and installation method (U/G or A/G)
Specify GF for each load
The global GFs are specified on this dialog while the individual GFs are specified on the editor of
Load Schedule template All Electrical Loads Input Data for Cable Sizing.
Global GF only
Cable sizing is carried out taking into account the global GFs only and does not refer to any
individual GFs.
Individual GF only
Cable sizing is carried out taking into account the individual GFs only and does not refer to any
global GFs. If there is no input in Load Schedule, no cable sizing is carried out.
Global & Individual GF

Cable sizing is carried out taking into account either the global or individual GFs. If both are
available for a certain load, the individual GF always takes precedence over the global one.
Note: The individual GFs are highlighted in different colors on the sizing result spreadsheet and MS
Excel output.
Target Data for Cable Sizing

Sized or Unsized
Unsized Power Cables Only
When this option is selected, power cables in the electrical load schedule where cable sizes are blank
13-7
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
(including Error code) or #Wire/Phase is zero (0) become the targets for the sizing.
All Power Cables

When this option is selected, all power cables in the electrical load schedule become targets for the
sizing. These will overwrite the existing sizes unless "Lock" option is specified on the electrical load
schedule.
Cable Library
Use Available Cable Sizes Only
When this option is selected, only the cable sizes in the cable library where the field [Available] = Yes
become available for the sizing.
Use All Cable Sizes

When this option is selected, all the cable sizes in the cable library become available for the sizing.
Type of Electrical Equipment

Clicking "Details" button brings up "User Options" - "Cable Sizing" tab. Users could select equipment
types to include in the cable sizing calculation.
The equipment types are specified in the menu "Edit" category "All Elec. Loads" some editor
screens.
Type of Driven Loads

The target motors for cable sizing can be filtered by the type of their driven load. This option allows
user to specify different sizing criteria such as the derating factors for different types of motors
(according to driven load). For example, in the case of air fin coolers where normally no spare
13-8
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
machines are provided in the air fin bays, their power cables carry current nearly to their designed
ampacity limit.
Exclude Locked Items

Overwriting data for locked items is impossible on e-DPP. However, this option is an exception. Cable
sizing can be performed irrespective of the value of individual "Locked" flag.
When this check box remains checked, "Locked" records are excluded from the scope of cable sizing
algorithm.
Cable Application
Overwrite Cable Voltage & Type
When this option is selected, cable voltages, cable types and no. of cores specified here will have
priorities for the sizing. Existing cable sizes will be overwritten on the electrical load schedule.
Manufacturer
Select a manufacturer for the cable sizing data reference. The default value initially set is "DPP".
Frequency (Hz)
The power frequency from the menu "Project" "Standard" is shown here.
Units
The units of cable dimensions selected in the menu "Project" "Standard" is shown here.
Standard
The applied standard of cable selected in the menu "Project" "Standard" is shown here.
Voltage Class
Run Sizing
Select the desired voltage classes on which to perform the sizing.
Load kV
The motor rated voltages selected in the menu "Project" "Electrical" are shown here.
Cable Voltage
The rated cable voltages defined in the menu "Project" "Electrical" are shown. It is necessary to
define the cable rated voltage prior to the sizing calculation if cable types on this GUI is to be selected.
U/G and A/G

Indicate the appropriate cable type and grouping factor to be used in the cable sizing for each voltage
class and type of installation i.e. U/G and A/G
Cable Type
You can select cable type from the list box for each voltage class and each type of cable installation,
A/G (Above ground) or U/G (Underground).
13-9
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
The correspondence with the raceway type is as follows;

U/G Duct
U/G Buried
A/G Trays
A/G Conduit
Air Drop
U/G
U/G
A/G
A/G
A/G
(Raceway Type = 0)
(Raceway Type = 1)
(Raceway Type = 2)
(Raceway Type = 3)
(Raceway Type = 4)
Temp Factor
The temperature derating factor is automatically displayed here.
described in "Adjust by Ambient Temp. (deg.C) (Ta)" above.
The calculation of this factor is
Group Factor
You can specify grouping factors in the range of 0.01 to 1.00 for each voltage class and each type of
cable installation. The grouping factors reflect installation method of cable conductors, e.g. spacing,
trefoil, parallel, trays, etc. e-DPP does not consider adjustment factors for differences in soil thermal
resistivity or depth of buried cables, these factors may be included into the grouping factors for a
practical solution.
Application MF
Specify the desired Application MF (Multiplying Factor) for motor and static load independently. The
Application MF is used to derate the cable ampacity (MF times full load current).
Clicking Application MF button will bring up a new dialog as shown below:
Edit Application MF dialog

There are two sections, Global Multiplying Factors (GMF) and Individual Multiplying Factors
(IMF) on this dialog. User is allowed to select only one of them by clicking radio button.
Global Multiplying Factors (GMF)
Values specified in this section are applied to all eight voltage classes, HV-1, HV-2, MV-1,
13-10
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
MV-2, LV-1 (3ph), LV-2 (3ph), LV (1ph) and DC.

For more details about the voltage classes, refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.4 Electrical.
GMF
Select or enter two GMF values.
The upper one is for electrical loads with its full load current less than a value specified in
FLC (A) text box on the right side of I < symbol.
The lower one is for electrical loads with its full load current equal or greater than a value
specified in FLC (A) text box on the right side of I >= symbol.
FLC (A)
Enter a boundary FLC in ampere between two GMFs. This value is included for the
higher GMF. Only the upper text box for low GMF is editable and its value is
immediately echoed in the lower one when changed.
Individual Multiplying Factors (IMF)

Values specified in this section are applied to the voltage classes separately as follows:
HV & MV
LV
DC
HV-1, HV-2, MV-1 and MV-2
LV-1 (3ph), LV-2 (3ph) and LV (1ph)
DC
Copy GMF button

Click this button to copy the values specified in Global Multiplying Factors (GMF)
section to all six sub-sections of Individual Multiplying Factors (IMF) section. This
command is useful when majority of values in IMF section are the same as those in GMF
section and user needs to alter a few items only.
Clicking this button will bring up the below dialog to warn a user.
Motor section
IMF and boundary FLC (A) specified here are applied to motor loads. Applicable type of
motors depends on the selections in User Options Cable Sizing Equipment type.
Static Load section
IMF and boundary FLC (A) specified here are applied to static loads. Applicable type of
static loads depends on the selections in User Options Cable Sizing Equipment
type.
Help
Clicking this button will launch the context online help.
Apply
Once all the desired settings for MF and FLC (A) have been done, click this button to
13-11
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
save them to the project database and refresh the indications in Cable Sizing Criteria
dialog from where this dialog was called.
Close
Clicking this button will close this dialog. Any changes made on this dialog will be saved
silently without any warning to user.
Motor Low
These cells indicate MF values for motors having FLC (A) less than the boundary FLC (A)
specified in Edit Application MF dialog.
Motor High
These cells indicate MF values for motors having FLC (A) equal or greater than the boundary FLC
(A) specified in Edit Application MF dialog.
Motor FLC
These cells indicate the boundary FLC (A) values for motors specified in Edit Application MF
dialog.
Static Load Low
These cells indicate MF values for static loads having FLC (A) less than the boundary FLC (A)
specified in Edit Application MF dialog.
Static Load High
These cells indicate MF values for static loads having FLC (A) equal or greater than the boundary
FLC (A) specified in Edit Application MF dialog.
Static Load FLC
These cells indicate the boundary FLC (A) values for static loads specified in Edit Application
MF dialog.
13.1.2 Command Buttons

Run
After all the parameters are set above, click "Run" button to execute power cable sizing. If one or
more cables were tagged for sizing, "Results" window appears as shown in the next page, Section
13.1.3.
Save
To save the parameters set above, click "Save" button.
Print
An image of this active window is pasted to Word Pad file. You can print the image showing all the
parameters.
Help
Click on "Help" button to open On-Line help file.
13-12
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Close
Click on "Close" button to close this dialog window of Cable Sizing Criteria.
13.1.3 Results
<Dialog of Cable Sizing Results>

When "Run" button is clicked, the calculation of power cable sizing starts and the above window will
be shown.
The cells filled with yellow color mean newly substituted values by the program.
The cells filled with blue color mean erroneous values (usually 0) that cause failure of the sizing. You
need to correct those values in the editor and run the sizing program again.
Table of Sizing Results

This window indicates the results of cable sizing including;
Size
This column indicates calculated cable sizes. If the sizing fails and no cable size have been determined,
error codes are filled in these cells instead of normal cable sizes.
Error Code
Err_1
Err_2_1
Err_2_2
Err_3_1
Err_3_2
Err_3_3
Err_4_1
Err_4_2
Err_5
Err_6
Reason of Sizing Failure

Cable length is zero.
System voltage is zero.
Load voltage is zero.
Motor locked rotor current is zero.
Full load current is zero or negative.
Power factor is zero.
Cable resistance is zero.
Cable reactance is zero.
Cable ampacity data in the library are empty.
Number of wires per phase exceeded 9
13-13
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
#/Ph
This column indicates the number of parallel conductors per phase (Max. 9). If this figure exceeds 9,
the program terminates the sizing calculation and goes to the next electrical load. (Error code: "Err_6")
Length (m)
Length of cable in meter entered in the electrical load schedule.
Resistance (Ohm/km)
Resistance value of cable in ohms per one kilometer retrieved from the cable library. If #/Ph is more
than 1, the value is divided by #/Ph value.
Reactance (Ohm/km)
Reactance value of cable in ohms per one kilometer retrieved from the cable library. If #/Ph is more
than 1, the value is divided by #/Ph value.
Nominal Ampacity
Ampacity of the cable in ampere (base ampacity) before any adjustment (no de-rating factors is
applied) retrieved from the cable library.
Temp Adj Factor

Derating factors for cable ampacity due to difference between base temperature on which cable is
rated and the ambient temperature where the cable will be laid.
Group Factor
Derating factor for cable ampacity due to the grouping effect of cable installation in raceway. This
factor is manually determined outside of e-DPP.
Note: Global GF values will be indicated when Global GF only option was selected as Apply
Grouping Factor (GF). On the other hand, individual GF values will be indicated when Individual
GF only option was selected. In addition, when Global & Individual GF option was selected,
either global GF or individual GF values will be indicated depending on the availability of GF values
specified per load. However, when both the global and individual GFs were specified, e-DPP will
utilize the individual values. Individual values will be highlighted in different colors for both the
spread sheet result and excel report.
Derating Factor
Overall derating factor (Grouping factor * Temperature factor)
Derated Ampacity
Calculated cable ampacity multiplied by the overall derating factors.
%VD at Running
Calculated voltage drop (%) for the selected cable size at normal running condition.
Max. Length Run (m)

Maximum allowable length (m) of the selected cable size at normal operation
%VD at Starting
Calculated voltage drop (%) for the selected cable size at motor starting.
13-14
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Max. Length Start (m)

Maximum allowable length (m) of the selected cable size at motor starting
FLA/Temp Amp
Ratio of the full load current of the connected load and the de-rated cable ampacity due to the "Temp
Adj Factor" only ("Group Factor" not included).
Min. Size
If "Apply Default Minimum Cable Sizes" is selected, the minimum cable sizes for individual rated
motors are retrieved from the minimum cable size table. This option is applicable for motors only (not
for static loads).
Final Select Size

Select any cable size from the drop down list to alter the calculated size. This size will serve as the
final size of the cable under consideration. If "Final Select Size" is not explicitly specified, the
calculated size will take the precedence.
When selecting a new size different from the calculated one, a "Go" button will be shown in the
adjacent column "Re-Calc". Clicking this button will result to a new set of calculated values based on
the specified size. Parameters modified due to these results will be indicated in pink color.
(Note: An alert message will appear when the selected cable size from the drop down list is less than
the calculated value, "Selected size is smaller than the calculated one! Changing the size will result in
non-conformance with the sizing criteria".)
Key Factor
The number indicating key factors by which criteria the cable sizes have been determined are shown in
this column.
Key Factor = 1: By Ampacity
Key Factor = 2: By Voltage drop at normal running
Key Factor = 3: By Voltage drop at motor start
Key Factor = 4: By Minimum Cable Size
Key Factor = 5: By User Selection
Re-Calc
A "Go" button will be displayed to indicate that a new size (different from the calculated value) was
selected from the "Final Selected Size" column. Refer to "Final Selected Size" above.
13-15
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Note 1: It is not allowed to alter the calculated value of #/Ph. Even when you change the size, the recalculation
will be carried out based on the indicated #/Ph value.
Note 2: Even if you don't carry out the recalculation, the selected size in the column "Final Selected Size", if any,
will designate the final size of the cable.
Lock All/Unlock All

Locking or unlocking of all the records in a single click is possible with this option. In this way,
records will be secured from overwriting.
Sizing Filter
In this option, calculated cable results will be filtered to show "all", "sized", or "unsized" items.
All
All the cables are shown regardless of sizing results.
Sized
Only cables with succeeded sizing results will be shown.
Unsized
Only cables for which the sizing failed and have the error codes (Err_***) will be shown.
Select Filter
You can filter the spread window with a field value of column where the cursor is currently located.
Filter
Only records that have the same cell value in a column where the cursor is located will be shown.
Remove
Reset the selected filter to show all the records.
Multi-Sort (+ Load ID)

You can sort the spread data with the following 6 option buttons;
None
Sorted by Load ID in an ascending order.
kV
Sorted by Load rated voltage in a descending order and Load ID in an ascending order.
Eq Type
Sorted by Equipment code and Load ID both in an ascending order.
Type/kV
Sorted by Equipment code (ascending), Load rated voltage (descending) and Load ID in an ascending
order.
13-16
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Cab Spec
Sorted by Cable voltage, Cable type, No. of cores and Load ID all in an ascending order.
Inst.
Sorted by raceway type and Load ID both in an ascending order.
(Note: Clicking the column headers can also sort the spread window. Subsequent clicks toggle
ascending and descending orders.)
Command
Save
Click this button to save the sizing results shown in this window. However, if "Lock" protection is set
"ON" in the electrical load schedule, new calculated cable sizes will not be overwritten.
To Excel
The sizing results can be exported to e-DPP predefined or user-defined Excel form. After clicking this
button, another dialog box will be shown where in the user can specify items (form to be used, page
feed condition, etc.) as desired.
"Template Name"
Select any form from the pull down list to which the cable sizing results will be exported.
A predefined user form can be defined in the menu "Template" "Cable Sizing Result".
"Excel File Name"

A different Excel template can be defined. However, changing it might cause mismatches in cell
addresses against the selected template.
"Sheet Feed by"

This option allows user to define a base field (kV, System kV, MotVoltageClass, etc.) where the output
should be categorized as sheets in excel.
Preview
13-17
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Preview Toolbar
"Next"
Click on "Next" button to navigate the next page (grayed-out if the preview contains only one page or
if the preview is on the last page).
"Previous"
Click on "Previous" button the navigate to previous page (grayed-out if the preview contains only one
page or if the preview is on the first page).
"Zoom"
Click on "Zoom" button to zoom-in or out the preview layout.
"Print"
Click on "Print" button to bring up the Print dialog box to start and print job.
(Note: Print setup is also accessible in this menu.)
"Setup"
Click on "Setup" button to display the Setup dialog box, which contains options that allows user to
define printing preferences.
"Close"
Click on "Close" button to close and return to Cable Sizing result Dialog.
Help
13-18
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Close
Click on "Close" button to save (apply the result of the cable sizing) and return to the dialog of Cable
Sizing Criteria.
13.1.4 Calculation Formulas

The criteria of power cable sizing implemented in e-DPP are expressed by the following three
categories;
(1) Derated cable ampacity vs. load current
(2) Voltage drop (%) at normal load operation
(3) Voltage drop (%) at motor start (For motor loads only)
The detailed procedures and formulas for power cable sizing are described below.
13.1.4.1 Cable Ampacities

"Temperature Factor"
When "Adjust by Ambient Temp. (Ta)" is selected on the entrance menu, the temperature factor Fta is
calculated with the approximation formula for each installation method ("U/G" or "A/G") by the
difference between the base and actual ambient temperatures of cable installation;
Fta =
Tc T
Tc Ta
Where
The result of calculated Fta is referred by the cable sizing calculation and reflected to the overall
"Derating Factor".
If this option is not selected, the default value 1.00 is substituted in Fta.
"Grouping Factor"
You can input grouping factor Fg for each cable installation type on the entrance menu. The product of
Fg and Fta becomes an overall derating factor.
"Comparison with Load Current"

The derated cable ampacity is compared with a load current multiplied by "Application MF" that can
be inputted on the entrance menu.
[Cable Ampacity] * Fta * Fg > [Application MF] * [Load Current]
If the above condition becomes true, then the program goes to the next step to calculate a voltage drop.
If false, the next larger size of cable in the cable library will be examined.
13-19
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
13.1.4.2 Unit Adjustment for R & X

Prior to the voltage drop calculations, the program converts cable resistances and reactances into the
unit of "ohm per 1 km" since the cable library may include several units for cable length.
13.1.4.3 Voltage Drop at Normal Operation

Maximum Cable Length at a Given Voltage Drop at Normal Operation
The calculation formulas for the maximum length of cable against the specified voltage drop at normal
running vary depending on the types of loads and user selections as follows.
(1) 3-phase Motor (3 & 4 Wires)

<Formula 1>
10000 VS
3 I (r cos + x sin )
<Formula 2>
10000 VS2
3 Vm I (r cos + x sin )
where:
l:
:
Vs :
Vm :
I:
r:
x:
cos:
sin:
Maximum cable length (m)

Specified voltage drop (%)
System (bus) voltage (kV, Line-Line)
Motor rated voltage (kV)
Motor full load current (A)
Resistance of cable (ohm/km)
Reactance of cable (ohm/km)
Motor power factor at full load
Motor reactance factor at full load
(2) 1-phase Motor (2 Wires Line-Line & 3 Wires Line-Line)

<Formula 1>
5000 VS
I (r cos + x sin )
<Formula 2>
5000 VS2
Vm I (r cos + x sin )
(3) 1-phase Motor (3 Wires Line-Neutral)

<Formula 1>
5000 VS
I (r cos + x sin )
13-20
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
<Formula 2>
2500 VS2
Vm I (r cos + x sin )
(4) 3-phase Static Load (incl. Capacitor, UPS, Feeder, Lighting Circuit, VFD, Battery
Charger, Heater, Space Heater and Lumped Load) (3 & 4 Wires)
The calculation formula for the maximum cable length is given below by using KVA of a
static load.
10000 VS2
KVA (r cos + x sin )
where:
l:
:
Vs :
r:
x:
cos:
sin:

Power factor of static load at full load
Reactance factor of static load at full load
(5) 1-phase Static Load (2 Wires Line-Line & 3 Wires Line-Line)
5000 VS2
(6) 1-phase Static Load (3 Wires Line-Neutral)
2500 VS2
(7) DC Motor
<Formula 1>
5000 VS
I r
<Formula 2>
5000 VS2
Vm I r
If the calculated l(m) is greater than or equal to the length of load cable, the program goes to the next
13-21
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
step to calculate a voltage drop at motor start.

If not, the next larger size of cable in the cable library will be examined.
Voltage Drop at a Given Cable Length at Normal Operation

The formulas for voltage drop (%) at normal operation are as follows;
(1) 3-phase Motor

<Formula 1>
<Formula 2>
where:
:
l:
Vs:
Vm :
I:
r:
x:
cos:
sin:
3 I (rl cos + xl sin )

10000 VS
3 Vm I (rl cos + xl sin )
10000 VS2
Calculated voltage drop (%) by the selected cable size
Actual cable length (m) of load
Motor full load current (A)
Resistance (ohm/km) of the selected cable size
Reactance (ohm/km) of the selected cable size

<Formula 1>
I (rl cos + xl sin )

5000 VS
<Formula 2>
Vm I (rl cos + xl sin )

5000 VS2

<Formula 1>
I (rl cos + xl sin )

5000 VS
13-22
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
<Formula 2>
Vm I (rl cos + xl sin )

2500 VS2
(4) 3-phase Static Load
KVA (rl cos + xl sin )

10000 VS2
where:
:
KVA :
l:
Vm :
Vs :
r:
x:
cos:
sin:

Capacity of static load (kVA)
Power factor of static load at full load
Reactance factor of static load at full load
(5) 1-phase Static Load (2 Wires Line-Line & 3 Wires Line-Line)

5000 VS2
(6) 1-phase Static Load (3 Wires Line-Neutral)

2500 VS2
(7) DC Motor
<Formula 1>
I r l
5000 VS
<Formula 2>
Vm I r l
5000 VS2
13.1.4.4 Voltage Drop at Motor Start

Maximum Cable Length at a Given Voltage Drop at Motor Start
The maximum cable length against the specified voltage drop (%) is calculated with the formulas
depending on user selections;
13-23
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
(1) 3-phase Motor

<Formula 1>
lS
10000 S VS
3 I S (r cos S + x sin S )
<Formula 2>
lS
10000 S VS2
3 Vm I S (r cos S + x sin S )
<Formula 3>
(rR + xX ) +
(rR + xX )2
l S = 1000

r 2 + x 2 R 2 + X 2
1 S
100
r 2 + x2

<Formula 1>
lS
5000 S VS
I S (r cos S + x sin S )
<Formula 2>
lS
5000 S VS2
Vm I S (r cos S + x sin S )
<Formula 3>
(rR + xX ) +
(rR + xX )2
l S = 1000

r 2 + x 2 R 2 + X 2
1 S
100
r 2 + x2

<Formula 1>
lS
5000 S VS
I S (r cos S + x sin S )
<Formula 2>
lS
2500 S VS2
Vm I S (r cos S + x sin S )
13-24
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
<Formula 3>
(rR + xX ) +
(rR + xX )2
l S = 1000
where:
lS :
S :
Vs :
Vm :
Is (%)
r:
x:
coss:
sins:
Z:

r 2 + x 2 R 2 + X 2
1 S
100
r 2 + x2

Motor locked rotor current (%) of I
Motor power factor at starting
Motor reactance factor at starting
Motor impedance at starting (ohm)
<3-phase Motor>
Z=
100000 Vm
3 IS I
<1-phase Motor>
Z=
100000 Vm
IS I
R:
Motor resistance at starting (ohm)
X:
Motor reactance at starting (ohm)
R = Z cos S
X = Z sin S
If the calculated l(m) is greater than or equal to the length of load cable, this cable size will be taken as
a calculation result.
If not, the next larger size of cable in the cable library will be examined.
Voltage Drop at a Given Cable Length at Motor Start

The formulas for voltage drop (%) at motor start are;
(1) 3-phase Motor

<Formula 1>
3 I S (rl cos S + xl sin S )

10000 VS
13-25
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
<Formula 2>
3 Vm I S (rl cos S + xl sin S )

10000 VS2
<Formula 3>
S = 1
100
2
2
rl
xl
R +
+X +
1000
1000

<Formula 1>
I S (rl cos S + xl sin S )

5000 VS
<Formula 2>
Vm I S (rl cos S + xl sin S )

5000 VS2
<Formula 3>
S = 1
100
2
2
xl
rl
+X +
R +
1000
1000

<Formula 1>
I S (rl cos S + xl sin S )

5000 VS
<Formula 2>
Vm I S (rl cos S + xl sin S )

2500 VS2
<Formula 3>
S = 1
100
2
2
xl
rl
+X +
R +
1000
1000
13-26
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
where:
S :
l:
Vs:
Vm :
Is :
r:
x:
Z:

Motor starting current (A)
Motor impedance at starting (ohm)
<3-phase Motor>
Z=
100000 Vm
3 IS I
<1-phase Motor>
Z=
100000 Vm
IS I
R:
Motor resistance at starting (ohm)
X:
Motor reactance at starting (ohm)
coss:
sins:

R = Z cos S
X = Z sin S
<Note for Low Voltage 1-phase 3-wire System>

When kV of single phase load is less than 75% of system kV, the load is treated as connected between
line and neutral wires, e.g. Load 1 between L1 and N wires or Load 2 between L2 and N wires as
shown in the below circuit diagram:
13-27
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
e-DPP sizes power cables for 1-Phase system based on assumption that all loads connected between
line and neutral wires are balanced. In the above circuit diagram, the capacity of Load 1 should be
equal to Load 2. In other words, e-DPP calculates a cable size for Load 1 or Load 2 based on
assumption that current flown through the neutral wire N is zero. That means that Load 1 and
Load 2 need to be integrated to single load like Load 3 for determining a required cable size.
Calculation results such as voltage drops and maximum cable lengths shown by e-DPP for single
phase loads connected between line and neutral should be regarded as reference purpose only and not
be used for determining cable sizes for procurement or construction.
13-28
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
13.2 Power Cable Sizing (Individual Loads)

In addition to the batch cable sizing described in the above section 13.1, e-DPP provides with another
capability to size power cables for individual loads one by one. When user wants to size the cables for
a single load with different criteria from others, e.g. particular derating factor, this feature gives
flexibility in size determination in conjunction with the batch sizing.
This function can be launched from the editor of any template for load schedule by selecting a target
load and then right clicking on the editor screen.
When you select Cable Sizing from the popup menu, the new dialog appears as below.
13-29
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Load Data
This section indicates the relevant properties of the target load that are required for cable sizing and
retrieved from Load Schedule database.
Load ID
Tag number of the target load. This field is not editable.
Equip. Type
Type of equipment which is driven by the target load or the load itself. The abbreviation defined in
the menu Defaults Value List is indicated here. This field is not editable.
Output (HP/kW/kVA/kvar)
Rated output of motor or capacity of other load. The unit varies depending on the user selected one
in the editor. These fields are not editable.
Poles
Number of poles for motor. This field is not editable.
Rated KV
Rated voltage of the target load in kilo-volt. This field is not editable.
Phase
Number of phases or DC for the target load. This field is not editable.
Wire
Number of wires of power supply system to the target load. This field appears only when Phase = 1
since the calculation formula is affected by the number of wires for a single-phase load only. This
field is not editable.
System KV
Nominal voltage of power supply system to the target load in kilo-volt. This value is retrieved from
the menu Project Electrical if available. If Project Electrical data have not been
specified yet, the same figure as the above load rated voltage Rated KV is substituted as a default.
13-30
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
This field is not editable.
FLC (A)
Full load or rated current of the target load in amperes. This field is not editable.
Application MF
Application multiplying factor against the loads current in per unit. This value is considered as a
margin for conservative sizing and usually equal to or greater than 1.0. The load current that is
compared with derated cable ampacity in the sizing calculation is adjusted by this value.
This value is retrieved from the menu Cable Management Power Cable Sizing Cable
Sizing Criteria if available. If the data have not been specified yet, 1.0 is substituted as a default.
This field is editable but not saved anywhere. When user changes this value, MF x FLC (A) is
automatically recalculated.
MF x FLC (A)
A product of FLC and Application MF. This value is compared with derated cable ampacity.
This field is not editable.
PF at Full Load (%)

Power factor of the target load at its full load operation in %. This field is not editable.
LRC (%)
Locked rotor current for motor in %. This field is not editable.
PF at Start (%)
Power factor of the target load at its starting time in %. This field is not editable.
Power Cable Data

This section indicates the relevant properties of the power cable that are required for cable sizing and
retrieved from Cable Library and Load Schedule databases.
Cable ID
Tag number of the power cable. This field is not editable.
If the cable ID is not assigned in the load schedule database, this field is left blank and not
necessarily required for executing the cable sizing.
Raceway Type
Installation method of power cable. The full description defined in the menu Defaults Value
List is indicated here. This field is not editable.
Conductor
Raw material of cable conductor, Cu or Al. This field is not editable.
Insulation Voltage
Rated voltage of conductor insulation. This field is not editable.
13-31
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Core
Number of wires per cable and type of wires (C, P, etc.). This field is not editable.
Length (m)
Length of cable in meter. This field is not editable.
Insulation Type
Materials of insulation, sheath, jacket, armor, etc. This field is not editable.
Temp. Adj. Factor

Temperature adjustment factor calculated (approximately) by the difference between the base and
actual ambient temperatures of cable installation.
This field is editable but not saved anywhere. When user changes this value, Derating Factor is
automatically recalculated.
Grouping Factor
Grouping factor reflecting installation method of cable conductors, e.g. spacing, trefoil, parallel,
trays, etc. e-DPP does not consider adjustment factors for differences in soil thermal resistivity or
depth of buried cables, these factors may be included into the grouping factors as a practical
solution.
This value is retrieved first from Load Schedule where the grouping factor can be specified for
loads individually. If the value is zero (no input), e-DPP then retrieves it from database setup with
the menu Cable Management Power Cable Sizing Cable Sizing Criteria if
available. If again the data have not been specified yet, 1.0 is substituted as a default. This field is
editable and saved in the load schedule database when you click Save button. When user changes
this value, Derating Factor is automatically recalculated.
Derating Factor
A product of Temp. Adj. Factor and Grouping Factor. This field is not editable.
Vd at Running (%)
Allowable voltage drop in % against a system voltage for motors or other loads at normal running.
This field is editable but not saved anywhere.
Vd at Start (%)
Allowable voltage drop in % against a system voltage for motors at starting. This value is retrieved
from the menu Cable Management Power Cable Sizing Cable Sizing Criteria if
available. If the data have not been specified yet, 15.0 is substituted as a default. This field is
editable but not saved anywhere.
Library Quick Pick button

Clicking this button brings up the dialog of Library Quick Pick for selecting the power cable
header (without size).
13-32
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
When you click OK button, those header information are populated in the fields on the previous
Power Cable Sizing dialog. (Note: They are not saved until you click Save button.)
Apply Default Minimum Cable Size checkbox

Check this box to apply predetermined minimum cable sizes for individual loads. When this option
is applied and then calculated cable sizes are less than the corresponding minimum cable sizes, the
latter is taken as calculation results.
When motor kW or HP is greater than the maximum kW or HP registered in Minimum Cable Size
table, the minimum cable size for the maximum kW or HP in the table is taken.
(Note: The minimum cable sizes can be also accessed from the menu "Cable Management"
"Minimum Cable Size".)
When New Cable Size is already calculated and you check this box, the minimum size will be
substituted in the field Size of New Cable Size section if the new cable size is smaller than the
minimum cable size.
Min. Cable Size

Show the predetermined minimum cable size corresponding to the specified cable specifications.
Cable Library option

Use Available Cable Sizes Only
When this option is selected, only the cable sizes in the cable library where the field [Available]
= Yes become available for the sizing.
Use All Cable Sizes
13-33
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
When this option is selected, all the cable sizes in the cable library become available for the
sizing.
Present Cable Size

Size (mm2 or AWG/kcmil)
This field indicates the present power cable size calculated and/or saved in Load Schedule database
if available.
Cables/Ph
This field indicates the number of parallel conductors per phase for the present cable.
R (ohm/km)
Resistance value of the present cable size in ohms per one kilo-meter retrieved from the cable
library. If Cables/Ph is more than 1, the value is divided by Cables/Ph value.
X (ohm/km)
Reactance value of the present cable size in ohms per one kilo-meter retrieved from the cable library.
If Cables/Ph is more than 1, the value is divided by Cables/Ph value.
Nominal Amp. (A)

Ampacity of the present cable size in ampere (base ampacity) before any adjustment (no de-rating
factors is applied) retrieved from the cable library. If Cables/Ph is more than 1, the value is
multiplied by Cables/Ph value.
Derated Amp. (A)

Calculated cable ampacity of the present cable size in ampere multiplied by the overall derating
factors. If Cables/Ph is more than 1, the value is multiplied by Cables/Ph value.
Vd at Run (%)
Calculated voltage drop (%) for the present cable size at normal running condition.
Max. Length at Run (m)

Maximum allowable length (m) of the present cable size at normal operation.
Vd at Start (%)
Calculated voltage drop (%) for the present cable size at motor starting.
Max. Length at Start (m)

Maximum allowable length (m) of the present cable size at motor starting.
New Cable Size

Size (mm2 or AWG/kcmil)
This field indicates power cable size newly calculated by clicking Run button. If the sizing failed,
an error code is shown in System Message section.
Cables/Ph pull down list & Fix checkbox

You can select the number of parallel conductors per phase (Max. 10) before sizing by clicking this
list and check Fix checkbox. e-DPP will size the cable with the fixed number of parallel cables.
13-34
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
If you dont check Fix checkbox, e-DPP will determine the required number of parallel cables
according to the sizing formulas and indicates the result in this list.
R (ohm/km)
Resistance value of the newly calculated cable size in ohms per one kilo-meter retrieved from the
cable library. If Cables/Ph is more than 1, the value is divided by Cables/Ph value.
X (ohm/km)
Reactance value of the newly calculated cable size in ohms per one kilo-meter retrieved from the
cable library. If Cables/Ph is more than 1, the value is divided by Cables/Ph value.
Nominal Amp. (A)

Ampacity of the newly calculated cable size in ampere (base ampacity) before any adjustment (no
de-rating factors is applied) retrieved from the cable library. If Cables/Ph is more than 1, the value is
multiplied by Cables/Ph value.
Derated Amp. (A)

Calculated cable ampacity of the newly calculated cable size in ampere multiplied by the overall
derating factors. If Cables/Ph is more than 1, the value is multiplied by Cables/Ph value.
Vd at Run (%)
Calculated voltage drop (%) for the newly calculated cable size at normal running condition.
Max. Length at Run (m)

Maximum allowable length (m) of the newly calculated cable size at normal operation
Vd at Start (%)
Calculated voltage drop (%) for the newly calculated cable size at motor starting.
Max. Length at Start (m)

Maximum allowable length (m) of the newly calculated cable size at motor starting
1 Size Smaller button

After the sizing completes successfully, you can change the size manually to the next smaller one in
the cable library database by clicking this button. If the calculated size is the smallest in the library
database, the button is disabled. You can change the size only, not reduce the number of parallel
cables Cables/Ph.
If the changed size comes to violate the sizing criteria, i.e. ampacity and voltage drop ratio, the
violated figures are shown in red color. You can save the insufficient size in the database but will
be warned by a caution message to accept it.
1 Size Larger button

After the sizing completes successfully, you can change the size manually to the next larger one in
the cable library database by clicking this button. If the calculated size is the largest in the library
database, the button is disabled. You can change the size only, not increase the number of parallel
cables Cables/Ph.
Both of 2 buttons dynamically change their enabled/disabled status upon user changes on Apply
Default Minimum Cable Size checkbox or Cable Library option.
13-35
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Command Buttons
Refer to Section 13.1.1 for details.
Run button
Execute the cable sizing calculation. If the sizing completes successfully, the fields of New Cable
Size will be filled out in blue colored values.
Save button
Save the field data currently indicated in Power Cable Data and New Cable Size sections into the
database. All field data in New Cable Size section will be transferred to Present Cable Size
section and cleared.
This button is disabled if the source record of the target load is locked against modifications.
To Excel button
Export all the field data indicated on this dialog to MS Excel.
Help button
Launch Online Help and show the associate page.
Close button
Close this dialog. If there are any changes unsaved, a warning message will appear to prompt users
action.
13-36
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Calculation Formulas & Algorithms

The exactly same formulas and algorithms as those used in Section 13.2 Power Cable Sizing (Batch)
are applied to the individual cable sizing.
13-37
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Cable Sizing Chart
13.3 Cable Sizing Chart

The program of "Cable Sizing Chart" generates a selection table for power cable sizes. The calculation
formulas used in the program are the same as those for Power Cable Sizing descried in Chapter 13.1
and based on allowable cable ampacity, voltage drop ratios at normal operation of load and motor
starting.
The databases referred to by the program, i.e. motor, cable and static load, have the same structures as
those of e-DPP and hence, editable with e-DPP library menu.
13.3.1. Command Buttons
Open
All the parameters set in 5 pages (see 13.2.2 to 13.2.6) are stored in Parameter file with the file
extension .prm. Click on "Open" button to select an existing parameter file. The program loads the
stored parameters into 5 pages.
Save
Click on "Save" button to save modified or newly defined parameters in the same file name.
Save As
Click on "Save As" button to save modified or newly defined parameters in a different name of file.
13-38
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Cable Sizing Chart
To Excel
Click on "To Excel" button to generate a cable sizing chart with the parameters defined in 5 pages.
MS-Excel automatically launches and indicates a chart sheet. Use the Save As menu command of MS
Excel when saving the Excel sheet with a different file name. The default name of generated Excel
sheet is "DPPCabChart.xls".
Help
Exit
Click on "Exit" button to terminate the cable sizing chart program (not e-DPP program).
13.3.2. General Page

Project information you entered in this page appears in the header and/or footer parts of Cable Sizing
Chart (MS Excel sheet).
Project Information
Customer
Name of customer is up to 50 alphanumeric characters. This data is retrieved from Project Information
13-39
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Cable Sizing Chart
(See Chapter 8.1) and not editable by user.
Project Title
Project title is up to 30 alphanumeric characters. This data is retrieved from Project Information (See
Chapter 8.1) and not editable by user.
Job No.
Job number is up to 20 alphanumeric characters. This data is retrieved from Project Information (See
Chapter 8.1) and not editable by user.
Document No.
Enter any alphanumeric characters for user document no.
Date
Enter any alphanumeric characters for execution, saving or print date.
Rev. No.
Enter any alphanumeric characters for revision no. of chart
Note: When using 0 (zero) for the revision no. and the setting of "Zero values" is unchecked in
MS-Excel Tools Options View, 0 (zero) will not be shown in MS-Excel sheet. In this case,
please enter '0 (single quotation mark + zero) in this Rev. No. cell.
MS Excel Form
You can select the output form either "e-DPP Predefined Form" or "User Defined Form". If you click
"User Defined Form" option, the pull down list becomes enabled and you can select any of user
defined forms that you have customized in the menu "Template" "Cable Sizing Chart".
13-40
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Cable Sizing Chart
13.3.3. Criteria Page

Criteria you defined in this page is used by the calculation formulas of maximum cable length.
System Data
System Nominal Voltage (kV)
Select or enter nominal voltage of bus supplying motor/load in kilo-volt. Generally, this voltage is
different from motor/load rated voltage.
System Frequency
Select either 50Hz or 60Hz.
Max. Voltage Drop @ Normal Running (%)

Select or enter allowable maximum voltage drop in % against a system voltage at normal running.
Typical value is 3-5% for motors and 1-5% for static loads.
Max. Voltage Drop @ Motor Starting (%)

Select or enter allowable maximum voltage drop in % against a system voltage at motor starting.
Typical value is 15-20%. This option is disabled when static load type is selected in "Load Type" of
Load/Motor Page.
13-41
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Cable Sizing Chart
Wiring System
Select the numbers of phases and wires for applied circuit system.

Refer to Section 13.1.1 for details.
Cable Derating Data

Installation
Select raceway type of power cable from Duct Bank, Direct Buried, Free Air and Conduit Air. The
program obtains ampacity data from the cable library according to this selection.
Ambient Temperature (deg. C)

Select or enter ambient temperature of cable. The program calculates a compensation factor Fta in
comparison with the base ambient temperature stored in the reference database, and indicates in the
"Derating Factor" cell.
The calculation formula is given below.
Fta =
Tc T
Tc Ta
Where
Tc and Ta are stored in the cable library. T is entered by user.
Grouping Factor
You can specify grouping factors in the range of 0.01 to 1.00. The grouping factors reflect installation
method of cable conductors, e.g. spacing, trefoil, parallel, trays, etc. e-DPP does not consider
adjustment factors for differences in soil thermal resistivity or depth of buried cables, these factors
may be included into the grouping factors for a practical solution.
Total Derating Factor

e-DPP automatically calculates the total derating factor as a product of the compensation factor of
ambient temperature and the grouping factor.
Total Derating Factor = Fta * Grouping Factor
13-42
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Cable Sizing Chart
13.3.4. Load/Motor Page
"Select Library File" Button

Click on this button and select a new file on the dialog to change the reference library.
Load Type
Select either Motor or Static Load. When Static Load is selected, the criterion of voltage drop % at
motor starting is not applied.
Load Specification
Output Unit
Select either KW or HP. The load output values are indicated in the selected unit on the chart.
Number of Phase
Select either 3 or 1 (single). The calculation formulas of cable voltage drop vary on the selected
number of phase.
Manufacturer
Select a name of manufacturer from the pull down list. The selected manufacturer is used as a key
field to retrieve the data from static load or motor library.
13-43
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Cable Sizing Chart
Rated Voltage
Select a rated voltage of static load or motor from the pull down list. The selected rated voltage is used
as a key field to retrieve the data from static load or motor library.
Enclosure Type
Select a type of enclosure for motors from the pull down list. The selected type is used as a key field to
retrieve the data from motor library. When Static Load is selected, this selection list is disabled.
Number of Poles
Select the number of poles for motors from the pull down list. The selected figure is used as a key field
to retrieve the data from motor library. When Static Load is selected, this selection list is disabled.
"Edit Motor Library" Button

To change the motor library data in the selected library file, click on this button and go to the motor
library menu. Changes made though this button also permanently affect the library data.
"Edit Static Load Library" Button

To change the static load library data in the selected library file, click on this button and go to the static
load library menu. Changes made though this button also permanently affect the library data.
13.3.5. Cable Page
13-44
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Cable Sizing Chart
Cable Specification
Standard
Select an applicable standard of cable from the pull down list. The selected standard is used as a key
field to retrieve the data from cable library.
Unit System
Select either Metric (mm2) or English (AWG, kcmil, MCM). The selected unit system is used as a key
Manufacturer
Select a name of manufacturer from the pull down list. The selected manufacturer is used as a key
Conduit Installation
Not selectable. Only Non-Mag option is available.
Conductor Type
Select either Co (Copper) or Al (Aluminum) for cable conductor type.
Rated Voltage
Select a rated voltage of cable from the pull down list. The selected voltage is used as a key field to
retrieve the data from cable library.
Insulation Type
Select an insulation type of cable from the pull down list. The selected type is used as a key field to
Number of Cores
Select the number of cable cores from the pull down list. The selected number is used as a key field to
Type of Cores
Select a type of cable cores from the pull down list. The selected type is used as a key field to retrieve
the data from cable library.
"C" stands for Core, "P" for Pair, "T" for Triplex or Triad, etc.
Temperature Data
Base Temperature (A/G) (deg. C)
Retrieved data from the referenced library for base temperature (above ground) is indicated in this cell
and not editable by user.
Base Temperature (U/G) (deg. C)

Retrieved data from the referenced library for base temperature (underground) is indicated in this cell
13-45
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Cable Sizing Chart
Max. Conductor Temp (deg. C)

Retrieved data from the referenced library for maximum conductor temperature is indicated in this cell
"Edit Cable Library" Button

When you like to change the cable library data in the selected library file, click on this button and go
to the cable library menu. Changes made though this button also permanently affect the library data.
13.3.6. Others Page
Other Settings
Max. Cable Length to Show (m)
Specifying the maximum length here, the calculation results of allowable cable length that exceed the
specified figure are not shown in the cable sizing chart (MS-Excel sheet).
Multiplying Factor (MF)

To adopt multiplying factors to the full load currents of static loads or motors, you can specify 2
figures with a boundary of current value.
The factors affect only cable ampacity calculation but not voltage drops. See Chapter 13.2.7
"Calculation Formulas"
13-46
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Cable Sizing Chart
Number of Parallel Cables

In addition to the chart for single run cable (default), other charts for parallel cables can be generated.
"1", "2", "3", "4" & "5" Checkboxes

Check any boxes of number "2" to "4" when you want to create additional cable sizing charts for
parallel runs. The number "1", "2", "3", "4" & "5" mean the number of parallel cables. The checkbox
"1" is always checked as default.
Additional charts for parallel cables will be created in new sheets of the same MS Excel book with the
sheet name "Parallel 2", "Parallel 3" and so on.
Minimum Cable Size of Parallel Runs

Usually the minimum cable sizes for parallel runs are different from (larger than) the ones for single
run cables. Select the minimum size from the pull down list for parallel runs. The columns of cable
data of which the sizes are less than the selected minimum size are not shown in created charts.
Minimum Cable Sizes
Use this option to reflect the minimum cable sizes specified in the menu "Cable Management"
"Minimum Cable Size". This option is applicable to motors only.
Apply
The minimum cable sizes are taken into account when creating the charts.
Ignore
The minimum cable sizes are not taken into account when creating the charts.
"Show Min. Cable Size" Button

To define or edit the minimum cable sizes for motor loads, click "Show Min. Cable Size" button.
"Minimum Cable Sizes" dialog box appears.
13-47
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Cable Sizing Chart
<Dialog of Minimum Cable Sizes>
Length Cell of Min. Size

This option determines the color of intersectional cell of the minimum size of cable data column and
motor data row.
Default
Yellow Color
:
:
Default background color does not change.

Background color changes to yellow.
Length Cell under Min. Size

This option determines the presentation of cell in which cable sizes are less than the minimum cable
sizes.
Blank
Gray Color
: Calculated maximum cable lengths are not shown.

: Background color changes to gray. Calculated lengths remains in cells.
<Coloring of Minimum Cable Size Options>
13-48
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Cable Sizing Chart
13.3.7. Calculation Formulas

The exactly same formulas and algorithms as those used in Section 13.1 Power Cable Sizing (Batch)
are applied to the individual cable sizing.
13-49
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Drum Scheduling
13.4 Drum Scheduling

Drum scheduling is a process of collecting identical cables (in terms of specifications and sizes) and
allocating them into a spool called Drum. A drum is a roll of cable of certain length.
Procurement of cables is generally transacted in unit of drum. And during the lay out (pulling) of
cables at the construction site the cables are drawn out and cut from the drums. For these reasons, a
proper management of drum is necessary to facilitate procurement processes and to maximize the
usage of the cable in the drums.
The two main purpose of drum scheduling are;

(1) Generate "Drum List"
Drum list is a summary of cable drums which enlist pertinent information about the description of
the drums. Generally, this list is used for procurement
(2) Generate "Drum Schedule"
Drum schedule is a listing of arrays of cables allocated to a drum. The arrays of cables represent
the segments of the cable wound in the drums. In other words, a drum schedule is a table of how
the content of a drum will be cut into pieces/sections. Generally, this schedule is used for
construction.
Flow of Drum Scheduling

A cable schedule is necessary before drum list and drum schedules can be generated. From the cable
schedule, e-DPP collects all distinct cable sizes of distinct specification and summarizes them in table
hereto referred as "Drum Specification". A "Drum Specification" table also contains the criteria for
the management of the length of cable that will be available in the drums for each distinct cable size of
distinct specification.
13-50
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Drum Scheduling
Flow of Drum Scheduling
13.4.1. Statistics
This section conveys the information about the statistics of cables and drums utilized in the project.
Specification
Total number of specifications
This refers to total counts of cables of distinct sizes and distinct specification.
Drums
Total number of drums
This refers to the total counts of registered drums.
Number of locked drums

This refers to the total counts of protected drums (drums immune from changes).
Cables
Total number of cables
This refers to the total counts of cables in the cable schedule.
Number of cables scheduled

This refers to the total counts of cables which were already scheduled to drum.
Number of cables not scheduled

This refers to the total counts of cables which are not yet scheduled to drum.
13-51
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Drum Scheduling
Number of locked cables

This refers to total counts of protected cables (cables immune from changes).
13.4.2. Drum Scheduling Functionalities

The drum scheduling is divided with six functionalities as follows:
Edit Drum Specifications
Run Drum Scheduling
Edit Drum List
Edit Drum Schedule
Move Drum Cables
Check Cable & Drum Data
13.4.2.1. Edit Drum Specification

Clicking "Edit Drum Specification..." button brings out the summary of distinct cable sizes of
distinct specification and the criteria for the management of the drum length (length of cable in the
drum). When this button is clicked, the following dialog appears;
In the above dialog, you can specify the criteria for the management of the length of cable that will be
available in the drums for each distinct cable size of distinct specification.
(Note: In this version, the dialog shown above can now be minimized or maximized as desired by the
user.)
13-52
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Drum Scheduling
Table Properties
Option
Select one of the two (2) options "Max. Len" or "Round Up".
Max. Len
If "Max. Len" is selected the maximum length of cable that will be available in a drum will be equal to
the value specified in "Max. Length" column. In other words, this option dictates the limitation of
the summation of length of the segment of the cables that could be scheduled in a drum according to
the fixed value in "Max. Length" column. Also, the actual available spare length of cable in a drum
may be equal to or greater than the value specified in "Spare Length" column.
Round Up
If "Round Up" is selected the maximum length of cable that will be available in a drum varies to the
rounded-up value of the summation of the length of all segments of cables being scheduled in the
drum but not more than the value specified in "Max. Length" column. The rounding number is the
value specified in "Round Up Length" column. Also, the actual available spare length of cable in a
drum may be equal to or less than the value specified in "Round Up Length" column.
This option may be selected if excessive spare is not required for certain sizes of cables of certain
specifications for some reason like for instance the cost per linear length of cable is high and/or the
cable manufacturer accepts fractional order.
Notes for both "Max. Len" and "Round Up" option
a) The cumulative length of segments of cables that could be allocated to the drums is restricted by
the "Scheduling Length". "Scheduling Length" is the difference between the values in "Max.
Length" and "Spare Length" column ("Max. Length" - "Spare Length").
b) In case a single (one segment) cable having a length more than the value specified in "Max.
Length" column, this single cable will be allocated to a single drum of length equal to "Max.
Length". Though consideration can be taken later e.g. increase the drum length later or
consider splicing the cable.
Max. Length (m)

This parameter is used to determine the prospective and limitation of length of cable that will be
available in a particular drum. By default, this parameter is populated with value from cable library
if the corresponding data is available. Otherwise, a default value of 1000(m) is set.
Round-Up Length (m)

This setting is valid only when "Round-Up" option is selected. The default value is 20 (m). Round-Up
Length (m) should be less than 50% of Max. Length (m) and equal or less than Spare Length (m).
Spare Length (m)

Specify the prospective length of cable you want to spare in a drum. The default value is 5% of
"Max. Length (m)". The actual drum spare length may be at least or at most equal to this value
depending on the selected option "Max Len" or "Round Up" as discussed in "1) Option" above.
The Spare Length (m) should be less than 50% of Max. Length (m).
13-53
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Drum Scheduling
Scheduling Options
All Max. Len
Globally set the "Option" to "Max. Len"
All Round Up
Globally set the "Option" to "Round Up"
Drum Max. Length

Globally assigned value to "Max. Length" according to the data entered in the text box.
Update
Click "Update..." button to reflect the entered value in the adjacent textbox to the "Max. Length"
column of the drum specification table
Round Up Length
Globally assigned value to "Round Up Length" according to the data entered in the text box.
Update
Click "Update" button to reflect the entered value in the adjacent textbox to the "Round Up Length"
column of the drum specification table
Spare Length
Globally assigned value to "Spare Length"
(m) - Update
Specify the absolute value of the intended spare length in the text box and click the adjacent button
"Update" to reflect the said value to the "Spare Length" column of the drum specification table.
(%) - Update
Specify the intended spare length in percent of "Max. Length" in the text box and click the adjacent
button "Update" to reflect the absolute equivalent value of the said percentage value to the "Spare
Length" column of the drum specification table.
Command Buttons
Update Table
When this button is clicked, the drum specification table will be updated based on the latest cable
schedule i.e. new specification will be added if any and/or the counts of cables and their cumulative
length (total length) will be updated if any relevant changes were made in the cable schedule. All the
user's defined setting and entry (i.e. data in the "Option", "Max Length", "Round Up Length", and
"Spare Length" columns) will be unchanged.
Remake Table
When this button is clicked, the drum specification table will be reset based on the latest cable
schedule and the entire user's defined setting and entry will be overwritten with the default setting and
data.
13-54
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Drum Scheduling
Delete
Delete a current row of drum specification which is not necessary anymore. Rows in which "No. of
Cables" is more than zero are not allowed to delete.
Initial Sort
Clicking this button returns the sort order to the original state when the dialog opens. This is
effective when the original sorting was re-organized by selective sorting. Selective sorting is being
done by clicking the header of a particular column on the table. The order of sorting alternatively
changes from ascending to descending and vice versa on subsequent click of the mouse at the header.
Preview
Click "Preview" button to view the print layout of the Table in its current state and print as necessary.
Save
Click "Save" button to save the changes made.
To Excel
Click "To Excel" button to export the Table in its current state to MS Excel.
Close
Click "Close" button to return to "Drum Schedule" dialog.
13.4.2.2. Run Drum Scheduling

Clicking "Run Drum Scheduling" button brings out the dialog responsible for creating the "Drum
List" and "Drum Schedule". When this button is clicked, the following dialog appears;
13-55
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Drum Scheduling
Scheduling Objects
Select from the pull down lists which cables of certain size of certain specification are the target of
scheduling. The list of cable specification available for scheduling is shown in the "List of Cable
Specification" list box. If the target are all the cables, leave all the pull down list to "All". The
pull-down lists behave in hierarchical order i.e. from top to button.
Data Source
Select the Data Source of the target cables. Data Source is a name of cable manufacturer
(MFRName) in e-DPP cable library and intended to use for discriminating the cable data when
different cable manufacturers are selected with identical specification of cables.
When the cable data are not extracted from e-DPP cable library, Data Source list shows a blank. This
occurs if the name of manufacturer is not specified when the cable data have been populated by User
Data Import or Data Filling action. However, even in such case, the drum scheduling program treats
those cables as "Manufacturer name = <blank>" in the same manner as for the other cables.
Conductor Type
Select the conductor type (copper or aluminum) of the target cables.
Rated Voltage
Select the rated voltage of the target cables.
Cable Type
Select the insulation, jacket, mechanical, and/or chemical protection type of the target cables.
13-56
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Drum Scheduling
No. of Wires
Select the number of conductors and their configuration of the target cables.
Cable Size
Select the size of the target cables.
Geographical Criteria
The Geographical Criteria accounts the relationship of the pulling locations and the equipment to be
served. These criteria allow you to optimize your scheduling preparation by automatically putting
cables to the right drums. There are two (2) methods to realize an optimal drum scheduling;
i. Filter the prospect cables for drum scheduling by "Geographical Criteria".
ii. Use the "Orphan Control"
When "Geographical Criteria" is applied, it is required to manually execute one by one each group of
target cables (group of cables of the same location). On the other hand, "Geographical Criteria" has
an advantage. For example, in case engineering work in some areas is delayed due to some reasons
but in some areas it is already complete and for those completed areas placement of order of the cables
is now required, then "Geographical Criteria" may be the best option.
Site Area
Select the site area where the target cables belong.
Substation
Select the substation where the target cables belong.
Process Unit
Select the process unit where the target cables belong.
Switchboard
Select the switchboard where the target cables are served.
Bus
Select the bus where target cables are terminated.
Options
Scheduling Scope
The following options are effective at the second and subsequent runs. Either the cables that have
been already scheduled to drums or the cables that have not been yet can be target of scheduling.
All cables with & without drum no

If this option is selected all cables and drums will be the target of scheduling.
Only cables without drum no

If this option is selected only the cables which have not been scheduled yet to drums will be the target
of scheduling.
13-57
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Drum Scheduling
Include existing drums

This is an additional option to take into account the spare lengths of the existing drums, meaning if a
particular cable with certain length can fit in the available spare length of a certain existing drum then
this cable will be scheduled to that drum.
Orphan Control
The objective of these Options is to globally optimize scheduling preparation by automatically putting
cables to the right drums.
Note: The following options (one or more) are enabled only when their counterpart (pull down list) in
the "Geographical Criteria" frame is set to "All" and the subject addressed by the said option is not
utilized in the Drum Naming Convention Builder.
Site Areas
Check this checkbox to segregate scheduling of cables by site area.
Substations
Check this checkbox to segregate scheduling of cables by substation.
Process Units
Check this checkbox to segregate scheduling of cables by process unit.
Switchboards
Check this checkbox to segregate scheduling of cables by switchboard.
Buses
Check this checkbox to segregate scheduling of cables by bus.
Drum No. - Naming Convention

Specified Naming Convention will be displayed on this area.
"Edit" Button
Click "Edit" button to bring out the Drum Naming Convention as shown below.
13-58
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Drum Scheduling
The drum naming convention is a rule how the drums will be assigned with ID (Drum Number)
automatically.
Source of Naming Fragment

The following tables and fields serve the criteria to produce the intended format of the Drum Number.
Tables
Cond Type
Rated Voltage
Cable Type
#Wire
Unit
Cable Size
Site Area
Substation
Process Unit
Switchboard
Bus
Fields
User Text 1
User Text 2
User Text 3
Serial Number
The contents (records) of each table are dynamic with the Cable Schedule (meaning their value
depends on what is available in the Cable Schedule).
In each table are records of "Value" & "Code". The data in the column "Value" is data extracted from
Cable Schedule and the data in the column "Code" is default or user-defined data that will represent
the "Value". Hence, the combination of the "Code" is actually the one that comprises the Drum
Number.
e-DPP pre-assigned default abbreviation for the "Code" but the user can later freely assigned any
alphanumeric up to 10 characters to yield meaningful message. However, the drum number is
limited only up to 26 characters and therefore selection of the Codes and their combination should be
exercised thoroughly in order for the resulting drum number not to exceed the said limitation.
13-59
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Drum Scheduling
Cond Type
This table corresponds to the type of conductor of the cables. The value of "0" and "1" denotes
copper and aluminum respectively. The default Code is "CU" for "0" and "AL" for "1".
Rated Voltage
This table corresponds to the rated voltage of the cables.
alphabet letter.
The default Code for each Value is set to
Cable Type
This table corresponds to the type of insulation, jacket, and other mechanical or environmental
protection of the cables. The default Code for each Value is set to alphabet letter.
#Wire
This table corresponds to the number of conductors in the cables. The default Code is set as to the
number of conductors in two digits format. For example if the number of conductor is 3, then the
corresponding default Code is "03".
Unit
This table corresponds to the configuration of the conductors in the cables, e.g. Core (C) or Pair (P).
The default Code is set as same as the Value.
Cable Size
This table corresponds to the size of the cables. The default Code is set as same as the Value with the
following exception;
i) Slash ("/") used in AWG size series like in "4/0" or "2/0" is designated to "S" since this
symbol is not allowed by the program to be included in the drum number. For example, the
Code for "4/0" is defaulted to "4S0".
ii) Dot (".") used in metric size series like in "2.5" is designated to "D" due to the same reason
as in i). For example, the Code for "2.5" is defaulted to "2D5".
Site Area, Substation, Process Unit, Switchboard, Bus

These tables correspond to the geographical location of the cables where they will be laid out. Their
title explains their scope. The default Code for each Value of each table is set to alphabet letter.
User Text 1, User Text 2 & User Text 3

Any static strings (alphanumeric and hyphen) which is required to be part of the drum number may be
entered here.
Serial Number
Serial number is a part of drum number that makes a drum number unique in case there is more than
one drum of identical specifications (having cable with the same specification). This number
corresponds to the count of drums. Therefore, it is a must to have this number. Number of digits
from 1 to 5 is available as option for user to choose. The numbers of digits dictate the number of
digits of the serial number and it signifies the number of leading zeros less the digits of the count of a
particular drum. For example, if you selected number of digits of 4 and the count of a particular
drum is 32, then the serial number will be "0032". In case user has chosen number of digits less than
the number of digits of the count of a particular drum, the exact number of the count will be utilized.
But the presentation of those counts which exceed and those which are within the chosen number of
digits will be different. For example, if the chosen Number of Digits is 3, all counts less than 1000
13-60
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Drum Scheduling
will be presented in 3 digits (001 to 999) and those 1000 and above will be presented in more than 3
digits (1001 to ? ).
"Clear All" Button

Clicking on this button resets all the settings to default pre-assigned setting. "Convention Builder" is
reset as well and only "Serial Number - 3 Digits" remains.
Convention Builder
There are Ten (10) sections in the "Convention Builder" frame and combination of these sections will
comprise the Drum Numbers. Each section needs to be filled-in from any of the 15 items in the
"Source of Naming Fragment" frame by drag and drop operation.
Notes:
i. Each item in the "Source of Naming Fragment" can only be used once in the "Convention
Builder".
ii. At least one section in the "Convention Builder" is should be filled-in by "Serial Number"
from the "Source of Naming Fragment".
"Clear 1" to "Clear 10" Button

Clicking this button clears the section (textbox) underneath.
execution of "Save" button and reopening of the dialog.
Empty sections are eliminated after
"-" (Hyphen)
Check the checkbox above the hyphen label to inserts a hyphen between the adjacent sections.
Sample (Max. 26 char)

A sample of the drum number is reflected here for reference. It shows dynamically the format of the
drum number related to the product of the convention builder.
As the maximum length of drum number is limited to 26 characters, this textbox will help you
distinguish if you exceed such limitation.
"Save" Button
"Close" Button
Click "Close" button to return to "Run Drum Scheduling" dialog.
Command Buttons
Clear All
Click "Clear All" button to delete the drum list and all drum schedules.
Run
Click "Run" button to execute drum scheduling. (Confirmed if desired to open drum list editor)
Close
Click "Close" button to return to main dialog.
13-61
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Drum Scheduling
13.4.2.3. Edit Drum List

Clicking "Edit Drum List" button brings out the Drum List Editor dialog as shown below.
Alternatively, this dialog can be opened immediately after the execution of Drum Scheduling.
In the above dialog, "Lock", "Drum Length (m)", "PO No." and "Maker" columns may be edited.
(Note: In this version, the dialog shown above can now be minimized or maximized as desired by the
user.)
Table Properties
Lock
Checking "Lock" cell protects the drum and its contents (cables) against changes when the drum
scheduling is re-executed. This function is useful to mark the drums that have been already ordered to
manufacturer.
Drum Length (m)

Alter the drum length as necessary.
PO No. & Maker

You may enter any data in "PO No." and "Maker" columns for additional information.
Command Buttons
Lock All & Unlock All
Check or uncheck all the cells in the "Lock" column in one step.
13-62
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Drum Scheduling
Show New Drum No. & Hide New Drum No.

Clicking "Show New Drum No." button shows "New Drum No." column in the table where you can
enter a new drum number. Note that the new drum number should be unique and up to 26 character
long only.
Create New Drum

Click "Create New Drum" button to create a new drum to which unscheduled cables may be scheduled
manually.
New Drum No.

Enter a new unique drum number up to 26 characters
Data Source
Select the Data Source that the drum will cater.
Conductor Type, Rated Voltage, Cable Type, No. of Wires, Cable Size, & Drum Length
(m)
These parameters describe the specification of the new drum.
Select the appropriate parameters.
Delete Drum
Click "Delete Drum" button to delete the currently selected drum. Note that only empty drums (no
scheduled cables) can be deleted.
Filter / Unfilter
Click "Filter" button to perform filter by selection. The currently selected cell serves as the filtering
criteria. Click "Unfilter" button to restore the table.
To Excel
Click "To Excel" button to export the Table in its current state to MS Excel.
Preview
13-63
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Drum Scheduling
Save
Close
Click "Close" button to return to "Run Drum Scheduling" dialog.
13.4.2.4. Edit Drum Schedule

Click the "Edit Drum Schedule" button if you want to edit some data in some cables (data which has
relevance to geographical information only). This action will open the following dialog;
List of Cable Specifications

Select from the list of the cable specification you wish to modify.
List of Drum No. (:Locked)

The drums bearing the specification selected in the "List of Cable Specification" are shown here.
this list, select the drum number where the cable you wish to modify belongs.
In
Spec. Info.
The "No. of Drums", "No. of Cables", and "Total length" involved in the selected specification on
"List of Cable Specifications" are shown in this frame for information.
Drum Info.
Relevant information of the Drum selected in the "List of Drum No." is shown in this frame.
Spread Table
The scheduled cables in a particular drum selected in "List of Drum No." are shown here. Here you
can edit the cable literature like, "Lock", "Length (m)", "From", "To", "Site Area", "Substation",
"Process Unit", "Switchboard", and "Bus".
13-64
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Drum Scheduling
If the length of some cables is increased and in total exceeds the drum length, an alert message will
warn you. You can either shorten the length of some cables to meet the drum length (but seems not
appropriate) or just note the message and save the changes and later move some cables to other drums.
Command Buttons
Lock All & Unlock All
Check or uncheck all the cells in the "Lock" column in one step.
Preview
Save
Close
To Excel
Click "To Excel" button to bring out the option dialog as shown below and eventually export drum
schedule(s) to MS Excel.
Note:
"Site Area", "Substation", "Process Unit", "Switchboard", and "Bus" columns are now available when
exporting Cable Drum Schedule on MS Excel by "To Excel" button. Such columns were initially
hidden upon exporting. When the user would like to include those columns, "Unhide" MS Excel
function must be used. (Select both the boundary columns, right-click and select "Unhide".)
13-65
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Drum Scheduling
Select scope
All drums of all cable specifications
All the drums existing in the current drum schedule will be exported to MS Excel.
All drums of current cable specification

All the drums of the currently selected cable specification in "Drum Schedule - Edit" dialog will be
exported to MS Excel.
Current drum
Only the drum currently selected in "Drum Schedule - Edit" dialog will be exported to MS Excel.
Advanced
Select this option then select from the pull down list the conditions on what to export to MS Excel.
Each item is combined with AND operator.
Options
Cable ID Field
Select a desired field from the drop down list to be shown in the MS Excel sheets on "Cable No."
column.
(Note: Options are the naming conventions created by the user on user defined fields to cover all
possible project requirements.)
Page break per drum no.

Check this checkbox to inserts a page break per drum number in MS Excel sheets.
13-66
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Drum Scheduling
13.4.2.5. Move Drum Cables

Click "Move Drum Cables" button if you want to manually move some cables from one drum to
another due to some reasons. This action will open the following dialog;
As mentioned above, in this dialog, cables can be moved from one drum to another drum of same
specification (same cable specification). Movement is done by drag & drop or arrow button
operation. Neither "Lock", "Cable ID", "Length (m)", "Site Area", "Substation", "Process Unit ID",
"Switchboard" nor "Bus" parameters can be edited in this dialog.
Cable Specifications
Select a cable specification from this pull down list. Think of this "Select Cable Specification" pull
down list as a filter criterion for the Drums. Meaning the drums that will be shown in the "Drum
Data (1)" and "Drum Data (2)" panes have a cable specification as the selected one in the "Select
Cable Specification" pull down list.
Drum Data (1) & Drum Data (2)

The dialog is generally divided into two (2) panes, the "Drum Data (1)" pane and the "Drum Data (2)"
pane. Both panes contain the same drums (drum no.) and a virtual drum named "<None>". This
"<None>" drum en-houses all unscheduled cables. By manipulation of drum selections in the "Drum
Data (1)" pane and in the "Drum Data (2)" pane, you will be able to move cables from one drum to
another in both directions.
Movement by Drag & Drop Mouse Operations

I. To move cables by Drag & Drop operations from one to another drum:
a) Select the specification of cable you wish to move in the "Select Cable Specification" pull down
list. The drums having that specification will be listed in the Drum Data (1) & (2).
b) On Drum Data (1), select the drum number having the cable(s) you wish to move.
13-67
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Drum Scheduling
c). On Drum Data (2), select the drum number where you wish to move the cable.
d). On the Drum Data (1) point to the Cable ID and drag & drop to the cable list section of the
Drum Data(2).
e). Moved Cable ID from Drum Data (1) will be displayed on this area.
Note:
i) Process of moving of Cable ID stated above can be done also from Drum Data (2) to Drum
Data (1).
II. To move more than one cable at once:

a) Select the specification of cable you wish to move in the "Select Cable Specification" pull down
list. The drums having that specification will be listed in the Drum Data (1) & (2).
b) On Drum Data (1), select the drum number having the cable(s) you wish to move.
c). On Drum Data (2), select the drum number where you wish to move the cable(s).
d) On Drum Data (1), point to the row headers (the cells under "No" column) of the starting cable
and drag to ending cable you wish to move. The highlighted cables are subject to move.
e) Click ">>" button.
13-68
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Drum Scheduling
Note:
i) Only adjacent cables can be selected.
ii) If you want to select all cables, click the "No" cell (upper-left most corner cell)
iii) Process of moving of Cable ID(s) stated above can be done also from Drum Data (2) to
Drum Data (1).
Don't show message

Check "Don't show message" checkbox to disable the warning message box which keeps on warning
you whenever the total length of cable scheduled in a certain drum exceed the drum length as result of
the moving cable to other drums.
Save
Close
13.4.2.6. Check Cable & Drum Data

By virtue of editing cables outside of Drum Scheduling program (e.g. in Cable schedule),
inconsistency in the structure of the drum schedules and drum list may occur. For example: 1)
Cables of certain specification might be assigned to drums of different specification, 2) New drums
might be specified in cable schedule though do not exist in the drum list. e-DPP can detects these
two (2) cases of inconsistency.
Click "Check Cable & Drum Data" button to check the said inconsistency.
the following dialog;
13-69
This action will open
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Drum Scheduling
Inconsistent Specifications
This area enlists the drums and their contents having disagreement between the specification of the
drums themselves and the specification of one or more cables assigned to them. The inconsistent
parameters are highlighted in red color.
It is a must to resolve the inconsistency by correcting the relevant items in the cable schedule or
re-execute drum scheduling (either manually un-schedule from the drum the inflicted cables or re-run
drum scheduling).
Preview
Click "Preview" button to view the print layout of the complete list of cables (where the specification
of one or more cables are inconsistent against the drum specification) belonging to the currently
selected drum and print as necessary.
New Drums
This area enlists the drums that exist in the cable schedule but do not exist in the drum list. This
situation happens when user entered certain drum numbers not registered in the drum list in the cable
schedule.
Check the checkbox adjacent to the drum number to qualify them for addition to the drum list
"Add to Drum List" Button

Click "Add to Drum List" button to add the checked new drums to the drum list.
13-70
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Conduit and Gland Sizing
13.5 Conduit and Gland Sizing

The conduit and cable gland sizing can be performed for all or part of cables (power, control, etc.)
stored in the cable schedule provided these cables have a counterpart in one of the Cable Libraries.
In order to perform the sizing, "Conduit and Cable Gland Selection Table" needs to be created
beforehand in the menu "Defaults - Conduit and Gland Size". Also, under the "Conduit and Cable
Gland Selection Table" window environment it is important for each newly selected cable library (or
already selected but no prior commencement of clicking the "Edit" button yet) the "Edit" button is
clicked in order e-DPP program could generate the corresponding conduit and gland selection table
which will be referred by the Conduit and Gland sizing. Otherwise, the Conduit and Gland Sizing
program will not yield the expected results. Refer to Chapter 13, clause 13.8.2 (Command Buttons)
for more information.
The data that are actually filled out by this program are;
Conduit Type
Conduit Size
Cable Gland Type
Cable Gland Size
Cable Entry (Thread) Type
Cable Entry (Thread) Size
When the following key parameters match "Conduit and Gland Selection" table and the cable schedule,
the above listed 6 parameters are transferred from the former to the latter.
Cable Manufacturer Name
Cable Voltage
Cable Type
No. of Cores
<Note>
The conduit sizing can be performed for single cable only that is installed in a conduit. Multiple cables
installed in a conduit cannot be treated. Therefore, "Percentage of Cross-Section" for single conductor
only in "Conduit and Gland Selection" table dialog is valid for the conduit sizing.
13.5.1. Entrance Menu
13-71
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Conduit and Gland Sizing
Targets
All Cables
All cables (Power, Control, Communication, etc.) stored in the cables schedule become targets of the
sizing.
Power Cables
Only power cables stored in the cables schedule become targets of the sizing.
Blank Data Only

Cable data where their conduit and cable gland type/size are not yet filled become targets of the sizing.
The existing non-blank data are bypassed.
All Data
Both blank and non-blank data become targets of the sizing.
13.5.2. Results
You can confirm the results of conduit and cable gland sizing on the edit windows of cable schedule
(DPPCable1 and DPPCable2).
The entry thread types which have been filled from Project Default Data - Cable Entry will be
overwritten by the results of conduit and gland sizing program.
13-72
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Cable Summary
13.6 Cable Summary

The Cable Summary tool allows you to generate report of all the cables utilized in your project.
summary is in terms of the quantities of the cables.
The
13.6.1. Cable Summary Criteria

Rated Voltage
Select the rated voltage of the cables of interest as one of the criteria of the summary.
Type
Select the type of insulation/jacket of the cables of interest as another criterion of the summary.
# of Conductors
Select the number and unit of construction of the conductors of the cables of interest as another
criterion of the summary.
Size
Select the size of the cables of interest as another criterion of the summary.
Note: The items appearing on the list box of Rated Voltage, Type, # of Conductors, and Size are
limited by data available in the cable schedule.
13-73
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Cable Summary
13.6.2. Command Button

Help
Run Summary
Click on "Run Summary" button to generate the cable summary according to the criteria discussed in
clause 16.2.1. The resulting summary is shown underneath of the window in tabular view.
Preview
Click on "Preview" button to show the printable layout of the generated summary.
Preview Toolbar
Next
Click on "Next" button to navigate to next page (grayed-out if the preview contains only one page or if
the preview is on the last page).
Previous
Click on "Previous" button to navigate to previous page (grayed-out if the preview contains only one
Zoom
Click on "Zoom" button to zoom-in or zoom-out and vice versa the size of the preview layout.
Print
Click on "Print" button to bring up the Print dialog box to start and print job. On the Print dialog box,
the Setup dialog box can also be called upon through "Page Setup" command button.
13-74
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Cable Summary
Setup
Click on "Setup" button to display the Setup dialog box which contains options that allow you to setup
the printing preferences.
Close
Click on "Close" button to close and return to Cable Summary Dialog.
To Excel
Click on "To Excel" button to output directly the cable summary in an external MS-Excel file.
save a copy, select File Save-as in the MS-Excel environment and assign a new file name.
To
Cancel
Click on "Cancel" button to close the Cable Summary Dialog window.
13-75
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Gland Summary
13.7 Gland Summary

The Gland Summary tool allows you to generate report of the entire gland utilized in your project.
The summary is in terms of the quantities of the glands.
13.7.1. Gland Summary Criteria

Gland Type
Select the type of the glands of interest as one of the criteria of the summary.
Gland Size
Select the size of the glands of interest as another criterion of the summary.
Entry Type
Select the entry type of the glands of interest as another criterion of the summary.
Entry Size
Select the entry size of the glands of interest as another criterion of the summary.
Note: The items appearing on the list box of Gland Type, Gland Size, Entry Type, and Entry Size are
limited by data available in the cable schedule.
13-76
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Gland Summary
13.7.2. Command Button

Help
Run Summary
Click on "Run Summary" button to generate the cable summary according to the criteria discussed in
clause 16.2.1. The resulting summary is shown underneath on tabular view.
Preview
Click on "Preview" button to show the printable layout of the generated summary.
Preview Toolbar
Next
Click on "Next" button to navigate to next page (grayed-out if the preview contains only one page or if
the preview is on the last page).
Previous
Click on "Previous" button to navigate to previous page (grayed-out if the preview contains only one
Zoom
Click on "Zoom" button to zoom-in or zoom-out and vice versa the size of the preview layout.
Print
Click on "Print" button to bring up the Print dialog box to start and print job. On the Print dialog box,
the Setup dialog box can also be called upon through "Page Setup" command button.
13-77
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Gland Summary
Setup
Click on "Setup" button to display the Setup dialog box, which contains options that allow you to
setup the printing preferences.
Close
Click on "Close" button to close and return to Cable Summary Dialog.
To Excel
Click on "To Excel" button to output directly the cable summary in an external MS-Excel file.
save a copy, select File Save as in the MS Excel environment and assign a new file name.
To
Cancel
Click on "Cancel" button to close the Cable Summary Dialog window.
13-78
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Minimum Cable Size
13.8 Minimum Cable Size

The Minimum Cable Size Table (DPPMinCabSize) defines the minimum cable size for each output
(kW or HP) of LV, MV and HV motor. If the results of cable sizing routine (refer to Chapter 13.1,
Power Cable Sizing.) show smaller cable sizes than those defined in DPPMinCabSize, the calculated
cable sizes are replaced with the minimum cable sizes defined in DPPMinCabSize. (There is an
option switch to do so or not.)
Only one DPPMinCabSize is created for all applicable motor voltage classes (LV-1 (3Ph), LV-2 (3Ph),
LV (1Ph), MV1, MV2, HV1 and HV2) together. However, only the voltage classes that have been set
to non-zero values in "Project Information" (see Chapter 8, Project Menu) are effective for creating
DPPMinCabSize. The other ineffective voltage classes will be disabled to select by a user.
Motor Output Unit

Select Motor Output Unit either "HP" or "KW".
Cable Size Unit

Select Cable Size Unit either "Metric" or "English".
Conduit Size Unit

Select the Conduit Size Unit, "Metric" or "English".
13-79
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Minimum Cable Size
Cable Data
Applicable Standard
The standard applicable to cables selected in "Project Standard" menu is shown in this cell.
Rated Voltage
Cable rated voltage corresponding to the active "Motor Voltage Class" selected in "Project
Electrical" menu is shown in this cell.
Motor Voltage Class

Selects one of the motor voltage classes that have been defined in "Project Information" for which a
part of DPPMinCabSize is being edited. Only one class can be selected at a time.
When the corresponding records already exist, e-DPP immediately enters an edit mode. The check
boxes indicating existence of data are shown in the right area of each motor voltage class.
Material Types
Cable Manufacturer
The uniquely filtered values of the cable manufacturer field in the cable library appear on the selection
box. The default value initially shown is "DPP".
Cable Type
The values of cable type field in the cable library are shown on the selection box.
Conduit Type
All the values of the conduit type field in the conduit library appear on the selection box.
Gland Type
All the values of the cable gland type field in the cable gland library appear on the selection box.
Cable Entry Type

The value list for the cable entry type field in the cable gland library is used for selection of this item.
("M", "NPT", "PG", "PF" and "ET")
A default value shown on the box is the previously selected one in "Project Information".
Minimum Size Calculation By Fault Current

Cable Conductor Type
Select the type of cable conductor either "Copper" or "Aluminum" which is used to calculate the
minimum cable size to withstand a fault current input below.
When "Motor Voltage Class" is LV-1 (3Ph), LV-2 (3Ph) or LV (1Ph), this item is disabled to select.
Standard
Select Cable Standard either "IEC" or "JIS" which is used to calculate the minimum cable size as well.
13-80
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Minimum Cable Size
Insulation Material
All the values of cable insulation materials filtered with "Conductor Type" and "Standard" specified
above are indicated in the selection box. Select one of them, which is used to calculate the minimum
cable size as well.
Fault Clearing Time (sec)

Enter a numeric value in the range of 0 - 1.0 (sec) which is used to calculate the minimum cable size
as well.
When "Motor Voltage Class" is LV-1 (3Ph), LV-2 (3Ph) or LV (1Ph), this item is disabled to enter.
Fault Current (kA)

Enter a numeric value in the range of 0 100 (kA) which is used to calculate the minimum cable size
as well.
When "Motor Voltage Class" is LV-1 (3Ph), LV-2 (3Ph) or LV (1Ph), this item is disabled to enter.
"Calc" Button
When this button is clicked, "Calculated Min. Size (mm2)" is calculated and its result is shown.
"Clear" Button
When this button is clicked, the input fields "Fault Clearing Time (sec)", "Fault Current (kA)" and
"Calculated Min. Size (mm2)" are cleared.
Calculated Min. Size (mm2)

The program calculates this value with the following formulas and shows its result on the text box,
which is disabled to edit;
"Calculated Min. Size (mm2)"
= 1000 * "Fault Current (kA)" * sqrt ("Fault Clearing Time (sec)") / [Coefficient]
Coefficient is stored in the e-DPP system database.
"Edit" Button
When "Edit" button is clicked, another window as shown in Section 13.7.2 appears for editing switch
devices, the minimum cable sizes, conduit sizes and gland sizes of the selected motor voltage class.
"Delete" Button
When "Delete" button is clicked, all the records of the minimum cable sizes belonging to the selected
motor voltage class are deleted from DPPMinCabSize. A warning message appears for your
confirmation before deletion is taken place.
13-81
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Minimum Cable Size
13.8.2. Editor
Editing the minimum cable sizes is performed on the above form. The upper area of the form indicates
the field contents input in the entrance menu. The lower area indicates the field contents of table
DPPMinCabSize.
Switch Device
Select from Fuse, CB or MCCB (for future).
Cable Size
If you like to change the minimum cable size, select the other size from the list box.
If the calculated minimum cable size is effective (MV-1, MV-2, HV-1 & HV-2) and an newly selected
size is less than that, a warning message is shown.
Conduit Size
When new records are created in DPPMinCabSize or "Conduit Type" changes from the previous one,
the conduit size (record) corresponding to the minimum cable size is retrieved as an initial value from
the conduit library with the following criteria;
Minimum conduit size (minimum Inner Diameter) that satisfies;
[Inner Diameter] **2 >= [Cable O.D.] **2 / [Ratio of Cross Section for One Conductor]
"Ratio of Cross Section" can be referred or changed in the entrance menu of the Conduit & Cable
13-82
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Minimum Cable Size
Gland Selection Table. (See Section 10.4.1, Entrance Menu.)

When the corresponding record is not found in the cable or conduit library, the conduit size will be left
blank.
If you like to change the calculated conduit sizes, select the other size from the list box.
Gland Size
When new records are created in DPPMinCabSize or "Gland Type" changes from the previous one,
the gland size (record) corresponding to the minimum cable size is retrieved as an initial value from
the cable gland library with the following criteria;
Minimum gland size (minimum Cable O.D. Max for Gland) that satisfies;
[Cable O.D. Max for Gland] >= [Cable O.D.]
When the corresponding record is not found in the cable or gland library, the gland size will be left
blank.
If you like to change the calculated gland sizes, select the other size from the list box.
Entry Size
When new records are created in DPPMinCabSize or "Entry Type" changes from the previous one,
the entry size of gland (record) corresponding to the selected gland type/size and entry type is
retrieved as an initial value from the cable gland library.
"Entry Size" is indication only and not editable. Values of "Entry Size" are always synchronized with
"Gland Size" of the same records.
"Re-Calc" Button (Not available)

When "Re-Calc" button is clicked, "Conduit Size" and "Gland Size" are newly selected as per the
above-described formulas. This function is used when you change the minimum cable sizes manually.
13-83
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Conduit and Gland Size Table
13.9 Conduit and Gland Size Table

The Conduit & Cable Gland Selection Table (hereinafter called "Conduit Selection Table") defines
default sizes of conduits, entries and cable glands against each size of power cable and is used for the
conduit & cable gland sizing routine. For such, that the detailed procedure is described in Chapter 13,
Cable Management.
The information similar to this Conduit Selection Table exists in the minimum cable size table
DPPMinCabSize [Conduit Size], [Entry Size] and [Gland Size] that are indexed by motor output
kW and forms a subset of the Conduit Selection Table. The difference between these 2 tables is that
whilst the Conduit Selection Table may includes any type and any size of cables used for a project, the
minimum cable size table may not.
The table name for the Conduit Selection Table is DPPCGSelect.
Cable Size Unit

Select Cable Size Unit either "Metric" or "English".
Conduit Size Unit

Select the Conduit Size Unit, "Metric" or "English".
Cable Standard
Select the Cable Standard, IEC, ANSI or JIS.
Cable Manufacturer
The uniquely filtered values of the cable manufacturer field in the cable library appear on the selection
box. The default value initially shown is "DPP".
13-84
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Cable Voltage
The uniquely filtered values of the cable voltage field in the cable library appear on the selection box.
Conduit Type
All the values of the conduit type field in the conduit library appear on the selection box.
Entry Type
The value list for the cable entry type field in the cable gland library is used for selection of this item.
("M", "NPT", "PG", "PF" and "ET")
A default value shown on the box is the previously selected one in "Project Information".
Gland Type
All the values of the cable gland type field in the cable gland library appear on the selection box.
Percent of Cross - Section

Enter the maximum allowable ratios (%) of the cable cross sectional areas against the inner sectional
areas of conduit for 3 cases of one, two and more than two conductors installed in a conduit.
Each value has to be within the range of over 0 to 100 (%) (Zero is not allowed.). The default figures
shown here are retrieved from NEC (53% for one conductor, 31% for two conductors and 40% for
more than two conductors.).
Click the "Save" buttons if you wish to save the changes made in the percent of cross section if any.
"Cable Library Selection Table"

The cable types in the cable library filtered with the upper parameters are shown on the left-hand
selection box. You can select anyone from them to create or add to the Conduit Selection Table and
move it to the right-hand selection box showing the present contents of the Conduit Selection Table.
When content is removed from the right-hand box, all the corresponding data are deleted from the
Conduit Selection Table with a warning message.
13.9.2. Command Buttons

Edit
Click "Edit" button for each cable library placed to the "Selection Table" pane in order for e-DPP to
initially perform the conduit and gland sizing (according to the parameters set at the upper half portion
of the dialog window) for each cable size belonging to the said cable library. Eventually, e-DPP
generates the "Conduit and Gland Selection Table" for that particular cable library. Only one selected
item can be edited at a time.
Once the "Edit" button is clicked, another window as shown in the next Section 10.4.3 will appear.
The user can manually modify then the conduit and gland sizes which were initially filled-up by
e-DPP program according to his preference.
Note: Clicking the "Edit" button for each new cable library placed in the "Selected Table" pane or
already existing but no prior commencement of clicking the "Edit" button yet is a must prior to
Conduit and Cable Sizing activity.
13-85
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
Help
Close
Click on "Close" button to close the Conduit and Cable Gland Selection Table Dialog window.
13.9.3. Editor
Editing the Conduit Selection Table is performed on the above form. The upper area of the form
indicates the field contents input in the entrance menu. The lower area indicates the field contents of
table DPPCGSelect.
Available
This field is linked to the same one of the cable library. Even if this checkbox is unchecked, the
Conduit Sizing program regards this cable as target.
Conduit Size - 1 Conductor

When new records are created in DPPCGSelect or "Conduit Type" changes from the previous one, the
conduit size (record) corresponding to the individual cable size is retrieved as an initial value from the
conduit library with the following criteria;
Minimum conduit size (minimum Inner Diameter) that satisfies;
[Inner Diameter] **2 >= [Cable O.D.] **2 / [Ratio of Cross Section for One Conductor]
When the corresponding record is not found in the cable or conduit library, the conduit size will be left
13-86
e-DPP 4.0.2
Cable Management
blank.
If you like to change the calculated conduit sizes, select the other size from the list box.
Conduit Size - 2 Conductors

The following formula is applied:
[Inner Diameter] **2 >= [Cable O.D.] **2 / [Ratio of Cross Section for Two Conductors]
Conduit Size - 3 Conductors

The following formula is applied:
[Inner Diameter] **2 >= [Cable O.D.] **2 / [Ratio of Cross Section for More than Two
Conductors]
Gland Size
When new records are created in DPPCGSelect or "Gland Type" changes from the previous one, the
gland size (record) corresponding to the individual cable size is retrieved as an initial value from the
cable gland library with the following criteria;
Minimum gland size (minimum Cable O.D. Max for Gland) that satisfies;
[Cable O.D. Max for Gland] >= [Cable O.D.]
When the corresponding record is not found in the cable or gland library, the gland size will be left
blank.
If you like to change the calculated gland sizes, select the other size from the list box.
Entry Thread Size

When new records are created in DPPCGSelect or "Entry Type" changes from the previous one, the
entry size of gland (record) corresponding to the selected gland type/size and entry type is retrieved as
an initial value from the cable gland library.
"Entry Thread Size" is indication only and not editable. Values of "Entry Thread Size" are always
synchronized with "Gland Size" of the same records.
<End of Chapter 13>
13-87
e-DPP 4.0.2
Chapter 14
Revision Control
e-DPP provides a comprehensive feature of Revision Control for all documents (templates) which are
generated inside e-DPP in a manner that complies with engineering practices.
The Revision Control consists of three (3) divisions.
Revision Up
Revision View
Revision List
e-DPP Revision Control assigns two (2) categories of revision numbers. The first one is "Official
Revision No." represented in numbers starting with "0". Another one is Internal Revision No."
represented by uppercase letters starting with "A". Both can be assigned to each document (template)
as shown in the above sample image.
14-1
e-DPP 4.0.2
Revision Control
Revision Up
14.1 Revision Up
The function of Revision Up is to count up the Official or Internal revision number by one step
upward (e.g. 2 to 3, or A to B) of the particular documents.
14.1.1 Template Selection
Template Selection
Select your target template (document) that you wish to count up its revision no. from the list box of
"Schedule Template" or "Data Sheet Template".
Print Type of Rev. No.

Select one option from "Official only" or "All". This option becomes effective in the revision column
of MS Excel data sheet.
The bottom row of the revision column is always fixed to Rev. 0. Therefore, even if your document
has Rev. A before Rev.0, Rev. A will not be shown.
Revision No. Control

Revision Type
Select your revision type, Official or Internal for the revision control category.
"Rev. Up" Button

The revision number of the selected document will be counted up by one step upward according to
your selection above. When you click on this button, the lower part of the dialog appears. See the next
Section 14.1.2, New Revision Information.
"Same Rev." Button

It might occur as a usual occasion that you have trivial changes or mistakes in the last revision of
document. If it is not worth counting up either an official or an internal revision mark, you can stamp
the revision number as same as the current one. The changes made between the latest and previous
revisions are kept in the e-DPP database as if the previous revision mark was not recorded.
14-2
e-DPP 4.0.2
Revision Control
Revision Up
14.1.2 New Revision Information

When you click on "Rev. No." or "Same Rev." button, the lower part of the Revision Up dialog
appears.
Description
Enter the revision description with a maximum of 255 characters.
Made By
Enter the name of engineer who made the revision of document with a maximum of 15 characters. The
initial value shown here is the Engineer Name you entered in the Login dialog box at the beginning of
the session.
Checked By
Enter the name of engineer who checked the revision of document with a maximum of 15 characters.
Approved By
Enter the name of engineer who approved the revision of document with a maximum of 15 characters.
Issue Status
Enter any statement regarding the issue status of the revision of document with a maximum of 100
characters. This information is not shown in any Schedule Sheet or Data Sheets, but can be exported to
MS Excel "Revision History". See the next Section 14.2, Revision View.
Motor Data
Enter any statement regarding the motor data used in the revision of document with a maximum of
100 characters. This information is not shown in any Schedule Sheet or Data Sheets, but can be
14-3
e-DPP 4.0.2
Revision Control
Revision Up
exported to MS Excel "Revision History". See the next Section 14.2, Revision View.
Cable Data
Enter any statement regarding the cable data used in the revision of document with a maximum of 100
characters. This information is not shown in any Schedule Sheet or Data Sheet, but can be exported to
MS Excel "Revision History". See the next Section 14.2, Revision View.
"OK" Button
After you have entered the above information, click on OK button to count up the revision mark of the
document.
14-4
e-DPP 4.0.2
Revision Control
Revision View
14.2 Revision View

You can review the history of revisions of the particular documents (templates) with this revision view
function.
Command Buttons
"Save" Button
You can alter the information of the past revisions in the lower part of this dialog except for "Rev. No"
and "Revision Date". When you click on the "Save" button, the changes you made here are saved.
"To Excel" Button

The revision information is exported to MS Excel sheet.

Select one option "Official only" or "All". This option becomes effective in the revision column of MS
Excel data sheet and also in the "View" button.
"View" Button
You can emulate the appearance of the revision columns shown on the equipment Data Sheets, but you
cannot alter any of the information presented here.
14-5
e-DPP 4.0.2
Revision Control
Revision View
14-6
e-DPP 4.0.2
Revision Control
Revision List
14.3 Revision List

You can obtain the past revision lists of document by revision number wise with this menu.
Parameter
Select your target template (document) of which you wish to obtain the revision list from the list box
of "Schedule Template" or "Data Sheet Template".
Specify Rev. No. - From & To

Specify the range of revision numbers of which you wish to obtain the revision list. For example, if
you specify as "From 0 To 2", the revision lists for Rev. 1 and 2 are obtained.
Select Item No.

Selecting a certain Item No. (ID) you are able to filter the revision list for that particular ID only.
Select Field
Selecting a certain field of the table you are able to filter the revision list for that field only.
Status
Selecting a status of the type of revision, "Changed", "Added", "Deleted" or "All" you are able to filter
the revision list for that particular status only.
"OK" Button
When you specify the above parameters, click on OK button. A revision list appears in the lower part
of this dialog.
14-7
e-DPP 4.0.2
Revision Control
Revision List
Page Feed by Rev. No.

If you like to do Page Feed by the revision numbers, check this option. Each revision number of
revision list is exported to one sheet of MS Excel book.
<End of Chapter 14>
14-8
e-DPP 4.0.2
Chapter 15
Template
"Template" is the kernel entity of e-DPP. Through various templates, you can access, edit and output
the equipment database of e-DPP.
e-DPP has eighty six (86) predefined templates along with the corresponding MS Excel formats.
(Some of them are used by the system and not disclosed to users.)
In addition to the e-DPP standard templates, you can design your own templates by the Template
Design function. The basic concept to design a user template is to relate a user MS Excel sheet with
the e-DPP database table. Columns of MS Excel sheet are linked with the fields of the e-DPP database
table. The Template Design program facilitates those relating processes.
<e-DPP Database>
<MS EXCEL format>
15-1
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Template List
15.1 Template List

You can see the list of all e-DPP templates, standard and user-designed, and alter their properties in
this window.
User Template Only

Check this checkbox to view only the user-designed template list.
Document No.
Enter a document no. for the current template (document) with a maximum 30 characters.

Select one option "Official only" or "All". This option becomes effective in the revision column of MS
Excel data sheet.
"Save" Button
When you make any changes in the document no. or "Print Type of Rev. No.", and you want to save
them, click on Save button for each document. You cannot save the changes for more than one
template at a time.
"Delete" Button
You can delete user-designed templates only. Therefore, if the current template is e-DPP standard, you
cannot delete it.
15-2
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Schedule Sheet
15.2 Schedule Sheet

A user template for Schedule Sheet is designed in this window. Before designing a new template, you
need to create a new MS Excel sheet for this template. Your MS Excel sheet is viewed on this window
as below.
"Copy" Button
To copy the presently shown template to a new one
The new template name should not start with "DPP" since "DPP" is a reserved prefix for the e-DPP
standard template.
15-3
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Schedule Sheet
"Create" Button
To create a new template
standard template.
"Save" Button
Save all the changes made on the template design window.
Category and Template Selection

Category
Select a category from the list box.
Template Name
Select a template from the list box.
Template Title
Enter a template title with up to 64 characters. Template title must be unique throughout the project.
MS Excel File
File Name
Select MS Excel file with "Find" button. Full path name is limited to 255 characters.
Sheet Name
Select a sheet name of the selected MS Excel file.
Data Offset
Max. Data Rows per Page
Enter the maximum number of data rows to be displayed on the output page (not a sheet).
Data Starting Column

Enter the starting column number of MS Excel sheet from where the e-DPP data are outputted. As
columns are named A, B, C, in MS Excel, you need to convert the letters to number, e.g. A=1, B=2,
etc.
15-4
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Schedule Sheet
Data Starting Row

Enter the starting row number of MS Excel sheet from where the e-DPP data are outputted.
Source Table and Field

Header Table
Field values that contain a single record are displayed on this e-DPP table. i.e. DPPProjectRec (Project
information), DPPMotorDefault (Default data for induction motors) and REVData (Revision data)
These values are assigned to the header part of your Schedule Sheet.
Data Table
Field values that contain more than one record is displayed one this e-DPP table. These values are
assigned to the body part of your Schedule Sheet. Individual categories have single particular table
related.
Initial Filter
You can enter an initial filter to limit the data shown in your new template by SQL statement.
"Header" area
You can assign the fields of the "Header Table" by dragging and dropping to this area.
Cell Data
When a cursor is located in the "Header" grid (MS Excel sheet), the cell data is shown in this field.
MS Excel Grid
You can drag and drop any fields of "Header Table" to this area. Dropped fields are expressed in the
format "*[<Table Name>,<Field Name>]".
"Data" area
You can assign the fields of "Data Table" by dragging and dropping to this area.
(Note: Letters in the column header do not correspond to those of MS Excel Sheet. You need to take
the value of "Data Starting Column" into account.)
Description
Enter descriptions for individual fields. These are shown in the column headers of the editor grid and
on the Sort (scroll-down list) and Filter (pull-down list) dialogs brought up by the same editor.
Decimal
Enter the number of significant digits after decimal point (e.g. 3 for "12.465").
Expression
You can concatenate the text type of existing fields and substitute into any of user defined text fields.
Also, you can conduct the four rules of arithmetic operation with more than one numeric type of
existing fields and substitute the calculation results into any of user defined numeric fields.
The Expression Builder helps you to organize a string concatenation or build a formula with "+", "-",
"*" and "/" operators.
15-5
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Schedule Sheet
Expression Builder
Double clicking the "Expression" cell of a user field, enables you to create an expression by
dragging/dropping field names from "Available Fields" and clicking several operators on the
Expression Builder.
For the text type of user fields, only string (text) type of fields can be referred. Each string field is
connected with "&" and "-" operators. Also, other constant strings than "-" can be included in the
expression, e.g. "_", "=". The constant string has to be sandwiched by single quotations in the
"Expression" box.
<String Expression>
For the numeric type of user fields, only numeric type of fields can be referred. Each numeric field is
connected with "+", "-", "/", "*", "(" and ")" operators.
<Numeric Expression>
15-6
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Data Sheet
15.3 Data Sheet

A user template for Data Sheet is designed in this window. Before designing a new template, you need
to create a new MS Excel sheet for this template. Your MS Excel sheet is viewed on this window as
below.
"Copy" Button
To copy the presently shown template to a new one
standard template.
"Create" Button
To create a new template
15-7
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Data Sheet
standard template.
"Save" Button
Save all the changes made on this template design window.
Category and Template Selection

Category
Select a category from the list box.
Template Name
Select a template from the list box.
Template Title
Enter a template title with up to 64 characters. Template title must be unique throughout the project.
MS Excel File
File Name
Select MS Excel file with "Find" button. Full path name is limited to 255 characters.
Sheet Name
Select a sheet name of the selected MS Excel file.
Data Offset
Max. Data Cols per Page
This cell indicates the number of data columns per page. User is not allowed to change its value.
The value is always 1 for the conventional style of datasheets and 3 for the vertical style of schedule
sheets which is categorized in datasheet in e-DPP.
Data Starting Column

Enter the starting column number of MS Excel sheet from where the e-DPP data are outputted. As
columns are named A, B, C, in MS Excel, you need to convert the letters to number, e.g. A=1, B=2,
etc.
This cell is enabled for the vertical style of schedule sheets only.
15-8
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Data Sheet
Data Starting Row

Enter the starting row number of MS Excel sheet from where the e-DPP data are outputted.
This cell is enabled for the vertical style of schedule sheets only.
Source Table and Field

Header Table
Field values that contain a single record are displayed on this e-DPP table. i.e. DPPProjectRec (Project
information), DPPMotorDefault (Default data for induction motors) and REVData (Revision data)
These values are assigned to the header part of your Data Sheet. Individual categories have single
particular table related.
Data Table
Field values that contain more than one record is displayed one this e-DPP table. These values are
assigned to the body part of your Data Sheet.
Initial Filter
You can enter an initial filter to limit the data shown in your new template by SQL statement.
"Data Sheet" area

You can assign the fields of the "Header Table" and "Data Table" tables by dragging and dropping to
this area.
15-9
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Load Summary
15.4 Load Summary

User is allowed to design desired forms to output the results of load summary calculation (refer to
chapter 12) in this menu.
<Template Design dialog for Load Summary>

In general, a report form for calculation results consists of three parts, i.e. header, main body and
footer. The dialog shown above has three tabs "General & Header Part", "Body Part" and "Footer Part"
accordingly. By this, user is allowed to design each part on each tab independently.
15.4.1 "General & Header Part" Tab

Template
Template Information
Template Name
Select a template you want to edit from the pull down list.
MS Excel File
Select MS Excel file with "Browse" button. Full path name is limited to 255 characters.
Sheet
The first sheet name of the selected MS Excel file is shown here. Only the first sheet can be used for
template design.
Document No.
15-10
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Load Summary
Enter a document number with up to 64 characters. Document number is one of the items that can be
included in the header and/or footer.
Command Buttons
Create
Clicking this button brings up a dialog to enter a new template name with up to 64 characters. To
enable this button, you need to clear all the tab data first by clicking "Clear" button.
Prior to creation of new template, a desired option in "General Parameters" - "Summary Base" needs
to be selected. Once any option has been selected, user cannot change it.
Copy
Clicking this button brings up a dialog to enter a new (destination) template name with up to 64
characters. New template name must be unique throughout the project. The summary base of
destination template is always the same as that of source template.
Delete
When you want to delete the current template, click this button. Warning message will appear to
confirm the deletion action.
Clear
Clicking this button clears all the settings on three tabs. This action is required to create a new
template whenever any project is loaded.
General Parameters
Summary Base
When user creates a new template, one of the options, i.e. "Switchboard", "Bus" or "Lumped Load"
needs to be selected.
When "Switchboard" is selected as a summary base, the items "Bus ID" and "Lump ID" in "Header
Part" and "Footer Part" are hidden.
When "Bus" is selected as a summary base, the item "Lump ID" in "Header Part" and "Footer Part" is
hidden.
When "Lumped Load" is selected as a summary base, no item is hidden.
MS Excel Cell Address

Print Area (Body & Footer Parts)
It is required to specify the Print Area of Excel sheet for the current template by selecting four
parameters from the pull down list.
Row Title area (header part) needs to be specified with MS Excel menu "File" "Page Setup"
"Sheet" "Print Title".
Start Row
Row number of the top-left corner cell in the body part (see the image below).
End Row
15-11
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Load Summary
Row number of the bottom-right corner cell in the footer part (see the image below).
Start Column
Column number (A, B, C, AA, AB, AC,) of the top-left corner cell in the body part (see the
image below).
End Column
Column number (A, B, C, AA, AB, AC,) of the bottom-right corner cell in the footer part (see the
image below).
<Structure of Load Summary Form>
Header Part
You can select the properties that you want to indicate in the header of Excel template. Check the
checkboxes for the properties and select the row and column numbers from the pull down lists. The
contents of pull down lists dynamically change depending on the specified values in "Print Area".
The items included in the header part are as follows:
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Caption
Proj title
Job No.
Location
S/S
Proj code
Swbd ID
Bus ID
Description
Project Title
Job No.
Location
Substation ID
Project Code
Switchboard ID
Bus ID
No.
8
9
10
11
12
13
Caption
Lump ID
kV
Engineer
Doc. No.
Config.
Loading
Description
Lumped Load ID
Rated kV
Name of Engineer
Document No.
Loading Category
15.4.2 "Body Part" Tab
15-12
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Load Summary
MS Excel Cell Address - Body

General Parameters
Number of data rows per page
Enter the number of data rows to be indicated in one Excel page (not sheet).
Blank line between data rows

Check this box to output data on every other line. With this option only odd lines will be filled with
data.
Unit of PF, EFF and Load Factor

Select one of the units, either "Per Unit" or "Percent (%)", in which you want to indicate the values of
power factor, efficiency and loading factor.
Show Unit (*) of output rating

This option is intended for such a case as the header title already shows a default unit of output rating
of loads, for example "kW", it might nuisance to repeat the same unit description (kW) in every row.
When you check any of the boxes, i.e. "HP", "kW", "kVA" and "kvar", only the checked units are
indicated in the body part.
Data Columns
In the body part, it is required to specify only the column numbers (alphabets) for checked items.
The items included in the body part are as follows:
No.
Caption
1 Equip. ID
Description
Equipment ID
No.
17
Caption
Load Factor
15-13
Description
Load Factor
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
No.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Caption
Equip. Type
Service
Vital
Essential
Non-Essential
Restarting
Continuous
Intermittent
Spare
Output
Unit
No. of poles
Rated kV
Phase
BHP
Load Summary
Description
Equipment Type
Service
Vital
Essential
Non-Essential
Restarting
Continuous
Intermittent
Spare
Output
Unit of Output
No. of poles
Rated kV
Number of Phase
BHP
No.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Caption
Eff @LF
PF @LF
Eff @100%
PF @100%
Cont. kW
Cont. kvar
Cont. kVA
Inter. kW
Inter. kvar
Inter. kVA
Spare kW
Spare kvar
Spare kVA
Remarks
Description
Efficiency at Load Factor
PF at Load Factor
Efficiency at 100% Load
PF at 100% Load
kW of Continuous Load
kvar of Continuous Load
kVA of Continuous Load
kW of Intermittent Load
kvar of Intermittent Load
kVA of Intermittent Load
kW of Spare Load
kvar of Spare Load
kVA of Spare Load
Remarks
15.4.3 "Footer Part" Tab
MS Excel Cell Address - Footer part

The items included in the footer part are as follows:
No.
1
2
3
4
Caption
Proj title
Job No.
Location
S/S
Description
Project Title
Job No.
Location
Substation ID
No.
6
7
8
9
15-14
Caption
Swbd ID
Bus ID
Lump ID
kV
Description
Switchboard ID
Bus ID
Lumped Load ID
Rated kV
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
No.
Caption
5 Proj code
Load Summary
Description
Project Code
No.
Group
1 Total continuous loads
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Caption
kW
kvar
kVA
PF
CF (x)
CF * kVA
Total intermittent loads
12
kW
kvar
kVA
PF
CF (y)
CF * kVA
13
14
15
16
17
18
Total spare loads
kW
kvar
kVA
PF
CF (z)
CF * kVA
19
20
21
22
23
Total maximum loads
kW
kvar
kVA
PF
Margin
24
25
26
27
28
Total peak loads
kW
kvar
kVA
PF
Margin
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Total motor loads
kVA
Ratio
kVA
Ratio
Cos Phi
Cos Phi1
Req. kvar
kW
kvar
kVA
kW
Total static loads

Power factor compensation
Total max. + Margin
Total peak + Margin
No.
10
Caption
Engineer
Description
Name of Engineer
Description
kW of total continuous loads
kvar of total continuous loads
kVA of total continuous loads
Power factor of total continuous loads
Coincidence factor x of total continuous
loads
kVA multiplied by coincidence factor x
of total continuous loads
kW of total intermittent loads
kvar of total intermittent loads
kVA of total intermittent loads
Power factor of total intermittent loads
Coincidence factor y of total intermittent
loads
kVA multiplied by coincidence factor y
of total intermittent loads
kW of total spare loads
kvar of total spare loads
kVA of total spare loads
Power factor of total spare loads
Coincidence factor z of total spare loads
kVA multiplied by coincidence factor z
of total spare loads
kW of total maximum loads
kvar of total maximum loads
kVA of total maximum loads
Power factor of total maximum loads
% of margin (contingency) of total
maximum loads
kW of total peak loads
kvar of total peak loads
kVA of total peak loads
Power factor of total peak loads
% of margin (contingency) of total peak
loads
kVA of total motor loads
Ratio total motor loads
kVA of total static loads
Ratio total static loads
Power factor before compensation
Power factor after compensation
kvar rating of required capacitor
kW of total maximum load + margin
kvar of total maximum load + margin
kVA of total maximum load + margin
kW of total peak load + margin
15-15
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
No.
Group
40
41
42 Page information
43
44 Document No.
45
46
Load Summary
Caption
kvar
kVA
Page #
Total #
No.
Config.
Loading
Description
kvar of total peak load + margin
kVA of total peak load + margin
Page number
Total number of pages
Document No.
Loading Category
Unit of calculated PF, CF & Ratio

calculated power factors, coincidence factors and ratio of motor/static loads.
Unit of PF for compensation

calculated power factor for capacitor compensation.
Last page only (General information)

Check this box to indicate the general information like project title, job no., etc in footer of the last
page only.
Last page only (Calculated values)

Check this box to indicate the calculated values like total kW, compensated power factor, etc in footer
of the last page only.
15-16
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Cable Sizing Result
15.5 Cable Sizing Result

User is allowed to design desired forms to output the results of power cable sizing calculation (refer to
<Template Design dialog for Cable Sizing Results>


Template
Template Name
MS Excel File
Sheet
template design.
Document No.
15-17
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Cable Sizing Result
Command Buttons
Create
Copy
characters. New template name must be unique throughout the project.
Delete
Clear

Print Area (Body & Footer Parts)
It is required to specify the Print Area of Excel sheet for the current template by selecting four
parameters from the pull down list.
Row Title area (header part) needs to be specified with MS Excel menu "File" "Page Setup"
"Sheet" "Print Title".
Start Row
Row number of the top-left corner cell in the body part (see the image below).
End Row
Row number of the bottom-right corner cell in the footer part (see the image below).
Start Column
Column number (A, B, C, AA, AB, AC,) of the top-left corner cell in the body part (see the
image below).
End Column
Column number (A, B, C, AA, AB, AC,) of the bottom-right corner cell in the footer part (see the
image below).
15-18
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Cable Sizing Result
<Structure of Cable Sizing Results>

(Note: Footer part is not shown on the image above since it is defined with respect to the specified row
and column of the body part.)
Header Part
checkboxes for the properties and select the row and column items from the pull down lists. The
contents of pull down lists dynamically change depending on the specified values in "Print Area".
No.
Caption
1 Proj title
2 Job No.
3 Location
Description
Project Title
Job No.
Location
No.
4
5
6
Caption
Proj code
Engineer
Doc. No.
15-19
Description
Project Code
Name of Engineer
Document No.
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Cable Sizing Result

General Parameters
Number of data rows per page
Enter the number of data rows to be indicated in one Excel page (not sheet).
Blank line between data rows

Check this box to output data on every other line. With this option, only odd number lines are filled
with data.
Unit of PF, EFF and Load Factor

power factor, efficiency and loading factor.
Show Unit (*) of output rating

This option is intended for such a case as the header title already shows a default unit of output rating
of loads, for example "kW", it might nuisance to repeat the same unit description (kW) in every row.
When you check any of the boxes, i.e. "HP", "kW", "kVA" and "kvar", only the checked units are
indicated in the body part.
Data Columns
In the body part, it is required to specify only the column numbers (alphabets) for checked items.
The items included in the body part are as follows:
15-20
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Cable Sizing Result
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Caption
Lock
Load ID
Equip. Type
Load Type
Service
Cont. Qty
Inter. Qty
Spare Qty
Output
Unit
Phase No.
Description
Lock Option
Load ID
Equipment Type
Load Type
Service
Continuous Quantity
Intermittent Quantity
Spare Quantity
Output
Unit of Output
No. of Phase
No.
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Caption
Cable Type
# Cores
Wire Type "C"
Cable Size
#/Phase
Cable Length
Resistance
Reactance
Base Amp.
Temp. Factor
Temp. Amp.
12
13
14
15
16
KV
Poles
Volt. Class
System KV
FLC
Rated kV
No. of Poles
Voltage Class
System kV
Full Load Current
37
38
39
40
41
RHO Factor
Group Factor
Derate Factor
Derated Amp.
VDrop @Run
17
App. MF
Application MF
42
Max Len Run
18
MF x FLC
43
VDrop @Start
19
PF @FL
MF x Full
Load Current
PF at Full Load
44
Max Len Start
20
LRC (%)
45
Amp. Ratio
21
22
PF @LR
Raceway
Locked Rotor
Current
PF at Locked Rotor
Installation Method
46
47
Min Cab Size

Min Sec Area
23
24
25
Cable ID
Conductor
Cable Volt.
Cable ID
Type of Conductor
Cable Voltage
48
49
50
Recalculated
User Cab Size
Sized Factor
15-21
Description
Cable Type
No. of Cores
Wire Type "C"
Cable Size
Wires per Phase
Cable Length
Resistance
Reactance
Base Ampacity
Temperature Factor
Temperature
Ampacity
RHO Factor
Group Factor
Derating Factor
Derated Ampacity
Voltage
Drop
Running
Maximum Length
Running
Voltage
Drop
Starting
Maximum Length
Starting
Ampacity Ratio
at
at
at
at
Minimum Cable Size

Minimum Sectional
Area
Recalculated
User Defined Size
Sized Factor
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Cable Sizing Result

No.
Caption
1 Proj title
2 Job No.
3 Location
Description
Project Title
Job No.
Location
No.
Group
42 Page information
43
44 Document No.
No.
4
5
Caption
Page #
Total #
No.
Caption
Proj code
Engineer
Description
Project Code
Name of Engineer
Description
Page number
Total number of pages
Document No.
Last page only (General information)

Check this box to indicate the general information like project title, job no., etc in footer of the last
page only.
15-22
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Cable Sizing Chart
15.6 Cable Sizing Chart

User is allowed to design desired forms to output the results of power cable sizing chart (refer to
<Template Design dialog for Cable Sizing Results>


Template
Template Name
MS Excel File
Sheet
template design.
Document No.
15-23
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Cable Sizing Chart
Command Buttons
Create
Prior to creation of new template, a desired option in "General Parameters" - "Load Type" needs to be
selected. Once any option has been selected, user cannot change it.
Copy
characters. New template name must be unique throughout the project. The Load Type of destination
template is always the same as that of source template.
Delete
Clear
General Parameters
Load Type
When user creates a new template, one of the options, i.e. "Motor" or "Static Load" needs to be
selected.
When "Motor" is selected as a load type, no item is hidden.
When "Static Load" is selected as a load type, items "VDrop@LR", "Pole" and "Enclosure" in
"Header Part" and "Footer Part" are hidden.
15-24
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Cable Sizing Chart
<Structure of Cable Sizing Chart>

(Note: Footer part is not shown in the image above since items were already included in the header
part. For other template design, user has the option on what to include for the header and the footer
part.)
Header Part
checkboxes for the properties and select the row (1-30) and column (A-AZ) items from the pull down
lists. The contents of pull down lists are now fixed.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Caption
Client
Project
Job No
Doc No
Date
Rev No
Sys kV
Frequency
VDrop@Run
10
VDrop@LR
11
12
Ph-Wire
Raceway
Description
Client
Project
Job No
Document No
Date
Revision No
System kV
Frequency
Voltage Drop
at Running
Voltage Drop
at Motor Starting
Wire per Phase
Installation Method
No.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Caption
Load Type
Load kV
Phase No
Poles
Enclosure
Cab Std
Cab Unit
Conduit
Conduct
Description
Load Type
Load kV
No. of Phase
No. of Poles
Enclosure
Cable Standard
Cable Unit
Conduit
Conductor
26
CabVolt
Cable Voltage
27
28
CabType
# Cores
Cable Type
No. of Cores
15-25
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Cable Sizing Chart
No.
Caption
13 Amb Temp
Description
Ambient Temperature
No.
29
Caption
AG Temp
14
Temp F
Temperature Factor
30
UG Temp
15
16
Group F
Derate F
Group Factor
Derating Factor
31
32
Cnd Temp
File Name
Description
Above Ground
Temperature
Underground
Temperature
Conductor Temperature
File Name

General Parameters
Number of Cable Data Columns
Enter the number of Cable Data Columns to be indicated in Excel output (not sheet).
Start Row of Cable Data

Define the starting row for the cable data.
(Note 1: As the number of cable data rows are fixed to 5, it is required to consider those 5 rows when
defining the start row of load data.)
Start Column of Cable Data

Define the starting column for the cable data.
(Note 2: As the field type of "Cable Size" is text (not number), cell format in MS Excel sheet for them
has to be specified "Text". When AWG/kcmils unit is applied to cable sizes, for example, the size
15-26
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
Cable Sizing Chart
presentation "1/0", "2/0", "3/0" or "4/0" will be indicated in "date" format in Excel like "Jan-00",
"Feb-00", "Mar-00" or "Apr-00".)
Number of Load Data Columns

Enter the number of Load Data Columns to be indicated in Excel output (not sheet).
(Note 3: As the number of load data columns are fixed to 9 for motors and 7 for static loads, it is
required to consider those 9 or 7 columns when defining the start column of cable data.)
Start Row of Load Data

Define the starting row for the Load data.
Start Column of Load Data

Define the starting column for the Load data.

Items on the Footer Part are the same as the Header. User has the option of what to include on the
report.
No.
Caption
1 Client
2 Project
3 Job No
Description
Client
Project
Job No.
No.
17
18
19
15-27
Caption
Load Type
Load kV
Phase No
Description
Load Type
Load kV
No. Of Phase
e-DPP 4.0.2
Template
No.
4
5
6
7
8
9
Caption
Doc No
Date
Rev No
Sys kV
Frequency
VDrop@Run
10
VDrop@LR
11
12
13
Cable Sizing Chart

No.
20
21
22
23
24
25
Caption
Poles
Enclosure
Cab Std
Cab Unit
Conduit
Conduct
Description
No. of Poles
Enclosure
Cable Standard
Cable Unit
Conduit
Conductor
26
CabVolt
Cable Voltage
Ph-Wire
Raceway
Amb Temp
Description
Document No.
Date
Revision No.
System kV
Frequency
Voltage Drop
at Running
Voltage Drop
at Starting
Wire per Phase
Installation Method
Ambient Temperature
27
28
29
CabType
# Cores
AG Temp
14
Temp F
Temperature Factor
30
UG Temp
15
16
Group F
Derate F
Group Factor
Derating Factor
31
32
Cnd Temp
File Name
Cable Type
No. of Cores
Above Ground
Temperature
Underground
Temperature
Conductor Temperature
File Name
<End of Chapter 15>
15-28
e-DPP 4.0.2
Chapter 16
Tools
e-DPP provides with the optional program modules to interface with external application data such as
ETAP and SPEL, and ground fault current calculation
ETAP Interface group
MS Access to ETAP
Export e-DPP project database to the intermediate database

which can be imported to ETAP by means of ETAP DataX
e-DPP module
MS Excel to ETAP
Export e-DPP project database to MS Excel Fixed Format

which can be imported to ETAP by means of ETAP DataX Excel
- Fixed Format module
ReporTAP
The separate application software ReporTAP to import ETAP

equipment information and analysis results
Applications group
Calculate ground fault current and relay sensitivities, etc.
SPEL Adaptor
Export e-DPP project database to the intermediate database

which can be imported to SPEL by means of SPEL Import
Manager module
16-1
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Access to ETAP
16.1 MS Access to ETAP

You can export e-DPP project databases to ETAP through the intermediate database "INT". A data
exchange module called "DataX eDPP" in ETAP version 5.5 and higher should be active in order to
import the "INT" database to the said application.
The complete data exchange process from e-DPP to ETAP involves two separate processes:
(1) First Process: Export of e-DPP data to intermediate database "INT"
This process is done inside e-DPP application environment and the functionalities are
described in this chapter.
(2) Second Process: Import of intermediate database "INT" to ETAP.
This process is done inside ETAP application environment and the functionalities are
described in ETAP User Guide Chapter 40 "Data Exchange".
16.1.1 Type of Equipment

The types of equipment that can be exported to ETAP
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Induction Motors
Synchronous Motors
MOVs
Static Loads
Capacitors
Cable
Lumped Loads
2W Transformers
are listed below.
(9) 3W Transformers
(10) Buses
(11) HV Circuit Breakers
(12) LV Circuit Breakers
(13) Fuses
(14) Contactors
(15) Overload Heaters
(16) Synchronous Generator or Power Grid
The above equipments reside in the following tables in e-DPP project database;
Table
DPPElecLoad
DPPCable
DPPLump
DPPXFMR
DPPBus
DPPSwgrMCC
Equipment Type
(1) to (5)
(6)
(7)
(8) and (9)
(10)
(11) to (15)
Equipment type (16) i.e. Synchronous Generator or Power Grid does not reside in e-DPP project
database. They are defined during the export process as described in Clause 6.6.2 (Power Source)
16-2
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Access to ETAP
16.1.2 Exporting To ETAP

To execute the Export to ETAP, select "Tools" tab "MS Access to ETAP". This opens the
"Export To ETAP" dialog box, as shown below.
Electrical Loads
Check the type of loads to be exported.
Check All and Uncheck All

The function of these buttons is self explanatory, i.e. to check or uncheck in one step all type of loads.
Lumped Loads - Include Members

Check "Lumped Loads - Include Members" if the individual loads associated to particular lumped
loads are to be exported also.
About "Lumped Load"
A Lumped Load is a representation of group of individual loads wherein its rating is generally
equal to the vector sum of the associated individual loads as calculated in Load Summary (See
Chapter 12).
If the "Lumped Loads" and the "Include Members" checkboxes are both checked (selected), the
individual loads associated to Lumped Loads and also the Lumped Loads themselves will be exported
to ETAP. This condition will create loading redundancy and hence will unnecessarily increase your
system loading by as much as the cumulative rating of the Lumped Loads. Therefore, it is
recommendable to uncheck the "Include Members" if the option " Lumped Loads" is selected or vice
versa.
Lumped Motors - Include Members

Same as "Lumped Loads" as described above.
Branches
16-3
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Access to ETAP
Check the type of branches to be exported.

The function of these buttons is self explanatory, i.e. to check or uncheck in one step all type of
branches.
Include Non-Power Cables

Check "Include Non-Power Cables" if non-power cables are to be exported to ETAP. Generally, the
cable schedule contains several kinds of cables according to uses other than power cable e.g. control,
data transmission, grounding, etc. and these kinds of cable may also be exported to ETAP.
Note 1: ETAP uses power cables only. If you export non-power cables, these cables will be placed in
ETAP One-line diagram connected to their designated bus. Currently, these cables have no use
in ETAP but in the future they may be utilized in the CSD (Control Sequence Diagram).
Note 2: When the checkbox "Lumped Loads - Include Members" is checked, all the cables associated
to Lumped Loads are exported to ETAP. If not, none of the associated cables are exported.
Note 3: When the checkbox "Lumped Motors - Include Members" is checked, all the cables associated
to Lumped Motors are exported to ETAP. If not, none of the associated cables are exported.
Note 4: If there is a conflict between Lumped Loads and Lumped Motors in this regard, for instance, a
certain motor is included in a Lumped Load but not in a Lumped Motor, "Include" supersedes.
Protective Devices
Check the type of protective to be exported.
ID Prefix
Enter ID prefix in alphanumeric characters (5 max.) for each type of protective devices. This ID
prefix will be combined to the equipment ID of the load being protected by the protective device and
the combination will serve as the ID of the said protective device when exported to ETAP. This
process is necessary since in ETAP all elements are compulsory to have unique ID.

The function of these buttons is self explanatory, i.e. to check or uncheck in one step all type of
protective devices.
Buses
Check "Buses" checkbox to export the buses also.
Nested Elements
Future
Power Source
Power Source is not treated in e-DPP's current version. However, ETAP requires at least one power
source in the system in order to execute power system calculation. For this reason, an option to
create a power source is provided here.
Create Power Source

16-4
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Access to ETAP
Check "Create Power Source" to create a power source and include such in the export process.
Afterwards, select what type of power source is intended, either a "Synchronous Generator" or a
"Power Grid"
Synchronous Generator or Power Grid

Intended type of power source, i.e. "Synchronous Generator" or a "Power Grid"
Connected Bus ID
This is the bus where the power source will be connected. Select from the pull down list the ID of
the said bus. Adjacent to the pull down list is a label which shows the nominal voltage of the
selected bus.
Bus Rated Voltage

The rated voltage of the bus which is specified in e-DPP menu "Edit" "Bus List" is shown in this
cell. User is not allowed to alter it.
Generator Parameters
If the selected type of power source is synchronous generator, the following parameters show up:
ID
ID of the generator.
Operation Mode
Operation mode of the generator i.e. swing, voltage control (PV control), Mvar control (PQ
control) or PF control (Power Factor control)
If your system have only one power source, the operation mode should be "swing" since in the
execution of power system calculation, there should be at least one swing power in the system.
Rated
kV
Rated voltage of the generator
kVA
Rated apparent power in kVA
PF(%)
Rated Power Factor in %
kW
Rated real power in kW
This field is inaccessible; the value shown here is related to the kVA and PF parameters.
X/R
X/R ratio
16-5
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Access to ETAP
Xd" (%)
Sub-transient direct-axis reactance (saturated) in %
Xd' (%)
Transient direct-axis reactance (saturated) in %
Xd (%)
Synchronous direct-axis reactance (saturated) in %
Power Grid Parameters

If the selected type of power source is power grid, the following parameters show up:
ID
ID of the Power Grid
Operation Mode
Operation mode of the power grid i.e. swing, voltage control (PV control), Mvar control (PQ
control) or PF control (Power Factor control)
If your system have only one power source, the operation mode should be in "swing" since in
the execution of power system calculation, there should be at least one swing power in the
system.
Rated
kV
Rated voltage of the Power Grid in kV
MVAsc
Three (3) phase short circuit capacity of the power grid in MVA (*)
X/R
Ratio of the positive sequence short circuit reactance and resistance (*)
Pos R(%)
Positive sequence short circuit resistance in % at 100MVA base (*)
Pos X(%)
Positive sequence short circuit reactance in % at 100MVA base (*)
(*)- MVAsc, X/R, Pos R(%), Pos X(%) are interrelated by the following equations:
16-6
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Access to ETAP
2
100( MVAbase)
%R % X
+
=
MVAsc
100 100
X /R =
%X
%R
Changing one of the parameters will yield changes to the other parameters.
Export
Click "Export" button to execute the export operation. When the export process is completed, a
message about the summary of the equipments which have been exported will be prompted through a
message dialog box. Click "OK" button for acknowledgement and to close the relevant dialogs.
16-7
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Excel to ETAP
16.2 MS Excel to ETAP

e-DPP provides with the feature to enable users to export e-DPP project equipment data to the fixed
format of MS Excel file that will be in turn imported to ETAP project by means of ETAP DataX
program. The fixed format Excel file is shipped with ETAP 7.0 and later release. The diagram below
illustrates the data flow from e-DPP to ETAP.
e-DPP Project
Database
MS Excel
Fixed
Format
ETAP Data
Exchange
Interface
ETAP
Add, Modify &

Delete Actions
User
Confirmation
For more details about ETAP DataX program - Excel Fixed Format, please refer to ETAP User Guide
chapter 43, section 43.3 Excel Fixed Format.
The fixed format of MS Excel file consists of 12 work sheets as shown below. Each sheet corresponds
to one type of electrical equipment.
12 types of equipment are listed below:
Impedance (*)
Reactor (*)
XLine (Transmission line) (*)
Cable
VFD
MOV
Non Motor Load (Static load)
Heater
3W-Transformer
2W-Transformer
Motor
Bus
16-8
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Excel to ETAP
(*) Impedance, reactor and XLine are excluded from the extent of this feature in e-DPP since
they are not defined in the current version of e-DPP.
16.2.1 Data Mapping

When you select MS Excel to ETAP command, the dialog shown below appears:
MS Excel Format
Only Fixed Format is available in the current e-DPP version.
Elements
In this section, user is allowed to select the types of equipment that user wants to export to Excel fixed
format.
Note:
ETAP requires the so-called Node Bus between a cable and a load or between a cable and each
winding of transformer to configure the system impedance matrix used for calculation. When
Cable check box is selected, node buses are automatically created by e-DPP with new bus IDs
assigned based on the user defined naming convention for cables or the pre-determined suffix
B- for transformers. The so-called Equipment Cable that does not require a node bus between
cable and load in ETAP is not created for any load in the current version of e-DPP.
16-9
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Excel to ETAP
Impedance
Not available in the current version of e-DPP.
Reactor
XLine (Transmission Line)
Cable
When this check box is selected, all power cables are exported including load cables, transformer
feeders (primary, secondary and tertiary windings) and interconnecting feeders between panel and
panel. Non power cables such as control, communication, grounding cables are not exported to
Excel.
e-DPP has 2 schedule tables , namely Cable Schedule and Electrical Load Schedule, containing
power cable data. If the cable schedule is created from the electrical load schedule using Data
Filling function and has not been updated by user, the data in these schedules are synchronized. The
cable schedule contains non-load power cables such as transformer feeders that are not contained in
the electrical load schedule.
The below image indicates the relation between these 2 schedule tables:
When Cable check box is checked, the option section Data Source of Load Power Cables
appears as shown below:
If the option Cable Schedule is selected, the power cable data (2) and (3) as shown in the above
image will be exported.
16-10
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Excel to ETAP
If the option Electrical Load Schedule is selected, the power cable data (1) and (3) will be
exported.
Data mapping from e-DPP project and Library databases to the fixed format Excel varies depending
upon the selected option as below:
Note: Cable Use for Transformer Cables
If there are power cables connected to the primary, secondary and/or tertiary windings of
transformer that will be exported to Excel, the special codes for the field CableUse in the table
DPPCable need to be specified as below:
TP:
TS:
TT:
Transformer Primary (can be substituted by P or F)

Transformer Secondary
Transformer Tertiary
These codes are specified in the Value List editor as shown below:
These special codes can be assigned to the transformer in Category entry of Property List or the
template editor Cable Schedule (Form-2).
16-11
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Excel to ETAP
Property List
Template editor Cable Schedule (Form-2)
16-12
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Excel to ETAP
Cable Schedule
e-DPP project database table is DPPCable.
Library database tables are LIBCableIDX and LIBCable.
ETAP Fixed Format Excel
Column Caption
Equipment ID
No per Phase
Service Type
Description
POWER_REQ
From Bus ID
To Bus ID
Cable Library Data
Unit System
Frequency
Conductor Type
Installation
Cable Voltage (kV)
% Class
Cable Source
Insulation
#/Cable
Cable Size
Library Unit Length
Library Length Unit
Base Temperature (C)
Cable Length
Cable Length Unit
Tolerance in %
Cable Impedance per Conductor
Temperature Minimum (C)
Temperature Maximum (C)
Positive R
Positive X
Positive Y
Zero R
Zero X
Zero Y
Impedance Unit
Impedance Unit
Unit Length
Per Length
Comment
Col.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
e-DPP Project / Library Database

(DPPCable / LIBCableIDX & LIBCable)
P/L (*)
Field Name
P
ID
P
PhaseValue
(Fixed to 1 (=In Service))
P
EquipmentName
(Fixed to "Y")
P
FromBus
P
ToBus
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
L
P
L
L
L
P
X
Y
Z
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Standard
Frequency
ConductorType
Installation
CableVoltageNum
VoltageClass
MFRName
CableTypeText (String left to the
first slash /)
NumberOfWires + UnitsOfWire
CabSize
OhmsPerLengthValue
OhmsPerLengthUnit
BaseTempR
LengthValueMeter
(Fixed to 2 (=meter))
(Fixed to 0)
BaseTempR
BaseTempR
RPosValue
XPosValue
YPosValue
RZeroValue
XZeroValue
YZeroValue
AF
(Fixed to 0 (=Ohms Per))
AG
L
OhmsPerLengthValue
AH
L
OhmsPerLengthUnit
AI
(none)
(*): P = Project database, L = Library database
16-13
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Excel to ETAP

e-DPP project database table is DPPElecLoad.
Library database tables are LIBCableIDX and LIBCable.
Column Caption
Equipment ID
No per Phase
Service Type
Description
POWER_REQ
From Bus ID
To Bus ID
Cable Library Data
Unit System
Frequency
Conductor Type
Installation
Cable Voltage (kV)
% Class
Cable Source
Insulation
#/Cable
Cable Size
Library Unit Length
Library Length Unit
Cable Length
Cable Length Unit
Tolerance in %
Cable Impedance per Conductor
Temperature Minimum (C)
Temperature Maximum (C)
Positive R
Positive X
Positive Y
Zero R
Zero X
Zero Y
Impedance Unit
Impedance Unit
Unit Length
Per Length
Comment
Col.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
e-DPP Project / Library Database

(DPPCable / LIBCableIDX & LIBCable)
P/L (*)
Field Name
P
PowerCableID
P
PhaseValue
P
EquipName
(Fixed to "Y")
P
Bus
P
"B-" & ID
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
L
P
L
L
L
P
X
Y
Z
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Standard
Frequency
ConductorType
Installation
CableVoltageNum
VoltageClass
MFRName
CableTypeText (String left to the
first slash /)
NumberOfWires + UnitsOfWire
CabSize
OhmsPerLengthValue
OhmsPerLengthUnit
BaseTempR
LengthValue
(Fixed to 2 (=meter))
(Fixed to 0)
BaseTempR
BaseTempR
RPosValue
XPosValue
YPosValue
RZeroValue
XZeroValue
YZeroValue
AF
(Fixed to 0 (=Ohms Per))
AG
L
OhmsPerLengthValue
AH
L
OhmsPerLengthUnit
AI
(none)
16-14
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Excel to ETAP
VFD
e-DPP project database table is DPPElecLoad. No library database table is referred to.
The field value of EquipType in the table DPPElecLoad is 8.
Column Caption
Equipment ID
POWER_REQ
Service Type
Bus ID
Data Type
Priority
Description
Rating kW
kV
%EFF
Comment
Col.
A
B
C
P/L (*)
P
P
P
e-DPP Project
(DPPElecLoad)
Field Name
ID
(Fixed to "Y")
If ContQty or InterQty = 1 Then
1 (In Service)
Else
0 (Out of Service)
D
P
If Cable is selected Then
DPPCable.ToBus
Else
DPPElecLoad.Bus
E
P
DataType
F
P
Priority
G
P
EquipName
H
P
KW
I
P
KV
J
P
EFF100
K
(none)
MOV
Column Caption
Equipment ID
QUANTITY
POWER_REQ
Bus ID
Col.
A
B
C
D
P/L (*)
P
Data Type
Priority
Initial Status
Service Type
E
F
G
H
P
P
Description
Motor kV
Motor kW
Rated Torque ft-lb
I
J
K
L
P
P
P
P
16-15
e-DPP Project
(DPPElecLoad)
Field Name
ID
(Fixed to 1)
(Fixed to "Y")
DPPCable.ToBus
Else
DPPElecLoad.Bus
DataType
Priority
(Fixed to 1 (=Close))
1 (In Service)
Else
0 (Out of Service)
EquipName
KV
KW
MotorFullLoadTrq
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Excel to ETAP
Column Caption
1-PHASE Y/N
Col.
M
Phase Connection
Closing DF
Opening DF
Throttling DF
Spare DF
%PF
%EFF
FLA
MOV Starting Period - Start %FLA
MOV Starting Period - LR %PF
MOV Starting Period - Start Time
No Load Period - NL %FLA
No Load Period - NL%PF
No Load Period - NL Time
Travelling Period - TP %FLA
Travelling Period - TP %PF
Travelling Period - TP Time
Seating_Unseating - Seat %FLA
Seating_Unseating - Seat %PF
Seating_Unseating - Seat Time
Equipment Cable Library Data
Unit System
Frequency
Conductor Type
Installation
Cable Voltage (kV)
% Class
Cable Source
Insulation
#/Cable
Cable Size
Library Unit Length
Library Length Unit
Cable ID
No per Phase
Cable Length
Cable Length Unit
Cable Temperature Minimum (C)
Cable Temperature Maximum (C)
Comment
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
P/L (*)
P
P
P
P
e-DPP Project
(DPPElecLoad)
Field Name
If PhaseNo = 1 Then
Y
Else
N
(Fixed to "" (blank))
(Fixed to 0)
(Fixed to 0)
(Fixed to 0)
(Fixed to 0)
PF100
EFF100
IFL
(Fixed to 0)
(Fixed to 0)
(Fixed to 0)
(Fixed to 0)
(Fixed to 0)
(Fixed to 0)
(Fixed to 0)
(Fixed to 0)
(Fixed to 0)
(Fixed to 0)
(Fixed to 0)
(Fixed to 0)
AH
(none)
AI
(none)
AJ
(none)
AK
(none)
AL
(none)
AM
(none)
AN
(none)
AO
(none)
AP
(none)
AQ
(none)
AR
(none)
AS
(none)
AT
(none)
AU
(none)
AV
(none)
AW
(none)
AX
(none)
AY
(none)
AZ
(none)
BA
(none)
16-16
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Excel to ETAP
Non Motor Load (Static Load)

Column Caption
Equipment ID
QUANTITY
POWER_REQ
Plant Area
Bus ID
Col.
A
B
C
D
E
P/L (*)
P
Data Type
VFD Y/N
Priority
RUN_INT_SP
F
G
H
I
Service Type
Description
Load Voltage
Load kVA
%PF
1-PHASE Y/N
K
L
M
N
O
P
P
P
P
P
Phase Connection
Cont DF
Inter DF
Spare DF
Delta-Wye-Grd - Connection
Operating Load (kVA)
P
Q
R
S
T
U

Unit System
Frequency
Conductor Type
Installation
Cable Voltage (kV)
% Class
Cable Source
Insulation
#/Cable
Cable Size
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
V
W
X
Y
Z
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
e-DPP Project
(DPPElecLoad)
Field Name
ID
(Fixed to 1)
(Fixed to "Y")
SiteArea
DPPCable.ToBus
Else
DPPElecLoad.Bus
DataType
(Fixed to "N")
Priority
If ContQty = 1 Then C
If InterQty = 1 Then I
If SpareQty = 1 Then S
1 (In Service)
Else
0 (Out of Service)
EquipName
KV
MVA
PF100
If PhaseNo = 1 Then
Y
Else
N
ContDF
InterDF
SpareDF
(Fixed to 0 (=Y)
(Calculated with PercentLoad0 &
MVA)
(none)
(none)
(none)
(none)
(none)
(none)
(none)
(none)
(none)
(none)
16-17
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Excel to ETAP
Column Caption
Library Unit Length
Library Length Unit
Cable ID
No per Phase
Cable Length
Cable Length Unit
Comment
e-DPP Project
(DPPElecLoad)
Col.
P/L (*)
Field Name
AF
(none)
AG
(none)
AH
(none)
AI
(none)
AJ
(none)
AK
(none)
AL
(none)
AM
(none)
AN
(none)
AO
(none)
Heater
Column Caption
Equipment ID
QUANTITY
POWER_REQ
Plant Area
Bus ID
Col.
A
B
C
D
E
P/L (*)
P
Data Type
Priority
RUN_INT_SP
F
G
H
P
P
P
Service Type
Description
Heater Voltage
Heater kW
%PF
1-PHASE Y/N
J
K
L
M
N
P
P
P
P
P
Phase Connection
Cont DF
Inter DF
Spare DF
O
P
Q
R
P
P
P
P
P
16-18
e-DPP Project
(DPPElecLoad)
Field Name
ID
(Fixed to 1)
(Fixed to "Y")
SiteArea
DPPCable.ToBus
Else
DPPElecLoad.Bus
DataType
Priority
1 (In Service)
Else
0 (Out of Service)
EquipName
KV
KW
PF100
If PhaseNo = 1 Then
Y
Else
N
ContDF
InterDF
SpareDF
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Excel to ETAP
Column Caption
Delta-Wye-Grd - Connection
Operating Load (kW)
Unit System
Frequency
Conductor Type
Installation
Cable Voltage (kV)
% Class
Cable Source
Insulation
#/Cable
Cable Size
Library Unit Length
Library Length Unit
Cable ID
No per Phase
Cable Length
Cable Length Unit
Comment
Col.
S
T
P/L (*)
P
e-DPP Project
(DPPElecLoad)
Field Name
(Fixed to 0 (=Y)
BHP
U
(none)
V
(none)
W
(none)
X
(none)
Y
(none)
Z
(none)
AA
(none)
AB
(none)
AC
(none)
AD
(none)
AE
(none)
AF
(none)
AG
(none)
AH
(none)
AI
(none)
AJ
(none)
AK
(none)
AL
(none)
AM
(none)
AN
(none)
3W-Transformer
e-DPP project database table is DPPXFMR. No library database table is referred to.
Column Caption
Equipment ID
QUANTITY
Service Type
Description
POWER_REQ
Primary Bus ID
Secondary Bus ID
Col.
A
B
C
D
E
F
P/L (*)
P
P
P
16-19
e-DPP Project
(DPPXFMR)
Field Name
ID
(Fixed to 1)
EquipmentName
(Fixed to "Y")
If Cable is selected and
CableUse = P or F or TP Then
DPPCable.ToBus
Else
DPPXFMR.PrimaryBus
CableUse = TS Then
DPPCable.FromBus
Else
DPPXFMR.SecondaryBus
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Excel to ETAP
Column Caption
Tertiary Bus ID
Temp Rise
Transformer Primary Rating
Transformer Primary Rating UOM
Primary Voltage
Primary Voltage UOM
Secondary Voltage
Secondary Voltage UOM
Tertiary Voltage
Tertiary Voltage UOM
Secondary Rating
Secondary Rating UOM
Tertiary Rating
Tertiary Rating UOM
Pri-Sec Impedance
Pri-Sec Impedance UOM
Pri-Ter Impedance
Pri-Ter Impedance UOM
Sec-Ter Impedance
Sec-Ter Impedance UOM
Cooling Code
Pri-Sec X/R
Pri-Ter X/R
Sec-Ter X/R
Transformer Max Rating
Basic Impulse Level
e-DPP Project
(DPPXFMR)
Col.
P/L (*)
Field Name
H
P
CableUse = TT Then
DPPCable.FromBus
Else
DPPXFMR.TertiaryBus
I
P
TempRise
J
P
PrimMVA
K
(Fixed to 1 (=kVA))
L
P
PrimkV
M
(Fixed to kV)
N
P
SeckV
O
(Fixed to kV)
P
P
TerkV
Q
(Fixed to kV)
R
P
SecMVA
S
(Fixed to 1 (=kVA))
T
P
TerMVA
U
(Fixed to 1 (=kVA))
V
P
PSPosZ
W
(Fixed to %Z)
X
P
PTPosZ
Y
(Fixed to %Z)
Z
P
STPosZ
AA
(Fixed to %Z)
AB
P
ClassName
AC
P
PSPosXoverR
AD
P
PTPosXoverR
AE
P
STPosXoverR
AF
P
PrimMVA2
AG
P
PrimBIL
2W-Transformer
e-DPP project database table is DPPXFMR. No library database table is referred to.
Column Caption
Equipment ID
QUANTITY
Service Type
Description
POWER_REQ
Primary Bus ID
Col.
A
B
C
D
E
F
P/L (*)
P
P
P
16-20
e-DPP Project
(DPPXFMR)
Field Name
ID
(Fixed to 1)
EquipmentName
(Fixed to "Y")
CableUse = P or F or TP Then
DPPCable.ToBus
Else
DPPXFMR.PrimaryBus
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Excel to ETAP
Column Caption
Secondary Bus ID
Temp Rise
Transformer Primary Rating
Transformer Primary Rating UOM
Primary Voltage
Primary Voltage UOM
Secondary Voltage
Secondary Voltage UOM
Pri-Sec Impedance
Pri-Sec Impedance UOM
Basic Impulse Level
Cooling Code
K Factor
Transformer Max Rating
X/R Ratio
e-DPP Project
(DPPXFMR)
Col.
P/L (*)
Field Name
G
P
CableUse = TS Then
DPPCable.FromBus
Else
DPPXFMR.SecondaryBus
H
P
TempRise
I
P
PrimMVA
J
(Fixed to 1 (=kVA))
K
P
PrimkV
L
(Fixed to kV)
M
P
SeckV
N
(Fixed to kV)
O
P
PSPosZ
P
(Fixed to %Z)
Q
P
PrimBIL
R
P
ClassName
S
(Fixed to (blank))
T
P
PrimMVA2
U
P
PSPosXoverR
Motor
The field value of EquipType in the table DPPElecLoad is 1 or 2.
Note: DC motor (EquipType=3) is not included.
Column Caption
Equipment ID
QUANTITY
POWER_REQ
VFD Y/N
Plant Area
Bus ID
Col.
A
B
C
D
E
F
P/L (*)
P
Data Type
Priority
RUN_INT_SP
G
H
I
P
P
P
Service Type
Description
P
P
16-21
e-DPP Project
(DPPElecLoad)
Field Name
ID
(Fixed to 1)
(Fixed to "Y")
(Fixed to "N")
SiteArea
DPPCable.ToBus
Else
DPPElecLoad.Bus
DataType
Priority
1 (In Service)
Else
0 (Out of Service)
EquipName
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Excel to ETAP
Column Caption
Motor Voltage
Motor kW
Brake kW
1-PHASE Y/N
Col.
L
M
N
O
Phase Connection
Cont DF
Inter DF
Spare DF
%PF 100%
%PF 75%
%PF 50%
%EFF 100%
%EFF 75%
%EFF 50%
% Locked Rotor Current
% Starting PF
Starting Device
Delta-Wye Connection
Grounding Type
Grd Device Amp Rating
Rated RPM
% Slip
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
Service Factor
Stall Time Hot Start
Stall Time Cold Start
Unit System
Frequency
Conductor Type
Installation
Cable Voltage (kV)
% Class
Cable Source
Insulation
#/Cable
Cable Size
Library Unit Length
Library Length Unit
Cable ID
No per Phase
Cable Length
Cable Length Unit
AH
AI
AJ
P/L (*)
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
AK
AL
AM
AN
AO
AP
AQ
AR
AS
AT
AU
AV
AW
AX
AY
AZ
BA
BB
e-DPP Project
(DPPElecLoad)
Field Name
KV
KW
BHP
If PhaseNo = 1 Then
Y
Else
N
ContDF
InterDF
SpareDF
PF100
PF75
PF50
EFF100
EFF75
EFF50
LRC
PFlr
StartType
(Fixed to 0 (=Y))
(Fixed to 0 (=Open))
(Calculated with Poles & Hz)
(Calculated
with
Poles
MachineRpm)
SF
TaHot
TaCold
&
(none)
(none)
(none)
(none)
(none)
(none)
(none)
(none)
(none)
(none)
(none)
(none)
(none)
(none)
(none)
(none)
(none)
(none)
16-22
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Excel to ETAP
Column Caption
Comment
e-DPP Project
(DPPElecLoad)
Col.
P/L (*)
Field Name
BC
(none)
BD
(none)
Bus
e-DPP project database table is DPPBus, DPPCable and DPPElecLoad. No library database
table is referred to.
Column Caption
Equipment ID
POWER_REQ
Bus Voltage
Initial %Voltage
Service Type
Description
Min %DF
Max % DF
ANSI or IEC
Bus Type
Cont Rating (A)
Bracing Symm RMS (kA)
Bracing ASymm RMS (kA)
Bracing Crest (kA)
Bracing peak kA (IEC)
Comment
e-DPP Project
(DPPBus, DPPCable & DPPElecLoad)
Col.
P/L (*)
Field Name
A
P
ID (from DPPBus) or
ToBus (from DPPCable) or
B- + ID (from DPPElecLoad)
B
(Fixed to "Y")
C
P
BusKV (from DPPBus) or
OperationKV (from DPPCable) or
KV (from DPPElecLoad)
D
(Fixed to 100)
E
F
G
(Fixed to 80)
H
(Fixed to 100)
I
P
If e-DPP = 1 (ANSI) Then
0 (ANSI)
Else
1 (IEC) (e-DPP = 0 (IEC) or 2
(JIS))
J
(Fixed to 0 (=Others))
K
(Fixed to 0)
L
(Fixed to 0)
M
(Fixed to 0)
N
(Fixed to 0)
O
(Fixed to 0)
P
(None)
16.2.2 Exporting to Excel Fixed Format

After you select the elements to be exported and click on Export button, if MS Excel file having the
same name already exists the below message will appears:
16-23
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Excel to ETAP
If you click Yes, the export process will start and the below message appears after completion of the
export:
After you click OK button, MS Excel is launched and shows the exported data.
You may modify the generated Excel file as far as you follow Field Mapping Rules specified in
ETAP User Guide chapter 43.3.2.
16-24
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Excel to ETAP
Note:
Other types of equipment which are not listed below are out of scope of ETAP Interface.
VFD
MOV
Non Motor Load (Static load)
Heater
3W-Transformer
2W-Transformer
Motor
If such equipment is included in the electrical load schedule, there will be discrepancies between the
output reports from the options Cable Schedule and Electrical Load Schedule.
For example, if a power capacitor is included in Electrical Load Schedule, the capacitor and its
associate cable will be ignored by the program. On the other hand, if the associate cable exists in
Cable Schedule, it will be exported to MS Excel.
16-25
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
MS Excel to ETAP
16.2.3 Importing to ETAP

ETAP DataX program for importing the generated Excel sheets can be accessed from the ETAP menu
File | Data Exchange | Excel Fixed Format as shown below:
When you select Excel Fixed Format in the popup menu, the below dialog appears:
Select the fixed format Excel file in the section Equipment Data File Name generated by (exported
from) e-DPP by clicking Browse button.
Refer to ETAP User Guide chapter 43.3 for further steps to import the file to ETAP project database.
16-26
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
ReporTAP
16.3 ReporTAP
Please refer to the separate user guide "ReporTAP User Guide".
16-27
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
16.4 Ground Fault Calculation

Please refer to the separate user guide "GFCalc User Guide (Add-On Edition)".
16-28
e-DPP 4.0.2
Tools
SPEL Adaptor
16.5 SPEL Adaptor

Please refer to the separate user guide "SPEL Adaptor User Guide".
<End of Chapter 16>
16-29
e-DPP 4.0.2
Chapter 17
View
View tab contains the commands to control the appearance of screen & windows and show the Project
Editor, Property List and License Manager.
Project Editor provides a special view of the entire project. Templates, Datasheets, and Properties of
every component within this project can be viewed by opening from this editor. Library may also be
open, modified, saved and copied with this editor.
Window group enables you to arrange multiple windows (Project Editor and templates) of different
components and categories listed from the Editor Selection tab.
17-1
e-DPP 4.0.2
View
Project Editor
17.1 Project Editor

The Project Editor is a graphical tree representation that includes templates, datasheets, libraries, and
components associated with your project.
The project tree can be expanded to display items under each component. Clicking a "+" icon (inside a
square) increases the tree expansion, showing more details. Clicking a "" icon (inside a square)
decreases the tree expansion, showing fewer details. Selecting an item by right-clicking it will display
a context-sensitive command menu that allows you to perform actions on the selected item.
Project Filename
Project Components
Right-Click to open the different
Templates of the following components
See Fig. 1
Library Path & Filename

Right-Click to Open, Save
and Save As libraries.
Project Component
Electrical Load
Note: The number corresponding to
the project components are total items
for that component
Project Component Items

Right-Click to open the different
Templates, Datasheets, and Property
Lists of the following component items
See Fig. 1
Fig. 1
Note:
1. Datasheets may only be available for some component items.
2. List of templates shown are dependent to the component item
that was selected.
17-2
e-DPP 4.0
View
Project Editor
Template
Project Editor can be used to open a template. However, the component selected from the Project
Editor will be used as a filter type for the items that will be shown on the template. In the image below
for example, induction motor component was selected on the Project Editor and all induction motor
items were displayed on that template.
Note:
The same template can not be opened simultaneously. For example, when " Electrical Load Schedule
(Form-1)" is opened containing "filtered induction motors", it should be closed first before opening the
same template with "filtered static loads" on it.
Electrical Load Schedule (Form-1) template containing filtered Induction Motors
Datasheet
In datasheet, an electrical equipment or materials are presented in one sheet. To open datasheet,
Right-click a component item (i.e. induction motor item tag "AM-2001") on the Project Editor and
select [Datasheet]. With the Data Sheet Viewer, you can edit all parameters. However, those
changes will not be saved on the database. (Note: The same headers as of MS Excel may be shown as
mentioned below for convenient editing.)
17-3
e-DPP 4.0
View
Project Editor
Induction Motor Datasheet
Preview
Click "Preview" button to show image below. As shown, users may zoom and print the selected
datasheet. Printer setting can be modified by clicking setup button.
Show Header
Click "Show Header" button to show the row and column header of the selected datasheet.
Hide Header
Click "Hide Header" button to hide the row and column header of the selected datasheet. (Note: Hide
header button is disabled if indicating that headers for both row and column are hidden.
Close
Click "Close" button to exit from the Data Sheet Viewer.
17-4
e-DPP 4.0
View
Property List
17.2 Property List

The Property List displays all the categories with the corresponding fields retrieved from the database.
In this window, it is convenient to modify properties for a certain component items since all the fields
are listed and arrangement in categories or alphabetically is possible.
The properties in categories can be expanded to display the items under each component. Clicking a
"+" icon (inside a square) increases the tree expansion, showing more details. Clicking a "" icon
(inside a square) decreases the tree expansion, showing fewer details.
In the User Options menu (See chapter 16 "Tools Menu"), User is allowed to switch whether ID (&
related fields) and inherited fields can be edited on Property List. The fields that are not allowed to
edit are shown in gray color.
Component Item Tag
Component Item Properties

Fields are listed in a Category view.
User may view these fields in an
alphabetical order.
Property Information
Information regarding the selected
property of the component item is
displayed in this area.
Item List
Item under a component highlighted
from the Project Editor can be selected
from this pull down menu. Upon
selection, all properties of this item will
be displayed.
17-5
e-DPP 4.0
View
Property List
Categorized icon
Click
icon to arrange the fields by categories.
Alphabetical icon
Click
icon to arrange the fields alphabetically.
Lock icon
Click
icon to lock all the active fields in the Property List.
Unlock icon
Click
icon to unlock all the active fields in the Property List.
Backward arrow
Click
button to display the previous item of a selected component from the Project Editor with
its corresponding properties.
Forward arrow
Click
button to display the previous item of a selected component from the Project Editor with
its corresponding properties.
Save button
Click "Save" button to save all the changes made on the Property List.
Close button
Click "Close" button to exit Property List dialog.
17-6
e-DPP 4.0
View
Status Bar
17.3 Status Bar

Status bar is indicated at the bottom of e-DPP screen and consist of 5 panes as shown below:
Indicates a help line message for a

command where the mouse cursor
is currently located.
Default string is e-DPP version
(e.g. e-DPP 4.0.0)
Indicates a currently active project
name and login user name.
Indicates a title of editor template
when a spreadsheet style editor is
opened.
Indicates the status of key locks.
CAP = Caps Lock ON
NUM = Num Lock ON
SCRL = Scroll Lock ON
Resize gripper
When user wants to resize the
entire e-DPP screen, this gripper is
used.
1st Pane
2nd Pane
3rd Pane
4th Pane
5th Pane
17-7
e-DPP 4.0
View
Window
17.4 Window
Cascade windows
Use this command to arrange multiple opened windows in an overlapped fashion.
Tile-Vertical
Use this command to tiled-vertically arrange multiple opened windows in a non-overlapped
(side-by-side) fashion.
17-8
e-DPP 4.0
View
Window
Tile-Horizontal
Use this command to tiled-horizontally arrange multiple opened windows in a non-overlapped
(side-by-side) fashion.
Switch windows
Use this command to list currently opened windows and switch to another window from an active one.
17-9
e-DPP 4.0
View
License Manager
17.5 License Manager

Search an available network key and retrieve the license information stored in it.
The retrieved information is indicated in the dialog below.
Server
Configuration
This field indicates either "Network" or "Stand-Alone" depending on the license type of user's
key.
Server Name
This field indicates the name of server where the WIBU USB key is plugged. If the type of
license is "Stand-Alone", it indicates "Local".
License
Module Name
This field indicates the name of all the program modules that e-DPP provides.
No. of Users
Total:
Connected:
The total number of licenses provided for this program module.

The number of users who are currently using this program module.
17-10
e-DPP 4.0
View
License Manager
Free:
The number of licenses up to that additional users can use

this program module.
<End of Chapter 17>
17-11
e-DPP 4.0
Appendix-I
Database Field Descriptions
The database fields that you can access in e-DPP are tabulated here with their field types and
descriptions.
You will need to refer to the database fields for;
Template Design
Filter, Sort and Page Feed Condition in Edit Forms
RevControl - Revision List
of the following 11 tables;

No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Purpose
Project Record
Revision Data
Cable Schedule
Switchgear/MCC Schedule
Bus List
Switchboard List
Local Control Station
Lumped Load List
Lumped Motor List
Transformer Schedule
<LEGEND>
Field Type
1
Yes/No
2
Byte
3
Integer
4
Long
6
Single
Table Name
DPPProjectRec
RevData
DPPElecLoad
DPPCable
DPPSwgrMcc
DPPBus
DPPPanel
DPPLCS
DPPLump
DPPLumpMotor
DPPXFMR
Data Type
Yes/No
Byte
Number
Number
Number
7
8
10
12
App - I - 1
Location
Schedule
Datasheet
Header
Header
Body
Body
Body
Body
Body
Body
Body
Body
Body
Any
Any
Any
Any
Any
Any
Any
Any
Any
Any
Any
Field Type
Double
Date
Text
Memo
Data Type
Number
Date/Time
Text
Memo
e-DPP 4.0.2
Project Record (DPPProjectRec)
1. Project Record (DPPProjectRec)

No.
Field Name
Data
Type
1.
Altitude
Number
2.
AverageTemp
Number
3.
BTDCableEntryType
Text
4.
CableStandard
Number
5.
CableUnits
Number
6.
CableUpdate
Date/Time
7.
CabVoltageDC
8.
Length
Description
(Selection Values, Default Value with *)
Site altitude from sea level (m)
0, 1000 (*)
Average ambient air temperature (deg. C)
10
Type of cable entry for bearing temperature detector

"M" (*), "NPT", "PG","PF", "ET", [blank]
Applicable cable standard
0: IEC (*), 1: ANSI, 2 : JIS
Units of length (ft, mile, m, km), weight (lbs, kg) and size
(mm2, AWG) for cables
0: Metric (*), 1: English
Data/Time of DPPCable updated lastly
Text
20
CabVoltageHV1
Text
20
9.
CabVoltageHV2
Text
20
10.
CabVoltageLV1Ph
Text
20
11.
CabVoltageLV3Ph1
Text
20
12.
CabVoltageLV3Ph2
Text
20
Cable rated low voltage-1phase

<[CableStandard]="IEC">
Default="0.6/1KV"
<[CableStandard]="ANSI" >
Default="1KV"
<[CableStandard]="JIS">
Default="600V"
Cable rated high voltage no.1
Default=blank
Default=blank
Default=blank
Cable rated high voltage no.2
Default="8.7/15KV"
Default="15KV"
Default="11KV"
Default="0.6/1KV"
Default="1KV"
Default="600V"
Default="0.6/1KV"
Default="1KV"
Default="600V"
Default="0.6/1KV"
Default="1KV"
Default="600V"
App - I - 2
e-DPP 4.0.2

No.
Field Name
Data
Type

Length
Description
13.
CabVoltageMV1
Text
20
14.
CabVoltageMV2
Text
20
15.
CCRCableEntryType
Text
10
16.
Consultant
Text
50
Cable rated medium voltage no.1

Default="6/10KV"
Default="10KV"
Default="6.6KV"
Cable rated medium voltage no.2
Default="3.6/6KV"
Default="5KV"
Default="3.3KV"
Type of CCR cable entry
Name of consultant
17.
Contract
Text
30
Official contract no.
18.
Contractor
Text
50
Name of contractor
19.
CoolingWaterTemp
Number
Cooling water temperature (deg. C)
20.
CorrosionProtection
Yes/No
21.
Country
Text
20
Corrosion protection
Yes: Required (*), No: Not required
Name of country of plant site
22.
Customer
Text
50
Name of customer
23.
DataRevs
Number
(For ETAP interface)
24.
ELoadUpdate
Date/Time
Data/Time of DPPElecload updated lastly
25.
Engineer
Text
26.
Frequency
Number
27.
FreqVariationDC
28.
30
Name of engineer
Text
10
Power frequency (Hz)

50 (*), 60
Not used
FreqVariationHV1
Text
10
29.
FreqVariationHV2
Text
10
Frequency variation for HV-1

"+-0.5%", "+-1.0%", "+-1.5%", "+-2.0%", "+-2.5%", "+-3.0%",
"+-4.0%", "+-5.0%" (*), <blank>
Same for HV-2
30.
FreqVariationLV1Ph
Text
10
Same for LV (1phase)
31.
FreqVariationLV3Ph1
Text
10
Same for LV-1 (3phase)
32.
FreqVariationLV3Ph2
Text
10
33.
FreqVariationMV1
Text
10
Same for MV-1
34.
FreqVariationMV2
Text
10
Same for MV-2
35.
GasGroup
Text
10
Gas group (=Enclosure group)

<Standard=IEC>
II, IIA, IIB (*), IIC, [blank]
<Standard=ANSI>
A, B, C, D (*), [blank]
App - I - 3
e-DPP 4.0.2

No.
Field Name
Data
Type
36.
HazardAreaClass
Text
37.
HP_KW
Number
38.
IID
Number
39.
Issue
Number
40.
JobNo
41.

Length
Description
20
Hazardous area classification

<Standard=IEC>
Zone 0, Zone 1, Zone 2 (*)
<Standard=ANSI>
Class I Div 1, Class I Div 2 (*)
Unit of output power
0: HP, 1: kW (*)
ETAP internal key ID
Link to INTProjectRec [IID]
Text
20
Contractors job no.
LCSCableEntryType
Text
10
42.
LCSUpdate
Date/Time
Type of LCS cable entry

Data/Time of DPPLCS updated lastly
43.
LibFullPath
Text
255
Full path of assigned library database file
44.
LightingPhase
Text
10
45.
LightingVolt
Number
46.
Location
Text
No. of Phase for Lighting Power

"1ph" (*), "3ph"
Voltage for Lighting Power
<LightingPhase="1ph">
100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 220 (*), 230, 235, 240, 250, [blank]
<LightingPhase="3ph">
380, 400, 415 (*), 435, 440, 460, 480, [blank]
Location of plant site
47.
MaxDesignTemp
Number
Maximum design temperature (deg. C)
48.
MaxHumidity
Number
49.
MaxKWforDC
Number
50.
MaxKWforHV1
Number
51.
MaxKWforHV2
Number
52.
MaxKWforLV1Ph
Number
53.
MaxKWforLV3Ph1
Number
54.
MaxKWforLV3Ph2
Number
55.
MaxKWforMV1
Number
56.
MaxKWforMV2
Number
57.
MaxStorageTemp
Number
Maximum relative humidity (%)

85 (*)
Maximum motor output for DC voltage in designated unit by
HP_KW
Maximum motor output for high voltage-1 (HV1) in designated
unit by HP_KW
Maximum motor output for high voltage-2 (HV2) in designated
unit by HP_KW
Maximum motor output for low voltage-1phase (LV) in
designated unit by HP_KW
2 (*)
Maximum motor output for low voltage-1 3phase (LV) in
160 (*)
Maximum motor output for low voltage-2 3phase (LV) in
Maximum motor output for medium voltage-1 (MV1) in
Maximum motor output for medium voltage-2 (MV2) in
Maximum temperature during storage (deg. C)
58.
MaxTemp
Number
Maximum ambient air temperature (deg. C)
59.
MaxTransportTemp
Number
Maximum temperature during transportation (deg. C)
60.
MinDesignTemp
Number
Minimum design temperature (deg. C)
61.
MinKWforDC
Number
Minimum motor output for DC voltage in designated unit by

HP_KW
30
App - I - 4
e-DPP 4.0.2

No.
Field Name
Data
Type
62.
MinKWforHV1
Number
63.
MinKWforHV2
Number
64.
MinKWforLV1Ph
Number
65.
MinKWforLV3Ph1
Number
66.
MinKWforLV3Ph2
Number
67.
MinKWforMV1
Number
68.
MinKWforMV2
Number
69.
MinTemp
Number
70.
MotorStandard
Number
71.
MotVoltageDC
Number
72.
MotVoltageHV1
Number
73.
MotVoltageHV2
Number
74.
MotVoltageLV1Ph
Number
75.
MotVoltageLV3Ph1
Number
76.
MotVoltageLV3Ph2
Number
77.
MotVoltageMV1
Number
78.
MotVoltageMV2
Number
79.
NGAmpDC
Number
80.
NGAmpHV1
Number
81.
NGAmpHV2
Number
82.
NGAmpLV1Ph
Number
83.
NGAmpLV3Ph1
Number
84.
NGAmpLV3Ph2
Number
85.
NGAmpMV1
Number
86.
NGAmpMV2
Number

Length
Description
Minimum motor output for high voltage-1 (HV1) in designated
unit by HP_KW
Minimum motor output for high voltage-2 (HV2) in designated
unit by HP_KW
Minimum motor output for low voltage-1phase (LV) in
0 (*)
Minimum motor output for low voltage-1 3phase (LV) in
0 (*)
Minimum motor output for low voltage-2 3phase (LV) in
Minimum motor output for medium voltage-1 (MV1) in
Minimum motor output for medium voltage-2 (MV2) in
Minimum ambient air temperature (deg. C)
Applicable motor standard
0: IEC (*), 1: ANSI, 2: JIS
Motor rated low voltage-DC (kV)
0.25, 0.24, 0.235, 0.23, 0.22 (*), 0.2, 0.12, 0.115, 0.11, 0.1
[blank]
Motor rated high voltage no.1 (kV)
34.5, 33, 30, 24.5, 24, 23, 22, 13.8, 13.2, 12, 11.5, 11, 6.9, 6.6,
6.3, 6, 4.16, 4.0, 3.8, 3.6, 3.45, 3.3, 3, 2.4, [blank] (*)
Motor rated high voltage no.2 (kV)
34.5, 33, 30, 24.5, 24, 23, 22, 13.8, 13.2, 12, 11.5, 11 (*), 6.9,
6.6, 6.3, 6, 4.16, 4.0, 3.8, 3.6, 3.45, 3.3, 3, 2.4, [blank]
Motor rated low voltage-1phase (kV)
0.25, 0.24, 0.235, 0.23, 0.22 (*), 0.2, 0.12, 0.115, 0.11, 0.1
[blank]
1.0, 0.6, 0.48, 0.46, 0.44, 0.435, 0.415, 0.4 (*), 0.38, 0.25, 0.24,
0.235, 0.23, 0.22, 0.2, [blank]
1.0, 0.6, 0.46, 0.44, 0.435, 0.415, 0.4, 0.38, 0.25, 0.24, 0.235,
0.23, 0.22, 0.2, [blank] (*)
Motor rated medium voltage no.1 (kV)
34.5, 33, 30, 24.5, 24, 23, 22, 13.8, 13.2, 12, 11.5, 11, 6.9, 6.6
(*), 6.3, 6, 4.16, 4.0, 3.8, 3.6, 3.45, 3.3, 3, 2.4, [blank]
Motor rated medium voltage no.2 (kV)
24.5, 24, 23, 22, 13.8, 13.2, 12, 11.5, 11, 6.9, 6.6, 6.3, 6, 4.16,
4.0, 3.8, 3.6, 3.45, 3.3 (*), 3, 2.4, [blank]
Not used
Current of neutral grounding resister for HV-1 in amperes
5, 10, 20, 50, 100 (*), 200, 400, <blank>
When [NGtypeHV1] is "Open" or "Solid", this field is disabled.
Same for HV-2
5, 10, 20, 50, 100 (*), 200, 400, <blank>
5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 400, <blank> (*)
5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 400, <blank> (*)
5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 400, <blank> (*)
Same for MV-1
5, 10, 20, 50, 100 (*), 200, 400, <blank>
Same for MV-2
5, 10, 20, 50, 100 (*), 200, 400, <blank>
App - I - 5
e-DPP 4.0.2

No.
Field Name
Data
Type

Length
Description
87.
NGSecDC
Number
Not used
88.
NGSecHV1
Number
89.
NGSecHV2
Number
90.
NGSecLV1Ph
Number
91.
NGSecLV3Ph1
Number
92.
NGSecLV3Ph2
Number
93.
NGSecMV1
Number
94.
NGSecMV2
Number
95.
NGTypeDC
Text
10
Duration of fault current flow through neutral grounding resister

for HV-1 in seconds
5, 10 (*), 20, 30, <blank>
When [NGtypeHV1] is "Open" or "Solid", this field is disabled.
Same for HV-2
5, 10 (*), 20, 30, <blank>
5, 10, 20, 30, <blank> (*)
5, 10, 20, 30, <blank> (*)
5, 10, 20, 30, <blank> (*)
Same for MV-1
5, 10 (*), 20, 30, <blank>
Same for MV-2
5, 10 (*), 20, 30, <blank>
Not used
96.
NGTypeHV1
Text
10
97.
NGTypeHV2
Text
10
98.
NGTypeLV1Ph
Text
10
99.
NGTypeLV3Ph1
Text
10
100.
NGTypeLV3Ph2
Text
10
Type of neutral grounding system for LV (1phase)

"Open" (*), "Solid", "Resistor", "Reactor", <blank>
Type of neutral grounding system for LV-1 (3phase)
"Open", "Solid" (*), "Resistor", "Reactor", <blank>
101.
NGTypeMV1
Text
10
Same for MV-1
102.
NGTypeMV2
Text
10
Same for MV-2
103.
PlantName
Text
50
Name of plant
104.
PowerCableEntryType
Text
10
105.
ProjectCode
Text
10
Type of power cable entry

Code (abbreviation) of project
106.
ProjectFile
Text
30
107.
ProjectTitle
Text
30
108.
Revision
Number
109.
SCCAmpDC
Number
Not used
110.
SCCAmpHV1
Number
Short circuit current for HV-1in kA
111.
SCCAmpHV2
Number
Same for HV-2
112.
SCCAmpLV1Ph
Number
113.
SCCAmpLV3Ph1
Number
114.
SCCAmpLV3Ph2
Number
Type of neutral grounding system for HV-1

"Open", "Solid", "Resistor" (*), "Reactor", <blank>
Same for HV-2
ETAP project file name

INT MDB name = "INT"+ProjectFile+".mdb"
DPP MDB name = "DPP"+ProjectFile+".mdb"
Project title
App - I - 6
e-DPP 4.0.2

No.
Field Name
Data
Type

Length
Description
115.
SCCAmpMV1
Number
Same for MV-1
116.
SCCAmpMV2
Number
Same for MV-2
117.
SCCkVDC
Number
Not used
118.
SCCkVHV1
Number
119.
SCCkVHV2
Number
120.
SCCkVLV1Ph
Number
121.
SCCkVLV3Ph1
Number
122.
SCCkVLV3Ph2
Number
123.
SCCkVMV1
Number
124.
SCCkVMV2
Number
125.
SeismicFactor
Text
10
126.
SHCableEntryType
Text
10
127.
SpaceHeaterPhase
Text
10
128.
SpaceHeaterVolt
Number
129.
Standard
Number
130.
SunlightProtection
Yes/No
131.
SwgrUpdate
Date/Time
Base voltage of [SCCAmpHV1] in kV

230, 220, 215, 176, 132, 115 (*), 77, 72, 69, 66, 36, 34.5, 33, 30,
24.5, 24, 23, 22, 15, 13.8, 13.2, 12, 11.5, 11, 7.2, 6.9, 6.6, 6.3, 6,
4.8, 4.16, 4.0, 3.8, 3.6, 3.45, 3.3, 3, 2.4, [blank]
Default is [SysVoltageHV1]
Base voltage of [SCCAmpHV2] in kV
176, 132, 115, 77, 72, 69, 66, 36, 34.5, 33, 30, 24.5, 24, 23, 22,
15, 13.8, 13.2, 12, 11.5 (*), 11, 7.2, 6.9, 6.6, 6.3, 6, 4.8, 4.16,
4.0, 3.8, 3.6, 3.45, 3.3, 3, 2.4, [blank]
Default is [SysVoltageHV2]
Base voltage of [SCCAmpLV1Ph] in kV
1.0, 0.6, 0.25, 0.24 (*), 0.235, 0.23, 0.22, 0.2, 0.12, 0.115, 0.11,
0.1 [blank]
Default is [SysVoltageLV1Ph]
Base voltage of [SCCAmpLV3Ph1] in kV
1.0, 0.6 (*), 0.48, 0.46, 0.44, 0.435, 0.415, 0.4, 0.38, 0.25, 0.24,
0.235, 0.23, 0.22, 0.2, [blank]
Default is [SysVoltageLV3Ph1]
Base voltage of [SCCAmpLV3Ph2] in kV
1.0, 0.6, 0.46, 0.44, 0.435, 0.415, 0.4, 0.38, 0.25, 0.24, 0.235,
0.23, 0.22, 0.2, [blank] (*)
Default is [SysVoltageLV3Ph2]
Base voltage of [SCCAmpMV1] in kV
36, 34.5, 33, 30, 24.5, 24, 23, 22, 15, 13.8, 13.2, 12, 11.5, 11,
7.2, 6.9, 6.6 (*), 6.3, 6, 4.8, 4.16, 4.0, 3.8, 3.6, 3.45, 3.3, 3, 2.4,
[blank]
Default is [SysVoltageMV1]
Base voltage of [SCCAmpMV2] in kV
24.5, 24, 23, 22, 15, 13.8, 13.2, 12, 11.5, 11, 7.2, 6.9, 6.6, 6.3, 6,
4.8, 4.16, 4.0, 3.8, 3.6, 3.45 (*), 3.3, 3, 2.4, [blank]
Default is [SysVoltageMV2]
Seismic factor
<IEC>
Disabled
<ANSI>
"Zone 1", "Zone2", "Zone 3", "Zone 4", "Zone 5",
"Zone 6", "Zone 7"
<JIS>
"0.5G", "1.0G", "1.5G", "3G"
Type of space heater cable entry
No. of Phase for Space Heater Power
"1ph" (*), "3ph"
Voltage for Space Heater Power
<SpaceHeaterPhase="1ph">
100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 220 (*), 230, 235, 240, 250, [blank]
380, 400 (*), 415, 435, 440, 460, 480, [blank]
Applicable standard
0: IEC (*), 1: ANSI, 2: JIS
Direct sunlight protection
Yes: Required, No: Not required (*)
Data/Time of DPPSwgrMcc updated lastly
App - I - 7
e-DPP 4.0.2

No.
Field Name
Data
Type

Length
Description
132.
SysVoltageDC
Number
133.
SysVoltageHV1
Number
134.
SysVoltageHV2
Number
135.
SysVoltageLV1Ph
Number
136.
SysVoltageLV3Ph1
Number
137.
SysVoltageLV3Ph2
Number
138.
SysVoltageMV1
Number
139.
SysVoltageMV2
Number
140.
TempClass
Text
141.
TropicalTreatment
Yes/No
142.
Units
Number
143.
VoltVariationDC
Text
10
144.
VoltVariationHV1
Text
10
145.
VoltVariationHV2
Text
10
Voltage variation for HV-1

"+-1%", "+-2%", "+-3%", "+-4%", "+-5%", "+-6%", "+-7%",
"+-8%", "+-10%" (*), <blank>
Same for HV-2
146.
VoltVariationLV1Ph
Text
10
147.
VoltVariationLV3Ph1
Text
10
148.
VoltVariationLV3Ph2
Text
10
149.
VoltVariationMV1
Text
10
Same for MV-1
150.
VoltVariationMV2
Text
10
Same for MV-2
151.
WireSystemDC
Number
Not used
152.
WireSystemHV1
Number
153.
WireSystemHV2
Number
Number of wires for HV-1 circuit system

3 (*), 4
Same for HV-2
154.
WireSystemLV1Ph
Number
155.
WireSystemLV3Ph1
Number
Number of wires for LV (1phase) circuit system

2 (*), 3
156.
WireSystemLV3Ph2
Number
157.
WireSystemMV1
Number
Same for MV-1
10
Nominal system DC voltage (kV)

0.25, 0.24, 0.235, 0.23, 0.22 (*), 0.2, 0.12, 0.115, 0.11, 0.1
[blank]
Nominal system high voltage no.1 (kV)
230, 220, 215, 176, 132, 115 (*), 77, 69, 66, 34.5, 33, 30, 24.5,
24, 23, 22, 13.8, 13.2, 12, 11.5, 11, 6.9, 6.6, 6.3, 6, 4.16, 4.0, 3.8,
3.6, 3.45, 3.3, 3, 2.4, [blank]
Nominal system high voltage no.2 (kV)
176, 132, 115, 77, 69, 66, 34.5, 33, 30, 24.5, 24, 23, 22, 13.8,
13.2, 12, 11.5 (*), 11, 6.9, 6.6, 6.3, 6, 4.16, 4.0, 3.8, 3.6, 3.45,
3.3, 3, 2.4, [blank]
Nominal system low voltage-1phase (kV)
0.25, 0.24, 0.235, 0.23, 0.22 (*), 0.2, 0.12, 0.115, 0.11, 0.1
[blank]
Nominal system low voltage no.1-3phase (kV)
1.0, 0.6, 0.48, 0.46, 0.44, 0.435, 0.415 (*), 0.4, 0.38, [blank]
Nominal system low voltage no.2-3phase (kV)
1.0, 0.6, 0.46, 0.44, 0.435, 0.415, 0.4, 0.38, [blank] (*)
Nominal system medium voltage no.1 (kV)
34.5, 33, 30, 24.5, 24, 23, 22, 13.8, 13.2, 12, 11.5, 11, 6.9 (*),
6.6, 6.3, 6, 4.16, 4.0, 3.8, 3.6, 3.45, 3.3, 3, 2.4, [blank]
Nominal system medium voltage no.2 (kV)
24.5, 24, 23, 22, 13.8, 13.2, 12, 11.5, 11, 6.9, 6.6, 6.3, 6, 4.16,
4.0, 3.8, 3.6, 3.45 (*), 3.3, 3, 2.4, [blank]
Temperature class
T1, T2, T3 (*), T4, T5, T6
Tropical treatment
Yes: Required, No: Not required (*)
Unit used for overall project
0: Metric (*), 1: English
Same for DC
App - I - 8
e-DPP 4.0.2

No.
Field Name
Data
Type
158.
WireSystemMV2
Number
159.
WTDCableEntryType
Text

Length
Description
Same for MV-2
10
Type of cable entry for winding temperature detector

App - I - 9
e-DPP 4.0.2
Revision Data (RevData)
2. Revision Data (RevData)

No.
Data
Type
Field Name
Length
Description
Name (Initial) of person who approved this document
(template) indicated in the bottom line of data sheet
(template) indicated in the second line from bottom of
data sheet
(template) indicated in the third line from bottom of
data sheet
(template) indicated in the forth line from bottom of
data sheet
(Spare field)
1.
ApprovedBy1
Text
15
2.
ApprovedBy2
Text
15
3.
ApprovedBy3
Text
15
4.
ApprovedBy4
Text
15
5.
ApprovedBy5
Text
15
6.
CheckedBy1
Text
15
7.
CheckedBy2
Text
15
8.
CheckedBy3
Text
15
9.
CheckedBy4
Text
15
10.
CheckedBy5
Text
15
11.
CurrentRevNo
Text
12.
DocumentNo
Text
30
13.
MadeBy1
Text
15
14.
MadeBy2
Text
15
15.
MadeBy3
Text
15
16.
MadeBy4
Text
15
17.
MadeBy5
Text
15
Name (Initial) of person who made this document

data sheet
data sheet
data sheet
(Spare field)
18.
OfficialRevNo
Text
The latest official revision no. (Number only)
19.
RevDate1
Date
Revision date indicated in the bottom line of data sheet
20.
RevDate2
Date
21.
RevDate3
Date
22.
RevDate4
Date
23.
RevDate5
Date
Revision date indicated in the second line from bottom

of data sheet
Revision date indicated in the third line from bottom of
data sheet
Revision date indicated in the forth line from bottom of
data sheet
(Spare field)
Name (Initial) of person who checked this document

data sheet
data sheet
data sheet
(Spare field)
The latest revision no. whichever the date of official and
internal revision is the latest
(Number or alphabets)
Document no. corresponding each template
App - I - 10
e-DPP 4.0.2

No.
Data
Type
Field Name
Revision Data (RevData)

Length
Description
Revision description indicated in the bottom line of data
sheet
24.
RevDescription1
Text
255
25.
RevDescription2
Text
255
26.
RevDescription3
Text
255
27.
RevDescription4
Text
255
28.
RevDescription5
Text
255
29.
RevNo1
Text
30.
RevNo2
Text
31.
RevNo3
Text
32.
RevNo4
Text
33.
RevNo5
Text
Revision description indicated in the second line from

bottom of data sheet
Revision description indicated in the third line from
Revision description indicated in the forth line from
(Spare field)
Revision no indicated in the bottom line of data sheet
Always "0" or blank
Revision no indicated in the second line from bottom of
data sheet
Revision no indicated in the third line from bottom of
data sheet
Revision no indicated in the forth line from bottom of
data sheet
(Spare field)
App - I - 11
e-DPP 4.0.2
3. Electrical Load Schedule (DPPElecLoad)

No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
1 FinalData
1 "Yes" This record is fixed and not allowed to update any data except this field itself.
2 Mismatch
1 Used in Load Summary - Contents editor.

When load rated voltage does not match system voltage, this flag comes Yes (True)
3 IID
8 ETAP internal key ID.
4 Revision
5 DataRevs
6 Issue
7 FromETAP
1 "Yes" for a record come from ETAP
8 EquipType
2 0: IM (*), 1: SM, 2: MOV, 3: DCM,

4: Static load, 5: Capacitor, 6: Lumped load, 7: UPS,
8: VFD, 9: Charger
9 MotorLibID
10
50 ID to accessed motor library table LIBMotor
10 ID
10
26 Equipment ID (Equipment ID, e.g. "PM-1200A")
11 IDbody
10
26 Body of load ID by removing suffix if any. (e.g. "PM-1200")
12 IDsuffix
10
13 IDAllsuffixes
10
14 EquipName
10
2 Suffix of load ID (e.g. "A")

10 Merged suffix string for more than one identical equipment (e.g. "A/C" for 3)
100 Name of driven equipment (e.g. "Booster pump for H2 reactor A-1")
15 ContQty
2 Number of required / Continuous Load
16 InterQty
2 Number of required / Intermittent Load
17 SpareQty
2 Number of required / Spare Load
18 Quantity
8 Number of identical equipment (Not used)
19 ContDF
8 Demand factor of continuous load (%)
20 InterDF
8 Demand factor of intermittent load (%)

1/13 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
21 SpareDF
8 Demand factor of spare load (%)
22 HP_KW
8 0: HP, 1: kW (*), 2: kVA, 3: kvar

(3 (kvar) may be selected for EquipType=5 only)
23 HP
8 Output power or capacity in the unit specified by HP_KW
24 KW
8 Output power or capacity (kW) calculated from HP
25 Poles
8 Number of poles (Even number only). 2, 4 (*), 6, 8, [blank]
26 KV
8 Equipment rated voltage (kV)
27 PhaseNo
10
10 Number of phase. "3": 3phase(*), "1": 1phase, "DC": Direct current
28 DutyRating
10
20 Duty rating of motor

"Cont"(*), "15min", "30min", [blank]
29 Rotation
10
30 StartType
31 SpeedControl
10
5 Direction of motor rotation viewed from shaft end

"CW"(*), "CCW", "REV"
8 Type of motor start. 0: DOL (*), 1: Auto-xfrm, 2: Resistor, 3: Reactor,
4: Capacitor-Bus, 5: Capacitor-Terminal, 6: VFD,
7: Y-D
20 Speed control for motor
"C": Constant (*), "R": Reversible, "V": Variable,
"M": Multi-Speed, "P": Pole-Change, [blank]
32 Noise
8 Allowable Noise Level in dBA at 1meter and at full load

85(*)
33 SF
8 Service factor (1.0-1.25)
34 HotStart
2 Allowable number of hot starts

1 (*)
35 ColdStart
2 Allowable number of cold starts

2 (*)
36 TypeMotor
10
20 Type of motor. "IM"(*), "SM", "MOV", "DCM", "Canned", "Geared", "IG", [blank]
37 EnclosureType
10
20 Type of motor enclosure

"TEFC"(*), "TENV", "CACA", "CACW", [blank]
2/13 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
38 Location
10
20 Installation location of equipment

"OD": Outdoor (*), "ID": Indoor, [blank]
39 DegreeProtection
10
20 Degree of protection
<IEC>
"IP44", "IP54"(*), "IP55", "IPW44", "IPW54", "IPW55",
[blank]
<ANSI>
"NEMA 3", "NEMA 3R", "NEMA 3S", "NEMA 4"(*),
"NEMA 4X", "NEMA 5", [blank]
40 MountDirection
10
20 Mounting direction
"H": Horizontal" (*), "V": Vertical, [blank]
41 MountBase
10
20 Mounting base
"Foot" (*), "Flange", "Skirt", [blank]
42 MountForm
10
20 Mounting form
"IM1001" (*), "IM1011", "IM1031", "IM3001", "IM3011", "IM3031", [blank]
43 ExpProtection
10
20 Explosion protection
<IEC>
"Exd" (*), "Exp", "Exq", "Exo", "Exe", "Exia", "Exib", "Exs", "Exn", "Type N", [blank]
<ANSI>
(Disabled)
<JIS>
"d", "e" (*), "f", "I", "ia", "ib", "o", "s", [blank]
44 ExpClass
10
20 Explosion class
<IEC>
II, IIA, IIB (*), IIC, [blank]
<ANSI>
A, B, C, D (*), [blank]
<JIS>
1, 2, 3a, 3b (*), 3c, 3n
45 ExpTemp
10
20 Explosion temperature
<IEC>
"T1", "T2", "T3" (*), "T4", "T5", "T6", [blank]
<ANSI>
"T1", "T2", "T2A", "T2B", "T2C", "T2D",
"T3" (*), "T3A", "T3B, "T3C", "T4", "T4A",
"T5", "T6", [blank]
<JIS>
"G1", "G2", "G3" (*), "G4", "G5"
3/13 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
46 InsulationClass
10
10 Insulation class
"A": 105, "E": 120, "B": 130, "F": 155(*),
"H": 180, "C": over 180
47 InsulationTemp
10
10 Temperature rise of insulation

"A": 60, "E": 75, "B": 80, "F": 100 (*), "H": 125
48 Cooling
10
10 Code of cooling method

"IC4A1A1" (*), "IC4A1A0", "IC6A1A1", "IC8A1W7",
[blank]
49 MFRName
10
25 Manufacturer name of electrical equipment (Not driven load)
50 SupplierName
10
25 Supplier name of electrical equipment (Not driven load)
51 LoadSupplier
10
20 Supplier name of driven load
52 FrameNo
10
20 Motor frame number
53 Weight
8 Motor weight (kg)
54 SpaceHeater
1 Space heater for motor body required or not

<KV greater than 1.0>
SpaceHeater=DPPMotorDefault [SpaceHeaterHV]
<KV equal or less than 1.0>
SpaceHeater=DPPMotorDefault [SpaceHeaterLV]
55 SpaceHeaterW
8 Rated output of space heater for motor body in W
56 SpaceHeaterPhase
10
10 Number of phases of space heater power

"1ph" (*), "3ph"
57 SpaceHeaterVolt
2 Rated voltage of space heater power in Volt

100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 220, 230, 235, 240 (*), [blank]
380, 400, 415, 435, 440, 460, 480, [blank]
58 BearingRTD
1 Bearing RTD required or not

<[BearingRTDQty] = 0>
No
<[BearingRTDQty] <> 0>
Yes
4/13 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
59 BearingRTDQty
60 BearingRTDType
10
61 WindingRTDQty
62 WindingRTDType
10
Length
Description
2 Number of bearing temperature detectors

BearingRTDQty
=DPPMotorDefault [BearingRTDQtyHV]
BearingRTDQty
=DPPMotorDefault [BearingRTDQtyLV]
2 (*)
0 (*)
20 Type of bearing temperature detectors
"Pt100" (*), "Jpt100", "Ni100", "Ni120", [blank]
2 Number of winding temperature detectors
3 (*)
0 (*)
20 Type of winding temperature detectors
"Pt100" (*), "Jpt100", "Ni100", "Ni120", [blank]
63 WindingRTD
1 Winding RTD required or not

<[WindingRTDQty] = 0>
No
<[WindingRTDQty] <> 0>
Yes
64 BaseforMotor
1 Base for motor required or not

Yes, No (*)
65 KeyforCoupling
1 Shaft end key required or not

Yes (*), No
66 Canopy
1 Canopy required or not

Yes, No (*)
67 TBPosition
10
10 TB position on motor viewed from shaft end

"Side" (*), "Left", "Right", "Top", "Bottom", [blank]
68 PowerCableEntrySize
10
10 Size of cable entry for main power
69 SHCableEntrySize
10
10 Size of cable entry for space heater

5/13 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
70 BTDCableEntrySize
10
10 Size of cable entry for bearing RTD
71 WTDCableEntrySize
10
10 Size of cable entry for winding RTD
72 Coupling
10
20 Type of coupling
"D": Direct (*), "B": Belt, "G": Gear, [blank]
73 ShaftEnds
10
20 Shaft ends
"S": Single end (*), "D": Double ends
74 BearingTypeDE
10
10 Bearing type for driving end

"B": Ball (*), "S": Sleeve, "R": Roller, [blank]
75 BearingNoDE
10
10 Bearing no. for driving end
76 BearingTypeNDE
10
10 Bearing type for non driving end

"B": Ball (*), "S": Sleeve, "R": Roller, [blank]
77 BearingNoNDE
10
10 Bearing no. for non driving end
78 Lubricant
10
20 Type or brand of lubricant

"G": Grease (*), "O": Oil, "OM": Oil Mist, [blank]
79 BearingInsulation
1 Bearing insulation required or not

Yes, No (*)
80 NoloadVib
8 Allowable vibration at no-load in mm/s RMS
81 PaintColor
10
20 Final paint color
82 Corrosion
10
20 Corrosion proofing
"By Paint" (*), [blank]
83 MotorType
8 Motor Type (Motor=0, Generator=1)
84 MVAButton
8 Unit of apparent power (MVA=0, kVA=1)
85 MVA
8 Apparent power in the unit designated by [MVAButton]
86 IFL
8 Full load current in A
87 MachineRpm
8 Motor full load speed in RPM
88 PercentLoad0
8 Design loading factor in % for loading category No.1
89 PercentLoad1

6/13 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
90 PercentLoad2
91 PF100
8 PF at 100% loading in % (Range 0 100)
92 PF75
93 PF50
94 EFF100
8 Efficiency at 100% loading in % (Range 0 100)
95 EFF75
96 EFF50
97 LRC
8 Locked rotor current at Un in % of IFL
98 PFlr
8 PF at locked rotor in % (Range 0 100)
99 MotorLRTrq
8 Motor locked rotor torque in % of full load torque
100 MotorPullUpTrq
8 Motor pull up torque in % of full load torque
101 MotorBreakDownTrq
8 Motor break down torque in % of full load torque
102 MotorFullLoadTrq
8 Motor full load torque (N-m)
103 UnitsOfTorque
2 Unit of motor full load torque

<DPPProjectRec [Units] = 0 (Metric)>
1: "N-m" (*), 2: "kg-m"
<DPPProjectRec [Units] = 1 (English)>
1: "lb-ft" (*)
104 MachineGD2
8 Machine (motor + coupler + load) GD2 in kgf-m2
105 MotorGD2
8 Motor GD2 in kgf-m2
106 CouplerGD2
8 Coupler GD2 in kgf-m2
107 LoadGD2
8 Load GD2 in kgf-m
108 MachineWR2
8 Machine (motor + coupler + load) WR2 in the designated unit kgf-m2 (Metric) or lb-ft2 (English) by DPPProjectRec [Units]
109 MotorWR2
8 Motor WR2 in the designated unit kgf-m2 (Metric) or lb-ft2 (English) by DPPProjectRec [Units]
110 CouplerWR2
8 Coupler WR2 in the designated unit kgf-m2 or lb-ft2

7/13 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
111 LoadWR2
8 Load WR2 in the designated unit kgf-m2 or lb-ft2
112 MachineInertia
8 Summation of inertia constants of motor, coupler and driven load in kW-sec/kVA
113 MotorInertia
8 Inertia constants of motor in kW-sec/kVA
114 CouplerInertia
8 Inertia constants of coupler in kW-sec/kVA
115 LoadInertia
8 Inertia constants of driven load in kW-sec/kVA
116 InertiaLevel
10
10 Letter representing the level of inertial

"H" = Heavy, "M" = Medium (not used), "L" = Light
117 tE
8 Time tE in sec according to DEP definition for Exe motor in Zone 1
118 Ts100Un
8 Starting time in sec on full load at rated voltage
119 Ts80Un
8 Starting time in sec on full load at 80% rated voltage
120 TaCold
8 Allowable locked rotor time in sec on cold condition
121 TaHot
8 Allowable locked rotor time in sec on hot condition
122 TsNoLoad
8 Starting time on no load condition
123 TsFullLoad
8 Starting time on full load condition
124 LoadType
10
20 Type of load
"Pump" (*), "Fan", "Comp", "Mixer", "Blower", [blank]
125 BHP
8 Load BHP (Breaking Horse Power) in kW for loading category No.1
126 BHP1
127 BHP2
128 LoadTrq0
8 Load torque at 0% speed in %
129 LoadTrq25
130 LoadTrq50
131 LoadTrq75
132 LoadTrq100
8 Load torque at 100% speed in % of motor full load torque

8/13 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
133 ThrustExpansion
8 Thrust force in expansion direction in kg
134 ThrustContraction
8 Thrust force in contraction direction in kg
135 Bus
10
26 Connected bus ID
136 Panel
10
26 Panel no. from which motor is power supplied
137 LumpedLoad
10
26 ID of lumped load to which equipment belongs
138 LumpedMotor
10
26 ID of lumped motor to which equipment belongs
139 ChildLumpedMotor
10
26 ID of child lumped motor to which equipment belongs. Child lumped motors are created by the program.
140 CompositeMotor
10
26 Composite Motor to which equipment belongs
141 CableLibID
10
50 ID to accessed cable library table LIBCable
142 ConnectedCableIID
8 ETAP internal cable key (IID) for link to INTCable
143 PowerCableID
10
26 Power cable no. (e.g. "PM-1200A-P")
144 ConductorType
8 Raw material of conductor

0: CU (*), 1: AL
145 CableType
8 Power cable type in number from ETAP (Not used in DPP)
146 CableTypeText
10
20 Type of power cable in text format

(e.g. "XLPE/PVC", "CV", "EPR")
147 CableVoltage
10
20 Rated voltage of power cable

(e.g. "19/33kV", "15kV-133%", "600V")
148 NumberOfWires
8 Number of wires (conductors) in power cable
149 UnitsOfWire
10
10 Description of phase, grounding and/or neutral cores

"C" (*), "P", "T", "Q", "C+G", "C+E", "C+N", "C+1/2", "1/2C", "C+G+N", "C+E+N", [blank]
Expression in the column "No. of Cores" is [NumberOfWire] + [UnitsOfWire]
(e.g. "3C+E", "3C+1/2", "30P")
150 CabSize
10
10 Power cable size
151 PhaseValue
8 Number of power cables per phase
152 CableODValue
8 Overall diameter of power cable in mm

9/13 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
153 LengthValue
8 Length of power cable run in meter
154 RacewayType
8 Type of raceway
0: U/G Duct, 1: U/G Buried (*), 2: A/G Trays,
3: A/G Conduit, 4: Air drop
155 CondODValue
8 Conductor outer diameter of power cable in mm or inch
156 SizedKeyFactor
2 Key
Key
Key
Key
Key
Key
157 CableAmpDF
8 Grouping factor for power cable sizing (0.0-1.0)
158 LCSCableID
10
159 LCSCableType
factor which finally determined the cable size.

Factor = 1: By Ampacity
Factor = 2: By Voltage drop at normal running
Factor = 3: By Voltage drop at motor start
Factor = 4: By Minimum Cable Size
Factor = 5: By User Selection
26 LCS control cable no. (e.g. "PM-1200A-C1")
8 LCS control cable type in number
160 LCSCableTypeText
10
20 Type of LCS cable in text format

161 LCSCableVoltage
10
20 Rated voltage of LCS cable (e.g. "600")
162 LCSNumberOfWires
8 Number of wires (conductors) in LCS cable
163 LCSUnitsOfWire
10
10 Description of cores for LCS cable
164 LCSCabSize
10
10 LCS cable size
165 LCSCableODValue
166 LCSCableEntrySize
10
8 Overall diameter of LCS cable in mm or inch

10 Size of cable entry for LCS
167 LCSLengthValue
8 Length of LCS cable run in meter
168 LCSCondODValue
8 Conductor outer diameter of LCS cable in mm or inch
169 CCRCableID
170 CCRCableType
10
7
26 CCR control cable no. (e.g. "PM-1200A-C2")

8 CCR control cable type in number
10/13 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
171 CCRCableTypeText
10
20 Type of CCR cable in text format

172 CCRCableVoltage
10
20 Rated voltage of CCR cable

(e.g. "600V")
173 CCRNumberOfWires
8 Number of wires (conductors) in CCR cable
174 CCRUnitsOfWire
10
10 Description of cores for CCR cable
175 CCRCabSize
10
10 CCR cable size
176 CCRCableODValue
177 CCRCableEntrySize
10
Description
8 Overall diameter of CCR cable in mm or inch

10 Size of cable entry for CCR
178 CCRLengthValue
8 Length of CCR cable run in meter
179 CCRCondODValue
8 Conductor outer diameter of CCR cable in mm or inch
180 SHCableID
181 SHCableType
10
7
26 Space heater cable no. (e.g. "PM-1200A-SH")

8 Space heater cable type
182 SHCableTypeText
10
20 Type of space heater cable in text format

(e.g. "XLPE/PVC", "CV")
183 SHCableVoltage
10
20 Rated voltage of space heater cable

(e.g. "600V", "0.6/1kV")
184 SHNumberOfWires
8 Number of wires (conductors) in SH cable
185 SHUnitsOfWire
10
10 Description of cores for SH cable
186 SHCabSize
10
10 SH cable size
187 SHCableODValue
8 Overall diameter of SH cable in mm or inch
188 SHLengthValue
8 Length of SH cable run in meter
189 SHCondODValue
8 Conductor outer diameter of SH cable in mm or inch
190 ProcessUnitID
10
20 Process unit ID
191 SiteArea
10
20 Name of site area (e.g. "Off-Site", "Utility", "Marine", etc.)

11/13 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
192 HazardAreaClass
10
20 Hazardous area classification

<DPPProjectRec [Standard]=IEC>
Zone 0, Zone 1, Zone 2 (*), Non Class
<DPPProjectRec [Standard]=ANSI>
Class I Div 1, Class I Div 2 (*), Non Class
193 Substation
10
20 Name of substation from which a load is power supplied.
194 DiffProtection
195 CTRatioDiffProt
1
10
196 NoOfPhMeteringCT
197 CTRatioMeterPhase
10
198 NoOfGrMeteringCT
199 CTRatioMeterGround
10
Length
Description
1 Differential protection required or not.

No (*)
20 CT ratio for differential protection (e.g. "200/1")
2 Number of phase metering CTs
20 CT ratio for phase metering (e.g. "200/1")
2 Number of ground metering CTs
20 CT ratio for ground metering (e.g. "50/1")
200 SurgeArrestors
1 Surge arrestors required or not.

No (*)
201 SurgeCapacitors
1 Surge capacitors required or not.

No (*)
202 NoOfStartsYear
2 Maximum number of starts per year
203 RestartReq
1 Restart is required or not.
204 RestartGroup
10
26 Motor sequential restart group
205 MainMachineID
10
26 Main machine ID in case this motor is an auxiliary machine.
206 MotorStructure
10
20 Type of motor structure

"S": Squirrel cage (*), "W": Wound rotor, [blank]
207 DataType
8 Data status for this equipment along engineering flow

DataType=Data Source Table [DataType]
To be synchronized with DPPLoadDefs [DataCat]
0: Estimated (*), 1: Typical, 2: Vendor, 3: Final, 4: [blank]
(0-3 to be fixed and not allowed to alter)
12/13 Page
No
Field Name
208 Priority
Field Type
7
Length
Description
8 Importance of this equipment

Priority=Data Source Table [Priority]
To be synchronized with DPPLoadDefs [PriCat]
0: Critical, 1: Essential (*), 2: Nonessential, 3: Other,
4: Normal, 5: [blank]
(For future DEP use)
209 OneLineDWG
10
50 Online drawing no. showing this equipment
210 ReferenceDWG
10
50 Drawing No. of Reference (Schematic diagram, Motor outline drawing, etc.)
211 PurchasingDate
10
212 Remarks
10
213 UserText_0
10
50 User defined field No.0 in text format
214 UserText_1
10
215 UserText_2
10
216 UserText_3
10
217 UserText_4
10
218 UserNum_0
8 User defined field No.0 in numeric format
219 UserNum_1
220 UserNum_2
221 UserNum_3
222 UserNum_4
223 UserDate_0
8 User defined field No.0 in date format
224 UserDate_1
225 UserDate_2
8 Purchasing Date
100 Remarks of this record
13/13 Page
4. Cable Schedule (DPPCable)

No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
1 FinalData
2 IID
8 ETAP internal key ID. Link to DPPElecLoad [ConnectedCableIID]
3 Revision
4 DataRevs
5 Issue
6 FromETAP
7 FromDPPElecLoad
1 "Yes" for a record come from DPPElecLoad
8 MFRName
10
25 Name of cable manufacturer
9 CableLibID
10
50 ID to access cable library LIBCableIDX and LIBCable
10 CableLibLink
11 CableAccess
10
12 CableUse
10
10 Purpose of cable use

"P" : Power, "C" : Control, "CCR" : CCR (DCS),
"LCS" : LCS (Push button), "SH" : Space heater,
"F" : Feeder, "M" : Communication, "L" : LAN,
"G" : Grounding, "BD" : Bus Duct, [blank]
13 ID
10
26 Cable ID. Same as [PowerCableID], [LCSCableID], [CCRCableID] or [SHCableID] of DPPElecLoad
1 Flag to link the cable library always.

250 Key to link to ETAP cable library header
14 InService
8 Same as INTCable [InService]
15 TransparentCable
8 Same as INTCable [TransparentCable]
16 EquipmentCable
8 Same as INTCable [EquipmentCable]
17 DCCable
8 Same as INTCable [DCCable]
18 PhaseValue
8 Number of power cables per phase
19 CableType
8 (ETAP cable type. Decoding is needed.)

1/8 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
20 CableTypeText
10
20 Type of cable in text format

(e.g. "XLPE/PVC", "CV", "EPR")
21 CableVoltage
10
20 Rated voltage of cable

(e.g. "19/33kV", "15kV-133%", "600")
22 ConductorType
8 Raw material of conductor

0: CU (*), 1: AL
23 NumberOfWires
8 Number of phase conductors excluding grounding and neutral cores
24 UnitsOfWire
10
10 Description of phase, grounding and/or neutral cores. "C"(*), "P", "T", "Q", "C+G", "C+E", "C+N", "C+1/2", "-1/2C",
"C+G+N", "C+E+N", [blank]
Expression in the column "No. of Cores" is
[NumberOfWire]+[UnitsOfWire]
(e.g. "3C+E", "3C+1/2", "30P")
25 CabSize
10
10 Sectional area of conductor (e.g. "250", "70+35", "3/0")
26 EquipID
10
26
27 AlteredBy
10
20
28 AlteredTime
29 RacewayType
8 Type of raceway for all [CableUse]

0 : U/G Duct, 1 : U/G : Buried(*), 2 : A/G Trays,
3 : A/G Conduit, 4 : Air drop, [blank]
30 LengthValueMeter
8 Length of cable run in meter
31 LengthValue
8 Length of cable run in the designated unit in ETAP

When [LengthValueMeter] is input,
<[CableLengthUnit]=0 (ft)>
[LengthValue]=[LengthValueMeter]/0.3048
<[CableLengthUnit]=1 (mile)>
[LengthValue]=[LengthValueMeter]/1609.344
<[CableLengthUnit]=2 (meter)>
[LengthValue]=[LengthValueMeter]
<[CableLengthUnit]=3 (km)>
[LengthValue]=[LengthValueMeter]/1000
32 EquipmentName
10
100 Purpose description of cable
2/8 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
33 CableLengthUnit
8 Unit of cable length designated in ETAP

0 : ft, 1 : mile, 2 : m, 3 : km
34 CableODValue
8 Cable overall diameter in mm
35 CondODValue
8 Conductor overall diameter in mm
36 CableFrom
10
50 Start point of cable

When a record is transferred from DPPElecLoad and [CableFrom]=[blank], DPP automatically fills;
[CableFrom]=DPPElecLoad [Panel] as default.
37 CableTo
10
50 End point of cable

When a record is transferred from DPPElecLoad and [CableTo]=[blank], DPP automatically fills;
[CableTo]=DPPElecLoad [ID] except for CCR cables as default.
38 FromBus
10
26 Source bus ID connected to this cable
39 ToBus
10
26 Destination bus ID connected to this cable
40 FromEquipType1
10
30 Type of source equipment connected to this cable

(SPEL Interface)
41 FromEquipItemTag1
10
26 Tag of source equipment connected to this cable

(SPEL Interface)
42 FromEquipType2
10
30 Transformer secondary or tertiary connected to this cable

(SPEL Interface)
43 FromEquipItemTag2
10
26 Tag of Transformer secondary or tertiary connected to this cable

(SPEL Interface)
44 ToEquipType
10
30 Type of destination equipment connected to this cable

(SPEL Interface)
45 ToEquipItemTag
10
26 Tag of destination equipment connected to this cable

(SPEL Interface)
46 ConduitType
10
20 Conduit No.1 type
47 ConduitSize
10
10 Conduit No.1 size
48 ConduitLength
8 Length of conduit No.1 in meter
49 ConduitMFRName
10
25 Manufacturer name of conduit No.1 in meter
50 ConduitType2
10
20 Conduit No.2 type

3/8 Page
No
Field Name
51 ConduitSize2
52 ConduitLength2
Field Type
10
7
Length
Description
10 Conduit No.2 size

8 Length of conduit No.2 in meter
53 ConduitMFRName2
10
25 Manufacturer name of conduit No.2 in meter
54 EntryType
10
10 Cable entry type No.1. "M", "NPT", "PG", "PF", "ET", [blank]
55 EntrySize
10
20 Cable entry size No.1
56 EntryType2
10
10 Cable entry type No.2
57 EntrySize2
10
20 Cable entry size No.2
58 GlandType
10
20 Type of cable gland No.1
59 GlandSize
10
20 Size of cable gland No.1
60 GlandQty
2 Quantity of cable gland No.1
61 GlandMFRName
10
25 Manufacturer name of cable gland No.1
62 GlandType2
10
20 Type of cable gland No.2
63 GlandSize2
10
20 Size of cable gland No.2
64 GlandQty2
2 Quantity of cable gland No.2
65 GlandMFRName2
10
25 Manufacturer name of cable gland No.2
66 TerminalLugType
10
20 Type of terminal lug No.1
67 TerminalLugSize
10
20 Size of terminal lug No.1
68 TerminalLugQty
2 Quantiry of terminal lug No.1
69 TerminalLugMFRNam
e
10
25 Manufacturer name of terminal lug No.1
70 TerminalLugType2
10
20 Type of terminal lug No.2
71 TerminalLugSize2
10
20 Size of terminal lug No.2
72 TerminalLugQty2
2 Quantiry of terminal lug No.2

4/8 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
73 TerminalLugMFRNam
e2
10
25 Manufacturer name of terminal lug No.2
74 TerminationKitType
10
20 Type of termination kit No.1
75 TerminationKitSize
10
20 Size of termination kit No.1
76 TerminationKitQty
2 Quantiry of termination kit No.1
77 TerminationKitMFRNa
me
10
25 Manufacturer name of termination kit No.1
78 TerminationKitType2
10
20 Type of termination kit No.2
79 TerminationKitSize2
10
20 Size of termination kit No.2
80 TerminationKitQty2
2 Quantiry of termination kit No.2
81 TerminationKitMFRNa
me2
10
25 Manufacturer name of termination kit No.2
82 SpliceKitType
10
20 Type of splice kit No.1
83 SpliceKitSize
10
20 Size of splice kit No.1
84 SpliceKitQty
2 Quantiry of splice kit No.1
85 SpliceKitMFRName
10
25 Manufacturer name of splice kit No.1
86 SpliceKitType2
10
20 Type of splice kit No.2
87 SpliceKitSize2
10
20 Size of splice kit No.2
88 SpliceKitQty2
2 Quantiry of splice kit No.2
89 SpliceKitMFRName2
10
25 Manufacturer name of splice kit No.2
90 DrumNo
10
26 Drum no.
91 ElecLoadID
10
26 ID of electrical load to which this cable belongs.

Key ID to link to DPPElecLoad [ID]
Edit disabled for [FromDPPElecLoad]=Yes
5/8 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
92 ProcessUnitID
10
20 Process unit ID
Same as DPPElecLoad [ProcessUnitID]
93 SiteArea
10
20 Name of site area

Same as DPPElecLoad [SiteArea]
94 Substation
10
20 Name of substation from which this cable is laid.

Same as DPPElecLoad [Substation]
95 Bus
10
26 Bus no. from which this cable is laid.
96 Panel
10
26 Panel no. from which this cable is laid.

Same as DPPElecLoad [Panel]
97 LumpedLoad
10
26 Same as DPPElecLoad [LumpedLoad]
98 LumpedMotor
10
26 Same as DPPElecLoad [LumpedMotor]
99 OperationKV
8 Operation voltage in kV actually induced on this cable

<[CableUse]="P">
[OperationKV] = DPPElecLoad [KV]
<[CableUse]="SH">
[OperationKV] = DPPElecLoad
[SpaceHeaterVolt]/1000
<Others>
[OperationKV] = 0
100 OperationAmp
8 Same as DPPElecLoad [IFL]
101 TBFrom
10
20 No. of cable terminal block at start point

(e.g. "TB1", "X100")
102 TBTo
10
20 No. of cable terminal block at end point

(e.g. "TB2", "X101")
103 UserText_0
10
104 UserText_1
10
105 UserText_2
10
6/8 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
106 UserText_3
10
107 UserText_4
10
108 UserText_5
10
109 UserText_6
10
110 UserText_7
10
111 UserText_8
10
112 UserText_9
10
113 UserNum_0
114 UserNum_1
115 UserNum_2
116 UserNum_3
117 UserNum_4
118 UserNum_5
119 UserNum_6
120 UserNum_7
121 UserNum_8
122 UserNum_9
123 UserDate_0
124 UserDate_1
125 UserDate_2
126 HP_KW
8 Same as DPPElecLoad [HP_KW]
127 HP
8 Same as DPPElecLoad [HP]
128 KW
8 Same as DPPElecLoad [KW]

7/8 Page
No
Field Name
129 Poles
130 PhaseNo
Field Type
7
10
Length
Description
8 Same as DPPElecLoad [Poles]

10 Same as DPPElecLoad [PhaseNo]
8/8 Page
5. Switchgear/MCC Schedule (DPPSwgrMcc)

No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
1 FinalData
2 IID
8 ETAP internal key ID
3 FromDPPElecLoad
1 "Yes" for a record come from DPPElecLoad
4 EquipType
2 Type of equipment
0: IM (*), 1: SM, 2: MOV, 3: DCM,
8: VFD, 9: Charger
5 ID
10
6 EquipName
10
26 Equipment ID
Service name of electrical cubicle (e.g. "INCOME-A", "FEEDER-1", "BUS-TIE", etc.)
100 Name of driven equipment (e.g. "Booster pump for H2 reactor A-1")
Service description of electrical cubicle
(e.g. "13.8kV SG-C701 Incoming Line A")
7 HP_KW
8 Unit of output power

0: HP, 1: kW (*), 2: kVA, 3: kvar, A(*)
8 HP
8 Output power or capacity in the unit specified by HP_KW
9 Poles
8 Number of poles
10 KV
8 Equipment rated voltage (kV)
11 StartType
8 Type of motor start
12 SpeedControl
10
20 Speed control for motor

"C": Constant (*), "R": Reversible, "V": Variable,
"M": Multi-Speed, "P": Pole-Change, [blank]
13 IFL
8 Full load current in A
14 LRC
8 Locked rotor current at Un in % of IFL
15 Substation
10
16 RestartReq
17 PanelID
10
20 Name of substation from which a load is power supplied.

1 Restart is required or not.
26 Switchboard no. from which motor/load is power supplied
1/16 Page
No
Field Name
18 PanelType
19 PanelKV
Field Type
10
Length
Description
10 Type of switchboard
"SWGR" (*), "MCC", "DP" for future (unselectable)
8 System voltage applied to this switchboard in kV.
20 BusID
10
26 Bus no. from which motor/load is power supplied
21 StarterUnit
10
20 Unit no. of motor starter, power feeder, incomer, bus coupler, etc.
To be unique within a switchboard
22 UnitType
10
10 Type of unit
"IN": Incomer, "TIE": Tie-breaker, "FDR": Feeder,
"MS": Motor Starter", "SPR": Spare, "SPC": Space
"MSSPR": Spare Starter, "FSPR": Spare Feeder
"EQSPC": Equipped Space"
<DPPElecLoad [EquipType]=0>
Default = "MS"
<DPPElecLoad [EquipType]=4>
Default = "FDR"
23 UnitSortOrder
2 Sort order of starter unit to indicate on schedule sheet

Sort Key = [UnitSortOrder] + [StarterUnit] within same [PanelID]
24 TiedPanelID
10
26 Panel ID connected to other panel via tie breaker
25 TiedBusID
10
26 Bus ID connected to other bus in the same panel via tie breaker
26 PowerCircuitID
10
20 Identification no. of power circuit diagram for motor starter or power feeder
27 PowerCircuitName
10
50 Name of motor starter or power feeder power circuit diagram
28 SequenceID
10
32 Identification no. of motor starter or power feeder sequence diagram
29 SequenceName
10
50 Name of motor starter or power feeder sequence diagram
30 CCRStart
1 Start command from CCR (DCS) by digital signal
31 CCRStartContact
1 Type of start contact from CCR

0: One-shot (Momentary), 1: Steady (Maintained)
32 CCRStop
1 Stop command from CCR (DCS) by digital signal
33 CCRStopContact
1 Type of stop contact from CCR

2/16 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
34 CCRCommonContact
1 Yes: Common contact is used for CCR Start & Stop commands
No: Separate contacts are used for CCR Start & Stop commands
35 CCRPermitToStart
1 Permit to start signal from CCR (DCS) by digital signal
36 CCRStopInterLock
1 Stop interlock from CCR (DCS) by digital signal
37 CCRRunningStatus
1 Running status signal to CCR (DCS) by digital signal
38 CCRFault
1 Fault signal to CCR (DCS) by digital signal
39 CCRSpeedControl
1 Speed control signal from CCR (DCS) by analogue signal
40 CCRSpeedControlRa
nge
41 CCRCurrent
42 CCRCurrentRange
43 CCRSpeed
44 CCRSpeedRange
10
1
10
1
20 Range of speed control from CCR (DCS) by analogue signal

1 Current reading (A) to CCR (DCS) by analogue signal
20 Range of current reading (A) to CCR (DCS) by analogue signal
1 Speed reading (rpm) to CCR (DCS) by analogue signal
10
20 Range of speed reading (rpm) to CCR (DCS) by analogue signal
1 Electrical power reading (kW) to CCR (DCS) by analogue signal
10
20 Range of power reading (kW) to CCR (DCS) by analogue signal
47 CCRRunningStatusCo
m
1 Running status signal to CCR (DCS) by data communication
48 CCRFaultCom
1 Fault signal to CCR (DCS) by data communication
49 CCRCurrentCom
1 Current reading (A) to CCR (DCS) by data communication
50 CCRUserSignal1
1 (Spare field #1 for CCR user defined signal - Yes/No type)
51 CCRUserSignal2
52 CCRUserSignal3
45 CCRPower
46 CCRPowerRange
53 LCSCircuitID
10
20 Circuit ID of LCS
54 LCSCircuitName
10
20 Name of LCS circuit
3/16 Page
No
Field Name
55 LCSExpProof
56 LCSTypeID
Field Type
1
Length
Description
1 LCS enclosure is explosion proof or not.

<DPPElecLoad [ExpProtection] = " ">
No
<DPPElecLoad [ExpProtection] <> " ">
Yes
10
25 Type of LCS
<[LCSExpProof] = No>
[LCSCircuitName]
<[LCSExpProof] = Yes>
[LCSCircuitName] + "-EX"
57 LCSStart
1 Start switch (button) on LCS
58 LCSStop
1 Stop switch (button) on LCS
59 LCSStartStop
1 Start / Stop switch on LCS
60 LCSAutoManual
1 Auto / Manual change over switch on LCS
61 LCSAutoManualOff
1 Auto / Manual / Stop change over switch on LCS
62 LCSOnLamp
1 Running lamp on LCS
63 LCSOnLampColor
64 LCSOffLamp
65 LCSOffLampColor
66 LCSAlarmLamp
67 LCSAlarmLampColor
10
1
10
1
10
2 Color of running indication lamp on LCS

"G": Green, "R": Red (*), "A": Amber, "O": Orange,
"W": White, "Bl": Blue, "y": Yellow
1 Stop lamp on LCS
2 Color of stop indication lamp on LCS
1 Alarm lamp on LCS
2 Color of alarm indication lamp on LCS
68 LCSEmergStop
1 Emergency stop button on LCS
69 LCSAmmeter
1 Ammeter on LCS
70 LCSCT
1 CT inside LCS
4/16 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
71 LCSAmmeterScale
10
20 Scale of ammeter on LCS
72 LCSCTRatio
10
20 Ratio of CT inside LCS
Description
73 LCSUserSignal1
1 (Spare field #1 for LCS user defined signal - Yes/No type)
74 LPStart
1 Start command from PLC or local panel by digital signal
75 LPStartContact
1 Type of start contact from PLC or local panel

76 LPStop
1 Stop command from PLC or local panel by digital signal
77 LPStopContact
1 Type of stop contact from PLC or local panel

78 LPCommonContact
1 Yes: Common contact is used for Start & Stop commands of PLC or local panel
No: Separate contacts are used for Start & Stop commands of PLC or local panel
79 LPPermitToStart
1 Permit to start signal from PLC or local panel by digital signal
80 LPStopInterLock
1 Stop interlock from PLC or local panel by digital signal
81 LPRunningStatus
1 Running status signal to PLC or local panel by digital signal
82 LPFault
1 Fault signal to PLC or local panel by digital signal
83 LPSpeedControl
1 Speed control signal from PLC or local panel by analogue signal
84 LPSpeedControlRang
e
85 LPCurrent
86 LPCurrentRange
87 LPSpeed
88 LPSpeedRange
10
1
10
1
20 Range of speed control from PLC or local panel by analogue signal

1 Current reading (A) to PLC or local panel by analogue signal
20 Range of current reading (A) to PLC or local panel by analogue signal
1 Speed reading (rpm) to PLC or local panel by analogue signal
10
20 Range of speed reading (rpm) to PLC or local panel by analogue signal
1 Electrical power reading (kW) to PLC or local panel by analogue signal
90 LPPowerRange
10
20 Range of power reading (kW) to PLC or local panel by analogue signal
91 LPUserSignal1
89 LPPower
1 (Spare field #1 for LP user defined signal - Yes/No type)

5/16 Page
No
Field Name
92 LPUserSignal2
Field Type
1
Length
1 (Spare field #2 for LP user defined signal - Yes/No type)
93 LabelDescription
10
50 Unit label reading
94 SectionID
10
20 Switchboard section no.
95 SWDeviceAlarm
Description
1 Alarm from switching device
96 HVCBLibID
10
25 ID to access to DPP HV CB library table LIBHVCB
97 LVCBLibID
10
25 ID to access to DPP LV CB library table LIBLVCB
98 CircuitBreaker
99 CBType
1 Circuit breaker is used or not.
10
10 Type of circuit breaker

Default = DPPPanel [CBType]
"ACB", "VCB", "GCB"
100 CBRatedKV
8 CB rated voltage in kV
Default = DPPPanel [CBRatedKV]
<IEC>
0.38, 0.40, 0.415, 0.48, 0.69, 1.00, 2.75, 3.60, 4.76, 7.20, 8.25, 12.0, 15.0, 15.5, 17.5, 24.0, 25.8, 36.0, 38.0, 40.5, 48.3, 52.0, 72.5
<ANSI>
0.12, 0.208, 0.24, 0.48, 0.60, 4.3, 4.76, 15.0, 15.5, 25.8, 38.0, 48.3, 71.5, 121.0
101 CBRatedA
8 Rated continuous current in amperes

<IEC>
400, 630, 800, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300
<ANSI>
1200, 2000, 3000
102 CBBreakingKA
8 Maximum interrupting capability in kA

<ANSI>
12.0, 12.5, 16.0, 20.0, 23.0, 24.0, 25.0, 31.5, 36.0, 40.0, 48.0, 49.0, 63.0
<IEC>
6.30, 8.00, 10.0, 12.5, 16.0, 20.0, 25.0, 31.5, 40.0, 50.0, 63.0, 80.0, 100
103 CBMakingKA
8 Rated short-circuit making current in kA

<ANSI>
"2.5 time of the rated SC breaking current (r.m.s)"
<IEC>
"Below 1.6 time the rated SCC (r.m.s)"
"Below 2.7 time the rated SCC (peak)"
104 CBCycle
8 Rated Interrupting time in cycles

6/16 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
105 ShuntTrip
106 FuseLibID
10
107 PowerFuse
108 FuseType
10
Length
Description
1 Shunt trip of switching device

25 ID to access to DPP fuse library table LIBFuse
1 Power fuse is used or not
20 Type of power fuse
Default = DPPPanel [FuseType]
"Current Limiting", "CL-5", etc.
109 FuseRatedKV
8 Power fuse rated voltage in kV

Default = DPPPanel [FuseRatedKV]
<IEC>
0.380, 0.400, 0.415, 0.480, 0.690, 1.000, 2.750, 3.600, 5.500, 7.200, 8.250, 12.00, 15.00, 15.50, 17.50, 24.00, 25.80, 36.00, 38.00,
40.50, 48.30, 52.00, 72.50
<ANSI>
0.120, 0.208, 0.240, 0.480, 0.600, 4.300, 4.760, 5.500, 7.200, 8.250, 14.40, 15.00, 15.50
110 FuseBaseA
8 Rating of fuse base in amperes

<IEC>
8, 12, 15, 20, 25, 32, 50, 65, 85, 100, 115, 130, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 350, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300
<ANSI>
225, 600, 800, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3200, 4200
111 FuseRatedA
8 Rating of fuse in amperes

<IEC>
8, 12, 15, 20, 25, 32, 50, 65, 85, 100, 115, 130, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 350, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300
<ANSI>
225, 600, 800, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3200, 4200
112 FuseInterruptingKA
8 Rated interrupting capacity in kA

<IEC>
2.115, 3.500, 4.260, 5.800, 6.100, 6.615, 7.000, 8.000, 8.800, 8.900, 9.180, 9.300, 9.800, 10.00, 11.00, 12.50, 16.00, 17.00, 18.00,
19.00, 20.00, 22.00, 25.00, 28.00, 29.00, 31.50, 33.00, 35.00, 36.00, 40.00, 41.00, 50.00, 56.00, 93.00, 105.0
<ANSI>
8.80, 10.1, 12.0, 14.0, 18.0, 19.6, 20.6, 21.7, 22.0, 22.5, 23.0, 24.0, 28.0, 29.0, 30.0, 30.4, 33.2, 33.7, 35.0, 36.0, 37.0, 40.2, 45.5 46.3,
46.9, 48.0, 49.0, 55.0, 65.0, 85.0, 100, 200
113 MCCBLibID
114 MCCB
10
1
25 ID to access to DPP MCCB library table LIBMCCB

1 MCCB is used or not
7/16 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
115 NoOfMCCBPoles
10
Length
Description
10 Number of MCCB poles

"2", "3" (*), "4", "3+N", "2P", "3P", "4P", "3P+N", <blank>
116 MCCBFrameA
8 Rating of MCCB frame in amperes

30, 50, 60, 100, 160, 225, 250, 400, 630, 800
117 MCCBTripA
8 Rating of MCCB trip in amperes

3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 63, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 630, 700, 800
118 OLRLibID
119 ThermalProtection
10
1
25 ID to access to DPP thermal over load relay library table LIBOLR

1 Thermal over load relay is used or not
120 OLRRangeA
10
20 Rating range of thermal over load relay in text format
121 ContactorLibID
10
25 ID to access to DPP magnetic contactor library table LIBContactor
122 MagContactor
123 ContactorType
10
1 Magnetic contactor is used or not

20 Type of contactor
Default = DPPPanel [ContactorType]
"Vacuum", "Air", "NEMA 00", "NEMA 0", "NEMA 1", "NEMA 2",
"NEMA 3", "NEMA 4",
124 ContactorRatedKV
8 Contactor rated voltage in kV

Default = DPPPanel [ContactorRatedKV]
<IEC>
0.38, 0.40, 0.415, 0.48, 0.69, 1.00, 2.75, 3.60, 4.76, 7.20, 8.25, 12.0, 15.0, 15.5, 17.5, 24.0, 25.8, 36.0, 38.0, 40.5, 48.3, 52.0, 72.5
<ANSI>
0.12, 0.208, 0.24, 0.48, 0.60, 4.3, 4.76, 15.0, 15.5, 25.8, 38.0, 48.3, 71.5, 121.0
125 ContactorRatedA
8 Rating of magnetic contactor in amperes

<IEC>
8, 12, 15, 20, 25, 32, 50, 65, 85, 100, 115, 130, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 350, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300
<ANSI>
225, 600, 800, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3200, 4200
126 ContInterruptingKA
8 Rated interrupting capacity in kA

<IEC>
2.115, 3.500, 4.260, 5.800, 6.100, 6.615, 7.000, 8.000, 8.800, 8.900, 9.180, 9.300, 9.800, 10.00, 11.00, 12.50, 16.00, 17.00, 18.00,
19.00, 20.00, 22.00, 25.00, 28.00, 29.00, 31.50, 33.00, 35.00, 36.00, 40.00, 41.00, 50.00, 56.00, 93.00, 105.0
<ANSI>
8.80, 10.1, 12.0, 14.0, 18.0, 19.6, 20.6, 21.7, 22.0, 22.5, 23.0, 24.0, 28.0, 29.0, 30.0, 30.4, 33.2, 33.7, 35.0, 36.0, 37.0, 40.2, 45.5 46.3,
46.9, 48.0, 49.0, 55.0, 65.0, 85.0, 100, 200
8/16 Page
No
Field Name
127 ProtectionDevice
Field Type
10
Length
Description
50 Type, model or drawing no. of protection device
128 ProtectionDeviceTrip
1 Trip by protection device
129 MultiFuncRelay
1 Multi-function relay is used or not.
130 MainPowerType
10
20 Type of external main power connection

"Bus Duct" (*), Bus Bar", "Bus Duct (Top)", "XLPE", "XLPE/PVC", "XLPE/SWA/PVC", "CV"
<If this record exists in DPPElecLoad>
[MainPowerType] = [CableTypeText]
<[UnitType]="IN">
Default = DPPPanel [IncomingType]
<[CableTypeText] is blank and ([UnitType]="MS" or "FDR")>
Default = DPPPanel [OutgoingType]
131 MainPowerSize
10
20 Size of external main power connection

"1250A", "2000A", "2500A", "3000A", "(*)", "(**)", "(*1)", "(*2)", "(*3)"
[MainPowerSize] =
[PhaseValue] + "x"
+ [NumberOfWires] + [UnitsOfWire] + "-" + [CabSize]
+ "mm2" (DPPProjectRec [CableUnits] = 0)
<[UnitType]="IN">
Default = DPPPanel [IncomingSize]
132 AuxPowerCabType
10
20 Type of external auxiliary power cable

"XLPE/PVC", "PVC/PVC", "CV"
133 AuxPowerCabSize
10
20 Size of external auxiliary power cable

"3C-1.5mm2", "3C-2.5mm2", "3C-4mm2", "5C-1.5mm2", "5C-2.5mm2", "5C-4mm2", "7C-1.5mm2", "7C-2.5mm2", "7C4mm2", "(*)", "(**)", "(*1)", "(*2)", "(*3)"
134 ControlCabType
10
20 Type of control and signal cable

"XLPE/PVC", "PVC/PVC", "CV", "PEI", "MI"
[ControlCabType] = [CCRCableTypeText]
<If [CCRCableTypeText] is blank>
Default = DPPPanel [ControlCabType]
9/16 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
135 ControlCabSize
10
20 Size of control and signal cable

Default = DPPPanel [ControlCabSize]
"3P-1.5mm", "5P-1.5mm", "3P-1.5mm2", "5P-1.5mm2", "(*)", "(**)", "(*1)", "(*2)", "(*3)"
[ControlCabSize] =
[CCRNumberOfWires] + [CCRUnitsOfWire] + "-" +
[CCRCabSize] + "mm2"
<If [ControlCabSize] is still blank>
Default = DPPPanel [ControlCabType]
136 GndWireType
10
20 Type of grounding wire

"PVC", "THH"
137 GndWireSize
10
20 Size of grounding wire

"1C-120mm2", "1C-70mm2", "1C-35mm2", "(*)", "(**)", "(*1)", "(*2)", "(*3)"
138 CableEntryPoint
10
10 Cable entry point

"Bottom", "Top"
139 MotorRestartSetting
10
20 Setting of motor restart module (relay)
140 SchematicDWG
10
30 Drawing no. of motor starter or power feeder schematic diagram

Default = DPPPanel [SchematicDWG]
141 VT1RatioV
10
20 Ratio (V) of voltage transformer #1

(e.g. "14400/110V", "6600/220V", "No")
142 VT1PrimaryV
2 Primary voltage of voltage transformer #1 in volts
143 VT1SecondaryV
2 Secondary voltage of voltage transformer #1 in volts (DEP)

240, 230, 220, 120, 110
144 VT1RatedVA
2 Rating of voltage transformer #1 in volt-ampere
145 VT1Class
10
10 Class of voltage transformer #1

Default = DPPPanel [AccuracyVT]
"0.1", "0.2", "0.5", "1.0", "3.0", "3P", "6P", "(*)", "(**)", "(*1)", "(*2)", "(*3)", <blank>
146 VT2RatioV
10
20 Ratio (V) of voltage transformer #2

(e.g. "14400/110V", "6600/220V" , "No")
147 VT2PrimaryV
2 Primary voltage of voltage transformer #2 in volts
148 VT2SecondaryV
2 Secondary voltage of voltage transformer #2 in volts

240, 230, 220, 120, 110
10/16 Page
No
Field Name
149 VT2RatedVA
Field Type
3
Length
Description
2 Rating of voltage transformer #2 in volt-ampere
150 VT2Class
10
10 Class of voltage transformer #2

Default = DPPPanel [AccuracyVT]
"0.1", "0.2", "0.5", "1.0", "3.0", "3P", "6P", "(*)", "(**)", "(*1)", "(*2)", "(*3)", <blank>
151 CPTRatioV
10
20 Ratio (V) of control potential transformer

(e.g. "480/110V", "415/120V", "No")
152 CPTPrimaryV
2 Primary voltage of control potential transformer in volts
153 CPTSecondaryV
2 Secondary voltage of control potential transformer in volts

Default = DPPPanel [CPTSecVoltage]
240, 230, 220, 120, 110
154 CPTRatedVA
2 Rating of control potential transformer in volt-ampere
155 CPTClass
10
10 Class of control potential transformer

"0.1", "0.2", "0.5", "1.0", "3.0", "3P", "6P", "(*)", "(**)", "(*1)", "(*2)", "(*3)", <blank>
156 CT1RatioA
10
20 Ratio (A) of current transformer #1 for protection

(e.g. "2000/5", "50/0.025", "2000/5A", "50/0.025A", "No")
157 CT1RatedVA
2 Rating of current transformer #1 for protection in volt-ampere
158 CT1Class
10
10 Class of current transformer #1 for protection

Default = DPPPanel [AccuracyCT]
"0.1", "0.2", "0.5", "1.0", "3.0", "5.0", "5P", "10P", "(*)", "(**)", "(*1)", "(*2)", "(*3)", <blank>
159 CT2RatioA
10
20 Ratio (A) of current transformer #2 for protection

(e.g. "2000/5", "50/0.025", "2000/5A", "50/0.025A", "No")
160 CT2RatedVA
2 Rating of current transformer #2 for protection in volt-ampere
161 CT2Class
10
10 Class of current transformer #2 for protection

Default = DPPPanel [AccuracyCT]
"0.1", "0.2", "0.5", "1.0", "3.0", "5.0", "5P", "10P", "(*)", "(**)", "(*1)", "(*2)", "(*3)", <blank>
162 ZCTRatioA
10
20 Ratio (V) of zero-phase current transformer

(e.g. "50/5A", "50/0.025A", "No")
163 ZCTRatedVA
164 ZCTClass
3
10
2 Rating of zero-phase current transformer in volt-ampere

10 Class of zero-phase current transformer
"0.1", "0.2", "0.5", "1.0", "3.0", "5.0", "5P", "10P", "(*)", "(**)", "(*1)", "(*2)", "(*3)", <blank>
11/16 Page
No
Field Name
165 GPTRatioV
166 GPTRatedVA
167 GPTClass
Field Type
10
3
10
Length
Description
20 Ratio (V) of grounding potential transformer

(e.g. "6600/240V", "480/110V", "No")
2 Rating of grounding potential transformer in volt-ampere
10 Class of grounding potential transformer
"0.1", "0.2", "0.5", "1.0", "3.0", "3P", "6P", "(*)", "(**)", "(*1)", "(*2)", "(*3)", <blank>
168 SurgeAbsorber
1 Surge absorber required or not
169 EarthingSwitch
1 Earthing switch required or not
170 SafetyShutter
1 Safety shutter required or not
171 PressureFlap
1 Pressure flap required or not
172 StartButton
1 Start button / switch on MCC unit required or not
173 StartButtonColor
174 StopButton
175 StopButtonColor
176 ResetButton
177 ResetButtonColor
10
1
10
1
10
2 Color of start button on MCC unit

"G": Green (*), "R": Red, "B": Black, <blank>
1 Stop button / switch on MCC unit required or not
2 Color of start button on MCC unit
"G": Green, "R": Red (*), "B": Black, <blank>
1 Reset button / switch on MCC unit required or not
2 Color of reset button on MCC unit
"G": Green, "R": Red, "O": Orange, "B": Black (*), <blank>
178 StartStopSW
1 Start/Stop switch on MCC unit
179 RunningLamp
1 Running indication lamp on MCC unit
180 RunningLampColor
181 StoppedLamp
182 StoppedLampColor
183 FaultLamp
10
1
10
2 Color of running indication lamp on MCC unit

"G": Green (*), "R": Red, "A": Amber, "O": Orange,
"W": White, "Bl": Blue, "Y": Yellow, <blank>
1 Stop indication lamp on MCC unit
2 Color of stop indication lamp on MCC unit
1 Fault indication lamp on MCC unit
12/16 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
184 FaultLampColor
10
185 FaultIndicator
10
186 HealthyLamp
187 HealthyLampColor
10
Length
Description

"G": Green, "R": Red, "A": Amber, "O": Orange (*),
20 Type of fault indicator
"Flag Type" (*), "Lamp", "Yes", "No"
1 Healthy condition indication lamp on MCC unit
"G": Green, "R": Red, "A": Amber, "O": Orange,
"W": White (*), "Bl": Blue, "Y": Yellow, <blank>
188 SealInRelay
1 Seal-in (Self-holding) relay (42)
189 SealInAuxRelay
1 Seal-in (Self-holding) auxiliary relay (42X)
190 AlarmAuxRelay
1 Auxiliary relay for alarm indication lamp (30X)
191 ChangeOverSW
10
20 Function of change over switch

"AM": Auto/Manual (*), "RD": Remote/Direct, "Yes", "No"
<LIBSequence [AutoManual]=Yes>
[ChangeOverSW] = "Yes"
192 UnitSpaceHeater
1 Space heater for this unit required or not
193 UnitSHControl
1 Control circuit for unit space heater
194 MotorSpaceHeater
1 Power circuit for motor space heater required or not

Default [MotorSpaceHeater] = DPPElecLoad [SpaceHeater]
195 MeteringDevice
10
50 Requirement or type of metering devices

"As per One Line Diagram", "Analog", Digital"
196 Transducer
10
50 Requirement or type of transducers

"As per One Line Diagram", "Yes", "No"
197 CurrentTransducer
1 Current transducer (4-20mA) required or not
198 TestTerminal
1 Test terminals required or not
199 CBStatus
10
10 Number of contacts required to indicate CB status

"1-NO/1-NC", "2-NO/2-NC", "3-NO/3-NC", "Yes", "No", "NA", "-"
200 ContactorStatus
10
10 Number of contacts required to indicate magnetic contactor status

"1-NO/1-NC", "2-NO/2-NC", "3-NO/3-NC", "Yes", "No", "NA", "-"
13/16 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
201 FaultStatus
10
10 Number of contacts required to indicate fault status

"1-NC", "1-NO/1-NC", "2-NC", "Yes", "No", "NA", "-"
202 RemoteControl
10
10 Number of contacts required for remote control

"1-NO", "1-NO/1-NC", "2-NO", "Yes", "No", "NA", "-"
203 CBInterTrip
10
10 Number of contacts required for CB intertrip

204 CBInterLock
10
10 Number of contacts required for CB interlock

205 TypeDifferential
10
20 Type of differential relay
206 QtyDifferential
207 TypeOCR
10
208 QtyOCR
209 TypeOverVoltage
10
210 QtyOverVoltage
2 Number of differential relays

20 Type of overcurrent relay
2 Number of overcurrent relays
20 Type of overvoltage relay
2 Number of overvoltage relays
211 TypeUnderVoltage
10
20 Type of undervoltage relay
212 QtyUnderVoltage
2 Number of undervoltage relays
213 EarthFaultRelay
1 Earth (ground) fault relay required or not
214 TypeEarthFault
10
20 Type of earth fault relay
215 EarthFaultmA
8 Rating of earth fault relay in mili-amperes
216 QtyEarthFault
2 Number of earth fault relays
217 TypeNeutralOCR
10
218 QtyNeutralOCR
219 TypeReversePower
10
220 QtyReversePower
221 TypeNegativePhase
10
20 Type of neutral overcurrent relay

2 Number of neutral overcurrent relays
20 Type of reverse power relay
2 Number of reverse power relays
20 Type of negative phase-sequence relay
14/16 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
222 QtyNegativePhase
2 Number of negative phase-sequence relay
223 TypeACVoltMeter
10
224 QtyACVoltMeter
2 Number of AC voltmeters
225 ACVoltMeterSelectS
W
1 Selector switch for AC voltmeters required or not
20 Type of AC voltmeter
226 TypeACAmmeter
10
20 Type of AC ammeter
227 QtyACAmmeter
2 Number of AC ammeters
228 ACAmmeterSelectSW
1 Selector switch for AC ammeters required or not
229 Ammeter
1 Ammeter required or not
230 AmmeterScale
10
20 Ammeter scale
(e.g. "0-400A", "2 times extended")
231 TypeFreqMeter
10
20 Type of frequency meter
232 QtyFreqMeter
2 Number of frequency meters
233 TypePFMeter
10
20 Type of power-factor meter
234 QtyPFMeter
235 TypeDCAmmeter
10
236 QtyDCAmmeter
237 TypeWattMeter
10
238 QtyWattMeter
239 TypeVARMeter
10
240 QtyVARMeter
241 TypeWHMeter
10
242 QtyWHMeter
243 UserText_0
10
2 Number of power-factor meters

20 Type of DC ammeter
2 Number of DC ammeters
20 Type of wattmeter
2 Number of wattmeters
20 Type of reactive volt-ampere meter
2 Number of reactive volt-ampere meters
20 Type of watt-hour meter
2 Number of watt-hour meters
15/16 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
244 UserText_1
10
245 UserText_2
10
246 UserText_3
10
247 UserText_4
10
248 UserNum_0
249 UserNum_1
250 UserNum_2
251 UserNum_3
252 UserNum_4
253 UserDate_0
254 UserDate_1
255 UserDate_2
16/16 Page
6. Bus List (DPPBus)

No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
1 FinalData
2 IID
8 ETAP internal key to link to INTBus
3 FromBusIID
8 [BusIID] of an upstream bus supplying power to this bus.
4 Revision
5 DataRevs
6 Issue
7 FromETAP

"No" for a record originated in DPP
8 ID
10
26 Bus No.
9 FromBusID
10
26 [BusID] of an upstream bus supplying power to this bus for system configuration No.1
"<top>" for the top bus
10 FromBusID1
10
11 FromBusID2
10
12 FromBusID3
10
13 FromBusID4
10
14 FromBusID5
10
15 FromBusID6
10
16 FromBusID7
10
17 FromBusID8
10
1/4 Page
No
Field Name
18 FromBusID9
19 BusKV
Field Type
10
7
Length
Description
8 Rated (Nominal) voltage of bus
Same as INTPanel [NominalkV]
This field is used for SWGR/MCC data sheets.
Default value = [PanelkV]
<IEC>
0.38, 0.40, 0.415, 0.48, 0.69, 1.00, 2.75, 3.60, 4.76, 7.20, 8.25, 12.0, 15.0, 15.5, 17.5, 24.0, 25.8, 36.0, 38.0, 40.5, 48.3, 52.0, 72.5
<ANSI>
0.12, 0.208, 0.24, 0.48, 0.60, 4.3, 4.76, 15.0, 15.5, 25.8, 38.0, 48.3, 71.5, 121.0
20 Panel
10
26 Panel ID that contains this bus
21 Substation
10
20 Substation ID that contains the panel which cotains this bus
22 InService
8 Same as INTBus [InService]
23 Phase
8 0: 3phase, 1: 1phase-2wires, 2: 1phase-3wires, 3: 3-3W, 4: 3-4W
24 AlteredBy
10
20
25 AlteredTime
26 TotalContKW
8 Total active power for continuous load in kW
27 TotalContKVAR
8 Total reactive power for continuous load in kvar
28 TotalContKVA
8 Total apparent power for continuous load in kVA
29 TotalContPF
8 Total power factor for continuous load in kVA

TotalContPF=TotalContKW / TotalContKVA
30 ContCF
8 Coincidence factor for continuous load in % (0-100)

100(*)
31 ContCFKVA
8 KVA for continuous load adjusted by C.F.

ContCFKVA=ContCF * TotalContKVA / 100
32 TotalInterKW
8 Total active power for intermittent load in kW
33 TotalInterKVAR
8 Total reactive power for intermittent load in kvar
34 TotalInterKVA
8 Total apparent power for intermittent load in kVA

2/4 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
35 TotalInterPF
8 Total power factor for intermittent load in kVA

TotalInterPF=TotalInterKW / TotalInterKVA
36 InterCF
8 Coincidence factor for intermittent load in % (0-100)

50(*)
37 InterCFKVA
8 KVA for intermittent load adjusted by C.F.

InterCFKVA=InterCF * TotalInterKVA / 100
38 TotalSpareKW
8 Total active power for spare load in kW
39 TotalSpareKVAR
8 Total reactive power for spare load in kvar
40 TotalSpareKVA
8 Total apparent power for spare load in kVA
41 TotalSparePF
8 Total power factor for spare load in kVA

TotalSparePF=TotalSpareKW / TotalSpareKVA
42 SpareCF
8 Coincidence factor for spare load in % (0-100)

10(*)
43 SpareCFKVA
8 KVA for spare load adjusted by C.F.

SpareCFKVA=SpareCF * TotalSpareKVA / 100
44 MTLoadPercent
8 Percent of motor loads against all motor and static loads.

When Load Summary calculation is performed, this field is updated.
Motor loads are identified by XLoadSumPanel [EquipType] = 0, 1, 2 or 3.
45 MTLoadKVA
8 Total apparent power of motor loads in kVA

MTLoadKVA=MTLoadPercent * TotalKVA / 100
46 STLoadPercent
8 Percent of static loads against all motor and static loads.

STLoadPercent=100(%) - MTLoadPercent
Static loads are identified by XLoadSumPanel [EquipType] <> 0, 1, 2 and 3.
47 STLoadKVA
8 Total apparent power of static loads in kVA

STLoadKVA=STLoadPercent * TotalKVA / 100
48 TotalKW
8 Total active power in kW after multiplied by C.F.

TotalKW=(ContCF*TotalContKW+InterCF*TotalInterKW
+SpareCF*TotalSpareKW) / 100
3/4 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
49 TotalKVAR
8 Total reactive power in kvar after multiplied by C.F.

TotalKVAR=(ContCF*TotalContKVAR+InterCF*TotalInterKVAR
+SpareCF*TotalSpareKVAR) / 100
50 TotalKVA
8 Total apparent power in kVA after multiplied by C.F.

51 Contingency1
8 Margin in % for calculated plant maximum demand
52 Contingency2
8 Margin in % for calculated plant peak demand
53 UserText_0
10
54 UserText_1
10
55 UserText_2
10
56 UserText_3
10
57 UserText_4
10
58 UserNum_0
59 UserNum_1
60 UserNum_2
61 UserNum_3
62 UserNum_4
63 UserDate_0
64 UserDate_1
65 UserDate_2
4/4 Page
7. Switchbpard List (DPPPanel)

No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
1 FinalData
2 IID
8 ETAP internal key to link to INTPanel
3 FromPanelIID
8 [PanelIID] of an upstream switchboard supplying power to this panel.
4 Revision
5 DataRevs
6 Issue
7 FromETAP

8 PanelType
10
10 Type of switchboard
"SWGR" (*), "MCC" (, "DP" for future (unselectable))
9 ID
10
26 Switchboard No.
10 BusID1
10
26 Bus no. contained in this switchboard (1)
11 BusID2
10
12 BusID3
10
13 BusID4
10
14 FromPanelID
10
26 [PanelID] of an upstream switchboard supplying power to this panel for system configuration No.1
"<top>" for the top switchboard
15 FromPanelID1
10
16 FromPanelID2
10
17 FromPanelID3
10
18 FromPanelID4
10
1/12 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
19 FromPanelID5
10
20 FromPanelID6
10
21 FromPanelID7
10
22 FromPanelID8
10
23 FromPanelID9
10
24 PanelKV
8 System voltage applied to this switchboard in kV.

Same as DPPPanelSummary [PanelKV]
This field is used for Load Summary program and retrieved from DPPProjectRec [SysVoltageHV1 LV1Ph].
25 RatedKV
8 Rated (Nominal) voltage of switchboard.

Same as INTPanel [NominalkV]
This field is used for SWGR/MCC data sheets.
Default value = [PanelkV]
<IEC>
0.38, 0.40, 0.415, 0.48, 0.69, 1.00, 2.75, 3.60, 4.76, 7.20, 8.25, 12.0, 15.0, 15.5, 17.5, 24.0, 25.8, 36.0, 38.0, 40.5, 48.3, 52.0, 72.5
<ANSI>
0.12, 0.208, 0.24, 0.48, 0.60, 4.3, 4.76, 15.0, 15.5, 25.8, 38.0, 48.3, 71.5, 121.0
26 SysVoltageClass
10
10 Name of system rated voltage class in text format

"HV1", "HV2, "MV1", "MV2", "LV3Ph1", "LV3Ph2" or "LV1Ph"
27 InService
8 Same as INTPanel [InService]
28 Phase
8 0: 3phase, 1: 1phase-2wires, 2: 1phase-3wires
29 AlteredBy
10
20
30 AlteredTime
31 TotalContKW
32 TotalContKVAR
33 TotalContKVA
2/12 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
34 TotalContPF

35 ContCF
8 Coincidence factor for continuous load in % (0-100)

100(*)
36 ContCFKVA

37 TotalInterKW
38 TotalInterKVAR
39 TotalInterKVA
40 TotalInterPF

41 InterCF
8 Coincidence factor for intermittent load in % (0-100)

50(*)
42 InterCFKVA

43 TotalSpareKW
44 TotalSpareKVAR
45 TotalSpareKVA
46 TotalSparePF

47 SpareCF
8 Coincidence factor for spare load in % (0-100)

10(*)
48 SpareCFKVA

49 MTLoadPercent

When Load Summary calculation is performed, this field is updated.
50 MTLoadKVA

3/12 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
51 STLoadPercent

52 STLoadKVA

53 TotalKW

54 TotalKVAR

55 TotalKVA

56 Contingency1
8 Margin in % for calculated plant maximum demand
57 Contingency2
8 Margin in % for calculated plant peak demand
58 SpecificationNo
10
30 Reference specification no.
59 CodeStandard
10
30 Applicable code & standard

(e.g. "ANSI-C.31", "IEC-298", etc.)
60 RequisitionNo
10
30 Requisition no. of this switchboard
61 PurchaseOrderNo
10
30 Purchase order (PO) no. of this switchboard
62 DocumentNo
10
30 Document no. of this switchboard data sheet
63 OneLineDWG
10
50 One line drawing no.
64 ReferenceDWG
10
50 Reference drawing no.
65 LayoutDWG
10
30 Layout (outline dimensional) drawing no.
66 SchematicDWG
10
30 Schematic drawing no.
67 ATSDWG
10
30 Automatic transfer scheme (ATS) drawing no.
4/12 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
68 MFRName
10
25 Manufacturer name
"ALSTOM", "Siemens", "Schneider", "ABB", "HOLEC", "Square D", "S&I", "Merlin Gerin", "Westinghouse", "Fuji",
"Mitsubishi", "Toshiba", "Togami", "Hyundai"
69 ModelName
10
20 Name of switchboard model
70 PurchasingDate
10
71 Location
10
20 Installation location of switchboard

"OD": Outdoor (*), "ID": Indoor
72 Substation
10
20 Name of substation in which this switchboard is installed.
73 MountingType
10
30 Mounting type of whole switchboard

"Vertical Free Standing" (*), "Rack Mounting", "Wall Mounting"
74 BackToBack
1 Mounting type of units

No: "Front only" (*), Yes: "Back-to-Back"
75 UnitDrawout
1 Draw out construction of unit

No: "Non-draw-out", Yes: "Draw-out" (*)
8 Purchasing date
(e.g. "20020522", "22-05-02")
76 EnclosureType
10
30 Type of enclosure
"Metal Clad", "Metal Enclosed" (*), "Compartment"
77 DegreeProtection
10
<IEC>
"IP44", "IP54"(*), "IP55", "IPW44", "IPW54", "IPW55"
<ANSI>
"NEMA 4X", "NEMA 5", "NEMA7", "NEMA9"
78 WiringClass
10
20 Class of wiring method

"NEMA Class I", "NEMA Class II"
79 WiringMethod
10
20 Type of wiring method

"NEMA Type A", "NEMA Type B", "NEMA Type C"
80 InternalWireType
10
20 Type of wires used for internal connection in switchboard

"THHN", "THHW", "THWN", "PVC", "IV"
81 InternalWireSize
10
20 Size of wires used for internal connection in switchboard
82 PaintColor
10
20 Final paint color

"RAL7032" (*), "Munsell N7", "Munsell 5Y 7/1"
5/12 Page
No
Field Name
83 PaintMethod
Field Type
10
Length
Description
20 Method of paint
84 NoOfIncomers
2 Required number of incomer units
85 NoOfCouplers
2 Required number of bus coupler units
86 NoOfBusRisers
2 Required number of bus riser units
87 NoOfFeeders
2 Required number of distribution feeder units (without transformer)
88 NoOfGenerators
2 Required number of generator breaker units
89 NoOfXFRs
2 Required number of transformer feeder units
90 NoOfMotors
2 Required number of motor starter units
91 NoOfCapacitors
2 Required number of capacitor bank units
92 IncomingPoint
10
10 Incoming point of power supply

"Top" (*), "Bottom", "From SWGR", "From ACB",
"From VCB"
93 IncomingType
10
10 Incoming type of power supply

"Bus Duct" (*), "Cable", "Bus Bar"
94 IncomingSize
10
20 Material size for incoming type

(e.g. "2500A", "3-1C-300mm2", etc.)
95 OutgoingPoint
10
10 Outgoing point of power feeding

"Top", "Bottom" (*)
96 OutgoingType
10
10 Outgoing type of power feeding

"Bus Duct", "Cable" (*)
97 ControlCabPoint
10
10 Connection point of external control cable

"Top", "Bottom" (*)
98 ControlCabType
10
10 Type of external control cable

"PVC", "PEI"
99 ControlCabSize
10
10 Size of external control cable in text format
10
10 Type of circuit breaker

"ACB", "VCB", "GCB"
100 CBType
6/12 Page
No
Field Name
101 CBRatedKV
102 FuseType
Field Type
7
10
103 FuseRatedKV
104 ContactorType
10
105 ContactorRatedKV
Length
Description
8 CB rated voltage in kV
<IEC>
0.38, 0.40, 0.415, 0.48, 0.69, 1.00, 2.75, 3.60, 4.76, 7.20, 8.25, 12.0, 15.0, 15.5, 17.5, 24.0, 25.8, 36.0, 38.0, 40.5, 48.3, 52.0, 72.5
<ANSI>
0.12, 0.208, 0.24, 0.48, 0.60, 4.3, 4.76, 15.0, 15.5, 25.8, 38.0, 48.3, 71.5, 121.0
20 Type of power fuse
"Current Limiting"
8 Power fuse rated voltage in kV
<IEC>
0.380, 0.400, 0.415, 0.480, 0.690, 1.000, 2.750, 3.600, 4.760, 7.200, 8.250, 12.00, 15.00, 15.50, 17.50, 24.00, 25.80, 36.00, 38.00,
40.50, 48.30, 52.00, 72.50
<ANSI>
0.120, 0.208, 0.240, 0.480, 0.600, 4.300, 4.760, 5.500, 7.200, 8.250, 14.40, 15.00, 15.50
20 Type of magnetic contactor
"Vacuum", "Air"
8 Magnetic contactor rated voltage in kV
<IEC>
0.38, 0.40, 0.415, 0.48, 0.69, 1.00, 2.75, 3.60, 4.76, 7.20, 8.25, 12.0, 15.0, 15.5, 17.5, 24.0, 25.8, 36.0, 38.0, 40.5, 48.3, 52.0, 72.5
<ANSI>
0.12, 0.208, 0.24, 0.48, 0.60, 4.3, 4.76, 15.0, 15.5, 25.8, 38.0, 48.3, 71.5, 121.0
106 StarterUnitType
10
30 Type of motor starter unit

"Fuse+Contactor", "MCCB+Contactor", "ACB"
107 FeederUnitType
10
10 Type of power feeder unit

"ACB", "MCCB", "Fuse"
108 BusMaterialHoriz
10
30 Material of main or horizontal bus bars

"Copper", "Brass", "Tinned Copper", "Silver Plated Copper", "Aluminium"
109 BusMaterialVert
10
30 Material of vertical bus bars

"Copper", "Brass", "Tinned Copper", "Silver Plated Copper" , "Aluminium"
110 BusMaterialNeut
10
30 Material of neutral bus bars

111 BusMaterialGnd
10
30 Material of grounding bus bars

112 BusInsulation
10
30 Type of bus bar insulation

"Epoxy resin", "Rubber", "PVC Taping", "Bare"
7/12 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
113 BusRatedAHoriz
2 Horizontal bus bar continuous rating in A

(e.g. 2000)
114 BusRatedAVert
2 Vertical bus bar continuous rating in A

(e.g. 600)
115 BusRatedANeut
2 Neutral bus bar continuous rating in A

(e.g. 300)
116 BusRatedAGnd
2 Grounding bus bar continuous rating in A

(e.g. 300)
117 BusSCRatedKV
8 Bus bar short circuit voltage in kV at which [BusSCRatedKA] is defined.

<IEC>
0.38, 0.40, 0.415, 0.48, 0.69, 1.00, 2.75, 3.60, 4.76, 7.20, 8.25, 12.0, 15.0, 15.5, 17.5, 24.0, 25.8, 36.0, 38.0, 40.5, 48.3, 52.0, 72.5
<ANSI>
0.12, 0.208, 0.24, 0.48, 0.60, 4.76, 15.0, 15.5, 25.8, 38.0, 48.3, 71.5, 121.0
118 BusSCRatedKA
8 Bus bar short circuit capacity in kA RMS Symmetrical

12.0, 12.5, 16.0, 20.0, 23.0, 24.0, 25.0, 31.5, 36.0, 40.0, 48.0, 49.0, 63.0
119 BusSCRatedSec
2 Bus bar short circuit withstand duration in sec

1 (*), 2, 3
120 BusSCPeakKA
8 Bus bar peak short circuit capacity in kA

12.0, 12.5, 16.0, 20.0, 23.0, 24.0, 25.0, 31.5, 36.0, 40.0, 48.0, 49.0, 63.0, 80.0, 100.0
121 LFWithstandKV
8 Rated power (low) frequency withstand voltage in kV for HV switchboard

10, 15, 19, 26, 34, 40, 50, 70, 95, 140, 185, 230, 275, 325, 360, 395, 460, 520, 575, 630, 690, 750, 800, 860, 920, 980, 1040, 1090
122 InsulationLevel
8 Rated insulation voltage in kV for LV switchboard

0.6, 1.0 (*), 1.5
123 BIL
8 Basic lightning impulse insulation level (BIL) in kV

10, 20, 30, 45, 60, 75, 95, 110, 125, 150, 200, 250, 350, 450, 550, 650, 750, 825, 900, 975, 1050, 1175, 1300, 1425, 1550, 1675,
1800, 1925, 2050, 2175, 2300, 2425, 2550, 2625, 2675, 2800, 2925, 3050
124 MVAClass
2 Short circuit capacity MVA class in MVA
125 ClosingVolt
10
10 Control voltage for breaker closing in text format

"AC 240V", "AC 220V", "AC 120V", "AC 110V", "AC 100V", "DC 120V", "DC 110V, "DC 100V", "DC 48V"
126 ClosingPhase
10
10 Number of phase of control voltage for breaker closing in text format

"1-phase" (*), "3-phase", " "
2 Number of wires of control voltage for breaker closing in text format

2 (*), 3, 4
127 ClosingWire
Length
Description
8/12 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
128 TrippingVolt
10
10 Control voltage for breaker tripping in text format

129 TrippingPhase
10
10 Number of phase of control voltage for breaker tripping in text format

"1-phase" (*), "3-phase", " "
2 Number of wires of control voltage for breaker tripping in text format

2 (*), 3, 4
130 TrippingWire
131 ControlPowerSource
10
20 Control power source

"Common PT", "Individual PT", "From CPT", "From P-N" (*), "From L1-L2", "From L2-L3", "From L1-L3", "1-phase", "3phase"
132 ControlVolt
10
10 Control circuit voltage in text format

133 ControlPhase
10
10 Number of phase of control voltage in text format

"1-phase" (*), "3-phase", " "
134 CPTSecVoltage
2 CPT secondary voltage in V

2 (*), 3, 4
135 PanelSpaceHeater
1 Space heater is required or not
136 PanelSpaceHeaterVol
t
10
10 Space heater voltage in text format

"AC 240V", "AC 220V", "AC 200V", "AC 120V", "AC 110V", "AC 100V"
137 PanelSpaceHeaterPh
ase
10
10 Number of phase of space heater voltage in text format

"1-phase" (*), "3-phase"
138 PanelSpaceHeaterWir
e
2 Number of wires of Space heater voltage

2 (*), 3, 4
139 ATS
1 Automatic transfer scheme (ATS) is required or not
140 NPMaterial
10
20 Material of nameplate
"Stainless steel", "Plastic", "Vinyl"
141 NeutralBar
1 Neutral bus bar required or not
142 GroungingBar
1 Grounding bus bar required or not
143 LiftingEye
1 Lifting eyes required or not
144 FloorFrame
1 Floor frame required or not
9/12 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
145 TestEquipment
1 Test equipment required or not
146 TestCable
1 Test cable required or not
147 RelayToolKit
1 Relay tool kit required or not
148 Receptacle
1 Receptacle required or not
149 Lighting
1 Lighting required or not
150 AnchorBolt
1 Anchor bolts required or not
151 FixingBolt
1 Fixing bolts required or not
152 CableTerminal
1 Cable terminals required or not
153 CableGlandPlate
10
Description
20 Misc. information about cable gland plate

"Drilled", "Undrilled", "Yes", "No"
154 CableGland
1 Cable gland required or not
155 CableBracket
1 Cable bracket required or not
156 ClosingRectifier
1 Closing rectifier required or not
157 HingedRearDoor
1 Hinged rear door required or not
158 KeyInterlock
1 Key interlocking mechanism required or not
159 DoorLock
1 Door lock with common key required or not
160 CPTransfer
1 Control power auto transfer scheme required or not
161 SurgeArrestor
1 Surge arrestor required or not
162 SurgeCapacitor
1 Surge capacitor required or not
163 Lifter
1 Breaker / unit lifter required or not
164 FusePuller
1 Insulated fuse puller required or not
165 ChargingHandle
1 Charging handle required or not
166 DrawoutHandle
1 Draw-out handle required or not

10/12 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
167 FutureExtension
10
168 NoOfEarthingTruck
Length
Description
20 Provision for future expansion by front view

"Right", "Left", "Right & Left"
2 Required number of earthing trucks
169 AccuracyPT
10
10 Accuracy class of potential transformer

"0.1", "0.2", "0.5", "1.0", "3P", "6P"
170 AccuracyVT
10
10 Accuracy class of voltage transformer

"0.1", "0.2", "0.5", "1.0", "3.0", "3P", "6P"
171 AccuracyCT
10
10 Accuracy class of current transformer

"0.1", "0.2", "0.5", "1.0", "3.0", "5.0", "5P", "10P"
172 AccuracyMeter
10
10 Accuracy class of meter

0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.5
173 AccuracyAmmeter
10
10 Accuracy class of ammeter

0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.5
174 AccuracyVoltmeter
10
10 Accuracy class of voltmeter

0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.5
175 AccuracyWHMeter
10
10 Accuracy class of watt-hour meter

0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.5
176 WitnessTest
1 Witness test by purchaser required or not
177 RoutineTest
1 Routine test required or not
178 SpecialTest
1 Special test required or not
179 OtherTest
1 Other test required or not
180 MFRLayoutDWG
1 Manufacturers Layout (Outline Dimension) drawing required or not
181 MFRLoadingData
1 Manufacturers Loading Data required or not
182 MFRSpecData
1 Manufacturers Specification and Performance Data required or not
183 MFRAssemblyDWG
1 Manufacturers Assembly drawing required or not
184 MFRSchematicDWG
1 Manufacturers Schematic diagram required or not
185 MFRWiringDWG
1 Manufacturers Wiring diagram required or not

11/12 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
186 MFRRelaySetData
1 Manufacturers Relay Coordination and Setting schedule required or not
187 MFRTestProcedure
1 Manufacturers Test Procedure required or not
188 MFRSparePartsList
1 Manufacturers Spare Parts List required or not
189 MFRSpecialToolList
1 Manufacturers Special Tool List required or not
190 MFRDocumentList
1 Manufacturers Document List required or not
191 MFROpManual
1 Manufacturers Installation and Operation Manual required or not
192 MFROtherDocuments
1 Manufacturers Other Documents required or not
193 UserText_0
10
194 UserText_1
10
195 UserText_2
10
196 UserText_3
10
197 UserText_4
10
198 UserNum_0
199 UserNum_1
200 UserNum_2
201 UserNum_3
202 UserNum_4
203 UserDate_0
204 UserDate_1
205 UserDate_2
12/12 Page
8. Local Control Station (DPPLCS)

No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
1 FinalData
2 IID
8 ETAP internal key ID
3 ID
10
4 Quantity
25 Type of LCS (e.g. "LV-M-001-EX", "LV-M-002")

2 Quantity of the same type [LCSTypeID] of LCS
Total value of DPPSwgrMcc with the index key DPPSwgrMcc [LCSTypeID]
5 LCSCircuitID
10
20 Circuit ID of LCS
6 LCSCircuitName
10
20 Name of LCS circuit
7 LCSExpProof
1 LCS enclosure is explosion proof or not.
8 TagPlate
10
50 Description or material of tag plate
9 WarningPlate
10
50 "Yes"/"No" or description of warning plate
10 ExplosionProtection
10
20 Explosion protection
<IEC>
"ExdIIBT3" (*), [blank]
<ANSI>
"T3A", "T3B", "T3C", "T3D" (*), [blank]
<JIS>
"d3bG3", [blank]
11 DegreeProtection
10
<IEC>
"IP44", "IP54"(*), "IP55", "IPW44", "IPW54", "IPW55",
[blank]
<ANSI>
"NEMA 4X", "NEMA 5", [blank]
12 OperationVoltage
10
20 Rated operation voltage in text format

"110VAC", "120VAC" (*), "230VAC", "240VAC", "48VDC", <blank>
13 RatedA
10
10 Rated current in text format

"3A", "5A", <blank>
1/4 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
14 Mounting
10
20 Mounting method of LCS

"Wall Mounting"(*), "Embedded", "Self-Standing", <blank>
15 CableEntry
10
50 Position, thread size, etc. of cable entry (hub)

(Any descriptions about cable entry)
16 CableEntrySize
10
10 Size of cable entry for LCS cable
17 EnclosureMaterial
10
20 Material of Enclosure
18 Painting
10
20 Method and/or color of painting
19 TerminalBlock
1 Terminal block for external cables
20 CableGland
1 Cable gland for external cables
21 CableGlandQty
2 Quantity of cable glands
22 CableGlandType
10
20 Type of cable gland in manufacturers product range
23 CableGlandSize
10
10 Cable gland size
24 BlindPlug
1 Blind plug for unused holes
25 MountingBolt
1 Mounting bolts
26 ControlCableType
10
30 Type of LCS cable in text format

"XLPE/SWA/PVC", "600V-PVC/PVC", etc.
27 ControlCableSize
10
20 LCS cable size

"6P-2.5mm2", "7C-1.5mm2", etc.
28 GndWireSizeIn
10
10 Grounding wire size inside LCS
29 GndWireSizeOut
10
10 Grounding wire size outside LCS
30 LCSStart
1 On switch (button) on LCS
31 LCSStop
1 Off switch (button) on LCS
32 OffLockStop
1 Off-Lock facility on stop button, e.g. padlock, pin lock, etc.
33 LCSStartStop
1 On / Off switch on LCS
34 LCSAutoManual
1 Auto / Manual change over switch on LCS

2/4 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
35 LCSAutoManualOff
1 Auto / Manual / Off change over switch on LCS
36 LockAutoManual
1 Lock facility on auto/manual/(off) switch, e.g. pin lock, etc.
37 LCSOnLamp
1 On lamp on LCS
38 LCSOnLampColor
39 LCSOffLamp
40 LCSOffLampColor
41 LCSAlarmLamp
42 LCSAlarmLampColor
10
1
10
1
10
2 Color of running indication lamp on LCS

"Y": Yellow, "W": White, <blank>
1 Off lamp on LCS
2 Color of stop indication lamp on LCS
1 Alarm lamp on LCS
2 Color of alarm indication lamp on LCS
43 LCSEmergStop
1 Emergency stop button on LCS
44 LCSAmmeter
1 Ammeter on LCS
45 LCSCT
1 CT inside LCS
46 LCSAmmeterRange
10
20 Range of ammeter on LCS
47 LCSCTRatio
10
20 Ratio of CT inside LCS
48 UserText_0
10
49 UserText_1
10
50 UserText_2
10
51 UserText_3
10
52 UserText_4
10
53 UserNum_0
54 UserNum_1

3/4 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
55 UserNum_2
56 UserNum_3
57 UserNum_4
58 UserDate_0
59 UserDate_1
60 UserDate_2
4/4 Page
9. Lumped Load List (DPPLump)

No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
1 FinalData
2 IID
8 ETAP internal key to link to INTLump
3 Revision
4 DataRevs
5 Issue
6 FromETAP

7 ID
8 InService
10
7
26 ID of lumped load
8 Same as INTLump [InService]
9 Bus
10
26 Connected Bus No.
10 Panel
10
26 Panel no. from which load is power supplied
11 Substation
10
20 Substation no. from which load is power supplied
12 PhaseNo
10
10 "3": 3phase(*), "1": 1phase
13 Status
8 Operation Mode
14 ContDF
8 Same as INTLump [ContDF]
15 InterDF
8 Same as INTLump [InterDF]
16 SpareDF
8 Same as INTLump [SpareDF]
17 MVAButton
8 Same as INTLump [MVAButton]
18 MVA
8 When Load Summary calculation is performed, TotalKVA is transferred to this field.

<MVAButton=0 (MVA)>
MVA=TotalKVA/1000
<MVAButton=1 (kVA)>
MVA=TotalKVA
19 KV
8 Same as INTLump [KV] for ETAP lumped load

1/4 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
20 IFL
8 IFL=TotalKVA/(sqrt(3) * KV)
21 PF
8 PF=TotalKW / TotalKVA * 100
22 LoadPercent0
8 Same as INTLump [LoadPercent0]
23 LoadPercent1
24 LoadPercent2
25 AlteredBy
Description
10
20
26 AlteredTime
27 TotalContKW
28 TotalContKVAR
29 TotalContKVA
30 TotalContPF

31 ContCF
8 Coincidence factor for continuous load in %

100(*)
32 ContCFKVA

33 TotalInterKW
34 TotalInterKVAR
35 TotalInterKVA
36 TotalInterPF

37 InterCF
8 Coincidence factor for intermittent load in %

50(*)
38 InterCFKVA

39 TotalSpareKW

2/4 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
40 TotalSpareKVAR
41 TotalSpareKVA
42 TotalSparePF

43 SpareCF
8 Coincidence factor for spare load in %

10(*)
44 SpareCFKVA

45 MTLoadPercent

MTLoadPercent=100(%) - STLoadPercent
Static loads are identified by XLoadSum [EquipType]<>0, 1, 2 and 3.
46 MTLoadKVA

Motor loads are identified by XLoadSum [EquipType]=0, 1, 2 or 3.
47 STLoadPercent

48 STLoadKVA

49 TotalKW

50 TotalKVAR

51 TotalKVA

52 UserText_0
10
53 UserText_1
10
54 UserText_2
10

3/4 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
55 UserText_3
10
56 UserText_4
10
57 UserNum_0
58 UserNum_1
59 UserNum_2
60 UserNum_3
61 UserNum_4
62 UserDate_0
63 UserDate_1
64 UserDate_2
4/4 Page
10. Lumped Motor (DPPLumpMotor)

No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
1 FinalData
2 IID
8 ETAP internal key to link to INTIndMotor
3 Revision
4 DataRevs
5 Issue
6 FromETAP

7 EquipType
2 0: IM (*), 1: SM, 2: MOV, 3: DCM,

8: VFD, 9: Charger
For lumped motors, this field is fixed to "IM".
8 TypeMotor
10
9 MotorType
20 "IM"(*), "SM", "MOV", "DCM", "Canned", "Geared", "IG", [blank]

8 Motor Type (Motor=0, Generator=1)
10 LoadType
10
20 Type of load
"Pump" (*), "Fan", "Comp", "Mixer", "Blower", [blank]
11 MotorLibID
10
50 ID to accessed motor library table LIBMotor
12 ID
10
26 ID of lumped motor
13 IsChild
14 ChildID
10
15 IsGroupedByRestart
16 GroupedRestartGrou
p
10
1 "Yes" - Child derived from parent lumped motor by the program, "No" - Parent lumped motor
26 Sub ID of child lumped motor derived from parent
1 "Yes" - Lumed by restart group
26 Restart group ID for which the program lumped the individual motors
17 IsGroupedByPole
1 "Yes" - Lumed by number of poles
18 GroupedPoles
2 Number of poles for which the program lumped the individual motors
1/5 Page
No
Field Name
19 IsGroupedByLoadTyp
e
Field Type
1
Length
Description
1 "Yes" - Lumed by load type
20 GroupedLoadType
10
20 Load type for which the program lumped the individual motors
21 IsGroupedByInertia
22 GroupedInertiaLevel
10
23 EquipName
10
24 NoOfMotors
2 Total number of motors included in a lumed motor
25 ContQty
2 Total number of motors in continuous operation
26 InterQty
2 Total number of motors in intermittent operation
27 SpareQty
2 Total number of motors in spare operation
28 Quantity
8 Not used
29 InService
8 Same as DPPElecLoad [InService]
30 RestartReq
1 "Yes" - This motor will restart after power restration
1 "Yes" - Lumed by inertia level

10 Inertia level for which the program lumped the individual motors: L=Light, M=Medium (future), H=Heavy
100 Description of lumped motor
31 RestartGroup
10
26 Restart group ID
32 LumpedLoad
10
26 Lumped load ID to which this lumped motor belongs
33 Bus
10
26 Same as DPPElecLoad [Bus]
34 Panel
10
26 Same as DPPElecLoad [Panel]
35 Substation
10
20 Same as DPPElecLoad [Substation]
36 Status
8 Same as DPPElecLoad [Status]
37 ContDF
8 Same as DPPElecLoad [ContDF]
38 InterDF
8 Same as DPPElecLoad [InterDF]
39 SpareDF
8 Same as DPPElecLoad [SpareDF]
40 MVAButton
8 Same as DPPElecLoad [MVAButton]

2/5 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
41 TotalMVA
8 Total kVA (not MVA) of lumped motor
42 TotalKW
8 Total kW of lumped motor
43 RepMVA
8 kVA (not MVA) of representative motor for lumped motor
44 RepKW
8 kW of representative motor for lumped motor
45 Poles
8 Number of poles of representative motor for lumped motor
46 KV
8 Rated voltage in kV of representative motor for lumped motor
47 PhaseNo
10
10 Number of phase of representative motor for lumped motor
48 IFL
8 Full load current in ampere of representative motor for lumped motor

IFL=TotalKVA/(sqrt(3) * KV)
49 MachineRpm
8 PRM of representative motor for lumped motor
50 Slip
8 Slip in % of representative motor for lumped motor
51 PercentLoad0
8 Loading ratio in % of lumped motor for loading category No.1
52 PercentLoad1
53 PercentLoad2
54 BHP
8 BHP (Brake Horse Poser) in kW of lumped motor for loading category No.1
55 BHP1
56 BHP2
57 PF100
8 Power factor at 100% loading of representative motor for lumped motor
58 PF75
59 PF50
60 EFF100
8 Efficiency at 100% loading of representative motor for lumped motor
61 EFF75
62 EFF50

3/5 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
63 LRC
8 Locked roter current in % of representative motor for lumped motor
64 PFlr
8 Locked roter power factor in % of representative motor for lumped motor
65 MotorLRTrq
8 Motor locked rotor torque in % of representative motor for lumped motor
66 MotorPullUpTrq
8 Motor pullup torque in % of representative motor for lumped motor
67 MotorBreakDownTrq
8 Motor breakdown (maximum) torque in % of representative motor for lumped motor
68 MotorFullLoadTrq
8 Motor full load torque in % of representative motor for lumped motor
69 LoadTrq0
8 Load rotor torque at 0% loading in % of representative motor for lumped motor
70 LoadTrq25
71 LoadTrq50
72 LoadTrq75
73 LoadTrq100
74 UnitsOfTorque
2 Unit of motor full load torque

<DPPProjectRec [Units] = 0 (Metric)>
1: "N-m" (*), 2: "kg-m"
<DPPProjectRec [Units] = 1 (English)>
1: "lb-ft" (*)
75 MachineGD2
8 Machine (motor + coupler + load) GD2 of lumped motor
76 MotorGD2
8 Motor GD2 of lumped motor
77 CouplerGD2
8 Coupler GD2 of lumped motor
78 LoadGD2
8 Load GD2 of lumped motor
79 MachineWR2
8 Machine (motor + coupler + load) WR2 of lumped motor
80 MotorWR2
8 Motor WR2 of lumped motor
81 CouplerWR2
8 Coupler WR2 of lumped motor
82 LoadWR2
8 Load WR2 of lumped motor
83 MachineInertia
8 Machine (motor + coupler + load) inertia constat in sec of lumped motor

4/5 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
84 MotorInertia
8 Motor inertia constat in sec of lumped motor
85 CouplerInertia
8 Coupler inertia constat in sec of lumped motor
86 LoadInertia
8 Load inertia constat in sec of lumped motor
87 AlteredBy
10
20
88 AlteredTime
89 UserText_0
10
90 UserText_1
10
91 UserText_2
10
92 UserText_3
10
93 UserText_4
10
94 UserNum_0
95 UserNum_1
96 UserNum_2
97 UserNum_3
98 UserNum_4
99 UserDate_0
100 UserDate_1
101 UserDate_2
5/5 Page
11. Transformer Schedule (DPPXFMR)

No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
1 FinalData
2 IID
8 ETAP internal ID in XFMR2 or XFMR3 for link with XFMRDPP
3 Revision
8 Revision no. (Same as ETAP)
4 DataRevs
8 Date of revision (Same as ETAP)
5 Issue
8 Issue no. (Same as ETAP)
6 FromETAP
7 ID
10
26 Equipment ID (Equipment ID, e.g. "TX-20-101A")
8 EquipmentName
10
9 ManufacturerName
10
12 Name of manufacturer
(ETAP Info page)
10 TypeName
10
12 Not used (ETAP system use)
11 XFMRType
10
25 Type of transformer; "Oil" or "Dry"
12 XFMRSubType
10
50 Sub-type of transformer (e.g. "Conservator tank", "Resin molded", "Hermetical sealed", "Sealed tank", "Gas liquid seal",
"Inert gas pressure", "Expansion tank", etc.)
100 Service name of transformer (e.g. "Unit Distribution for #20 Process Area")
Oil: Conservator Tank, Sealed Tank, Gas-Oil Seal, Conservator/Diaphragm, Breathing Tank, [Blank]
Dry: Cast Coil Type, Gas-filled Type, Ventilated Type, Non-Ventilated Type, Sealed Type, Resin Filled Type, [Blank]
13 ClassName
10
24 Type of cooling (e.g. ONAN, OFAF, OA, FA, FOA, OA/FA, etc)
Oil: ONAN (OA), ONAF (FA), ONAN/ONAF, ONAN/ONAF/ONAF (OA/FA/FA), ONAN/ONAF/OFAF (OA/FA/FOA),
ONAN/ODAF (OA/FOA), ONAN/ODAF/ODAF (OA/FOA/FOA) , OFAF (FOA), OFWF (FOW), ODAF (FOA), ODWF (FOW),
ONWF, ONWF/ONAN, KDAF, KDWF, KFAF, KFWF, KNAN, KNAN/KFAF/KFAF, KNAN/KNAF, KNAN/KNAF/KFAF,
KNAN/KNAF/KNAF, KNWF, KNWF/KNAN, LDAF, LDWF, LFAF, LFWF, LNAN, LNAN/LFAF/LFAF, LNAN/LNAF,
LNAN/LNAF/LFAF, LNAL/LNAF/LNAF, LNWF, LNWF/LNAN,
Dry: (ANSI) AA, AFA, AA/FA, ANV, GA
(IEC) AN, AF, AN/AF, ANAN
1/15 Page
No
Field Name
14 TemperatureOil
Field Type
7
Length
Description
8 Temperature rise of insulation oil in deg.C (e.g. 60, 65, etc)

IEC : 55, 60, Blank
ANSI: 55, Blank
15 TemperatureWinding
8 Temperature rise of winding in deg.C (e.g. 60, 65, etc)

IEC (Oil): 65,70
(Dry): 60,75,80,100,125,150
ANSI (Oil): 65
(Dry) 55, 60, 80, 115, 130, 150
16 TempRise
17 PrimBIL
10
7
20 Temperature rise in text form for users discrete use

8 BIL (Basic Lightning Impulse Insulation Level) of primary connection in kV
10, 15, 19, 26, 34, 40, 50, 70, 95, 140, 185, 230, 275, 325, 360, 395, 460, 520, 575, 630, 690, 750, 800, 860, 920, 980, 1040, 1090
IEC : 20,40,60,75,95,125,145,150,170,200, 250,325,350,450, 550,650,750,825,850,900,950,1050,1175,1300,1425,1550,1800,1950
ANSI: 10, 30, 45, 60, 75, 95, 110, 125, 150, 200, 250, 350, 450, 550, 650, 750, 825, 900, 1050, 1175, 1300, 1425, 1550, 1675,
1800, 1925, 2050
18 SecBIL
8 BIL (Basic Lightning Impulse Insulation Level) of secondary connection in kV

10, 15, 19, 26, 34, 40, 50, 70, 95, 140, 185, 230, 275, 325, 360, 395, 460, 520, 575, 630, 690, 750, 800, 860, 920, 980, 1040, 1090
IEC : 20,40,60,75,95,125,145,150,170,200, 250,325,350,450, 550,650,750,825,850,900,950,1050,1175,1300,1425,1550,1800,1950
ANSI: 30, 45, 60, 75, 95, 110, 125, 150, 200, 250, 350, 450, 550, 650, 750, 825, 900, 1050, 1175, 1300, 1425, 1550, 1675, 1800,
1925, 2050
19 TerBIL
8 BIL (Basic Lightning Impulse Insulation Level) of tertiary connection in kV

10, 15, 19, 26, 34, 40, 50, 70, 95, 140, 185, 230, 275, 325, 360, 395, 460, 520, 575, 630, 690, 750, 800, 860, 920, 980, 1040, 1090
IEC : 20,40,60,75,95,125,145,150,170,200, 250,325,350,450, 550,650,750,825,850,900,950,1050,1175,1300,1425,1550,1800,1950
ANSI: 30, 45, 60, 75, 95, 110, 125, 150, 200, 250, 350, 450, 550, 650, 750, 825, 900, 1050, 1175, 1300, 1425, 1550, 1675, 1800,
1925, 2050
20 PrimaryBus
10
26 Name (ID) of bus the primary of transformer connects to.
21 SecondaryBus
10
26 Name (ID) of bus the secondary of transformer connects to.
22 TertiaryBus
10
26 Name (ID) of bus the tertiary of transformer connects to.

2/15 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
23 InService
8 0: In service, 1: Out of service

Used for ETAP interface
24 PrimkV
8 Rated kV of primary winding
Description
25 PrimWireSystem
10
10 Circuit wire system of primary power (e.g. "3ph-3w")

1ph-2W, 3ph-3W, 3ph-4W,
26 PrimNGType
10
10 Type of neutral grounding of primary power (e.g. "Resistor", "Solid", "Reactor", etc.)
Open, Resistor, Reactor, Solid, Resonant
27 PrimNGAmp
8 Rated current of primary neutral grounding facility in ampere

1, 5, 10, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, Blank
28 PrimNGSec
8 Rated time duration of primary neutral grounding facility in second

10, 30, 60, 600, Extended
29 SeckV
8 Rated kV of secondary winding
30 SecWireSystem
10
10 Circuit wire system of secondary power (e.g. "3ph-3w")

1ph-2W, 1ph-3W, 3ph-3W, 3ph-4W
31 SecNGType
10
10 Type of neutral grounding of secondary power (e.g. "Resistor", "Solid", "Reactor", etc.)
32 SecNGAmp
8 Rated current of secondary neutral grounding facility in ampere

1, 5, 10, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, Blank
33 SecNGSec
8 Rated time duration of secondary neutral grounding facility in second

10, 30, 60, 600, Extended
34 TerkV
8 Rated kV of tertiary winding
35 TerWireSystem
10
10 Circuit wire system of tertiary power (e.g. "3ph-3w")

3ph-3W, 3ph-4W, Blank
36 TerNGType
10
10 Type of neutral grounding of tertiary power (e.g. "Resistor", "Solid", "Reactor", etc.)
37 TerNGAmp
8 Rated current of tertiary neutral grounding facility in ampere

1, 5, 10, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, Blank
38 TerNGSec
8 Rated time duration of tertiary neutral grounding facility in second

10, 30, 60, 600, Extended
39 PhaseNo
10
10 Number of phase in text form (e.g. "3", "3ph", etc.)

1 Phase, 3 Phase
3/15 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
40 MVAButton
8 Unit of apparent power (MVA=0, kVA=1)

Used for ETAP interface
41 PrimMVA
8 Transformer OA (ONAN) capacity in the unit [MVAbutton]
42 PrimMVA2
8 Transformer FA (ONAF) capacity in the unit [MVAbutton]
43 PrimMVA3
8 Transformer FOA (OFAF) capacity in the unit [MVAbutton]
44 SecMVA
8 Capacity of secondary winding for 3-winding transformer in the unit [MVAbutton]
45 TerMVA
8 Capacity of tertiary winding for 3-winding transformer in the unit [MVAbutton]
46 MVAText
10
47 PSPosZ
50 Transformer capacity in text form (e.g. "2000/2500kVA (OA/FA)")

8 Positive sequence impedance between primary and secondary windings in %
48 PSPosZBase
10
20 Base capacity of positive sequence impedance between primary and secondary windings in text form (e.g. "at OA 2000kVA")
49 Tolerance
10
10 Tolerance of positive sequence impedance between primary and secondary windings in text form (e.g. "+/-0.5%")
50 PSPosXoverR
8 X/R ratio of positive sequence impedance between primary and secondary windings
51 PSPosX
8 Positive sequence reactance between primary and secondary windings in %
52 PSZeroZ
8 Zero sequence impedance between primary and secondary windings in %
53 PSZeroXoverR
8 X/R ratio of Zero sequence impedance between primary and secondary windings
54 PSZeroX
8 Zero sequence reactance between primary and secondary windings in %
55 PTPosZ
8 Positive sequence impedance between primary and tertiary windings in %
56 PTPosXoverR
8 X/R ratio of positive sequence impedance between primary and tertiary windings
57 PTPosX
8 Positive sequence reactance between primary and tertiary windings in %
58 PTZeroZ
8 Zero sequence impedance between primary and tertiary windings in %
59 PTZeroXoverR
8 X/R ratio of Zero sequence impedance between primary and tertiary windings
60 PTZeroX
8 Zero sequence reactance between primary and tertiary windings in %
61 STPosZ
8 Positive sequence impedance between secondary and tertiary windings in %

4/15 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
62 STPosXoverR
8 X/R ratio of positive sequence impedance between secondary and tertiary windings
63 STPosX
8 Positive sequence reactance between secondary and tertiary windings in %
64 STZeroZ
8 Zero sequence impedance between secondary and tertiary windings in %
65 STZeroXoverR
8 X/R ratio of Zero sequence impedance between secondary and tertiary windings
66 STZeroX
8 Zero sequence reactance between secondary and tertiary windings in %
67 OneLineDWG
10
50 Drawing number of one line diagram
68 ReferenceDWG
10
50 Drawing number of reference diagram
69 MFRName
10
25 Name of manufacturer
(ETAP Remarks page)
70 PurchasingDate
10
71 AlteredBy
10
20 (ETAP internal use)
8 (ETAP internal use)
72 AlteredTime
73 ID2
10
8 Date of purchasing in text form
26 Second ID for plural number of transformers (e.g. ID="TX-001A", ID2="TX-001B")
74 Quantity
8 Quantity of identical transformers to be indicated in a datasheet
75 Location
10
10 Installation location (e.g. "Outdoor", "Tropical", etc.)

Indoor, Outdoor, Marine Below Deck, Marine Above Deck,
76 HazardAreaClass
10
20 Hazardous area classification code

<Standard=IEC>
Zone 0, Zone 1, Zone 2 (*)
<Standard=ANSI>
Class I Div 1, Class I Div 2 (*)
77 DutyRating
10
20 Duty rating of transformer operation (e.g. "Continuous", "Emergency", "Short time", "Periodic", etc.)
Continuous, Intermittent, Periodic, Short-Time, Varying
78 Insulation
10
20 Insulation class (e.g. "F (65deg.C Rise)")

IEC: A(60oC Rise), E (75oC Rise), B (80oC Rise), F (100oC Rise), H (125oC Rise), C(150 oC Rise) Related to item #15
ANSI : A(Class 105), B(Class 130), F (Class 155), H (Class 180), >H (Class 220)
5/15 Page
No
Field Name
79 WindingMaterial
Field Type
10
Length
Description
10 Material of winding conductor (e.g. "Cu", "SMES")

Cu, Al
80 WindingInsulation
10
20 Insulation method of winding conductor (e.g. "Uniform", "Graded")

Single, Heavy, Triple, Quadruple
81 SysFrequency
8 Power frequency (Hz)

50 (*), 60
82 SysVoltage
8 Nominal primary system voltage (kV)

230, 220, 215, 176, 132, 115, 77, 69, 66, 34.5, 33, 30, 24.5, 24, 23, 22, 13.8, 13.2, 12, 11.5, 11, 6.9, 6.6, 6.3, 6, 4.16, 4.0, 3.8, 3.6,
3.45, 3.3, 3, 2.4, 1.0, 0.6, 0.48, 0.46, 0.44, 0.435, 0.415, 0.4, 0.38, 0.25, 0.24, 0.235, 0.23, 0.22 (*), 0.2, 0.12, 0.115, 0.11, 0.1 [blank]
83 SysVoltVariation
10
10 Primary system voltage variation

"+/-1%", "+/-2%", "+/-3%", "+/-4%", "+/-5%", "+/-6%", "+/-7%", "+/-8%", "+/-10%" (*), <blank>
84 SysFreqVariation
10
10 Primary system frequency variation

"+/-0.5%", "+/-1.0%", "+/-1.5%", "+/-2.0%", "+/-2.5%", "+/-3.0%", "+/-4.0%", "+/-5.0%" (*), <blank>
85 SysWireSystem
2 Number of wires for primary circuit system

3 (*), 4
86 SysSCCAmp
8 Short circuit current for primary system in kA
87 SysSCCkV
8 Base voltage of [SysSCCAmp] in kV

230, 220, 215, 176, 132, 115, 77, 72, 69, 66, 36, 34.5, 33, 30, 24.5, 24, 23, 22, 15, 13.8, 13.2, 12, 11.5, 11, 7.2, 6.9, 6.6, 6.3, 6, 4.8,
4.16, 4.0, 3.8, 3.6, 3.45, 3.3, 3, 2.4, 1.0, 0.6, 0.48, 0.46, 0.44, 0.435, 0.415, 0.4, 0.38, 0.25, 0.24, 0.235, 0.23, 0.22, 0.2, 0.12, 0.115,
0.11, 0.1 [blank]
Default is [SysVoltage]
88 SysNGType
10
89 SysNGAmp
8 Current of neutral grounding resister for primary system in amperes

5, 10, 20, 50, 100 (*), 200, 400, <blank>
When [SysNGtype] is "Open" or "Solid", this field is disabled.
90 SysNGSec
8 Duration of fault current flow through neutral grounding resister or reactor for primary system in seconds
5, 10 (*), 20, <blank>
When [SysNGtype] is "Open" or "Solid", this field is disabled.
91 RatedFrequency
8 Rated frequency (Hz)

50 (*), 60
10 Type of neutral grounding for primary system

"Open", "Solid", "Resistor" (*), "Reactor", <blank>
6/15 Page
No
Field Name
92 VectorGroup
Field Type
10
Length
Description
20 Vector group (e.g. "Dyn11", "Yd5", etc.)

Dd0, Yy0, YNyn0, YNy0, Yyn0, Dy1, Dyn1, Yd1, YNd1, Dd2, Dd4, Dy5, Dyn5, Yd5, YNd5, Dd6, Yy6, YNy6, YNyn6, Yyn6, Dy7,
Dyn7, Yd7, YNd7, Dd8, Dd10, Dy11, Dyn11, Yd11, YNd11, [Blank]
93 SCCkA
8 Short circuit current withstand level in kA
94 SCCMVA
8 Short circuit current withstand level in MVA
95 SCCSec
8 Short circuit current withstand duration in second
96 SCCkV
8 Voltage for short circuit current withstand level in kV
97 MagnetickA
8 Maximum magnetizing current in kA
98 MagneticSec
8 Duration of maximum magnetizing current in sec.
99 PrimLFWithstandKV
8 Power frequency withstand voltage of primary system in kV
100 SecLFWithstandKV
8 Power frequency withstand voltage of secondary system in kV
101 TerLFWithstandKV
8 Power frequency withstand voltage of tertiary system in kV
102 TypeTapChanger
10
30 Type of tap changer (e.g. "OLTC", "DLTC", "On Load", "Off Load", "Fixed", etc.)
Fixed, Off Load Tap Changer, LTC (OLTC)
103 TappingWinding
10
104 MinPercentTap
8 Minimum tap position in % (e.g. 10, -5, etc.)

-10, -7.5, -5, [Blank], [kV button then specify value]
105 MaxPercentTap
8 Maximum tap position in % (e.g. 10, 5, etc.)

+10, +7.5, +5, [Blank]
106 StepPercentTap
8 Step of tap in % (e.g. 2.5, 1.25, 0.625, etc)

0.625, 1.25, 2.5, [Blank]
107 NumberPercentTap
2 Number of taps
([MaxPercentTap]- [MinPercentTap])/[StepPercentTap]+1
108 TapNeutralTerminal
10
20 Type or treatment of tap neutral terminal
1 LTC remote control panel required or not
109 LTCRemoteCP
20 Installed location of tap changer ("Primary", Secondary", "Tertiary", Primary & Secondary", etc.)
Primary, Secondary, Tertiary
7/15 Page
No
Field Name
110 LTCControlMethod
Field Type
10
Length
Description
20 Control method of LTC (e.g. "AVR", "Local-Remote", "Auto-Manual", "Master-Follower", etc.)

Master Follower, Circulating Current, Reverse Reactance, Power Factor, VAR, AVR, Manual
111 XFMRStandard
8 Standard of transformer
0: ANSI, 1: IEC
112 OilTempIndicator
1 Oil temperature indicator required or not
113 OilTempIndDesc
10
114 WindingTempIndicator
115 WindingTempIndDesc
10
50 Description of oil temperature indicator (e.g. "2-NO/1-NC")

1 Winding temperature indicator required or not
50 Description of Winding temperature indicator (e.g. "2-NO/1-NC")
116 OilLevelIndicator
117 OilLevelIndDesc
10
118 PressReliefDev
1 Pressure relief device required or not
119 PressVacuumGauge
1 Pressure vacuum gauge required or not
120 BuchholzRelay
1 Buchholz relay (63) required or not
121 SuddenPresRelay
1 Sudden pressure relay required or not
122 SuddenPresRelText
123 NumberPrimCT
10
3
1 Oil Level indicator required or not

50 Description of oil Level indicator (e.g. "2-NO/1-NC")
50 Description of sudden pressure relay (e.g. "2-NO/1-NC")

2 Number of primary phase CT
124 RatioPrimCT
10
20 Ratio of primary phase CT (e.g. "2000/5A", "300/1A")
125 ClassPrimCT
10
10 Accuracy class of primary phase CT (e.g. "5P20", "Class 10")

IEC: 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 3, 5, 0.2S, 0.5S, 5P5, 5P10, 5P15, 5P20, 5P30, 10P5, 10P10, 10P15, 10P20, 10P30
ANSI: 0.3, 0.6, 1.2, C10, C20, C50, C100, C200, C400, C800, K10, K20, K50, K100, K200, K400, K800, T10, T20, T50, T100, T200,
T400, T800
126 RatedVAPrimCT
127 TypePrimCT
128 NumberSecCT
3
10
3
2 Rated burden of primary phase CT in VA

20 Type of primary phase CT (e.g. "Window", "Bur", "Wound", "Bushing", "Donut")
Bushing, Window, Bar-Type, Wound
2 Number of secondary phase CT
8/15 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
129 RatioSecCT
10
20 Ratio of secondary phase CT (e.g. "2000/5A", "300/1A")
130 ClassSecCT
10
10 Accuracy class of secondary phase CT (e.g. "5P20", "Class 10")

T400, T800
131 RatedVASecCT
132 TypeSecCT
133 NumberTerCT
3
10
3
2 Rated burden of secondary phase CT in VA

20 Type of secondary phase CT (e.g. "Window", "Bur", "Wound", "Bushing", "Donut")
2 Number of tertiary phase CT
134 RatioTerCT
10
20 Ratio of tertiary phase CT (e.g. "2000/5A", "300/1A")
135 ClassTerCT
10
10 Accuracy class of tertiary phase CT (e.g. "5P20", "Class 10")

T400, T800
136 RatedVATerCT
137 TypeTerCT
138 NumberNeutCT
3
10
3
2 Rated burden of tertiary phase CT in VA

20 Type of tertiary phase CT (e.g. "Window", "Bur", "Wound", "Bushing", "Donut")
2 Number of neutral phase CT
139 RatioNeutCT
10
20 Ratio of neutral phase CT (e.g. "2000/5A", "300/1A")
140 ClassNeutCT
10
10 Accuracy class of neutral phase CT (e.g. "5P20", "Class 10")

T400, T800
141 RatedVANeutCT
142 TypeNeutCT
3
10
2 Rated burden of neutral phase CT in VA

20 Type of neutral phase CT (e.g. "Window", "Bur", "Wound", "Bushing", "Donut")
9/15 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
143 PrimIsolatingSW
1 Primary isolation switch required or not
144 PrimCableDuct
1 Primary cable duct required or not
145 PrimConnectType
10
Length
Description
20 Type of primary connection (e.g. "Exposed bushing ", "Cable Chamber", "Bus Duct")
Air Terminal Chamber, Exposed Bushing, Bus Duct, Braided Flex ,
146 PrimNumberConnect
2 Number of primary connections per phase
147 PrimConnectCond
10
10 Conductor type of primary connection material (e.g. "PVC/SWA", "Thin Copper", "XLPE")
148 PrimConnectSize
10
20 Conductor size of primary connection (e.g. "2000A", "35mm2", "250MCM")
149 PrimNumberCond
2 Number of conductors of primary connection material
150 PrimNumberCore
2 Number of cores of primary connection material
151 PrimTypeCond
10
20 Conductor type of primary connection (e.g. "Cu", "Al")

Cu, Al
152 SecBusductBox
1 Bus duct box for secondary connection required or not
153 SecCableDuct
1 Secondary cable duct required or not
154 SecConnectType
10
20 Type of secondary connection (e.g. "Exposed bushing ", "Cable Chamber", "Bus Duct")
Air Terminal Chamber, Exposed Bushing, Bus Duct, Braided Flex , Flexible Bus Link,
155 SecNumberConnect
2 Number of secondary connections per phase
156 SecConnectCond
10
10 Conductor type of secondary connection material (e.g. "PVC/SWA", "Thin Copper", "XLPE")
157 SecConnectSize
10
20 Conductor size of secondary connection (e.g. "2000A", "35mm2", "250MCM")
158 SecNumberCond
2 Number of conductors of secondary connection material
159 SecNumberCore
2 Number of cores of secondary connection material
160 SecTypeCond
10
20 Conductor type of secondary connection (e.g. "Cu", "Al")

Cu, Al
161 TerBusductBox
1 Bus duct box for tertiary connection required or not

10/15 Page
No
Field Name
162 TerCableDuct
163 TerConnectType
164 TerNumberConnect
Field Type
1
10
3
Length
Description
1 Tertiary cable duct required or not

20 Type of tertiary connection (e.g. "Exposed bushing ", "Cable Chamber", "Bus Duct")
2 Number of tertiary connections per phase
165 TerConnectCond
10
10 Conductor type of tertiary connection material (e.g. "PVC/SWA", "Thin Copper", "XLPE")
166 TerConnectSize
10
20 Conductor size of tertiary connection (e.g. "2000A", "35mm2", "250MCM")
167 TerNumberCond
2 Number of conductors of tertiary connection material
168 TerNumberCore
2 Number of cores of tertiary connection material
169 TerTypeCond
170 AuxTerminalBox
10
1
20 Conductor type of tertiary connection (e.g. "Cu", "Al")

1 Auxiliary terminal box required or not
171 AuxPowerVolt
10
20 Voltage of auxiliary power (e.g. "120VAC", "DC110V")
172 AuxPowerPhase
10
10 Number of phase of auxiliary power (e.g. "3-ph", "Single")
173 AuxTBDegProtection
10
20 Degree of protection of auxiliary terminal box (e.g. "IP42", "NEMA 4X")

IEC: IP31, IP41, IP42, IP43, IP44, IP45, IP53, IP54, IP55, IP65, [Blank]
ANSI: NEMA 1, NEMA 2, NEMA 3, NEMA 3R, NEMA 3S, NAMA 4, NEMA 4X, NEMA 5, NEMA 6, NEMA 6P, NEMA 12, NEMA
12K, NEMA 13
174 CableLugType
10
20 Type of cable lugs (e.g. "Compression", "Clamp", "Flat Plate", "Block Dies")
Compression, Mechanical, Clamp,
175 CableLugSupplier
10
50 Name of supplier of cable lugs (e.g. "Purchaser", "Manufacturer", "Vendor")
176 Nameplate
1 Nameplate required or not
177 OilDrainValve
1 Oil drain valve required or not
178 OilDrainType
10
20 Type of oil drain valve (e.g. "Globe")

Ball, Globe, Butterfly,
179 TopOilFilter
1 Top oil filter required or not

11/15 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
180 LiftingLug
181 WheelType
10
182 CoolingFan
1 Cooling fan required or not
183 CoolFanContBox
1 Cooling fan control box required or not
184 CoolFanQty
2 Number of cooling fans
185 CoolFanVolt
10
20 Rated voltage of cooling fan power (e.g. "AC120V", "240Vac")
186 CoolFanPhase
10
10 Number of phase of cooling fan power (e.g. "3-ph", "Single")
187 CoolFanWatt
188 CoolFanControl
7
10
1 Lifting lug required or not

20 Type of wheel (e.g. "Flat-Rim", "Flange")
8 Rated output of cooling fan in watt

30 Control method of cooling fans (e.g. "Wind temp", "Top gas temp", "Single stage", "Double stage" "Oil temp", "Remote")
Direct Oil Temp, Simulated Winding Temp, Calculated Winding Temp, LTC Temp Difference,
189 CoolFanCBDegProtec
tion
10
20 Degree of protection of cooling fan control box (e.g. "IP42", "NEMA 4X")
IEC: IP31, IP41, IP42, IP43, IP44, IP45, IP53, IP54, IP55, IP65, IP66, [Blank]
ANSI: NEMA 1, NEMA 2, NEMA 3, NEMA 3R, NEMA 3S, NAMA 4, NEMA 4X, NEMA 5, NEMA 6, NEMA 6P, NEMA 12, NEMA
12K, NEMA 13
190 SilicagelBreather
1 Silica gel breather required or not
191 FoundationBolt
1 Foundation bolts required or not
192 GroundTerminal
1 Grounding terminals required or not
193 SunShade
1 Sun shade required or not
194 SpaceHeater
1 Space heater required or not
195 SpaceHeaterVolt
10
10 Rated voltage of space heater power (e.g. "AC120V", "240Vac")
196 CableGland
1 Cable gland in terminal box required or not
197 AnchorBolt
1 Anchor bolts required or not
198 TotalLoss
8 Total loss at 100% voltage in watt or %

12/15 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
199 NoLoadLoss
8 No load loss at 100% voltage in watt or %
200 RatedLoadLoss
8 Rate load loss at 100% voltage in watt or %
201 EFF100LF100PF
8 Efficiency at 100% load factor & 100% power factor in %
202 EFF100LF080PF
203 EFF075LF100PF
204 EFF075LF080PF
205 EFF050LF100PF
206 EFF050LF080PF
207 Noise
8 Maximum noise in dBA
208 OilType
10
20 Type or brand name of insulation oil

Mineral-Oil, Silicone Fluid, Less Flammable Fluid, R-Temp, Beta Fluid, Alpha Fluid, Ester, Envirotemp, [Blank]
209 OilQtyMainTank
8 Quantity of oil in main tank in liter, gallon, kg or lb
210 OilQtyRadiator
8 Quantity of oil in radiator in liter, gallon, kg or lb
211 OilQtyConservator
8 Quantity of oil in conservator tank in liter, gallon, kg or lb
212 OilQtyTotal
8 Total Quantity of oil in liter, gallon, kg or lb
213 CoreWeight
8 Weight of core in kg, ton or lb
214 TankWeight
8 Weight of tank body in kg, ton or lb
215 TotalWeight
8 Total weight in kg, ton or lb
216 OverallWeight
8 Overall weight in kg, ton or lb
217 Length
10
4 Dimensional length in mm or inch
218 Width
8 Dimensional width in mm or inch
219 TotalHeight
8 Dimensional total height in mm or inch
220 OverCoverHeight
8 Dimensional over-cover height in mm or inch

13/15 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
221 UntankingHeight
222 DimensionText
10
30 Dimension in text form (e.g. "H2300xW3450xD2310")
223 SpecificationNo
10
30 Reference specification no.
224 CodeStandard
10
30 Applicable code & standard (e.g. "ANSI", "IEC", etc.)

ANSI, IEC, [Blank]
225 RequisitionNo
10
30 Requisition no.
226 PurchaseOrderNo
10
30 Purchase order (PO) no.
227 DocumentNo
10
30 Document no.
228 Mounting
10
20 Mounting type (e.g. "Skid", "Wheel", etc.)

Pad Mount, Pole Mount, Platform Mount, Unit Substation, Skid Mount, [Blank]
229 PaintColor
10
20 Code or name of paint color
230 PaintMethod
10
20 Method of painting
8 Dimensional un-tanking height in mm or inch
231 TypeTest
1 Type test required or not
232 RoutineTest
1 Routine test required or not
233 SpecialTest
1 Special test required or not
234 ImpulseTest
1 Impulse test required or not
235 UserText_0
10
236 UserText_1
10
237 UserText_2
10
238 UserText_3
10
239 UserText_4
10
240 UserNum_0
241 UserNum_1
242 UserNum_2

14/15 Page
No
Field Name
Field Type
Length
Description
243 UserNum_3
244 UserNum_4
245 UserDate_0
246 UserDate_1
247 UserDate_2
15/15 Page

e-DPP UG

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

e-DPP UG

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

e-DPP

(electrical - Data Processing Program)

ELTECHS Engineering & Consulting Co., Ltd.

ELTECHS Engineering & Consulting Co., Ltd.

Specification ................................................................................................................. 1-2

Chapter 2 Setup ............................................................................................ 2-1

System Requirements .................................................................................................. 2-2

e-DPP Installation (Stand-Alone) ............................................................................... 2-5

Stand-Alone License ................................................................................................... 2-3

e-DPP Installation (Network) ................................................................................... 2-13

Client Workstation .................................................................................................... 2-13

License Manager Server ............................................................................................ 2-18

e-DPP Software Installation .................................................................................. 2-13

Running e-DPP .......................................................................................................... 2-24

Uninstall e-DPP Software ......................................................................................... 2-25

Chapter 3 Overview ...................................................................................... 3-1

e-DPP Deliverables and Operation Flow ................................................................... 3-2

General Features ......................................................................................................... 3-3

Database Structure ...................................................................................................... 3-6

DPPProjectRec .......................................................................................................... 3-10

ELTECHS Engineering & Consulting Co., Ltd.

Chapter 4 Ribbon Bar .................................................................................. 4-1

System Button .............................................................................................................. 4-2

Optional Commands ................................................................................................. 4-25

Start Tab .................................................................................................................... 4-10

Defaults Menu .............................................................................................................. 4-8

Chapter 5 File Menu ..................................................................................... 5-1

Open Project ................................................................................................................ 5-2

"General" .................................................................................................................. 5-13

Chapter 6 Data Import ................................................................................. 6-1

Import MS Access........................................................................................................ 6-2

Settings tab ............................................................................................................... 6-2

ELTECHS Engineering & Consulting Co., Ltd.

Command buttons .................................................................................................. 6-10

Import MS Excel........................................................................................................ 6-11

Rules and Restriction ................................................................................................ 6-11

Chapter 7 Editor ........................................................................................... 7-1

Editor Functions .......................................................................................................... 7-2

Opening Template Edit Form ...................................................................................... 7-3

Copy Command for Specific Templates ................................................................... 7-22

Electrical Load ..................................................................................................... 7-17

Template Features ..................................................................................................... 7-25

All Electrical Loads .................................................................................................. 7-25

Chapter 8 Project .......................................................................................... 8-1

Information .................................................................................................................. 8-2

Loading Categories ..................................................................................................... 8-6

Chapter 9 Library......................................................................................... 9-1

Motor ............................................................................................................................ 9-2

Motor Library: Entrance Menu ................................................................................... 9-3

ELTECHS Engineering & Consulting Co., Ltd.

HV Circuit Breaker Library: Entrance Menu ............................................................ 9-34

LV Circuit Breaker ................................................................................................... 9-39

Motor Sequence Library Editor ................................................................................. 9-28

HV Circuit Breaker ................................................................................................... 9-34

LCS Circuit Library Editor ....................................................................................... 9-24

Motor Sequence ......................................................................................................... 9-28

Cable Gland Library: Entrance Menu ....................................................................... 9-19

LCS Circuit ................................................................................................................ 9-24

Conduit Library: Entrance Menu............................................................................... 9-15

Cable Gland ............................................................................................................... 9-19

Cable Library: Entrance Menu .................................................................................... 9-8

Conduit ....................................................................................................................... 9-15